Select orations of Lysias

Re wa

ἢ ue τ Ἧι

ἈΥΠΎ {᾿ς 4 ia
τ ἜΘΟΣ ἡ ΤῸ
A ὯΝ Mate
Re OMe Κα τον

τ
τὰς -
* - =. ταις
= Saar =
Sn κοτε τα tin een eres
Seen pen Sees =

ieee
weenie ene

Seo

es oe
rea
eae

; δ ἢ
{

ah
ay

re ate ie ive é
τὴ i pair SRL
a io ain
ere io ena ΝΙΝ igh
Νὴ ated ΑΝ Ὁ ᾿ AY Aaye re
CE ad Bpales
ἢ if ᾧ

He
NG)

i ee ἢ

BORG IO Gai ες
DAREN Coa LAN
\ ¥ renee a He tf

Hie

ee

See
rin aemacrata

ee

᾿ a Ms oe |
Ἢ ἐν

Pair
ne

ἣν
Hee

> 4, a aoe)
aan χὴν s

στα ΟΝ =

Sper SOS
- a ¥)

op wp rg oI, ὅτ ἢ

ORATIONS OF LYSIAS.

WITH

INTRODUCTIONS AND EXPLANATORY NOTES,

BY

WILLIAM ARNOLD STEVENS,

PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS IN ROCHESTER THEOLOGICAL
SEMINARY.

λόγῳ δὲ πεῖσαι.
Funeral Oration, 19

NINTH. EDITION.

CHICAGO:

S. C. GRIGGS AND COMPANY.
1893.

CopyrIGHT, 1876.
By S. C. GRIGGS & CO.

University Press: Joun Witson & Son,
CAMBRIDGE.

SRLFE
URL

pe./ {1701

J

To my Father,

REV. JOHN STEVENS, D.D.,

AS A PUBLIC ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF HIS INVALUABLE COUNSEL
AND ENCOURAGEMENT, ESPECIALLY DURING MY
COLLEGIATE AND POST-GRADUATE
STUDIES,

THIS VOLUME

IS GRATEFULLY AND AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBED.

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation

https://archive.org/details/selectorationsof0Olysiiala

PREFACE,

Tue use of the orations of Lysias with different
classes during the past thirteen years has more than
confirmed my first impression of their great value in
a course of Greek instruction. An edition of the ora-
tions contained in this volume was completed two years
ago last winter, but the manuscript was destroyed while
on its way to the printer by the burning of an express-
car. It had been begun at the suggestion of the late
Professor Hadley, and a portion of the work had received
the benefit of his critical revision, —one of the last of
those unheralded services which that noble-hearted
scholar, too humble and too great to covet fame, and
setting all too low an estimate on. his exhaustless stores
of learning, was ever so generously rendering on every
hand. The completion of my task for the second time
—fulfilling but tardily the promise made to the pub-
lishers — has been delayed until the present by other
imperative duties.

The work is especially designed as a reading-book in
Attic prose, to follow the Axabasis. The fitness of
Lysias’ orations for this purpose will be better under-
stood from the account given in the Introductory Sketch.
In preparing the Notes it has been my chief aim to guide
the student to a reasoned translation. It seems hardly

vi PREFACE.

to be questioned that the value of translation as a mental
discipline will depend mainly on the student’s being able
to give an intelligent account of his work, — to furnish
not only the correct rendering, but the reasons for it. 1
have therefore made numerous grammatical references,
particularly in the notes on the twelfth and the thirteenth
orations, and on the twenty-second. The latter oration,
and the narrative portions of the two former, will be
found the most suitable for the use of younger classes,
Advanced classes may profitably read the twelfth and
thirteenth entire, not only for their historical value, but
as specimens of argumentative composition in the foren-
sic branch.

Some references have been made to larger grammars,
and to works not accessible to the majority of students.
Those teachers who read beyond their text-books will not
object to these, nor to the occasional mention of parallel
passages in orations not found in this volume.

Matters of fact and history have been explained to
some extent, but not, it is believed, at so great a length
as to interfere with the main purpose of the Notes. The
Classical Dictionary and the Dictionary of Antiquities
have been constantly referred to, and their use by the
student is taken for granted throughout.

The text adopted is that of Scheibe (Teubner’s edi-
tion). The few instances in which I have departed from
it, in language or punctuation, are mentioned in the
Notes. As regards the division of syllables, I have fol-
lowed the rule of dividing compound words into the ele-
ments out of which they are formed; 6. δ΄. πολεμ-άρχῳ, παρ-
εἶναι. This method has reason as well as the authority
of Curtius and many other modern grammarians in its
favor.

PREFACE: vil

Use has been made of all the best authorities to which
I could procure access. Of the most service have been
Reiske (the fifth and sixth volumes of his Ovatorum Gre-
corum, Lipsi@, 1772); Rauchenstein (Ausgewahlie Reden
des Lysias, Sechste verbesserte Auflage) ; and Frohberger,
(Ausgewahlte Reden des Lysias, both the larger work in
three volumes, and the abridged edition, which appeared
last year). Frohberger’s annotations, especially, have
been a constant and indispensable help. Other com-
mentators are mentioned in the Notes.

The elucidation of the chronology and history of the
events referred to in the twelfth and thirteenth orations
has been greatly aided by Scheibe’s Dze oligarchische
Umwalzung zu Athen am Ende des peloponnesischen Krie-
ges; Leipzig, 1841. The principal historical references
in the notes are to the histories of Grote and Curtius.

In the preparation of the introductions, among other
authorities, I have found of great value Friedrich Blass’s
Attische Beredsamkeit. While rewriting my Introduc-
tory Sketch Professor R. C. Jebb’s two volumes on the
_ Attic Orators from Antiphon to Is@os came to hand,
bringing much fresh and stimulating suggestion. I am
glad to call the attention of any who may read these
pages to that work as one of the most useful contri-
butions to the history of Greek literature that English
scholarship has for many years produced. An interesting
monograph on the style of Lysias is Des Caractéres de
l’Attictsme dans l’ Eloquence de Lysias, by Jules Girard,
Paris, 1854.

My thanks are due Professor J. R. Boise, of the Uni-
versity of Chicago, for various timely suggestions. For
information on certain legal technicalities and points of
contrast between the ancient and modern codes, I am

Vill PREFACE.

indebted to Samuel J. Thompson, Esq., of Cincinnati, a
gentleman who in spite of the demands of an exacting
profession has kept fresh his interest in classical studies
and the problems of the higher education. Especially
do I desire to make full acknowledgment of the help I
have received from my colleague in instruction, Mr.
Charles Chandler. He has aided me in the revision of
the larger part of the manuscript, and also in the proof-
reading. His accurate scholarship, combined with rare
taste and judgment, has made his heartily rendered
assistance of very great value, adding not a little to the
service which I trust this book may render to classical
students and the cause of sound learning.

GRANVILLE, OHIO, April 26, 1876.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Page
PREFACE . - + 3 ς x s 3 - F : Vv
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH OF LYSIAS AND HIS WRITINGS:

I. The Life of Lysias Ξ : ᾿ . ὃ A A xi
Il. His Style. - a : 2 : é ; : SS:
III. His Genius and Character . : 2 5 ζ ΣΕ Ὁ ΩΥ
IV. His Writings . A Wee 3 : ῇ é ; xxvii

ORATIONS.

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES :
Introduction 2 : = - : ; : p 3
Text = ἃ : ; ᾿ > ᾿ 2 πω"
XIII. » AGAINST AGORATUS:
Introduction é Ξ d x 4 ς ; F 34
Text P ; . ᾿ : ὲ ‘ - ΩΝ
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE:
Introduction " : : ὦ 4 : 5 ᾿ 64
Text A ε: ° F - : Ξ 3 δ 67
XXII. AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS:
Introduction ἡ : A ; > 5 ὰ : 78
Text 4 F 2 : P ὰ Ν Ἑ a . 80
II. FUNERAL ORATION :

Introduction - ; Α 2 ς : ‘ ; 87
Text 4 ; ᾿ ἢ 4 ᾿ ᾿ ; ᾿ «(QE

Χ TABLE

Notes ON ORATION XII.
“e “ec ce XIII.
ΓΖ “ce ce VIL

ce {« ςς XXIL

ee {ς {ς Il.

CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE .

OF: CONTENTS.

NOTES.

115

moh. te Sm

162

. 170

175

. 191

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH

OF

LYSIAS AND HIS WRITINGS.

I. THE LIFE OF LYSIAS.

LysIAS, a native, though not a citizen of Athens, was a Sicilian
Greek by descent, a son of Cephalus of Syracuse. The year
of his birth is altogether uncertain. In the “Lives of the Ten
Orators,” a work formerly attributed to Plutarch, 459 B. c. is the
date assigned, but there are reasons for believing it to be merely an
unfounded inference on the part of the writer. The year 444 B.C.
is the date fixed upon by K. F. Hermann after an exhaustive inves-
tigation of the chronology of the subject, and the greater number
of modern critics are inclined to adopt his view. Others, as Wester-
mann, fix the year so late as 432. Rauchenstein, and more recently
Jebb, lean to the ancient opinion. On the whole, the correctness of
the year 444 as an approximate date is strongly favored by the fact
that it best explains the few historical statements that have come
down to us concerning Lysias and his father, and the relation in
which they stood to their contemporaries. It is known that he lived
to the age of eighty, — from 444 to 364, if the date here assumed be
the true one.

Cephalus, the father, was a man of wealth and culture who had
been induced by Pericles to take up his residence in Athens. There
four children were born to him, — three sons, Polemarchus, Lysias,
and Euthydemus, and one daughter. His dwelling in the Pirzeus
was the abode of hospitality ; Socrates and his friends often met at _

Xil INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

the table of the genial old man. There Plato has laid the opening
scene of the greatest of his works, the Republic, and Cephalus is
honored with a worthy part in the conversation. In this home of
luxury, culture, and rare discourse, Lysias remained till his fifteenth
year, enjoying along with the youth of the most distinguished fam-
ilies the best education that Athens could afford.

The next seventeen or eighteen years were passed in Thurii, a
flourishing Greek colony of Lower Italy, whither he had gone with
his brother Polemarchus after their father’s death. Of the extent
and character of their business operations in that city we are not
informed. Lysias gave himself chiefly to learned pursuits, his stud-
ies taking a rhetorical direction under Tisias, the famous rhetor of
Syracuse. Rhetoric, the art of discourse, then embraced a wide
range of topics; with the Sicilians it was, in a special sense, the art
of beautiful diction (edémera). The studies comprehended under the
name of rhetoric formed no small part of the intellectual movement
of the age. Lysias threw himself with ardor into these studies, and
soon became a proficient in the highly artificial and ornate style of
the school in which he was trained. If we were to judge solely
from Plato’s representations in the Phaedrus, his earlier productions
must have displayed the defects quite as strikingly as the merits
of this school. But the grounds are slender for taking the com-
position given in that dialogue as a specimen of the art of Lysias.
It is more than likely that Plato’s contempt for the sham rhetoric
that filled the ears of the multitude with sounding phrases led him
to do injustice to Lysias, who was reputed at the time of the com-
position of that dialogue to be the leading rhetor in Athens, and
was therefore in Plato’s view one of the chief promoters of a demor-
alizing tendency in literature and education.

The overthrow of the Athenian party in Thurii, after the destruc-
tion of the Sicilian Expedition, brought the two brothers back to
Athens. This was in 411. Their lives seem hitherto to have been
led in close intimacy, and they now continued their partnership,
carrying on a large shield manufactory which employed a hundred
and twenty slaves. It stood adjoining the residence of Lysias, in
the Pirzus. Polemarchus resided in the upper city. They also
had real estate in Athens (three dwelling-houses are mentioned in
the Oration Against Eratosthenes), funds that had been invested
abroad, besides (in the year 404) a large sum of gold and silver coin

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΗ

kept in Lysias’s own house. But business was not allowed to ab-
sorb their attention. We find Lysias soon taking rank as the fore-
most rhetorician and speech-composer (λογογράφος) in the city. It
was a profession exposed to a certain degree of unpopularity, be-
cause, among other reasons, it was with many a money-making
employment. In Lysias’s case, however, it was during this period
merely the employment of his scholarly leisure, being indeed about
the only avenue to distinction open to a foreigner of his tastes
and inclinations.

How his prospects were changed by the Year of Anarchy, how
his brother was seized for summary execution by the tyrants, and
all their property within reach confiscated, while he himself barely
escaped by secret flight, —is best learned from the orator’s own
account in the Oration Against Eratosthenes. During the exile he
proved his attachment to his native city, and his devotion to the
cause of freedom. He rendered various services to the exiled
democrats, and it is especially mentioned that he furnished to
Thrasybulus while at Phyle two thousand drachmas, two hundred
shields, and a reinforcement of three hundred hired troops. His
services were not forgotten by Thrasybulus after the restoration;
a decree was passed admitting him to full citizenship. But imme-
diately afterwards, on account of some technical irregularity, it was
reconsidered and rejected as illegal at the instance of a jealous
opponent of Thrasybulus. Lysias remained therefore in his pre-
vious status as an igoreAns, a resident possessed of special civic
privileges, but without suffrage or eligibility to office.

The year of exile over, he set himself first of all, after the re—
establishment of the old order of government, to bring to justice the
man most directly concerned in the murder of his brother. This
was Eratosthenes, who was still in the city. It was a custom of
ancient sanction that the nearest kinsmen of a murdered man should
be his avengers, taking the necessary legal measures to secure the
conviction and execution of the murderer. In order to accomplish
this Lysias would be obliged to appear in person before a court of
Athenian citizens, and that at a time when it was peculiarly difficult
to gain an impartial hearing. Party spirit was never more rife;
the civil war was over, but its clashing feuds and passions remained.
For such business as was now in hand the training that Lysias had
received was not the best. In an Athenian dicastery, and above

XIV INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

all at a time like this, the studied elegances and the well-turned
phrases and periods of the Sicilian manner were ineffective weap-
ons. The contests in the courts were like hand-to-hand fights,
where every moment counted, and each stroke must be made to tell.
In many classes of actions the law restricted each speaker to a cer-
tain time. There were also other more or less distinctly defined
traditionary requirements as to the topics, the classes of arguments
and their order, and the methods of appeal, while at the same time
it was necessary to meet the demand of an Athenian audience for
artistic excellence. But how well Lysias discerned the exigencies
of the occasion as he prepared himself for this celebrated prosecu-
tion, and how he so mastered the situation, as, if not to gain his
case, yet to create a new style of forensic oratory, and thereby, as
Otfried Miiller declares, to inaugurate a new era in the history of
Attic prose, — this is to be learned from the Oration Against Eratos-
thenes, the first given in this volume. It is historically the begin-
ning of the school of oratory that reached its most perfect develop-
ment in Demosthenes. From the time of this oration a new style
of discourse began to be heard from the Athenian bema, —an elo-
quence founded on nature and truth, but aiming at ideal excellence
under the conscious guidance of art.

Whether he obtained a verdict, we are not informed. But from
that day he was the first advocate in Athens, the recognized master
in forensic oratory. The courts during the years immediately fol-
lowing were crowded with cases. It was difficult for the most
peaceably inclined to avoid litigation. In the humorous complaint
that Lysias puts into the mouth of a wealthy client, matters had
come to such a pass that even the unborn children of Athenians
shuddered to think of the litigation in prospect for them when they
should come into the world. Now the average man might not care
to trust to his own legal or rhetorical skill, and the services of an
able speech-writer would be in demand. An advocate could render
better service to his client by writing a speech for him to deliver,
than by personally appearing in court to assist in the conduct of the
case. Lysias, therefore, deprived of his fortune, became a profes-
sional logographer, and during the remainder of his long life was so
successful in his practice, that, out of all the cases intrusted to him,
he lost, we are told, but two.

Little is known of his subsequent career. Cicero relates, but the

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XV

story is not well authenticated, that when Socrates was awaiting his
trial, Lysias brought him a carefully written plea for his defence,
which, however, the philosopher declined to use. It has been sup-
posed that he took a more prominent part in political affairs after
his reputation in practical oratory had become established, but as to
this we have no certain information. A passage in Oration XIX.
speaks of his having been member of an embassy to Syracuse, to
the court of Dionysius the Elder, but the reading is disputed. Once
he becomes a conspicuous figure to all Greeks, and this is his last
appearance on the page of the historian. It was in 388 B. Ὁ. (ac-
cording to Diodorus), at Olympia. Dionysius the tyrant of Syra-
cuse had sent a magnificently equipped legation to represent him at
the Olympic games, — four-horse chariots to contend in the race-
course, distinguished rhapsodists to recite his praises, tents richly
adorned with purple and gold,—a spectacle of dazzling splendor
such as the festival for many years had not witnessed. But patriotic
Greeks could not forget the oppressions exercised upon their coun-
trymen, and the conquests over Greeks by which Dionysius had aug-
mented his power. Lysias gave expression to the popular indigna-
tion in one of the patriotic orations that had come to be a part of
the quadrennial celebration. In this discourse, of which a frag-
ment only remains, he denounced the Sicilian tyrant and the Persian
king as the two great enemies of the Hellenic world. As Diodorus
relates (see the fuller narration given by Grote, Vol. XI. pp. 29-34),
the multitude were powerfully wrought upon by the speaker, and
at once carried away by the impulse of the hour, made a violent
assault upon the tents of the legation. At all events the legation
proved, so far as its political design was concerned, a complete
failure.

IJ. HIS STYLE.

The style of Lysias is peculiarly difficult to describe, or to illus-
trate by quotation of detached passages. Each of his orations
must be read as a whole in order to appreciate its character as a
work of art,—such a work of art as goes far to satisfy Plato’s
_ requirement in a discourse, that it should possess a sculpturesque
beauty like that of the idealized human form. The writings of

Xvi INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

Lysias have for us a twofold significance: besides being the prod-
ucts of a rare literary genius, a collection unique in forensic oratory,
they constitute an epochal creation in Attic prose, marking a new
stage of advance in the literary development of Greece. I shall
here only enumerate briefly the leading characteristics of his style
as compared with that of other writers, and thereby attempt to
reach a statement of the fundamental principles of that department
of art in which he was in that age a creator, and still remains an
acknowledged model.

In regard to the diction and composition of Lysias, modern crit-
ics, to the extent that they find themselves competent, have but
confirmed the judgment of the ancients, particularly Dionysius of
Halicarnassus. The latter made his style the subject of a special
treatise. He pronounces Lysias the standard of Atticism, particu-
larly of the so-called “plain” style (ἰσχνόν, Lat. senue*), as distin-
guished from the “ grand.”

His diction is the purest Attic, not the old Attic, Dionysius
tells us, which Plato and Thucydides sought to retain, but the cur-
rent idiom of his own day. He uses the best vernacular of con-
temporaneous Athens. Though he was of Sicilian parentage, and
had lived a number of years in Italy, he is, in respect to the
choice of words, an Athenian of the Athenians. It is Quintilian
whose cutting criticism exposes the fatal defect of the Asiatic
school of oratory as contrasted with the Attic; the former fails,
he says, in finding the proper word. Now Lysias has the con-
spicuous merit of always having at his command right words (κύρια
ὀνόματα), the nearest and best understood words to express the
things meant. Thus he selects the concrete rather than the abstract,
the specific rather than the general, and avails himself of the ma-
terials of current speech in preference to those drawn from poetry
and the grandiloquent, semi-poetic diction of the then prevailing
oratory. It is to be remembered that prose was not yet freed from
the trammels of poetry; it was an almost unheard-of thing that the
literary artist could abandon metre, and mould his creations from

ἘΠῚ According to Cicero the chief marks of the ‘genus tenue’ are these : —

“1, ‘In regard to composition, a free structure of clauses and sentences, not strain-
ing after a rhythmical period. 2, In regard to diction, (4) purity, (δ) clearness,
(c) propriety. 3. Abstemious use of rhetorical figures.’ ”

Jesp’s Aétic Orators, Vol. I. p. 162.

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. Xvi

the clay of common speech. The success of Lysias in this direc-
tion drew admiration even in the times of Dionysius. The latter
says: “He seems to talk like the uneducated, but yet in a manner
superior to them. He is a master composer in the unmetrical style,
having found a peculiar harmony, by which his diction avoids clum-
siness and vulgarity, and becomes elegant and graceful.”

In regard to composition his style stands in marked contrast with
that of Isocrates. The elaborate periods of the latter are famous.
His long and flowing sentences, framed with symmetrical com-
pleteness, and obeying with the nicest care the rules of euphony
and rhythm, were the delight of many of the ancient rhetoricians.
Lysias adopted a looser, freer structure, more like the language of
conversation, yet not without an artistic finish and rhythmical move-
ment of its own.

In general it may be said that his style is characterized by the
primal merits of perspicuity, force, and beauty. Its simplicity and
terse directness contribute in a marked degree to its perspicuity.
Absence of embellishment is a noticeable feature; there are few
rhetorical figures. The orator seems unwilling to have the atten-
tion diverted for an instant from the clear, sharp outlines of his
narrative or argument. He presses on certo agmine, “with unerr-
ing march,” — to use a phrase of Virgil’s, — wasting no words and
never losing sight of his main end. His sentences are condensed
without being harsh or obscure. Dionysius declares that he sur-
passes Thucydides, and even Demosthenes, in the respect that he
scarcely ever leaves the reader in doubt as to his exact meaning.
Force, the next of the leading qualities named above, is not so ob-
viously characteristic of single passages, though, as Cicero remarks,
“In Lysia saepe sunt etiam /acer?z, sic ut fieri nihil possit valen-
tius”; you do not feel a succession of blows, but a sustained energy,
imparting vigor and rapidity to the entire discourse.

It is in narration that Lysias appears to the greatest advantage.
His power is shown not so much in cogent logic, as in clear graphic
statement. Apparently forgetting the occasion for argument, he
proceeds to present the facts as he views them, making the listener
an eye-witness or a participant, and awakening him insensibly to
an interest in the persons and the transaction. With a construc-
tive faculty singularly felicitous and rapid in its working, he brings
to view the circumstances of the case, together with the various

XVill INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

machinery of cause, motive, and incident, until the fabric he has
reproduced stands like a present reality before the mind of the
hearer. When the statement of the case is complete, argument
seems unnecessary. As examples of this effective narration, two
passages may be cited: one in Oration ΧΙ]. (§§ 4--- 24), placed first
in the present volume, and the other in the Oration on the M/ur-
der of Evatosthenes (§§ 5-28), in which Euphiletus, an Athenian
citizen, defends himself for having slain the deceased, taken in
adultery with his wife,—a picture of manners not surpassed for
vividness in Greek literature.

His success as a writer of speeches for clients was due largely to
a rare power of personation, the so-called e‘hopoeia. With the art
of the dramatic poet or the novelist he divests himself of his own
personality, and composes a speech in a style and tone befitting the
client by whom it is to be delivered. Says Selden, in his Table-
Talk, “‘ He that is to make a speech for the Lord Mayor, must take
the measure of his Lordship’s mouth.” Lysias was not only the
first among advocates to recognize this principle, but he carried it
into practice with admirable success. The speaker, whether a pau-
per asking for a continuance of his pension from the public treasury,
or a wealthy land-owner repelling the charge of sacrilegious trespass
on temple properties, pleads his cause with the skill of a practised
advocate, but in forms of thought and speech natural to himself.
Each oration was thus, in a new sense, a work of literary art, having
an individuality of form corresponding to its inward idea, yet com-
plying with the requirements of that exquisite taste for structural
proportion that belongs to the best period of Greek art. The chief
defect observable in respect to rhetorical form is in arrangement of
argumentative topics ; in some of the orations a stricter logical order
would seem better adapted to strengthen the effect of the whole.
Even here, however, there may have been a deliberate choice of a
careless and apparently unstudied arrangement.

On another point I cannot do better than quote the following
paragraph from Professor Jebb’s admirable chapter on the Style of
Lysias :—

«Tt remains to say a few words on the peculiar and crowning excellence
of Lysias in the province of expression, —his famous but inexplicable
‘charm.’ It is noticeable that while the Roman critics merely praise his
elegance and polish, regarding it as a simple result of his art, the finer

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΙΧ

sense of his Greek critic apprehends a certain nameless grace or charm,
which cannot be directly traced to art, which cannot be analyzed or
accounted for ; it is something peculiar to him, of which all that can be
said is that it is there. What, asks Dionysius, is the freshness of a beauti-
ful face? What is fine harmony in the movements and windings of music?
What is rhythm in the measurement of times? As these things baffle defi-
nition, so does the charm of Lysias. It cannot be taken to pieces by rea-
soning ; it must be seized by a cultivated instinct. It is the final criterion
of his genuine work. ‘When I am puzzled about one of the speeches as-
cribed to him, and when it is hard for me to find the truth by other marks,
I have recourse to this excellence, as to the last piece on the board. Then,
if the Graces of Speech seem to me to make the writing fair, I count it to
be of the soul of Lysias ; and I care not to look further into it. But if the
stamp of the language has no winningness, no loveliness, I am chagrined,
and I suspect that after all the speech is not by Lysias ; and I do no more
violence to my instinct, even though in all else the speech seems to me
clever and well finished ; believing that to write well, in special styles other
than this, is given to many men; but that to write winningly, gracefully,
with loveliness, is the gift of Lysias.’”

It remains briefly to answer the question hinted at in the begin-
ning of this section, What are the fundamental principles of the
Lysian oratory, considered, namely, as prose composition?

Without assuming to have made an exhaustive analysis, I con-
sider that there are three or four that are entitled to special consid-
eration.

I. Truthfulness. The general historical accuracy of Lysias I
shall have occasion to mention afterwards. The point to be noted
here is that truthfulness is a determining element in his style.
The clearest possible exhibition of fact as the groundwork of all
persuasion, — this idea is a ruling one in his work. He begins no
argument without having first attained a clear, coherent conception
of the case, so thoroughly elaborated in all its parts and relations
that he is able to transfer it to the minds of others with a distinct-
ness extraordinarily impressive. The success of his method is of
course largely due to an imagination of unusual power; with that,
however, there was the still rarer faculty or quality, whether we ,
consider it native or acquired, of intellectual honesty. This is
habitually regulative of his imagination. He is intent on the mas-

‘tery of the facts, and furthermore does not rest satisfied short of

ΧΧ INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

the utmost possible clearness and precision in the expression of
his conceptions.

In general, his work bears the impress of an open, truthful nature;
he is a man who sees facts and believes in their reality and their
power, who is averse to exaggeration, and who will not strain after
effect. A later rhetorician quotes him as saying that “it is not by the
style that one’s thought is made great or small; the thought is great
that contains much, and small that contains little.” He says plain
things in a plain way. For common things he uses common words.
Thus it was not alone purity of diction that charmed his critics, but
the peculiar harmony of thought and expression. Hence his free-
dom from mannerism, and his perpetual freshness: hence an art so
admirable that it impresses every reader, but eludes analysis, and
defies imitation.

2. His style recognizes the insufficiency of the decorative prin-
ciple in literary art. This topic is closely connected with the pre-
ceding, and is indeed derivable from it, yet deserves separate
mention. The Sicilian school aimed at beautiful expression; the
Asiatic school strove to be ornately dignified and grand. Both
clung to the form irrespective of the thought, and sought to make
oratory impressive by its externals. Atticism, the school which, as
has been observed, has Lysias as its most conspicuous representa-
tive, constantly demanded that discourse should express thought ; it
was not so much to adorn, enrich, ennoble thought, as to express it.
Lysias perceived that embellishment could not be made the leading
motive. The thought, — and by this we are to understand not merely
the facts and their relations, but the emotion, the purpose and convic-
tion of the orator, all that in his soul which he would transfer to the
mind of the hearer, — this must give form and mould to the discourse.

3. It aims at the control of the will primarily through the intel-
lect. Reliance on intellectual conviction as most certain in the end
to influence the will is everywhere characteristic of the method of
Lysias. We cannot therefore wholly accept the statement of Pro-
fessor Jebb, that “the broadest characteristic of modern oratory as
compared with the ancient, is the predominance of a sustained ap-
peal to the understanding.” It is true that modern oratory, far more
than the ancient, goes back to fundamental principles, linking and
riveting its conclusions to them by long chains of logic, while the
latter relies on personal motives and prejudices, uses a great variety

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΧΙ

of precedents and examples, and employs obvious arguments drawn
from the circumstances of the case. But it is eminently character-
istic of Lysias that he adheres to the principle of effecting persua-
sion through the intellect rather than the feelings, and that, not alone
by working upon the imagination, but by means of reasoning, A
minute analysis of any of his principal forensic discourses will show
how all the available resources of argument are drawn upon in sup-
port of his position. He depends little on impassioned appeal, or
on the impulse communicated from speaker to hearer in the trans-
port of the moment. There is manifest a deliberate, self-contained
confidence that, if he can make his hearers understand the facts
as he does, his purpose is accomplished. Thus the oratory of
Lysias, while not in any large sense an appeal to principles, is emi-
nently an appeal to the understanding, whether we use this word as
referring to the logical faculty merely, or to the intellectual nature
as distinguished from the emotional. He finds his way to the feel-
ings by a cool, clear statement of facts and reasons, rather than by
any exhibition of emotional fervor, or by force of the personal mag-
netism of the orator.

4. Economy of the recipient’s attention. There is no need to
enlarge upon this point here. That this fundamental principle of
effective composition, so clearly unfolded in Herbert Spencer’s well-
known essay, is generally regarded in the writings of Lysias, appears
from what has been said above in the paragraphs treating of his
diction and composition. Indeed, he was forced into compliance
with this principle, so far as the economy of time is concerned, by a
method not ordinarily applied in modern forensic practice. The
laws of the Athenians in some cases, and their custom in others,
restricted the pleader to a limited time, and thus necessitated selec-
tion and compression of material. He is generally felicitous in the
arrangement of words in a sentence, so that the thought is easily
taken up as he advances. It should be said, also, that it is under
this head we find his most marked defects. A more frequent use of
figures would enliven his style, at once quickening the imagination
and aiding attention. A structure oftener alternating between the
loose and periodic forms would have afforded an agreeable contrast.
Demosthenes in this respect improved upon his predecessor, some-
times, however, sacrificing perspicuity in detail in his determination
to hold the unflagging attention of the audience to his main theme.

xxil INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

Ill. HIS GENIUS AND CHARACTER. .

To obtain even in faintest outline a conception of Lysias as a man,
is far from being an easy task. We are hindered not only by the
remoteness of his age, but by the fact that his life was mainly spent
in private, and was devoted to scholarly and professional pursuits.
Only a few works from his pen remain to us, and but the slightest
contemporaneous notices. We have caught a glimpse of him in
considering his style, —it being true of him as of every writer pos-
sessed of force and originality of mind, that “the style zs the man.”
There are, however, some additional points of view from which we
may contemplate his career with a livelier and more intelligent
interest.

To his contemporaries he was known as Lysias the sophist, — the
rhetor, — the λογογράφος, or advocate. The reader of Grecian his-
tory and literature will have become more or less familiar with the
import of these several designations. The latter technically and
more specifically described his profession. The λογογράφος (in the
forensic signification of the word) was an advocate who composed
speeches for clients that were to plead their own cause in court.
There were frequent cases then —afterwards they became still more
frequent — where advocates served their clients or friends by per-
sonally appearing in court to speak in their behalf, and to aid in the
conduct of the case. But it was ordinarily expected in Athens that
a citizen should plead his own cause; and if a professional advocate
came in person to his assistance, the fact of its being a paid service
was usually studiously concealed. Lysias confined himself to writ-
ing pleas for his clients to deliver. At the beginning of the fourth
century before the Christian era he was by far the most distin-
guished legal adviser and advocate of this class in Athens. His
broad and generous culture had long given him rank among the
foremost of the sophists, not devoted to speculative research as were
Protagoras and Plato, but to studies of the rhetorical sort. How
prominent a place he occupied may easily be perceived from the
Phedrus of Plato, as well as from the manner in which the great
philosopher elsewhere singles him out for hostile criticism.

Of his personal appearance we have no historical record. The
language of Aristides the sophist (about A. Ὁ, 175), “I saw” (ina

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XXill

dream) “Lysias the orator as a comely young man” (νεανίσκον οὐκ
ἄχαριν), may have been founded on tradition, or on the representa-
tion of him in then existing statues. In private it is probable that
his morals were not above those of the average Athenian of his time.
His religious attitude can only be negatively inferred; there is little
to indicate what were his positive opinions concerning the prevalent
religious system, or his temper and convictions regarding the great
truths of natural religion, which underlay the popular mythology.
In this respect his orations stand in marked contrast with those of
Lycurgus, whose reverent tone, to say nothing of the subject-matter
of his arguments, reveals a mind deeply imbued with the religious
beliefs and traditions of his country.

The most striking trait in the character of Lysias, morally con-
sidered, has been alluded to in the previous discussion. I mean his
habitual truthfulness. The student who inquires into the historical
bearings of his orations will be impressed with their general ac-
curacy, and the evident tone of fairness pervading them. With
scarcely an exception, so far as I have observed, his historical
statements vindicate themselves, when confronted with others that
apparently or really contradict them. In the note on § 17 of the
Oration Against Agoratus, 1 have remarked on one of these in-
stances; compare also the note on § 72 of the same oration. His
merit in this regard is not absolute; but it must be remembered
that if at times we find exaggeration, sophistical reasoning, and par-
tial representation of the facts, we are not to expect in an advocate,
and in that age, the impartiality of a historian or a judge.

A noticeable feature is his modesty. That characteristic of his
art which led to a withdrawal from view of his own personality, is to
be found in the man as well as in the artist. His patriotism and
public spirit had been abundantly shown in the contest for the lib-
eration of Athens from the misrule of the tyrants. It would not
have been unsuitable, therefore, when he came to plead before one
of her tribunals against the murderer of his brother, to allude to his
known services in the cause of his adopted country. But about the
only allusion to his own part in the work done by the men of Phyle
is found in the single word ἤλθομεν, we came.

His remarkable vigor and industry are shown by the number of
his orations, and by the length and success of his professional
career, although it was begun at so late a period in life. His tact

XXiV INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

in dealing with men, founded on a penetrating insight into motives
and character, has already been assumed in the discussion of the
ethopoetic element in his style. That he had humor, we can readily
make out. The plea for the pensioned Invalid, Oration XXIV., is
especially in the humorous vein. Occasionally he is sarcastic; in-
veighing against the profligate licentiousness of the younger Alci-
biades, he remarks that the young man had evidently despaired of
attaining the greatness of his ancestors, except by being vicious in
youth as they had been before him.

In a fragment preserved by Atheneus he has this to say of the
Socratic Aéschines, an incorrigible shirk: “ Moreover, gentlemen of
the jury, I am not the only person he treats thus, —it is the same
with every one else who has anything to do with him. Have not
the neighboring store-keepers, to whom he refuses to pay what he
has obtained on credit, shut up their stores and gone to law with
him? Are not his neighbors so annoyed that they are abandoning
their houses, and renting others farther off? .... And so many
crowd about his door at daybreak to collect their dues, that the
passers-by think it to be his funeral. Also the merchants in the
Pirzeus have come to the conclusion that it is less hazardous to take
a cargo into the Adriatic than to lend money to him.”

The reader is probably familiar with his reply to the client who
came back dissatisfied with the speech that had been written for
him. “When I read it for the first time,” said he, “it seemed an
admirable discourse; but after the second and third rehearsal it
appeared tame and feeble.” ‘ You must remember,” replied Lysias,
“that the judges are to hear it but once.”

He is sparing of aphorisms. “Laws will be no better than the
law-makers,” he says in XXX. 28. “Time is the most convincing
test of the truth,” XIX. 61. In Oration XX. (of doubtful genuine-
ness, however) it is finely said of the defendant: “ When he might
have concealed his property, and thus have avoided rendering as-
sistance, he preferred to have you know his circumstances, 2722 order
that, if in any event he should wish to do wrong, he might not be
able.” The reader will recall a similar thought in Rousseau’s Con-
Sessions.

More is known to us about him through Plato than through any
other contemporaneous writer. But to no contemporary is Plato
more unjust than to Lysias. The theory of rhetoric that he attributes

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. _XXV

to him, however justly it may or may not be assigned to Corax or to
Gorgias, was not that of Lysias. Some time before the Phedrus could
have been written, he had begun to compose speeches on principles
diametrically opposite to those condemned by Plato. The latter ex-
plains his own conception of a true rhetoric, as the art of implanting
one’s convictions in the soul of another ; the votary of this art must
therefore from its very nature possess himself of truth, and he must
likewise know the souls of men. On this latter point he says :—

“ Oratory is the art of enchanting the soul, and therefore he who
would be an orator has to learn the differences of human souls, —
they are so many and of such a nature, and from them come the
differences between man and man; he will then proceed to divide
speeches into their different classes. Such and such persons, he
will say, are affected by this or that kind of speech in this or that
way, and he will tell you why; he must have a theoretical notion of
them first, and then he must see them in action, and be able to fol-
low them with all his senses about him, or he will never get beyond
the precepts of his masters. But when he is able to say what per-
sons are persuaded by what arguments, and recognize the individual
about whom he used to theorize as actually present to him, and say.
to himself, ‘This is he, and this is the sort of man who ought to
have that argument applied to him in order to convince him of this’;
when he has attained the knowledge of all this, and knows also
when he should speak and when he should abstain from speaking,
and when he should make use of pithy sayings, pathetic appeals,
aggravated effects, and all the other figures of speech, —when, I say,
he knows the times and seasons of all these things, then, and not till
then, he is perfect and a consummate master of his art.” *

No one had realized this ideal so successfully, we may say so
marvellously, as Lysias. In the forensic branch he was wellnigh
“the consummate master of his art.” His success was-not by a
mere knack, nor was it the result alone of practice. It is evident
that he had rightly discerned and estimated the conditions of suc- |
cess in his profession, and had theorized upon them. He knew not
only “what” was to be said, but, as Plato required, the “to whom”
and the “when” and the “how much.” We can discern in him the
true Socratic of his age in the domain of rhetoric. How far he may

* Pheedrus, 271 ; Jowett’s Translation.

XXvi INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

have been stimulated or helped by Socrates in his discovery of the
true theory of forensic and practical eloquence it is impossible to
determine, but it is certain that the success of his method rests on
the same essential principles as the Socratic theory of education.

The defects of his mind are plainly to be seen in his works. We
miss the suggestive variety of a more productive imagination, the
warmth of a more emotional, sympathetic nature, and in certain pas-
sages the sublimity that would have been imparted by a loftier moral
enthusiasm. He had an understanding of extraordinary vigor, clear
perceptions, large common-sense, keen insight into men, but his
nature was not of the largest mould. On the bema his oratory could
scarcely have swayed the most powerful natures. He lacked the
deep, intense convictions which kept the thunderbolts of Demos-
thenes at a white heat, and which seem in his greatest moments to
have inspired him with transcendent energy. Yet the eloquence of
Lysias, if not of the very highest order, was almost perfect in its
kind. Addressed to audiences accustomed to be wrought upon by
all manner of appeals, it is clear, dispassionate, mainly directed to
the “intellect. It chooses its means with unerring adaptation, but
does not display them. It is the product of an art whose single aim
is πεῖσαι λόγῳ, to effect persuasion by discourse. In this species of
eloquence, which is careless of applause, acts indirectly upon the
emotions, and is only intent upon carrying its point, —hence study-
ing its audience, and the conditioning circumstances of the occasion,
no less than its theme, — in eloquence of this kind, if we are to judge
from the verdict of antiquity together with the confirmatory criticism
of modern times, Lysias has never been excelled. He seems at the
very outset of his professional career to have conceived with singular
clearness the nature of his task, and he labored with long-continued
and successful industry towards the realization of his ideal in its
accomplishment. His best qualities passed over into his work. He
did much toward bringing a noble art to the greatest perfection it ever
attained. Though not to be ranked in mental or moral stature with
his older and greater contemporary, Sophocles, we may nevertheless
justly apply to him as a composer of oratorical prose the words of
Professor Plumptre concerning the great dramatist: his character-
istic and surpassing excellence is to be found in “the self-control
and consummate art with which all his powers are devoted.to work-
ing out a perfection deliberately foreseen and aimed.”

INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XXVI1

IV. HIS WRITINGS.

There were current in ancient times 425 orations bearing the name
of Lysias, but not more than 250 were accounted genuine, — accord-
ing to Dionysius only 233. Out of this whole number there are 170
of which the titles have been preserved, or of which some fragments
remain. Four of these belong to the class of “ Epideictic” orations
(λόγοι ἐπιδεικτικοί), addresses delivered on special public and festive
occasions; two of these are extant, one the O/ymfiac mentioned in
the account of his life, the other the “eral Oration given in this vol-
ume. In the class of Deliberative or Political orations (λόγοι συμ-
βουλευτικοῦ there is but one,—a fragment forming No. XXXIV. in
the existing collections. It was written for delivery in the Ecclesia
immediately after the restoration of the democracy, and is probably
the earliest production that we have from his pen.

Of the Forensic orations (λόγοι δικανικοί) there are 30 extant (22
entire), but not all accounted genuine. The whole number of Foren-
sic orations in the list of titles and fragments is 159. They relate to
a great variety of cases, civil and criminal; impeachments for treason
and official misconduct; actions for violation of contracts, and for
damage received to property and character ; indictments for murder,
sacrilege, and for the crime, likewise capital, of unlawful speculation
in breadstuffs; among the pleaders, heirs-at-law, wards and guardians,
injured husbands, deserters, archons elect and admirals, —scarcely a
phase of Athenian public or private life that does not come into view.
A sufficient portion of the original collection has been preserved to
show what must have been the historical value of the whole. The
courts of Athens more than its political and festal assemblies, per-
haps even more than its stage, bring to our view the actual every-day
life of its citizens, as well as many transactions of political moment
that do not appear on the page of the historian.

Thus with all their merits in point of style and language, the pleas
of the great Athenian advocate have a still stronger claim upon the
attention of the modern reader. They are rich with information con-
cerning the inner history of their age. It may be questioned whether
any contemporary historical documents of greater value have come
down to us out of Greek antiquity. They relate toa generation about
which we are greatly concerned to know, — more, perhaps, than about

XXVili INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.

any other during the whole sway of the Hellenic civilization, were it
only for the reason that then Socrates lived, and philosophy began.
Loss of empire did not dim the lustre of the Attic mind. On the
contrary, it was in this generation that the Periclean Athens began to
bear its ripest and best fruit. The Athens that saw the beginning of
the fourth century before the Christian era is an “intensely luminous
point” on the dim background of antiquity. It has a microcosmic
history, and its points of contact with the civilization of a free peo-
ple in the nineteenth century of the Christian era are vastly more
numerous than those of any other pagan age. Into this Athens, its
streets and markets, its dwellings, its sanctuaries and temples, into
its Pirzeus harbor and along its wharves, the orations of Lysias lead
the reader. No Greek can be put into the hands of the elementary
student which throws such a strong side light upon the history with
which in his subsequent studies he will need to be most familiar.
While studying the language of these orations, their narratives and
their arguments, he is brought into the midst of the restless enter-
prise and the strifes of “that fierce democratie” of Athens, and
unconsciously he begins to reconstruct its history. An ecclesi-
astical historian has spoken of the importance of every student’s
setting foot on the original ground of historic investigation. ‘ How-
ever well told by modern compilers, there is almost sure to be some-
thing in the original records which we should have overlooked.”
These orations are not history, but they contain its materials, and
how important for its elucidation they have proved, any one may
estimate by observing the frequent reference to them in the works of
Grote, and in the volume by Boeckh on the Public Economy of the
Athenians. Nor is the lover of Greek literature to forget, as he
turns these pages, that without Lysias, such was his acknowledged
influence-on Attic prose and oratory, we should not have had De-
mosthenes. Along with Thucydides he forms the best introduction.
to the study of the greatest of orators. Scarcely less a service is it
that he leads us into the very court, before the very judges, as it
were, in whose presence the greatest of all the pagan world gave
utterance to that sublime vindication which Plato has reproduced
in the Apology of Socrates.

ΚΎΣΤΑΣ.

INTRODUCTION

TO THE

ORATION AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

‘Tae occasion and subject of this oration, and its sig-
nificance as beginning a new era in Attic prose, have already
been adverted to in the introductory sketch of Lysias and his
writings. It is, moreover, the only extant oration known to
have been spoken by the orator himself. His brother Pole-
marchus had been arrested and put to death the previous
year by order of the Thirty; the oration is a masterly plea
for justice against Eratosthenes as his murderer, the accused
having been a member of that body, and also having taken
an active part in the arrest.

The nature of the crime charged, and the official relations
of the defendant, lead the speaker beyond the mere accusa-
tion of a single criminal ; in the latter and larger part of his
speech he sets forth the true character of the oligarchic revo-
lution, arraigning its leaders with statesmanlike dignity and
eloquence for their murderous and treasonable conspiracy
against the Athenian people. Thus, although classed as a
judicial oration, it is in many respects, as Blass remarks, the
discourse of a statesman, and worthy to be named with the
celebrated oration of Demosthenes On the Crown.

The administration of the Thirty Tyrants, as they came
to be called, lasted about eight months, from June or July,
B.C. 404, into the following February. They were to draft

4 XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

a new code in harmony with the aims of the oligarchic party,
and for the time being the government of the city was placed
in their hands. Their appointment took place a little less
than a year after the loss of the Athenian fleet at A®gos-
potami, August, 405. It had been a year of unparalleled
suffering in the city. The blockade brought starvation to
‘its doors, and the dilatory negotiations of the treacherous
Theramenes had but deferred hope and prolonged misery.
Still, with their wonted hopefulness and courage the people’
clung to the existing constitution, struggling to maintain their
own freedom against foes within the city, while defending their
national independence against foes without. But a change of
government became inevitable after the surrender of Athens
to Lysander, towards the end of March, 404. ‘The exiled
aristocrats returned in the wake of the victorious Spartan
army; the leaders of the popular party were put out of the
way in the manner described in Oration XIIJ.; then followed
the appointment of thirty* of the oligarchic leaders, charged
with the legislative and executive duties above mentioned.
Their leading spirit was Critias, — resolute, energetic, and
with an ambition unchecked by fear or scruple. The Mod-
erates were represented by Theramenes and nine others who
had been nominated by him.

The deeds that made this administration a veritable reign
of terror, and soon rendered the name of the Thirty Tyrants
odious throughout the Grecian world, are sufficiently familiar
to the readers of history. Not less than 1500 persons were
put to death. Large amounts of private property were con-
fiscated, and even the treasuries and revenues of the temples
were not spared. The higher schools were closed, the public
teachers silenced, save Socrates, who could not be.t ‘The

* Their names are given by Xenophon, /eédlenica, II. 3, 2.
+ See Grote’s History of Greece, Vol. VIII. p. 257 seg.

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 5

regular courts, including the Areopagus, were suspended, and
denunciations from the most infamous informers were re-
ceived and acted upon without even the form of a trial.
Finally, as if to complete their own and their country’s degra-
dation, the usurpers introduced a Spartan garrison into the
Acropolis, to be maintained at the cost of the city.

Lysias and Polemarchus, being metics, belonged to a class
peculiarly exposed to the rapacity of the Tyrants. It was a
class for the most part engaged in commerce, democratic in
its sympathies, and containing many men of wealth. The
Tyrants were in pressing need of money. ‘They governed an
impoverished city, and that with the costly arm of a foreign
garrison. Lysias and his brother were placed on the list of
the ten who were first proscribed. In language simple but
graphic the orator describes the whole proceeding, — the visit
of the officers, their brutal violence and greed of plunder, the
details of his own escape, and the arrest of his brother by
Eratosthenes, followed by a summary execution without trial
and without even being charged with a crime.

Of Eratosthenes little is known except through this accusa-
tion of Lysias. He is mentioned by no other writer of the
time except Xenophon. During the administration of the
Four Hundred (8. c. 411), he had been one of the secret emis-
saries to the coast of Asia Minor to disseminate oligarchic
sentiments among the Athenian troops. Frustrated in his
attempts, he seems to have returned to Athens, and to have
remained till after the battle of AXgospotami. He then becomes
a member of the “ Ephors,” a sort of central executive com-
mittee of five appointed by the clubs and secret political
societies, — the so-called ἑταιρίαι and συνωμοσίαι, ---- which
were intriguing in favor of Sparta and an aristocratic polity.
He is next heard of as a member of the Thirty.

The career and character of Theramenes come under search-
ing review in the course of the oration. He had stood forward

6 XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

to advocate a moderate policy, and to oppose the useless
violence of Critias, —a step which cost him his life. His fol-
lowers were now demanding his enrolment among the martyrs
for liberty, and claiming for themselves the benefit of whatso-
ever popularity might accrue to his memory. Lysias effectually
disposes of these pretensions, and exposes him as a cautious,
but dishonest and thoroughly selfish politician, who deserved
but too well, though it was by unexpected hands, the reward
of his faithlessness to the people and his treason to the con-
stitution.

The trial is supposed to have been held between Sept. 21,
403,— the day of the return into the city of the patriots
under Thrasybulus, — and the close of that year. Jurisdic-
tion in murder cases properly devolved on the Areopagus;
but that tribunal, it may be, had not yet been reorganized.
The present case appears to have been tried before a dicas-
tery presided over by the King Archon (ἄρχων βασιλεύς), and
probably holding its sessions in the Delphinion. In the
opinion of Grote* it was on the occasion of a trial of
accountability («d@vva:), which he supposes Eratosthenes and
his colleague Phidon to have returned to stand, that this
indictment was preferred. We are inclined, however, to
believe with Scheibe and Frohberger that the case was simply
a trial for murder (γραφὴ φόνου).

The following brief analysis will aid the student in under-
standing the oration as a whole:

I. Exordium, $$ 1-3.

II. Argument on the specific charge contained in the indictment.

(1) Statement of facts, 88 4-24.
(2) Examination of the defendant, $$ 25, 26.

(3) Answer to the defence that he had acted on compulsion and
was therefore not responsible, §§ 27 — 36.

* History of Greece, Vol. VILL. p. 295. The question is discussed by
Blass, Geschichte der Att. Beredsamkeit, Ch. ΧΤΠ,

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 7

III. Argument extra causam, arraigning the defendant as particeps
criminis with the Thirty.
(1) Examination of his record, — whether he had rendered such
services to the state as to offset the crimes of himself and
his colleagues, $$ 37-61.
(2) Concerning Theramenes, §§ 62 -- 80.
(3) Contrast between the present trial and those under the
Thirty, and denunciation of the advocates and witnesses
for the defence, §§ 81-91.
IV. Appeal to the judges, 88 92-98.
V. Peroration, §§ 99, 100.

ΧΙ].

KATA ΕΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥ͂Σ

TOY TENOMENOY TON TPIAKONTA,
ON ΑΥ̓ΤῸΣ EINE AY2IAz.

4. Kerk
Οὐκ ἄρξασθαί μοι δοκεῖ ἄπορον εἶναι, bf
ἄνδρες δικασταί, τῆς κατηγορίας; ἀλλὰ παύσα-
σθαι λέγομει Se τοιαῦτα αὐτοῖς͵ τὸ μέγεθαρ καὶ

Wut othPrvry-

τοσαῦτα TO πλῆθος εἴργασται, pa μήτ᾽ ἂν pone
“opera, δεψότερα τῶν ὑπαρχόητων ioe /ophgab
μήτε τἀληθῆ ϑλυνάμενον. εἰ τὰ ἅπαντα δύνασθαι,
ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη ἢ τ τὸν κατήγορον ἀπειπεῖν ἢ τὸν xpo-
2 νον ἐπιλιπεῖν. τοὐναντίον δέ μοι δοκοῦμεν πείσε-
σθαι ἣ ἢ ἐν Fi i τοῦ χρόνῳ. πρότερον μὲν γὰρ
ἔδει τὴν ἐχθραν τοὺς κατηγοροῦντας ἐπιδεῖξαι,
ἥτις εἴη πρὸς τοὺς φεύγοντας ᾿ νυνὶ δὲ παρὰ τῶν
φευγόντων χρὴ wetter Oia ὁ ἥτις ἦν αὐτοῖς πρὸς
τὴν πόλιν ἔχθρα, ἀνθ᾽. ὅτου τοιαῦτα ἐτόλμησαν
εἰς αὐτὴν ἐξαμαρτάνειν. οὐ μέντοϊ ὡς οὐκ ἔχων
οἰκείας ἔχθρας καὶ συμφορὰς το λόγους ποιοῦ-
μαι, ἀλλλιὼς. ἅπασι πολλῆς πες ὃ οὔσης ὑπὲρ
3 τῶν ἰδίων ἢ ἢ ὑπὲρ τῶν δημοσίων ὀργίζεσθαι. . © ἐγὼ
μὲν οὖν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οὔτ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ πώποτε

Ὁ,

i

XII, AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

J

th pee ee

¥ 4 4 , “A > ,
OUTE ἀλλότρια πράγματα mpagas νυν ig Sena a

"pf? γεχενημένοι 8 κατηγορεῖν, ὥστε
πο λλάκις͵ « εἰς πολλὴν ἀθυμίαν α κατέστην, μὴ διὰ
PNA gr AAA,

τὴν ἀπειρίαν por καὶ ἀδυνάτως ὑπὲρ τοῦ adeh-

φοῦ καὶ ἐμφντοῦς τῆι sed puede sips, ok

Aye By owt

ι'δ:

ὅμως͵ δὲ ᾿ἀειηδσομᾶι ὑμᾶς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι
δι ἔλαχίστων διδάξαι. posrusd

Ovpos πατὴρ ἐὰν ες μτὸν ἐπείσθ μὲν ὑπὸ eps 4
κλέους εἰς ταύτην τὴν γὴν % ικέσθαι, € Seg Foude
εἰς 7 ὴν γῆ ἰφικε er δὲ Zp

κοντα ᾧκησε," Kal οὐδενὶ πώποτε οὔτε ἡμεῖς οὔτε

> a ‘a ¥ > 4, 3» 3 4

ἐκεῖνος δίκην οὔτε rose οὔτε ἐῤύψωμεν,

ἀλλ᾽ οὕτως @KOU ἥμενοι ὥστε μήτε
ng ee

εἰς τοὺς ἄλλους ἐξαμαρτο τάνειν ΩΝ ὑπὸ τῶν ἄλλων

“ἀδικεῖσθαι. ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οἱ Τρεδκαντά πονηροὶ, μὲν 5

καὶ συκοφάνται ὄντες εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν. κα δα ΤΉ ΘΝΝ,
a PS mi δὲ ἰδ aX
QOKOVTES δὲ ι τῶν ἀδίκων κἄθα͵ ἂν ποιῆσαι
3 χρῆναι τ 1 Deine P "ῇ
τὴν κ᾿ Ἀόχο καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς π ἴτας ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν καὶ
δίκαιοσύνην Tp πέσθαι, τοιαῦτα Beare ov τοι-

αντα οἰεῖν sit ute ὡς ye ree TOV ἐμαυτοῦ

FELRAVUE

TOV εἰπὼν καὶ περὶ τῶν ὑ ετέρων ἀναμνῆσαι

πειράσομαι. Vv Sens yap καὶ Πείσων ἔλεγον ἐν 6

Ag awd

ait
πολιτείᾳ. ἀχθομενοι καλλίστην οὖν εἶναι Be er
ἐλ ΔΑ,

σιν τιμωρεῖσθαι μὲν δοκεῖν, τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ χρηματῖ-
ζεσθαι: πάντως δὲ τὴν μὲν κυ πένεσθαι, τὴν

iar τ᾿ fry

TOU τὰ ἰάκοντα περὶ τῶν μετοίκων, ὡς εἶέν τινες τῇ

ὡς ἔπειθον: ἀποκτιννύναι μὲν γὰρ ἀν-

οὐ X
θρώπους περὶ οὐδενὸς ἡγοῦντο, λαμβάνειν δὲ

rr nA

δ᾽ ἀπ ρίσθαι χρημά ΠΩΣ oe TOUS ἀκούοντας 7

Ο ba AL

Urry

10 XII. KATA EPATOSOENOY®S.

ara περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιοῦντο. ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐ-
χρήμ ρ οὐ ξεν,
τοῖς δέκα ee Touraye? δὲ δύο" πένητας, ἵνα
αὐτοῖς ἢ πρὸς τοὺς ay pe ta, ὡς
Ve 2. meee jue he Y ara mp
των ἑνέκα ταῦτ i ol cena, ἰλλὰ δυμῷ “Pou, ᾳ τῇ, μ
γλ
πολιτείᾳ γεγένηται, ὥσπερ τι τῶν ἄλλων εὐλόγως
8 πεποιηκότες. διαλαβόντες δὲ τὰς οἰκίας ἐβάδιζον.
>. τὰς Ν , ε 5 , ἃ 3 λ ,
καὶ ἐμὲ μὲν ξένους ἑστιωντα κα κἀξέλάβον; ovs ἐξελά-
βρῶ 2 Πείσωνί με πἀραδιδόασι. ; οἱ ὁ δὲ ag o's εἰς,
τὸ ἐὀγαστή ον ἐλθόντες τὰ ἀνδ nano ἀπεγραά-
_govto. ἐγὼ δὲ Πείσωνα pee ἠρώτων ei βούλοιτό
με σῶσαι χρήματα λαβών ὁ «δ᾽ ἔφασκεν, εἰ πολ-
φ. l iy »τλ
9 ha εἴη. εἶπον οὖν ὅτι ee ἀῤγυρίου € cin is
νὰ
εἴην Sdovas+ δ θὲ ὡμολόγησε ταῦτα ποιήσειν.
i as μὲν οὖν ὅτι οὔτε “θεοὺς ovr’ ἀνθρώπους —
Ῥομῦζοο, © ΟΝ δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων. ἐδόκει one.
“To καιό: ατον εἶν πίστιν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ λαβεῖν. δὴ
igs εν ν p Reto: Keene
δὲ ὦμοσεν é ὦλειαν ἑ ἑαυτῷ καὶ τοῖς παισὶν δι ς ec
Gas. λαβὼν τὸ tad WT ἦν δε opera εἰσ ελθῶν, εἰς

ὡΡῸΣ ΨΟΝ γον

τὸ δῳμάτιον τὴν κιβωτὸν cs ai Πείσων

>

rua Le:

αἰσθόμενος εἰανρῤνετῶι, καὶ ἰδὼν τὰ ἐνόντα κάλει

τῶν ὑπηρεχῶν δύο, καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ κιβωτῷ sie
11 ἐκέλευσεν. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐχ ὅσον ὡμολύψησῷ εἶχεν, ὦ

ἄν Opes δικασταί, ἀλλὰ ape rears ἀργυρίου καὶ
τετρβοσίους κυζικηοὺ Us καὶ ἑκατὸν δάβεοκρὺς καὶ,
φὶάλας ἀ ἀργυρίου To CLs ἐδεόμην αὐτοῦ ἐφόδιά ἡ
μοι δοῦναι, ὁ δὶ, ιἀγᾳπήσειν με ἐφάσκεῦ, εἰ τὸ
12 σῶμα. Wooo. ἐξιοῦσι δ᾽ ἐμοὶ καὶ Πείσωνι ἐπι-

τυγχάνει Μηλόβιός τε καὶ Μνησιθείδης ἐκ τοῦ

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. II

ἀρ παρε

ἐργαστηρῖου ἀπιόντες, καὶ yeas ιν, άνουσι,͵ τρὸς

αν - Y

δ

ἜΝ οι ταῖς θύραις, καὶ ἐρωτῶσιν ὅ omy) βαδίζ 2 per ᾽

c

ὁ ὃ apace εἰς so ἀδελφοῦ τοῦ ἐμοῦ, ἵνα καὶ τὰ
σα mL
ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ οἰκίᾳ i παρ ύρΝ ἐκεῖνον μὲν ο οὖν ἐκέ-
λευον βαδίζειν, ἐμὲ δὲ μεθ᾽ αὑτῶν ἀκολουδεῖν ἰς
UU - AA: Crk

pe ca ae Πείσων͵ δι peers. σιγᾶν (μοι 13
παρεκελεύετο καὶ θαρρεῖν, ὡς SOM, ἐ ἐκεῖσε. κατα-
ama δὲ αὐτόθι ye oe €T ἐροιϑμίμλότον- νὰ
τα" ᾧ παραδόντες ἐμὲ πάλιν @XO ἐν τριούτἤιῳό -᾿
δ᾽ ὄντι μοι κυιδυνεύεωνκἐβόκε ἐδόκει, ὡς τοῦ γε Sr obavd
ὑπάρχοντος Bu Ane

he αὐτὸν τάδε, ‘ ἐπιτήδειος μέν oy ot τυγχάνεις

Moras δὲ Te ic nee 14

ya δ᾽ εἰς τὴν σὴν οἰκίαν, oes οὐδέν,
χῤημᾶάτων δ᾽ ἕνεκα sched en σὺ οὖν ταῦτα
πάσ᾽ οντί, μοι ἐρόθυμαν 1 BRET XO τὴν σεαυτοῦ ἕξ τὰ
υναμιν εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν σωτηριαψῃ ὁ ὁ δ᾽ ὑπέσχετο. στ Ἂν
ταῦτα ποιήσειν. ἐδόκει δ᾽ «αὐτῷ βέλτιον εἶναι
πρὸς es ee pono vas: Sorte yap ἅπαν ποιή-
σειν αὐτόν, εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη. ἐκείνου δὲ 15
διαλεγομένου sae ig (ἔμπειρος γὰρ ἃ ὧν ἐτύγχα-
νον τῆς οἰκίας, καὶ ἤδειν ὅτι ᾿ἀμφίϑυρος εἴ ΣᾺ ἐδόκει
poe ταϑ θὰ πειρᾶσθαι σωγηνδι, ἐνθυμουμένῳ ὅτι,
ἐὰν μὲ λάθω, ey ϑόμος ἐὰν δὲ ληφθωξῇ ἡγούμην
μέν, εἰ 2 Saud pth. εἴη memes pees os ὑπὸ τοῦ eo
που χρήματα λαβεῖν, οὐδὲν ἧττον ᾿ἀφεθήσεσι at,
obs μή, ὁμοίως ἀποθαρεισ θαι, rik bea διανοηθεὶς τό
ε νοῦς ἐκείνων ἐπὶ τῇ avec θύρᾳ δὴν φυλακὴν

ποιουμένων " τριῶν δὲ θυρῶν οὐσῶν, ἃς ἔδει με

~~
yy

I2

17

XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.

διελθεῖν, ἅπασαι ἀνεῳγμέναι ἔτυχον. ἀφικόμενος
δὲ εἰς ᾿Αρχένεω τοῦ ναυκλήρου ἐκεῖνον πέμπω εἰς
᾿Ξ, , : A ~ 5 ~ 9 A
ἄστυ, πευσόμενον περὶ TOU ga ἥκων δὲ
ἔλεγεν ὅτι Eparoctiage αὐτὸν τῇ ὁδῷ λαβὼν
εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον ἀπαγάγοι. ὼ ποιαῦτα
ἷς τὸ δεσμωτήρ γάγ Leh ee
πεπυσμέπος τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ὀιέπλευδα Μέγα:

ry o-
ράδε. ὀλεμάρχῳ δὲ ἀρήγγευναν οἵ τ ἰάκουτα

τὸ UT ἀκείνων εἰθισμένον π παβάγγεχαα, πίνειν Koz (μὰ
cast πρὶν τὴν αἰτίαν ents w δι ἥντινα, ager ,

ἀποβανεῖσ αι; οὕτω πολλοῦ ἐδέησε κ τθὴν

A

18 Oe καὶ ἐπειδὴ. ἀπε ἐκ τοῦ
es g

pra τηρίου, χεθνεώς, Py gos 2 ἡμῖν οἰκιῶν, Ἢ οὐσῶν.
εμιᾶς εἴάσαν ἐξε ἐξγεχθῆναι, ἄλλὰ κλίσιον μισθω: yd

σάμενοι, προῦυ ar αὐτόν. καὶ πολλῶν 6 ὄντων ἐὰν
τίων αἰτοῦσιν οὐδὲν ἔδοσαν εἰς τὴν ταφή! πιὰ

τῶν φίλων ὃ μὲν ἱμάτιον ὁ “δὲ προῦ χεφάλαιον ὁ ὁ δὲ
Loan p4rw ae

ὅ τι ἕκαστος ἔτυχεν ὁ 2 ney εἰς ay ἐκείνου ταφή Vv.
Ἴνν-

5,
Ὑ:9 καὶ exouTes μὲν ἑπτακοσίας ἀσπί 4 TOV mpere-

“

᾿
«
Ἀ
νΝ

i

2

ay} “SS ἔχοντες δὲ ᾿εὐόμο, "Sk χρυσίον, τοσοῦτον,

χαχκὸν δὲ καὶ κόσμον καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ ἱμάτια Ye

ben ὅσα β θεσώποτε, ᾧοντο ἀτήσσααὶ y καὶ

4 » 0
ἀνδράποδα εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, ὧν. τὰ μὲν Beater

ἔλαβον, τὰ δὲ λομπὰ εἰς τὸ δημόσιον ἀπέδοσαν

εἰς τοσαύτην ἀπληστιᾶν | καὶ αἰσχροκε εἰαν ἀφ
ἔων

KOVTO καὶ τοῦ τρόπου τοῦ αὑτῶν ἀπόδειξιν ἐποιή-

σαντο Phd τῆς γὰρ ᾿ολεμάβχου i fe ies * Χρυσοῦς

AA &
“a

2.»
ἑλικτῆρας, ov3 ἐχουσὰ erivpnes OTE TO Ἐρωτὸν
2b"

ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Μηλόβιος, ἐκ τῶν ὥτων

fw

ov

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 13
@ yak y at G and ᾿- ἊΨ μή
5 4 A > A A A > δ ,΄ ΄
ἐξεθλέγο, poset οὐδὲ κατὰ TO ἐλάχιστον μέρος τῆς 20
οὐσίας ἐλ wap αὐτῶν ἐτυγχάνομεν. ἀλλ᾽ οὕτως

εἰς ἡρδῃκδ διὰ τὰ χρήματα ἐξημά wee bets ὥσπερ οὐκ
ἂν ἕτεροι μ ιἐγάλων. ἀδικημάτι ὀργὴν ἔχοντες, οὐ

Mint &

τούτων ἀξίους YE. ὄντας TH πόλει, ἀλλὰ, πάσας τὰς

ὌΝ 3 (ete ees

χορηγίας χόρηγήφαντας, πολλὰς δ᾽ εἰσφορὰς εἰσει ει T χε
ξγκῦντας, Κοσμίους, δ᾽ ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παρέχοντας
ἐχθρὸν δ᾽

“VA th ur
Kal πᾶμ TO ,τῤοσταττόμενον ποιοῦντας,
οὐδένα ἘΠ tee κτημένους, πολλοὺς δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἐ ἐκ, τῶν

SAG ες Ἄλλα

πολεμίων λυσαμένους"
μ. ον αμέ υς" τοιούτων ἠξίωσαν ovX Cin:

ν᾽

ὁμοίοις τας ὥσπερ αὐτοὶ ἐπολϊτεὔοντο.. ἐν ae
οὗτοι γ᾽ ὰρ 7 πολλοὺς μὲν τῶν gone eis T ops. pohe- phe
pious Peace πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἀδίκως ἀποιζτεΐναντες.

ἀτάφους ἐποίησαν, ὺς δ᾽ "ἐπιτίμους ὄντας >t
ἀτίμους τῆς Sass Se eS <n δὲ θυγα- προ
τέράς. μελλούσας φηγδίδοσθαι ἐκώλυσαν. Καὶ εἰς 22
τοσοῦτόν εἰσι τόλμης ἀφιγμένοι ὥσθ᾽ ἥκουσιν

amon όμενοι, - καὶ
οὐδ᾽ argh ἄργασ ς
μην ἂν αὐτοὺς a ἰχηθῇ λέγειν" Me “γὰρ, ἂν καὶ

ἐμοὶ τούτου τἀγαθοῦ οὐκ ἐλάχιστον REPOS: νῦν 23

δὲ οὔτε πρὸς τὴν πόλιν αὐτοῖς τοιαῦτα ὑπάρχει
¥ Ν > / Ν > Ν 4 9 ‘
οὔτε πρὸς ἐμέ: τὸν ἀδελφὸν yap μου, ὥσπερ καὶ
πρότερον εἶπον, “Ἐρατοσθένης. ἀπέκτεινεν, οὔτε
αὐτὸς ἰδίᾳ ἀδικούμενος οὔτε εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὁρῶν .."
nh Omer 3
ἐξαμαρτάνοντα, ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ wapavople | 'προθύ-
pes ἐξυπηρετῶν. ἀναβιβασάμενος δ᾽ αὐτὸν βού- 24

λομαι ἐρέσθαι, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί. τοιαύτην γὰρ

.

μ τὶ

14

25

26

τ

27

XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥ͂Σ.

7 », Ὡς X it ’, 5 ’ Ν Ν
satis “Χῶ * ἔπι μὲν TH τούτου gina και ἘΣ
βπέρὴν περὶ τούτου διαλέγεσθαι, ἀσεβὲς εἶναι νομί-

R fone ἐπὶ δὲ τῇ, τούτου βλάβη καὶ PRs αὐτὸν τοῦτον

BA. hs igi » νυ»
ὅσιον καὶ εὐσεβές. ay ava 7) υ οὖν μοι καὶ ἀπόκρι-

ναι, ὅ τι ἄν σε ἐρωτῶ.
᾿Απήγαγες Πολέμαρχον ἢ ov; Τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρ-
wr MOM ¢ Gen
χύστων προσταχθέντα δεδιὼς ἐποίου. "Hobe ὃ
συν
ἐν τῷ Boerne ὅτε ob ἐδ ἐγίϑοντος περὶ “
ἡμῶν; Vel ale exe σύνηγόρευες τοῖς Kehevou-

σιν ἀπόκτειναι ἢ ἀντέλεγες ; ᾿Αντέλεγον. Mier
μὴ a, ; RL wk ἀποθάνητε. eet
νος mpas ἄδικα πάσχειν ἢ δίκαια; ἴἔλδικα. οὐ

Εἶτ᾽, ὦ σχετλιώτατε πάντων, ἀντένεψες μὲν ἵνα
σώσειας, ἀκρίδος ὁ δὲ ἵνα ἀποκτείναις ; καὶ
ὅτε μὲν͵ τὸ πλῆθος ἦν ὑμῶν κύριον. τῆς σώτηρζας
τῆς ἡμετέρας, ἀντιλέγειν φὴς τοῖς βούλόβοναν
a nfokeeta, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐπὶ σοὶ μόνῳ. 8 en
Kal σῶσαι soAcucoxee καὶ μή, εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον

es; εἶθ᾽ ὅτι μέν, ὡς φής, ἀντειπὼν οὐδὲν
ee ἀξιοῖς χρηστὸς νομίζεσθαι, ὅτι δὲ συλ-
λαβὼν ἀπέκτεινας, οὐκ οἴει ἐμοὶ καὶ τουτοισὶ δοῦ- \/
ναι δίξην ; tage

Kai μὴν οὐδὲ τοῦτο εἰκὸς αὐτῷ πιστεύειν, εἴπερ.
ἀληθῆ λέγει φάσκων ἀντειπεῖν, ὡς αὐτῷ προστα

Gi ι, ere AK,
ετάχθη. ov yap δή που ἐν Tot
eran. yap δή ἐν τοῖς μετοίκοις πίστοι.
Tap αὐτοῦ ὁλάμβανονι ει, ἐπεί τοι τῷ ἧττον εἰκὸς |
ἦν MPO ONE ἤναι: ἢ δονρς ἀυτευνών γε ἐτύγχανε

καὶ [ἐδαντίαν γνώμην ἀποδεδειγμένος ; τίνα γὰρ

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 15
re]

εἰκὸς 1 ἧττον ταῦτα ὑπηρετῆσαι ἢ τὸν ἀντει-
πόντα οἷς ἐκεῖνοι ἐβούλοντο 7 αχθῆναι ; ; "Ere δὲ 28. -τ
τοῖς ue ἄλλοις ᾿Αθηναίους ari Μοὶ ᾿δοκεῖ mpd
φασις εἶναι τῶν i ad aa εἰς TOUS τριάκοντα
ὀπρβέρειν τὴν αἰτίαν - αὐτοὺς δὲ τοὺς ate: oe
av iS/.Ebas αὐτοὺς ἀναφέρωσι," ΓΒ ὑμᾶς εἰκὸς ᾿

ἔχεσθαι ; εἰ qt γάρ τις ἦν ἐν τῇ πόλει 29.

ὉΝ
ἀρχὴ ἰσχυροτέρα αὐτῆς, ὑφ᾽ ἧς αὐτ iGascorenty
Tero πορὲ τὸ δίκαιον ἀνθρώπους ἀπὸ ι, ἴσως
ἂν etx εἰκότως αὐτῷ συγγνώμην εἴχετε" xt δὲ ὶ παρὰ
Tov πότε καὶ ried Be ἢ δίκην, εἴπερ τω τοῖς Je
τριάκοντα λέγειν. ὅ ὅτι τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντ; προσ-᾿
ταχθέντα ἐποίουν; Καὶ μὲν δὴ οὐκ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 30
> > 5» “ ε bite 4 52> Ν ‘ 4
ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ σάζειν τε αὐτὸν καὶ τὰ τούτοις
ἐψηφισμένα παρόν, oy Mal ὼν ἀπήγαγεν; if ὑμεῖς
᾿δὲ πάντες ὀργίι cobe, ὅσοι εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ἦλθο ν τὰς
ὑμετέρας ζήτησιν εἶν βοιούμενοι ἢ ἣ ὑμῶν ἢ τῶν ὑμετέ-
pov τινός. Καίτοι αἰ, κἰ χρὴ τοῖς διὰ τὴν ἑαυτῶν σω- 3:

τηρίαν eee ᾿ἀπολέ . συγγνώμην ἔχειν, ἐκεί-
νοις ἂν δικαιότε ov ieee pa γὰρ
πεμφθεῖσι μὴ ἐ ΕΥ̓ ΚΝ καὶ καταλαβοῦσι» ἐξάρ οἷς
; ὑ
γοιέφθαι. τῷ δὲ᾽ Ἐρατοσθ aes ἐξῆν εἴπει» ὅτι οὐκ
εἶ

aga σεν, ἔπειτα. ὅτι οὐκ ταῦτα γὰρ οὔτ᾽
¥ pAw haw

OV οὔτε aoavor . εἶ εν», € δ᾽ ume τῶν
Χο ὅσης μὴ I

ἐχ pay amen ides οἷόν ἔν: εἶναι ἐξελεγχθῆναι. |
χρὴν δέσε, ὦ ‘EpardaGeves, εἴπερ ἦσθα χρηστός, 32
πρλὴ μᾶλλον τοῖς δῦναι ἀδίκως ἀποθάᾶνεῖσθαι

A we teerv

μηνυτὴν γενέσθαι ἢ τοὺς ἀδίκως ἀπολουμένους

16 XII. KATA EPATOSOENOYS.
MOV (Aw
συλλαμβάνειν. νῦν δέ σου τὰ ἔργα ᾧ ἐρὰ(γεγέ-

νηται ὀνχ ὡς ἀνιωμένου ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἡ ἀμεμαν τοῖς

ε

ιγνομένοις, ὥστε τούσδε ἐκ τῶν ἔργων αλ-

33 yy ‘apna ee PY χρὴ hy <r
λον ἢ ἐκ τῶν a ai τὴν ψῆ ον έρ ιν, ἃ ἴσασι
γεγενημένα τῶν τότε λεγομένων τεκμήρια λαμβά-

5. ι
νοντας, ἐπειδὴ μάρτυβας “περὶ αὐτῶν οὗχ, οἷόν τε
magne xer dar You ep μόνον ἡμῖν παβεῖνοι οὐκ
Cag
ἐξῆν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ παρ Pe αὑτοῖς εἶναι, ὥστ᾽ ἐπὶ τούτοις
ς-- AU ἐν x

ἐστὶ πάντα τὰ κακὰ εἰργασμένδις τὴν πόλιν πάντα

34 τἀγᾳθὰ περὶ αὑτῶν -λέγειν. τοῦτο ΟΣ ΤΩ: οὐ
᾿φεύγω, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμολογῶ σοι, εἰ βούλει, ἀντειπεῖψ.

φ γάλα...
ϑαυμάζω δὲ τί ἄν ποτε ἐποίησας συνειπών, ὁπότε
᾿ ἀντειπεῖν φάσκων ἀπέκτεινας Πολέμαρχον. φέρε
δή, τί ἂν εἰ καὶ ἀδελφοὶ ὄντες ἐτύχετε αὐτοῦ ἢ καὶ
A , > »
υἱεῖς; ἀπεψηφίσασθε; δεῖ γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικα-

σύ

σταί, Ἐρατοσθένην δυοῖν θάτερον ἀποδεῖξαι, ἢ ἢ ὡς
οὐκ ἀπήγ γεν αὐτόν, ἢ ὡς δικαίως τοῦτ᾽ es
οὗτος δὲ ὁμολό γῆκεν, Fa NEY ὦ ὥστε ῥᾳ:
δίαν ὑμῖν τὴν διαψήφισιν περὶ αὑτοῦ πεποίη ε."
35 Καὶ μὲν δὴ πολλοὶ καὶ τῶν ἀστῶν καὶ τῶν ξένῳ» “ον
ἥκουσιν εἰσόμενοι τίνα γνώμην περὶ τούτων ἕξετε.
ὧν οἱ μὲν ὑμέτεροι ὄντες πολῖται μα ὄντες ἀπίασιν
ὅτι ἢ δίκην ᾿δϑουσὸ ὦ ὧν ἂν ἐ αμάρτωσιν, ἣ apa
aVTES rage ὧν ἐφίεν αι τύραννοι τῆς πόλεως ἔσον-

sus a AAs tae

Tal, δυστυχήσαντες δὲ TO ἴσον ὑμῖν ἕξουσιν" ὅσοι

δὲ ξένοι ἐπιδημοῦσιν, εἴσονται πότερον ἀδίκως τοὺς
= λ

τριάκοντα ἐκκηρύττουσιν ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ἢ δικαίως.

εἰ γὰρ δὴ αὐτοὶ οἱ κακῶς πεπονθότες λαβόντες

dA

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 17
j Pores, joes has Th ew
i cin ἢ που σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἡγήσονται πεέρίδρι.
yous ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν τιβορούμένόυς. / οὐκ οὖν δεινὸν “δ
εἰ τοὺς μὲν, τρρατηγούς, οἱ ἐνίκων ναυμαχοῦντες,
ὅτε διὰ χειμῶνα οὐχ, οἷοί 7 ἐφασαν vas TO, t
ἐκ . τῆς nS) «θαλάττης ἀνελέσθαι, θάνάτῳ͵ ἐζημιώφατεν.
ἡγούμενοι χρῆναι τῇ τῶν rebuedieau ἀρετῇ παρ
ἐκείνων δίκην λαβεῖν, RS he dé, οἱ ieee a, μὲν
ὄντες καθ᾽ ὅσον ἐδύναντο ἐποίησαν. ἡττηθῆναι i
ναυμαχοῦντας, ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστητ᾽
σαν, ὅμο es yi ἑκόντ. πολλοὺς τῶν πολιτῶν
ἀκρίτους ἀποκτιννύναι, οὐκ ἄρα χρὴ αὐτοὺς καὶ Le
"τοὺς παῖδας ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐσχάταις τρῶν KONG "τ
ἵεσθαι; τ
Ἔγὼ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες, δι agra, ngewe ἱκανὰ 37
εἶναι τὰ κατηγορημένα ᾿ μέχρι γὰρ τούτου νομίζω
χρῆναι κατηγορεῖν ἕως ἂν θανάτου δόξῃ τῷ; φεύ-
γοντι ἄξια εἰργάφθαι ., ταύτην ve. ἐσχάτην δίκην
δυνάμεθα παρ᾽ αὐτῶν λαβεῖν. ὥστ᾽ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅ τι
δεῖ πολλὰ κατηγορεῖν τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν, οἱ οὐδ᾽
ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου τῶν Πεπβαγμένων δὶς ἀποθα-
VOVTES Shep δοῦναι δύναιντ᾽ av. οὐ γὰρ δὴ οὐδὲ 38
τοῦτο αὐτῷ προσήκει ποιῆσαι, ὅπερ ἐν τῇδε τῇ
πόλει Raion ἐν" ἐστί, πρὸς μὲν τὰ κατηγορημένα, 7}
μηδὲν ἀπολογεῖσθαι, περὶ δὲ σφῶν αὐτῶν ἕτερα.
λέγοντες ἐνίοτε ἐξαπατῶσιν, ὑμῖν ἀποδεικνύντες ὡς
στρατιῶται ἀγαθοί εἰσιν, 7) ὡς πολλὰς τῶν πολε-
μίων ναῦς ἔλαβον τριηραρχήσαντες, ἢ πόλεις πο-
λεμίας οὔσας φίλας ἐποίησαν i eit κελεύετε αὐτὸν 39

2

18

40

41

42

ΔΑ

43

XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.

fn vrk 4 pA (ASK

ἀποδεῖξαι 6 O7TOU τοσούτους πον poner ἀπέκτει-

ναν ὅσους τῶν πολιτῶν, ἢ ναὺυς οπου τοσαύτας
(ny

ἔλαβον ὅσας αὐτοὶ πὰρέδοσαν, ἢ πόλιν nv TWO
rw Pe

νων hw OS U)4 A
Beet προσεκτήσαντο οἵαν τὴν ὑ ετέραν κατε-

᾿δουλώσαντο. ἀλλὰ γὰρ ὅπλα τῶν Rl aggre Bs ἐσκύ-
eas μιν"
λευσαν τοσαῦτα ὅσα τεῦ: ὑμῶν ἀφεί τυ ἀλλὰ

τείχη τοιαῦτα then ota τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἀτρὲ ΡΝ dry

σκαψαν; res Kal τὰ weeny. ἜΤΗ ρον.
ρια es, καὶ ὑμῖν ἐδηλοσαν ὅτι οὐδὲ τὸν
Ἱεειραιᾶ Νακεδαιμονίων εαἰἀλοῤῤνούφνον ν᾿ frpperrons
ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἑαυτοῖς THY ἀρχὴν οὕτω βέβαιοτέραν ἐ ἐνό-
μιζον εἶναι.

Πολλάκις οὖν ἐθαύμασ LT τῆς 7 τόλμης TOV λεγόν-
των ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν, “πλὴν. ὅταν ἐν pe ὅτι. τῶν
αὐτῶν ἐστιν αὐτούς avrg τὰ κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι "
καὶ τοὺς τ ιούτους ht ὧν «οὐ Bice νῦν πρῶτον,

. th
yA A tLe τὸ
“TO jf

ἱετέρῳ πλήθει τὰ δίαρμα α ἔπραξεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ εὐ My
ae

Chew Ὁ 2)
ἐπὶ τῶν, Πετρακοσίων ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ὁ va.
χίαν καθιστὰς. Heges ἐξ Ἕλλησσιθον Tpiy- |

papxos, κἀταλίπὼν gE ναῦν, μετὰ ᾿Ιατροκλέους
Anak

καὶ «ἑτέρων, ὧν τὰ, ὁν nat ee οὐδὲν δέομαι λέγειν.

οκρατίαν εἶναι ἔπραττε. καὶ τούτων μάρτυρας
ὑμῖν παρέξομαι. : ἫΝ

j

MAPTYPES.

Tov μὲν τοίνυν μεταξὺ βίου αὐτοῦ παρήσω'
ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ ναυμαχία καὶ ἡ συμφορὰ τῇ πόλει

bud evos δὲ δεῦρο αντία τοῖς βουλομέν
ὅτι τὰν δέν μέρας

ψ. Bil
es

ἘῪ

"ἢ

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 19
her ng Ao (tee
4 τ
Εγένετο, δημοκρατίας δεούσης, ἃ ν τῆς; στάσεως
ἦρξαν, eat ἄνδρες ἔφοροι. κατέσ σαν ὑπὸ τῶν
καλουμένὰν ἑταίρων, συναγωγεῖς ee σῶν πολιτῶν, fe

ε ΚΡ

ἄρχοντες € τῶν Po A ἐναντία δὲ τῷ ier
τέρῳ πλήθει. πράττοντες" ὧν Ἐρατοσθένης καὶ
Κριτίας ἦσαν. οὗτοι δὲ φυλάρχαυς τᾷ ἐπὶ ὶ τὰς 44
φυλακὰς κ πόστυσαν, καὶ ὅ τι δέοι χειβοτόνεισθαι
καὶ ὀὕστινας. χρείη ἄρχειν. ΡΥ ῥέεν καὶ εἴ τι
ἄλλο πράττειν βούλοιντο, κα κύριοι ἦσαν * οὕτως οὐχ
ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων μόνον. ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπὸ τούτων
πολιτῶν ὄντων ἐπεββυκούδοϑε ὅπω Fee ἀγαβὸν, δεν
μηδὲν wn ψηφισαισ ες Ὁ πολλῶν τε ἐνδεεῖς ἔσεσθε.
τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ἠπίσταντο, ὅτι ἄλλως μὲν pi οἷοί 45

t

TE peer dh Seba κακῶς δὲ i She ed
~ Tea εις L \

“δυνήσονται Ξ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἡγοῦντο TOV πἰὰρόντων' κὰ- αν
κῶν ἐπιθυμοῦντας ἀταλχάγῆναι ἘΠΕ τῶν μελλόνξ
των οὐκ ἐνθυμήσεσθαι. ὡς τοίνυν τῶν a =
ἐγένετο, μάρτυρας aed io, gees ov TOUS τότε"
ipinpenrortas: (ov eh ἂν δυναίμην), ἀλλὰ perches prey

ΡΥ,
αὐτοῦ "Ep Ὁ pee ἀκούσαντας. καίτοι εἰ ἐσω- 47 δε

Apr UM “Y

povouv ede: ουν ἂν αὐτῶν, καὶ τοὺς διδα-

sag MHA One. ΤΌ ΕΙΣ
ΗΝ υς τῶν σφετέρων ἀβμαρτημόλων σφόδ p “ἂν
BE. καὶ τοὺς ὅρκους, εἰ CORED, οὐκ ἂν *
ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς τῶν πολιτῶν κακοῖς πὶ ra suelo, an *
én δὲ τοῖς τὴς πόλεως ἀγαθοῖς ῥᾳδίωξ παρέβαι:
γον. πρὸς μὲν οὖν τούτους τοσαῦτα λέ «λέγω, τοὺς δὲ
μάρτυράς μοι κάλει. Καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε.

peed » =

MAPTYPES. /
Ve

20 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.

f put AM A

Ν Ν -“
48 Τῶν μὲν Hope ὕρων ἀκηκβαῇ ε. τὸ δὲ Saks yas ἐμ
εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν καταστὰς ἀγαθὸν μὲν οὐδενὸς ΜΕΝ :

oxev, ἄλλων δὲ πολλῶν. καίτοι εἴπεῃ ἦν, ἀκὴρ
τ σθόν, ἐχρῆν. ἂν πρῶτ TOY μὲν μὴ Φαρανθμώς ἁ τὰ
χειν, ἔπειτα τῇ βουχῇ μηνυτὴν Ry hes Hep TOV
Sey Oe ἁπασῶν, OTL at οβς Sera | Βάτρα-
χος καὶ Αἰσχυλίδης οὐ τἀληθῆ | μηνύουσιν, ἀλλὰ
ia ὑπὸ τῶν Ce als πλασθῶτα εἰσαγγέλλουσι,
49 συγκείμενα ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν πολίων Ὑ καὶ μὲν
δή, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅσοι κακόθοι ἦσαν τῷ Uae
τέρῳ skate οὐδὲν ἔλαττον εἶχον σιωπῶντες ἕτε-
fot γὰρ hg gy οἱ heyonnes καὶ πράττοντες ὧν Ὅν
οἷόν τ᾽ ἣ» helo κακὰ γενέσθαι τῇ πόλει. ὁπόσοι
“δ᾽ εὖνοί parry νοις εἶναι, πῶς οὐκ ἐνταῦθα ἔδειξαν, αὐὖ-
τοί τε τὰ Boots λέγοντες Kat τοὺς ἐξαμαρτά-
νοντας Peer perovees ὁ Tne ure eee
50 Ἴσως δ᾽ ἂν ἔχοι βάν» ὅτι ἐδεδοίκει, καὶ Hes

uy A
τοῦτο ἐνίοις ἱκανὸν ἔσται. ὅπως τοίνυν whi
AA ρ
σεται ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τοῖς peers ἃ ἐνα iia
i εἰ δὲ μή, ἐνταυθοῖ δῆλος ὃ ἔσται ὅτι he TE αὐτῷ
Avo

ee’ nperke, καὶ ὦ AEN ἐδ ἐδύνατο ὥστε ἐναντιούμενος
μηδὲν κακὸν παθεῖν ὑπ᾿ ἀἀὐτῶν, χρῆν. δ᾽ αὐτὸν
ὑπὲρ 77s ὑμετέρας σωτηρίάς ταύτην τὴν ΤΡᾺ υ-
μίαν ἔχειν, ἀλλὰ μὴ ὑπὲρ Θηραμένους, ὃς εἰς ὑμᾶς
51 πολλὰ ἐξήμαρτεν. YaAN οὗτος τὴν μὲν “πόλιν

ah TT > ‘ > ε ΄ > ‘
ἐχθρὰν ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι, τοὺς δ᾽ ὑμετέρους ἐχθροὺς

’ ε > / Lal > Ν a ΄
φίλους, ὡς ἀμφότερα ταῦτα ἐγὼ πολλοῖς τεκμηρί-

’ Ν ‘ Ν > / Ν
ols παραστήσω, καὶ τὰς πρὸς ἀλλήλους διαφορὰς

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

5 ε A e “A 5 5 ε A ε “ 4 ε ’
οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτῶν γιγνομένας, ὅὃπό-
τεροι ταῦτα πράξουσι καὶ τῆς πόλεως ἄρξουσι.
εἰ γὰρ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδικουμένων ἐστασίαζον, ποῦ
κάλλιον ἂν ἣν ἀνδρὶ ἄρχοντι, ἣ Θρασυβούλου Φυ-
λὴν κατειληφότος, τότ᾽ ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν αὑτοῦ

" ε ἄς π᾿ ΄, ΄ Δ ἮΝ
εὔνοιαν ; ὁ δ᾽ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπαγγείλασθαί τι 7 πρᾶ-

» A A A 5 A Led > A A “~
Ear ἀγαθὸν πρὸς τοὺς ἐπὶ Φυλῇ, ἐλθὼν μετὰ τῶν
, 5 Lad » We: | al ,
συναρχόντων εἰς Σαλαμῖνα Kat Ἐλευσῖνάδε τρια-
κοσίους τῶν πολιτῶν ἀπήγαγεν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτή-
A “~ , 5 »“ ε 4 7
ριον, καὶ μιᾷ ψήφῳ αὐτῶν ἁπάντων θάνατον Kate
’ 5 ‘ \ > Ν ΠΣ Ἀ
ψηφίσατο. ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ ἤλθομεν καὶ
ai ταραχαὶ γεγενημέναι ἦσαν καὶ περὶ τῶν διαλλα-

“ ε "4 > rs ἈΝ ε 4 > 4
γῶν ot λόγοι ἐγίνοντο, πολλὰς ἑκάτεροι ἐλπίδας

»¥ Ν 5 4 »Ἢ ε 5 7 5 ’
εἰχομεν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔσεσθαι ὡς ἀμφότεροι ἐδεί-
Eapev. οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἐκ Πειραιῶς κρείττους ὄντες

2 5» A 5 al ε Ν > ἈΝ 3᾿ 5 ,
εἴασαν αὐτοὺς ἀπελθεῖν - οἱ δὲ εἰς TO ἄστυ ἐλθόν-
τες τοὺς μὲν τριάκοντα ἐξέβαλον πλὴν Φείδωνος

Ἀ» ,ὕ » Ν 4 5 ’ > ,
καὶ ᾽᾿Ἐρατοσθένους, ἄρχοντας δὲ τοὺς ἐκείνοις ἐχθέ
στους εἵλοντο, ἡγούμενοι δικαίως ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν αὐ-
τῶν τούς τε τριάκοντα μισεῖσθαι καὶ τοὺς ἐν
Πειραιεῖ φιλεῖσθαι. γ΄ τούτων τοίνυν Φείδων ὁ τῶν
τριάκοντα γενόμενος καὶ ἹἹπποκλῆς καὶ ᾿Επιχάρης
ὁ Λαμπτρεὺς καὶ ἕτεροι οἱ δοκοῦντες εἶναι ἐναντιώ-
“ ~ Ν ’ Ν “59 ’, ε ’,ὔ
τατοι Χαρικλεῖ καὶ Κριτίᾳ καὶ τῇ ἐκείνων ἑταιρείᾳ,

ἐπειδὴ αὐτοὶ εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστησαν, πολὺ μεί-
ζω στάσιν καὶ πόλεμον ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ τοῖς
5 » > 4 es ‘\ A > 4
ἐξ ἄστεος ἐποίησαν - οἷς καὶ φανερῶς ἐπεδείξαντο
ν 5» ε A ~ > “ 5 Ψψ' δ A “a 5 ’
ὅτι οὐχ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐν Πειραιεῖ οὐδ᾽ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδίκως

21

52

54

55

56

22 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.

5 ’ tL ’ 50.» ε “ 3 ‘
ἀπολλυμένων ἐστασίαζον, οὐδ᾽ οἱ τεθνεῶτες αὐτοὺς
ἐλύπουν, οὐδ᾽ οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποθανεῖσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ
57 μεῖζον δυνάμενοι καὶ θᾶσσον πλουτοῦντες. λα-
Υ Ἦν Ν 3 Ἂς Χ Ν , > ’,
βόντες γὰρ τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἀμφοτέροις
ἐπολέμουν, τοῖς τε τριάκοντα πάντα κακὰ εἰργα-
σμένοις καὶ ὑμῖν πάντα κακὰ πεπονθόσι. καίτοι
A a lal > 4 > Ν > Pre 50
τοῦτο πᾶσι δῆλον ἦν, ὅτι εἰ μὲν ἐκεῖνοι ἀδίκως
» ε a , 4. Qo ὁ a 207 ε ,
ἔφευγον, ὑμεῖς δικαίως, εἰ δ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἀδίκως, οἱ τριά-
’ 5» ‘ Ἀ δι Ὁ » ψ
κοντα δικαίως: οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἑτέρων ἔργων αἰτίαν
λαβόντες ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἐξέπεσον, ἀλλὰ τούτων.
58 ὥστε σφόδρα χρὴ ὀργίζεσθαι, ὅτι Φείδων αἱρεθεὶς
“ ~ ἀν »
ὑμᾶς διαλλάξαι Kal καταγαγεῖν, τῶν αὐτῶν ἔργων
5 , Lal ἈΝ il > a“ ’ Ν \
Ἐρατοσθένει μετεῖχε καὶ TH αὐτῇ γνώμῃ τοὺς μὲν
΄σ an “ - ΩΣ >
κρείττους αὑτῶν Ov ὑμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν ἕτοιμος ἦν,
ec; = Ὄπ 397 7 > > / > “
ὑμῖν δὲ ἀδίκως φεύγουσιν οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀποδοῦναι
τὴν πόλιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλθὼν εἰς Λακεδαίμονα ἔπειθεν αὐ-
Ν
τοὺς στρατεύεσθαι, διαβάλλων ὅτι Βοιωτῶν ἡ πόλις
¥ Acar , ao » , ,
ἔσται, Kat ἄλλα λέγων οἷς wero πείσειν μάλιστα.
, Ν - ~ lal
59 ov δυνάμενος δὲ τούτων τυχεῖν, εἴτε Kal τῶν ἱερῶν
» δὰ ¥ » Ν » lal > lA
ἐμποδὼν ὄντων εἴτε Kal αὐτῶν ov βουλομένων,
ε Ν , > , ν » 3 ΄
ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἐδανείσατο, ἵνα ἔχοι ἐπικούρους
Cal ‘ , » > ,
μισθοῦσθαι. | καὶ Λύσανδρον ἄρχοντα ἠτήσατο,
> 4 ~
εὐνούστατον μὲν ὄντα TH ὀλιγαρχίᾳ, κακονούστα-
δὲ ~ / “~ δὲ / Ἁ 5
τον δὲ τῇ πόλει, μισοῦντα δὲ μάλιστα τοὺς «ἐν
60 Πειραιεῖ. μισθωσάμενοι δὲ πάντας ἀνθρώπους
} Po ee 4 A / \ ’ > ’ Ν
ἐπ᾿ ὀλέθρῳ τῆς πόλεως, καὶ πόλεις ἐπάγοντες, καὶ
τελευτῶντες Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τῶν συμμάχων
ὁπόσους ἐδύναντο πεῖσαι, οὐ διαλλάξαι ἀλλ᾽ ἀπο-

AIF. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 23

, Ud Ν / > Ν > »
λέσαι παρεσκευάζοντο τὴν πόλιν εἰ μὴ SV ἄνδρας
> , Shige tel ΄ x A 9 A
ἀγαθούς, οἷς ὑμεῖς δηλώσατε παρὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν.

’ / 9 Ν » / 4 > rs
δίκην λαβόντες, ὅτι Kal ἐκείνοις χάριν ἀποδώσετε.

Be A ἘΠῚ, Ν Ν > , Ν 039 ὦ 5
ταῦτα δὲ ἐπίστασθε μὲν καὶ αὐτοί, καὶ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι οὐ 61
δεῖ μάρτυρας παρασχέσθαι. ὅμως δέ: ἐγώ τε

Ν x > , ε ~ > > ee | ν ε
γὰρ δέομαι ἀναπαύσασθαι, ὑμῶν τ᾽ ἐνίοις ἥδιον ὡς

πλείστων τοὺς αὐτοὺς λόγους ἀκούειν.
ΜΑΡΤΎΡΕΣ.

Ν Ν ἈΝ
Φέρε δὴ καὶ περὶ Θηραμένους ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι 62
ὃ ἊΣ ΄, ὃ ὃ ΄ δέ Pe κα 3 A
ia βραχυτάτων διδάξω. δέομαι δ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀκοῦσαι
> A lal “
ὑπέρ T ἐμαυτοῦ καὶ τῆς πόλεως. καὶ μηδενὶ τοῦτο
παραστῇ, ὡς ᾿Ερατοσθένους κινδυνεύοντος Θηρα-
μένους κατηγορῶ" πυνθάνομαι γὰρ ταῦτα ἀπολο-
΄ as 4 > ΄ , να Ν A
γήσεσθαι αὐτόν, ὅτι ἐκείνῳ φίλος Hv καὶ τῶν
> ~ » ἴω 4 , > + 5 Ν
αὐτῶν ἔργων μετεῖχε. καίτοι σφόδρ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸν 63
οἶμαι μετὰ Θεμιστοκλέους πολιτευόμενον προσποι-
Ν [4
εἶσθαι πράττειν ὅπως οἰκοδομηθήσεται τὰ τείχη,
Ld
ὁπότε Kal μετὰ Θηραμένους ὅπως καθαιρεθήσεται.
-“ A ε
οὐ γάρ μοι δοκοῦσιν ἴσου ἄξιοι γεγενῆσθαι: ὃ
5 / >
μὲν yap Λακεδαιμονίων ἀκόντων φκοδόμησεν αὐ-
τά, οὗτος δὲ τοὺς πολίτας ἐξαπατήσας καθεῖλε. ~~
r YER Ty oe PR
περιέστηκεν οὖν TH πόλει τοὐναντίον ἢ ὡς εἰκὸς 64
τς ¥ \ Ν Ν Ν ΄ Ν ΄,
ἣν. ἄξιον μὲν γὰρ καὶ τοὺς φίλους τοὺς Θηραμέ-
’
νους προσαπολωλέναι, πλὴν εἴ τις ἐτύγχανεν ἐκεί-
lal “ 3
νῳ τἀναντία πράττων: νῦν δὲ ὁρῶ τάς τε ἀπο-
λογίας εἰς ἐκεῖνον ἀναφερομένας, τοὺς T ἐκείνῳ

24 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.

συνόντας τιμᾶσθαι πειρωμένους, ὥσπερ πολλῶν
> a > 7 2\\>? > , A τ
ἀγαθῶν αἰτίου ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μεγάλων κακῶν γεγενημέ-

65 vov. ὃς πρῶτον μὲν τῆς προτέρας ὀλιγαρχίας
αἰτιώτατος ἐγένετο, πείσας ὑμᾶς τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν

, » ε / ee Ν Ν
τετρακοσίων πολιτείαν ἑλέσθαι. καὶ ὁ μὲν πατὴρ
αὐτοῦ τῶν προβούλων ὧν ταῦτ᾽ ἔπραττεν, αὐτὸς
δὲ δοκῶν εὐνούστατος εἶναι τοῖς πράγμασι στρα-

86 as ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἠρέθη. καὶ ἕως μὲν ἐτιμᾶτο,
πιστὸν ἑαυτὸν παρεῖχεν" ἐπειδὴ δὲ Πείσανδρον
μὲν καὶ Κάλλαισχρον καὶ ἑτέρους ἑώρα προτέρους
αὑτοῦ γινομένους, τὸ δὲ ὑμέτερον πλῆθος οὐκέτι

’, Ps 5 ἴω 43 ¥ ,
βουλόμενον τούτων ἀκροᾶσθαι, τότ᾽ ἤδη διά τε
Ν Ν > / 4 Ἁ Ν 3 ε ~~ ,
‘Tov πρὸς ἐκείνους φθόνον καὶ τὸ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν δέος
4 lal > 4 » ’,
67 μετέσχε τῶν Ἀριστοκράτους ἐργων. γβουλόμενος
Ν τὴν ΄ ᾽,ὔ “ Ν > >
δὲ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πλήθει δοκεῖν πιστὸς εἶναι ᾽Αντι-
“A Ge ΄ / + ε a
φῶντα καὶ ᾿Αρχεπτόλεμον φιλτάτους ὄντας αὑτῷ
κατηγορῶν ἀπέκτεινεν, εἰς τοσοῦτον δὲ κακίας ἣλ-
θεν, ὥστε ἅμα μὲν διὰ τὴν πρὸς ἐκείνους πίστιν
ε ἴω ’ὔ x Ν ‘ Ν ε -“ ‘
ὑμᾶς κατεδουλώσατο, διὰ δὲ τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοὺς
’ > ’ , Ἀ Ν ~ /

68 φίλους ἀπώλεσε. "τιμώμενος δὲ καὶ TOV μεγίστων
ἀξιόύμενος, αὐτὸς" ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν τὴν πό-
λιν αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσε, ῥάσκρν. πρᾶγμα εὑρηκέναι
μέγα καὶ πολλοῦ ἄξιον. ὑπέσχετο δὲ εἰρήνην
ποιήσειν μήτε ὅμηρα δοὺς μήτε τὰ τείχη καθελὼν
μήτε τὰς ναῦς παραδούς ταῦτα δὲ εἰπεῖν μὲν οὐ-

69 devi ἠθέλησεν, ἐκέλευσε δὲ αὑτῷ πιστεύειν. ὑμεῖς

δὰ ae ᾽ A 4 ‘ a >
δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πραττούσης μὲν τῆς ἐν
᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ βουλῆς σωτήρια, ἀντιλεγόντων δὲ
ρείῳ πάγς ἧς σωτήρια, γόντων δὲ

a

\

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

σ΄
» Ε
πολλῶν Θηραμένει, εἰδότες δὲ ὅτι οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι av-
θρωποι τῶν πολεμίων ἕνεκεν τἀπόρρητα ποιοῦνται,
> S > > lal ε “ / > > ΄
ἐκεῖνος δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς αὑτοῦ πολίταις οὐκ ἠθέλησεν

25

εἰπεῖν ταῦτα ἃ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἐβξλλῶν ἐρεῖν,

Ὡν»
ὅμως ἐπετρέψατε αὐτῷ πατρίδα καὶ παῖδας καὶ

γυναῖκας καὶ ὑμᾶς αὐτούς. ὁ δὲ ὧν μὲν ὑπέσχετο
9 Ν ¥ 4 Ν > ’ ε Ν
οὐδὲν ἔπραξεν, οὕτως δὲ ἐνετεθύμητο. ὡς χρὴ
Ν Ase ial ’ \ / ν ἈΝ
μικρὰν καὶ ἀσθενῆ γενέσθαι τὴν πόλιν, ὥστε περὶ
e > Ν ua 3, x ’, > / x
ὧν οὐδεὶς πώποτε οὔτε τῶν πολεμίων ἐμνήσθη οὔτε
τῶν πολιτῶν ἤλπισε, ταῦθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἔπεισε πρᾶξαι,
3 ε Ν ’, 5 / > > 92%
ovx ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων ἀϑᾳχκαζομενοξ: ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὸς
ἐκείνοις ἐπαγγελλάμαμῃς,, τοῦ τε Πειραιῶς τὰ τείχη
ἘῸΝ
δέριαλεα καὶ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν πολιτείαν καταλῦ-
σαι, εὖ εἰδὼς ὅτι, εἰ Pe πασῶν τῶν ἐλπίδων ἀπο-

Ζτερηθήδδωρβε,. τρηζεῦι» παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὴν τιμωρίαν
᾿Κομιεῖσθε. καὶ τὸ τελευταῖον, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί,

οὐ πρότερον εἴασε τὴν ἐκκλησίαν γενέσθαι, ἕως ὁ
λεγόμενος ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων Καιρὸς ἐπιμελῶς ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ
ἐτηρήθη, καὶ μετεπέμψατο μὲν τὰς pees. Λυσάν-
δρὸβ ναῦς ἐκ iden Μεννλήκηός δὲ τὸ τῶν πολε-
μίων στρατόπεδον. ἡ τότε δὲ τούτων ὑπαρχόντων,
καὶ παρόντων Λυσάνδρου καὶ Φιλοχάρους καὶ Μιλ-
τιάδου, περὶ τῆς πολιτείας τὴν ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίουν,
ἵνα μήτε ῥήτωρ αὐτοῖς μηδεὶς ἐναντιοῖτο μηδὲ
ἀπειλοῖ, ὑμεῖς τε μὴ τὰ τῇ πόλει συμφέροντα ἕλοι-
, ὑμεῖς τε μὴ τὰ τῇ μφέρ ἕλου
σθε, ἀλλὰ τἀκείνοις δοκοῦντα ψηφίσαισθε. ἀνα-
‘ Ν 4 Css ε “A ,
στὰς δὲ Θηραμένης ἐκέλευσεν ὑμᾶς τριάκοντα
ἀνὸ ΄ > / Ν aN Ν A λ ΄
ράσιν ἐπιτρέψαι τὴν πόλιν, καὶ τῇ πολιτείᾳ

70

7I

73

26 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.

χρῆσθαι ἣν Δρακοντίδης ἀπέφαινεν. ὑμεῖς δ᾽
4 A 4 4 5 “a ε 3 ’
ὅμως καὶ οὕτω διακείμενοι ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιή-
σοντες ταῦτα" ἐγιγνώσκετε γὰρ ὅτι περὶ δουλείας
Ν > lA > 5 ,ὕ ἡ , 5 ΄
καὶ ἐλευθερίας ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξεκλησιάζετε.
as , 9S ᾿Ξ, ’ Ν Μ 4
74 Θηραμένης δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, (καὶ Τούτων
ε la > ἈΝ , s > 9 ὑδὲ
ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς μάρτυρας παρέξομαι) εἶπεν ὅτι οὐδὲν
> “ aN i, €. , θ 8 5 δὴ Ar Ν
αὐτῷ μέλοι τοῦ ὑμετέρου θορύβου, ἐπειδὴ πολλοὺς
A > 4 > 4 A Ν 7 ’ὕ
μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰδείη τοὺς τὰ ὅμοια πράττοντας
αὑτῷ, δοκοῦντα δὲ Λυσάνδρῳ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις
λέγοι. μετ᾽ ἐκεῖνον δὲ Λύσανδρος ἀναστὰς ἄλλα
Ν > εὐ τυ ς ’ὔ μα υδαΝ »
τε πολλὰ εἶπε καὶ OTL παρασπόνδους ὑμᾶς ἔχοι,
; an > A 4 1 Peer 2) » 3 Ν \
καὶ OTL OV περὶ πολιτείας ὑμῖν ἔσται ἀλλὰ περὶ
4 > A , > a , ,
σωτηρίας, εἰ μὴ ποιήσεθ᾽ ἃ Θηραμένης κελεύει. ,
“ 8’ 5 ~ 93 λ , 9 ” ὃ 5 θ Sa
75 τῶν δ᾽ ἐν TH ἐκκλησίᾳ ὅσοι ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ ἦσαν,
γνόντες τὴν παρασκευὴν καὶ τὴν ἀνάγκην, οἱ μὲν
> al 4 ἃς ε 4 5 3 Ν » > 4
αὐτοῦ μένοντες ἡσυχίαν ἦγον, οἱ δὲ ἤᾧχοντο ἀπιόν-
nw nw 4 »ὉΝ
τες, τοῦτο γοῦν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς συνειδότες, ὅτι οὐ-
δὲν κακὸν τῇ πόλει ἐψηφίσαντο : ὀλίγοι δέ τινες
καὶ πονηροὶ καὶ κακῶς βουλευόμενοι τὰ προστα-
76 χθέντα ἐχειροτόνησαν. παρηγγέλλετο γὰρ αὐτοῖς
δέκα μὲν οὺς Θηραμένης ἀπέδειξε χειροτονῆσαι,
,ὔὕ A A ε ’ »¥ ’
δέκα δὲ οὺς οἱ καθεστηκότες ἔφοροι κελεύοιεν,
δέκα δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων: οὕτω γὰρ τὴν ὑμετέραν
» ,ὔ ee Ἀ A ε “ 7 5 /
ἀσθένειαν ἑώρων καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν δύναμιν ἠπί-
σταντο, ὥστε πρότερον ἤδεσαν τὰ μέλλοντα ἐν τῇ
77 ἐκκλησίᾳ πραχθήσεσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἐμοὶ δεῖ
cr 5» Ν 5 ’ ’ ‘A A ε » > nA
πιστεῦσαι, ἀλλὰ ἐκείνῳ: πάντα yap τὰ UT ἐμοῦ
» ,ὔ > gig ba > , »Ἤ
εἰρημένα ἐν TH βουλῃ ἀπολογούμενος ἔλεγεν,

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

a Angry

9 \7 x a , “ WS eet BRS “a
ὀνειδίζων μὲν Tots φεύγουσιν, ὅτι Sv αὐτὸν κατέλ-
θοιεν, οὐδὲν φροντιζόντων Λακεδαιμονίων, ὀνειδί-
ζων δὲ τοῖς τῆς πολιτείας μετέχουσιν ὅτι πάντων
τῶν πεπραγμένων τοῖς εἰρημένοις τρόποις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ
GAA
αὐτὸς αἴτιος γεγενημένος τοιούτων τυγχάνοι, πολ-
λὰς πίστεις a δεδωκὼς καὶ Tap ἐκείνων
$i ty ἢ a
ὅρκους εἰχηφῶς. καὶ τοσούτων καὶ ἑτέρων κακῶν
καὶ αἰσχρῶν καὶ πάλαι καὶ νεωστὶ καὶ μικρῶν καὶ
μεγάλων αἰτίου γεγενημένου τολμήσουσιν αὑτοὺς
lA »¥ > / > ε Ν ε “ >
φίλους ὄντας ἀποφαίνειν, οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἀποθα-
’ id > >, δ Ν “A ε A ,
vovTos Θηραμένους add ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτοῦ πονηρίας,
καὶ δικαίως μὲν ἐν ὀλιγαρχίᾳ δίκην δόντος (ἤδη
id YEPX "9 7 5. (ἢ
Ν 3 Ν [4 ’ » ἃ 5
γὰρ αὐτὴν κατέλυσε), δικαίως δ᾽ ἂν ἐν δημοκρα-
τίᾳ: δὶς γὰρ ὑμᾶς κατεδουλώσατο, τῶν μὲν παρόν-
των καταφρονῶν, τῶν δὲ ἀπόντων ἐπιθυμῶν, καὶ
΄“ ’ 5» ’ ’ ’ ¥
τῷ καλλίστῳ ὀνόματι χρώμενος δεινοτάτων ἔργων
4
διδάσκαλος καταστάς. ;

Περὶ μὲν τοίνυν Θηραμένου: ἱκανά μοί ἐστι τὰ
κατηγορημένα" ἥκει δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐκεῖνος ὁ καιρός, ἐν ᾧ
δεῖ συγγνώμην καὶ ἔλεον μὴ εἶναι ἐν ταῖς ὑμετέραις

, > Ν . > ΄ ΝΣ 2 »
γνώμαις, ἀλλὰ παρὰ ᾽᾿Ἐρατοσθένους καὶ τῶν τουτουὶ
συναρχόντων δίκην λαβεῖν, μηδὲ μαχομένους [μὲν]

ex > A ΄ , , 9
κρείττους εἶναι τῶν πολεμίων, ψηφιζομένους δὲ ἥτ-
τους τῶν ἐχθρῶν. μηδ᾽ ὧν φασι μέλλειν πράξειν

΄ , 3 Fy. a > 7 > ΄΄
πλείω χάριν αὐτοῖς ἴστε, ἢ ὧν ἐποίησαν ὀργίζεσθε"
μηδ᾽ ἀποῦσι μὲν τοῖς τριάκοντα ἐπιβουλεύετε, παρ-
hin AP A
ὄντας δ᾽ ἀφῆτε: μηδὲ τῆς τύχης, ἣ τούτους παρέ-
δωκε τῇ πόλει, κάκιον ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς βοηθήσητε.

27

as |

J\A/
we

\

78

79

28 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.

, : Ν 97 - ΄ aa: ;
8% Κατηγόρηται δὴ ᾿Εῤῥατοσθένους καὶ τῶν τούτου
- N > ΄ > ͵΄ N Ὁ ἌΡΗΝ
φίλων, οἷς τὰς ἀπολογίας ἀνοίσει καὶ μεθ᾽ ὧν
ees “ ,ὕ ε ,ὕ 3 Ν 5 ϑιἣῬ
αὐτῷ ταῦτα πέπρακται. ὁ μέντοι ἀγὼν οὐκ ἐξ
» “ / ts Neb id “' Ν Ν.
ἴσον τῇ πόλει καὶ ᾿Ερατοσθένει: οὗτος μὲν γὰρ
κατήγορος καὶ δικαστὴς αὐτὸς HY τῶν κρινομένων,
ἡμεῖς δὲ vybi εἰς κατηγορίαν καὶ ἀπολογίαν καθέ-
82 σταμεν. γ΄ καὶ οὗτοι μὲν τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας
ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν, ὑμεῖς δὲ τοὺς ἀπολέσαντας
τὴν πόλιν κατὰ τὸν νόμον ἀξιοῦτε κρίνειν, παρ᾽ ὧν
οὐδ᾽ ἂν παρανόμως βουλόμενοι δίκην λαμβάνειν
» “7 A > , a N , > ,
ἀξίαν Tov ἀδικημάτων ὧν τὴν πόλιν ἠδικήκασι
’ 7 Ν ,
λάβοιτε. τί γὰρ ἂν παθόντες δίκην τὴν ἀξίαν
¥ aA » ΄ , > > N
83 εἴησαν τῶν ἔργων δεδωκότες ; πότερον εἰ αὐτοὺς
ἀποκτείνοιτε καὶ τοὺς παῖδας αὐτῶν, ἱκανὴν ἂν τοῦ
’ὔ ld ’ὔ - Ὁ Ld Ν 4. ἡ
φόνου δίκην λάβοιμεν, ὧν οὗτοι πατέρας καὶ υἱεῖς
Res ταν Soe ἊΣ ἈΝ ye 2\\ \ Ne >
καὶ ἀδελφοὺς ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν ; ἀλλὰ yap εἰ
Ν la ‘ Ν ’ : lal “Ὁ »
τὰ χρήματα τὰ φανερὰ δημεύσαιτε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι
al o Ὅ μν Ν a
ἢ τῇ πόλει, ἧς οὗτοι πολλὰ εἰλήφασιν, ἢ Tots ἰδιώ-
a > + > , 3 \ , ,
84 ταις, ὧν οἰκίας ἐξεπόρθησαν ; ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν πάν-
wn 5 Qn
Ta ποιοῦντες δίκην Tap αὐτῶν οὐκ av δύναισθε
λαβεῖν, πῶς οὐκ αἰσχρὸν ὑμῖν καὶ ἡντινοῦν ἀπολι-
“Ὁ 9 4 4 Ν ’ ,
πεῖν, ἡντινά τις βούλοιτο Tapa τούτων λαμβάνειν;
“ > Ἀν “ lal
πᾶν δ᾽ av μοι δοκεῖ τολμῆσαι, ὅστις νυνὶ οὐχ Ere
» An A A “- A
pov ὄντων τῶν δικαστῶν ἀλλ᾽ αὐτῶν τῶν κακῶς
πεπονθότων, ἥκει ἀπολογησόμενος πρὸς αὐτοὺς
τοὺς μάρτυρας τῆς τούτου πονηρίας" τοσοῦτον ἣ
85 ὑμῶν καταπεφρόνηκεν ἢ ἑτέροις πεπίστευκεν. ὧν
» / ” > inl > id ν
ἀμφοτέρων ἄξιον ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ἐνθυμουμένους ὅτι

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

A a beet, EET
our ἂν ἐκεῖνα ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν μὴ ἑτέρων συμπρατ-
/ ἊΨ» 3 ἃ “A > / > 0 “a Ἂν Ue Ν A
τόντων OUT ἂν νῦν ἐπεχείρησαν ἐλθεῖν μὴ ὑπὸ τῶν

29

> “~ ΕΣ , ἃ > , 9
αυτῶν οἰομένου σωθήσεσθαι, Ol OV τουτοις ἥκουσι,

\ »
βοηθήσοντες, ἀλλὰ ἡγούμενοι πολλὴν ἄδειαν σφί-
σιν ἔσεσθαι τῶν [τε] πεπραγμένων καὶ τοῦ λοιποῦ
ποιεῖν ὅ τι ἂν βούλωνται, εἰ τοὺς μεγίστων κακῶν

> ἢ ’ὔ 3 ’
αἰτίους λαβόντες ἀφήσετε.
᾿Αλλὰ καὶ τῶν ξυνερούντων αὐτοῖς ἄξιον θαυμά-
ζειν, πότερον ὡς καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ αἰτήσονται, τὴν
ε a“ > Ἁ ’, 5 4 5 ’ a
αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν πλείονος ἀξίαν ἀποφαίνοντες τῆς
΄ , > , 29K > \ Ψ
τούτων πονηρίας" ἐβουλόμην μέντ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὺς οὕτω
΄ = , N , σ a
προθύμους εἶναι σώζειν τὴν πόλιν, ὥσπερ οὗτοι
> ’ ἄν Ὁ \ , > , Ν
ἀπολλύναι" ἢ ws δεινοὶ λέγειν ἀπολογήσονται καὶ
τὰ τούτων ἔργα πολλοῦ ἄξια ἀποφανοῦσιν. ἀλλ᾽
5 ε Ν ε “Ὁ 5» Ν > A > Ν ἊΝ 4 7
οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν οὐδὲ τὰ δίκαια πώ-

5 ’ > Lal
TT OTE ETTEXELPNOEV ELTTELV. Ait

᾿Αλλὰ τοὺς μάρτυρας ἄξιον ἰδεῖν, οἱ τούτοις μαρ-͵

87

hs αὑτῶν ἐβκηγοροθαι σφόδῥᾳ ἐπίλησβο:

νας καὶ εὐήθεις νομίζοντες ὑμᾷς εἶναι, εἰ διὰ μὲν

ν

τοῦ ὑμεγέρου πλήθους ἀδεῶς ἡγοῦνται τοὺς τριά-
κοντα σώσειν, διὰ δὲ ᾿ΕἘρατοσθένην καὶ τοὺς συν-
ἄρχοντας αὐτοῦ δεινὸν ἦν καὶ τῶν τεθνεώτων ἐπ᾽
ἐκφορὰν ἐ ἐλθεῖν. καίτοι οὗτοι μὲν σωθέντες πάλιν
ἂν Svvawro τὴν πόλιν ἀπολέσαι ἐκεῖνοι δέ, ods
οὗτοι ἀπώλεσαν, τελευτήσαντες τὸν βίον bia
ἔχουσι τῆς παρὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν τιμωρίας. οὐκ οὖν
δεινὸν εἰ τῶν μὲν ἀδίκως τεθνεώτων οἱ φίλοι συν-
απώλλυντο, αὐτοῖς δὲ τοῖς τὴν πόλιν ἀπολέσασιν

20 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.

89

heir i t. > Ϊ re hy

ΔΉ
δήπου ἐπ᾽ ἐκφορὰν πολλοὶ ἥξουσιν, ὁπότε βοηθεῖν
A δας, Χ X \ a
τοσοῦτοι παρασκευάζονται; Kal μὲν δὴ πολλῷ

AY

ia) Xx κυ e >
. πεῖν, ἢ ὑπὲρ ὧν οὗτοι πεποιήκασιν ἀπολογήσα-

go

"

9

4 ’,’ e > ’ὔ 5 ’
σθαι. καίτοι λέγουσιν ὡς Ἐρατοσθένει ἐλάχιστα
an Cant ( LA £ an
TOY τριάκοντα κακὰ εἴῤγασται, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο av-
τὸν ἀξιοῦσι σωθῆναι: ὅτι δὲ τῶν ἄλλων “Ἑλλήνων
“~ » ε “ 5 ’ὕ > » nw
πλεῖστα εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐξημάρτηκεν, οὐκ οἴρμται χρῆναι
ae, > 4 ε ~ Ἂν ’ ν ’
αὐτὸν ἀπολέσθαι. ὑμεῖς δὲ δείξατε ἦν τινα γνώ-
μὴν ἔχετε περὶ τῶν πραγμάτων. εἰ μὲν γὰρ τού-
yah ἤχει » ε > ,
tov καταψηφιεῖσθε, δῆλοι ἔσεσθε ὡς ὀργιζόμενοι

f= OH“ LL ἵ

A v oR. LV
τοῖς πεπραγμένοις - εἰ δὲ ἀποψηφίεισθε, ὀφθήσε-
Β APY 7D

!

/

He:

ms > Φ' ΟΝ e Ne tele ape Licey oY δὶ retaet Sate:
poeov ηγουμαι ειναυ ὑπέρ WY πυμεις ἐπάσχετε αντει-

ow.

“ WE ¥ > ey: Ν 4 >” Ὑ
σθε των ͵αὐυτων εργων» επισυμήῆται τουτοις OVTES,

ν᾿ 5 *¢ ͵ Ψ ὙΦ Ν A ,
και οὐχ ἕξετε λέγειν OTL TA VITO τῶν τριάκοντα
᾽ν ἜΝ > A \ \ Ν ΤΣ “he ASS
προ ταν EVTO ETOLELTE* VUVL μεν yap ουόεις UMS
~~ ee : (

ae "ΑΛ,

> ὦ ἣν Ν ε ΄ ’ 4- ΛΠ Ὁ ,
ἀναγκάζει παρὰ τὴν ὑμετέραν γνώμην ἀποψηφί-
ν ’ Ν , »
ζεσθαι. ὥστε συμβουλεύω μὴ τούτων ἀποψηφι-
σαμένους yoy αὐτῶν καταψηφίσασθαι, - μηδ᾽
Ky myer =k APL ΝΥ Bye - A «ὦ 4 .ᾷ +
οἴεσθε κρύβδην εἶναι τὴν ψῆφον - φανέρὰν γὰρ
τῇ πόλει τὴν ὑμετέραν γνώμην ποιήσετε.
Βούλομαι δὲ ὀλίγα ἑκατέρους ἀναμνήσας κατα-
way" \ a“
βαίνειν, τούς τε ἐξ ἀστεὸς Kal τοὺ: ἐκ Πειραιῶς,
9 Ν ε ~ Ν ’ td A
iva τὰς ὑμῖν διὰ τούτων ενημένας συμφορὰς
ὑμῖν διὰ τούτων γεγενημένας συμφορὰς
παραδείγματα ἔχοντες τὴν ψῆφον φέρητε. καὶ
A ee.” Ψ 3 ᾿ , 3 / 9
πρῶτον μὲν ὅσοι ἐξ ἄστεός ἐστε, σκέψασθε ὅτι
eo. , ” ΄ ¥ ’ 9 A
ὑπὸ τούτων οὕτω σφόδρα ἤρχεσιθε, ὥστε ἀδελφοῖς
δι 2 \ , > a NYY Pe A
καὶ υἱέσι Kal πολίταις ἠναγκάζέσθε πολεμεῖν Tor-
val - a
οὔτον πόλεμον, ἐν ᾧ ἡττηθέντες μὲν τοῖς νικήσασι

ro?)

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.

bs Ωἂε| » 4, δ᾽ x 4, ὃ λ ’ὔ

τὸ ἴσον ἔχετε, νικήσαντες δ᾽ ἂν τούτοις ἐδουλεύετε.
Ν Ν 297 κά & ἈΝ “Δ > A

καὶ τοὺς ἰδίους οἴκους οὗτοι μὲν [ἂν] ἐκ τῶν πρα-
, , > , ςε on δὲ ὃ Ν Ν Ν

γμάτων μεγάλους ἐκτήσαντο, ὑμεῖς δὲ διὰ τὸν πρὸς

ἀλλήλους πόλεμον ἐλάττους ἔχετε: συνωφελεῖσθαι

μὲν γὰρ ὑμᾶς οὐκ ἠξίουν, συνδιαβάλλεσθαι δ᾽

5 ,ὔ 3 Le ε ’, > ’ ν

ἠνάγκαζον, εἰς τοσοῦτον ὑπεροψίας ἐλθόντες ὥστε

οὐ τῶν ἀγαθῶν κοινούμενοι πιστοὺς ὑμῶν ἐκτῶντο,

> Ἂς A > 35

ἀλλὰ τῶν ὄνει

ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὑμεῖς νῦν ἐν τῷ θαῤῥραλέφιδ ὄντες, καθ᾽ ὅσον

SWacbe, καὶ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐκ

Πειραιῶς τιμωρήσασθε, ἐνθυμηθέντες μὲν ὅτι ὑπὸ

τούτων πονηροτάτων ὄντων ἤρχεσθε, ἐνθυμηθέντες

Ν ν 3 > A aA > 4 Ν
δὲ ὅτι μετ᾽ ἀνδρῶν νῦν ἀρίστων πολιτεύεσθε καὶ

hand ’ Ud A ‘ »“» /
τοῖς πολεμίοις μάχεσθε καὶ περὶ τῆς πόλεως Bov-
λεύεσθε, ἀναμνησθέντες δὲ τῶν ἐπικούρων, οὗς οὗ-
τοι φύλακας τῆς σφετέρας ἀρχῆς καὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας
δουλείας εἰς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν κατέστησαν. καὶ πρὸς
ε κα ‘ ΕἾ a ΕΣ > A an ,
ὑμᾶς μὲν ETL πολλῶν ὄντων εἰπεῖν τοσαῦτα λέγω.
ν ee = > > \ A Ψ
ὅσοι δ᾽ ἐκ Πειραιῶς ἐστε, πρῶτον. μὲν τῶν ὅπλων
δναμνᾷν δητε; ὅτι “πολλὰς μάχας ἐν τῇ ne

ι οὐ ὑπὸ μὴ ν πολεμίων ἀλλ᾽ τ

paxerr dyer χ᾽ UK ὧι ἐμ pmo; we
των εἰρήνης δόσις ἀφῃρέθητε, τὰ ὅπλα, ἔπειθ᾽ ὅτι
ἐξεκηρύχθητε μὲν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, ἣν ὑμῖν οἱ πατέ-
ρες παρέδοσαν, φεύγοντας δὲ ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων
ἐξῃτοῦντο. \/ ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὀργίσθητε μὲν ὥσπερ ὅτ᾽
> ΄ > , \ ‘ A » a
ἐφεύγετε, ἀναμνήσθητε δὲ Kat τῶν ἄλλων κακῶν
ἃ πεπόνθατε ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν" ot τοὺς μὲν ἐκ τῆς ἀγο-
ρᾶς τοὺς δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν ἱερῶν συναρπάζοντες βιαίως

31

ν μεταδιδόντες εὔνους @OVTO εἶναι. -

94

95

96

re

32 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.

> , Ν Ἀ 3 Ν ’, Ἀ , Ν
ἀπέκτειναν, τοὺς δὲ ἀπὸ τέκνων καὶ γονέων καὶ
γυναικῶν ἀφέλκοντες φονέας αὑτῶν ἠνάγκασαν
Ὰ ,ὔ Ν 5 Ἀ -“ an , »”
γενέσθαι καὶ οὐδὲ ταφῆς τῆς νομιζομένης εἴασαν
τυχεῖν, ἡγούμενοι τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρχὴν βεβαιοτέραν
97 εἶναι τῆς παρὰ τῶν θεῶν τιμωρίας. ὅσοι δὲ τὸν
ΝΑ, τὶ a
θάνατον διέφυγον, πολλαχοῦ κινδυνεύσαντες καὶ
εἰς πολλὰς πόλεις πλανηθέντες καὶ “πανταχόθεν
vat MUL VERT I EY
ἐκκηρυττόμενοι, ἐνδεεῖς ὄντες τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, οἱ
Ν 3 ’, »" (ὃ Ν τὸ ’
μὲν ἐν πολεμίᾳ τῇ πατρίδι τοὺς παῖδας καταλιπόν-
ε Φ 45 , lal lal > , »
τες, οἱ δ᾽ ἐν ξένῃ γῇ, πολλῶν ἐναντιουμένων ἤλθετε
> Ν lal “ Ν Ἁ 4 4
eis τὸν Πειραιᾶ. πολλῶν δὲ καὶ μεγάλων κινδύνων
J ’ >” > ‘ ’ Ἀ Ν
ὑπαρξάντων ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ γενόμενοι τοὺς μὲν
> 4 Ν > > Ἁ 7 ,
ἠλευθερώσατε, τοὺς δ᾽ eis THY πατρίδα κατηγάγετε.
3 δὲ 25 ΄ Ν 4 ε , : 3 Ν
98 εἰ δὲ ἐδυστυχήσατε καὶ τούτων ἡμόρπετέ, cron
νι ἃ § ΄ 3 ΄ Ν 2 Σ a 4
μὲν ἂν δείσαντες ἐφεύγετε μὴ πάθητε τοιαῦτα οἷα
\ ‘ ἃ: eee UR Re ear (Cig κα
καὶ πρότερον, καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἱερὰ οὔτε βωμοὶ ὑμᾶς
LO 4 ὃ Ἂν, Ἁ 4 , 5 ’
ἀδικουμένους διὰ τοὺς τούτων τρόπους ὠφέλησαν.
Δ 4 al nw nw
ἃ καὶ τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι σωτήρια γίνεται" ot δὲ παῖ-
ὃ en ψ \ > 0 (ὃ > eee , x»
ες upwv, ὅσοι μὲν ἐνθάδε ἦσαν, ὑπὸ τούτων ἂν
ε ’ ε » a
vBpilovro, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ ξένης μικρῶν ἂν ἕνεκα συμ-
, , σφι gh own ᾿
βολαίων ἐδούλευον ἐρημίᾳ τῶν ἐπικουρησόντων.
3 Ν Ν
9) ᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ οὐ τὰ μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι βούλομαι
,ὔ Ν
λέγειν, τὰ πραχθέντα ὑπὸ τούτων οὐ δυνάμενος
3 Ὅς > δὲ Ν eX / > δὲ ὃ aS ἂν
εἰπεῖν" οὐδὲ γὰρ ἑνὸς κατηγόρου οὐδὲ δυοῖν ἔργον
> ’ fal an ~
ἐστίν, ἀλλὰ πολλῶν. ὅμως δὲ τῆς ἐμῆς προθυμίας
[οὐδὲν] ἐλλέλειπται, ὑπέρ τε τῶν ἱερῶν, ἃ οὗτοι τὰ
5 \ > “ὃ Ν δ᾽ > , συ ε / “A
μὲν ἀπέδοντο τὰ δ᾽ εἰσιόντες ἐμίαινον, ὑπέρ TE τῆς
, a “
πόλεως, ἣν μικρὰν ἐποίουν, ὑπέρ τε τῶν νεωρίων,

XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 33

a ~ Ν ε Ἁ “ ’ «- ε Lal
ἃ καθεῖλον, καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν τεθνεώτων, οἷς ὑμεῖς,
> ‘ “~ > “~ > > 4 > Lal
ἐπειδὴ ζῶσιν ἐπαμῦναι οὐκ ἠδύνασθε, ἀποθανοῦσι
βοηθήσατε. οἶμαι δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἡμῶν τε ἀκροᾶσθαι τοο

ἈΝ ε “Ὁ ” Ν “ ΄ ε ’
καὶ ὑμᾶς εἴσεσθαι τὴν ψῆφον φέροντας, ἡγουμέ-

Φ \ “ἡ , > ’ » A

vous, ὅσοι μὲν ἂν τούτων ἀποψηφίσησθε, αὐτῶν

/ Vad ν 5. *# Ν ’
θάνατον καταψηφιεῖσθαι, ὅσοι δ᾽ ἂν παρὰ τούτων
δίκην λάβωσιν, ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν τὰς τιμωρίας πεποιη-
μένους.

Παύσομαι κατηγορῶν. ἀκηκόατε, ἑωράκατε,

’ »» Ud

πεπόνθατε, ἔχετε. δικάζετε.

INTRODUCTION

TO THE

ORATION AGAINST AGORATUS.

Tus oration, like the preceding, derives its chief value
from its historical contents. It is an accusation of Agoratus
for his share in the death of Dionysodorus, who with other
leaders of the popular party had fallen a victim to the revolu-
tion that brought the Thirty into power. It relates some of
the nefarious transactions that enabled the oligarchy to suc-
ceed in their plans, and to subvert for the second time the
ancient republican constitution.

Theramenes, determined to break the spirit of the obstinate
Demos, after waiting for three months of famine to do their
work, and for Cleophon to be put to death, had at last
returned from his second embassy with the terms of peace.
Their acceptance was strenuously opposed by the democratic
leaders. Among them were Strombichides, Eucrates, —
brother to the Nicias who commanded the ill-fated Sicilian
expedition, — Calliades, and Dionysodorus. Now in order
that the oligarchy might carry their scheme into effect, these
men too must be removed, as Cleophon had been; Agoratus,
a man of ignoble birth and antecedents, was selected as a fit
instrument for the purpose. He had years before managed to
secure a reward from the state on the claim of having been
accessory to the assassination of Phrynichus. Afterwards
he had somehow procured the enrolment of his name as a

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 35

citizen ; at the time of the events here related he was pre-
tending to identify himself actively with the movements of the
popular party. By order of the Senate, which was at the
time of the deliberations on the peace with Sparta strongly
oligarchic, he was arrested and induced to make a confession
implicating the leaders above named, as well as many others,
in a conspiracy against the state. ‘They were arrested and
thrown into prison. The peace was then made. Within three
months the Thirty were placed in power. One of their first
acts was to institute a trial of the imprisoned leaders and
sentence them to death. ‘The description of this mock-trial
and of the parting scene in the prison forms a noteworthy
passage of the oration.

Of Dionysodorus we have no other information than what
is here given. He appears to have been one of the taxiarchs
for that year. His brother Dionysius, and a brother-in-law
whose name does not appear, come forward as prosecutors,
the latter delivering the principal accusing speech, one Ga the
unquestioned compositions of Lysias.

The manner of the indictment deserves notice. Instead of
the usual indictment for murder (γραφὴ φόνου), the prosecutors
avail themselves of the so-called process of Apagogé (ἀπαγωγή).
This process was preferred, it is supposed, in order to avoid
the more numerous legal forms and the intervening delays of
the other, especially since these would allow the escape of
the accused before trial. The Apagogé was a more direct
procedure, placing the accused under immediate arrest, and
providing for a speedy trial under the conduct of the Eleven
before a Heliastic court. ‘The only requisite preliminary was
that the accused should be brought before the Eleven, the
charges being made out in a bill or indictment which also
bore the name Apagogé. In its original form this indictment
could only be preferred when the person charged with crime
had been taken in the very act (ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, in flagranti), but

26 XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.

practice had allowed its application to be extended to any
well-known or notorious offences. In the present case, the
argument to justify resorting to this process ($$ 823 -- 87) is
evidently the most difficult part of the speaker's task, and is
skilfully thrown, as indeed it well deserves, into the back-

ground.
The date is uncertain, but probably not earlier than B. C. 400.

Blass conjectures 398, or even later.
The following is a brief analysis :

I. Exordium, $$ 1-4.
II. Statement of facts, originally attested by witnesses and documents,
with a résumé of the calamities for which Agoratus is in
part responsible, $$ 5 -- 48.
III. Refutation of the anticipated argument for the defence.
The accuser maintains :
(1) A denial of the charge is impossible in the face of the
evidence, §§ 49, 50.
(2) Justification of the act impossible, ὃ 51.
(3) The plea of compulsion of no avail, $$ 52 - 54.
(4) The chief guilt not to be thrown upon Menestratus,
δὲ 55-57:
IV. Considerations bearing on the character of the accused :
(1) His conduct compared with that of Aristophanes of Col-
leidze, $$ 58-61.
(2) The valuable citizens lost to the state compared with their
murderer Agoratus, a slave and the brother of three
notorious criminals, $$ 62-69.
(3) Exposure of the fraud of his claim to have served the state
in the assassination of Phrynichus, and thereby to have
gained citizenship, $$ 70 -- 76.
(4) Not, as claimed, one of ‘* the men of Phyle,” 8ξ 77 -- 82.
V. The validity of the indictment defended, 88 83 -- 87.
VI. Denial of the defendant’s claim to the benefit of the amnesty,
§§ 88-91.
VII. Peroration, §§ 92-97.

XIII.

KATA ΑΓΟΡΑΤΟΥ
[ENAEIZEQS].

I] POSHKEI μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, πᾶσιν
ὑμῖν τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀνδρῶν οἱ ἀπέθανον εὖνοι
" tad , ne , , \ > \
ὄντες TH πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ, προσήκει δὲ κἀμοὶ

σ΄ >
οὐχ ἥκιστα: κηδεστὴς γάρ μοι ἣν Διονυσόδωρος

Ν 3 , , > > ote SN »
καὶ ἀνεψιός. τυγχάνει οὖν ἐμοὶ ἡ αὐτὴ ἔχθρα

Ν 3 ΄ Ν \ ΟΝ ΄ A €¢€ /
πρὸς Aydpatov τουτονὶ καὶ τῷ πλήθει TO ὑμετέρῳ
ὡς...» ¥ ‘ ae A 5 jek et 9
ὑπάρχουσα: ἔπραξε yap οὗτος τοιαῦτα, dv ἃ UT
ἐμοῦ νυνὶ εἰκότως μισεῖται, ὑπό τε ὑμῶν, ἂν θεὸς
θέλῃ, δικαί θή Διονυσόδ ὰ

n, δικαίως τιμωρηθήσεται. νυσόδωρον γὰρ
\ κι κ eet, ee ear , a
τὸν κηδεστὴν τὸν ἐμὸν Kal ἑτέρους πολλούς, ὧν

Ἁ Ν 5 Ye! > 7 ¥ 3, > Ν
δὴ τὰ ὀνόματα ἀκούσεσθε, ἄνδρας ὄντας ἀγαθοὺς
περὶ τὸ πλῆθος τὸ ὑμέτερον, ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα
ἀπέκτεινε, μηνυτὴς κατ᾽ ἐκείνων γενόμενος. ποιή-
σας δὲ ταῦτα ἐμὲ μὲν ἰδίᾳ καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν προσ-

΄, ΄ > , Ν \ 4 rs
ἠκόντων μεγάλα ἐζημίωσε, τὴν δὲ πόλιν κοινῇ

“ ἴω 7
πᾶσαν τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν ἀποστερήσας οὐ μικρά,
ὡς ἐγὼ νομίζω, ἔβλαψεν. ἐγὼ οὖν, ἄνδρες δικα-
otal, δίκαιον καὶ ὅσιον ἡγοῦμαι εἶναι καὶ ἐμοὶ καὶ

2

38 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

en [2 Cal a: ν ’

ὑμῖν ἅπασι τιμωρεῖσθαι καθ᾽ ὅσον ἕκαστος δύνα-
ται: καὶ ποιοῦσι ταῦτα νομίζω ἡμῖν καὶ παρὰ
θεῶν καὶ παρ᾽ ἀνθρώπων ἄμεινον ἂν γίγνεσθαι.

4 δεῖ δ᾽ ὑμᾶς, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐξ ἀρχῆς τῶν
πραγμάτων ἁπάντων ἀκοῦσαι, W εἰδῆτε πρῶτον

\ ἮΝ , ass ε ὃ , ΄ A253
μὲν ᾧ τρόπῳ ὑμῖν ἡ δημοκρατία κατελύθη Kal ὑφ
Ψ + Φ , a 4 ξ΄». ὦ ,
ὅτου, ἔπειτα ᾧ τρόπῳ οἱ ἄνδρες ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αγοράτου
9. ly ie. Neer 3 , ,
ἀπέθανον, καὶ δὴ ὃ τι ἀποθνήσκειν μέλλοντες
ἐπέσκηψαν: ἅπαντα γὰρ ταῦτα ἀκριβῶς ἂν μα-

, Ν»
θόντες ἥδιον καὶ ὁσιώτερον ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ
καταψηφίζοισθε. ὅθεν οὖν ἡμεῖς τε ῥᾷστα διδά-
>» es ἢ ‘al ’ὔ > lal cn ΕἿΣ
ἕξομεν καὶ ὑμεῖς μαθήσεσθε, ἐντεῦθεν ὑμῖν ἄρξομαι
διηγεῖσθαι.

5 Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ αἱ νῆες at ὑμέτεραι διεφθάρησαν
καὶ τὰ πράγματα ἐν τῇ πόλει ἀσθενέστερα ἐγεγέ-
UNTO, οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον αἵ τε νῆες al Λακε-
δαιμονίων ἐπὶ τὸν Πειραιᾷ ἀφικνοῦνται, καὶ ἅμα

Ν lal
λόγοι πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης ἐγίγ-
Ὕ A
6 νοντο. ἐν δὲ τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ οἱ βουλόμενοι νεώ-
ld lal
τερα πράγματα ev TH πόλει γίγνεσθαι ἐπεβού-
λευον, νομίζοντες κάλλιστον καιρὸν εἰληφέναι καὶ
μάλιστα ἐν τῷ τότε χρόνῳ τὰ πράγματα, ὡς αὐτοὶ

7 ἠβούλοντο, καταστήσασθαι. ἡγοῦντο δὲ οὐδὲν
ἄλλο σφίσιν ἐμποδὼν εἶναι ἢ τοὺς τοῦ δήμου
προεστηκότας καὶ τοὺς στρατηγοῦντας καὶ ταξι-
apxovvtas. τούτους οὖν ἐβούλοντο ἀμωσγέπως
ἐκποδὼν ποιήσασθαι, ἵνα ῥᾳδίως ἃ βούλοιντο δια-

, ” ‘ > r on ΠΣ 6 :
πράττοιντο. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν Κλεοφῶντι ἐπέθεντο

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.

ἐκ τρόπου τοιούτου. OTE yap ἡ πρώτη ἐκκλησία
περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης ἐγίγνετο, καὶ οἱ παρὰ Λακεδαι-
4 ν » > > - ν > .
μονίων ἥκοντες ἔλεγον ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἕτοιμοι εἶεν τὴν
5 a ~ , 5 a
εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἰ κατασκαφείη
τῶν τειχῶν τῶν μακρῶν ἐπὶ δέκα στάδια ἑκατέρου,
, ε a > » > a > > +
τότε ὑμεῖς TE, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐκ ἠνέσχεσθε
ἀκούσαντες περὶ τῶν τειχῶν τῆς κατασκαφῆς,
Κλεοφῶν τε ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν πάντων ἀναστὰς ἀντεῖπειν
o 4 » nw
ὡς οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ οἷόν TE εἴη ποιεῖν ταῦτα. μετὰ
δὲ ταῦτα Θηραμένης, ἐπιβουλεύων τῷ πλήθει τῷ
ηραμενῆς, a 1) ef
ε , > Ἀ ’ὔ ν 5Ν φίστα ν Ἁ
ὑμετέρῳ, ἀναστὰς λέγει OTL, ἐὰν αὐτὸν ἕλησθε περὶ
τῆς εἰρήνης πρεσβευτὴν. αὐτοκράτορα, ποιήσειν
Ψ , - A a , ¥ N ΄
ὥστε μήτε τῶν τειχων διελεῖν μήτε ἀλλο τὴν πόλιν
ἐλαττῶσαι μηδέν. οἴοιτο δὲ καὶ ἄλλο τι ἀγαθὸν
Ν dl Lal / ε 4
παρὰ Λακεδαιμονίων τῇ πόλει εὑρήσεσθαι. πει-
4 . ε “ 9 > ”~ Ν >
σθέντες δὲ ὑμεῖς εἵλεσθε ἐκεῖνον πρεσβευτὴν αὐτο-
κράτορα, ὃν τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτει στρατηγὸν χειροτο-
νηθέντα ἀπεδοκιμάσατε, οὐ νομίζοντες εὔνουν εἶναι
“ ᾽ὕὔ ““ε , > a Ν > > Ν >
τῷ πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ. ἐκεῖνος μὲν οὖν ἐλθὼν εἰς
c c c
nr 7
Λακεδαίμονα ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ πολὺν χρόνον, καταλι-
πὼν ὑμᾶς πολιορκουμένους, εἰδὼς τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆ-
5» >. , > / A Ν Ἀ ’ὔ QA
fos ἐν ἀπορίᾳ ἐχόμενον καὶ διὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ
A Ν ἈΝ ἈΝ ΄“ 5 ’ > A
τὰ κακὰ τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἐνδεεῖς
2 , 5 a ε na 5 , 4
ὄντας, νομίζων, εἰ διαθείη ὑμᾶς ἀπόρως ὥσπερ
’,᾿ > 4 ε lal > A ΕΝ > ,
διέθηκεν, ἀσμένως ὁποιαντινοῦν ἐθελῆσαι ἂν εἰρή-
ὕὔ ε 5 5 , ε 4 A
vyv ποιήσασθαι. οἱ δ᾽ ἐνθάδε ὑπομένοντες καὶ
5 ’ ἴω A 4 3
ἐπιβουλεύοντες καταλῦσαι τὴν δημοκρατίαν εἰς
> n nm A , Ν ν
ἀγῶνα Κλεοφῶντα καθιστᾶσι, πρόφασιν μὲν ὅτι

39

Io

40 XIII. KATA ΑΤΟΡΑΤΟΥ.

13

14

15

16

οὐκ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅπλα ἀναπαυσόμενος, τὸ δ᾽ ἀλη-
θὲς ὅτι ἀντεῖπεν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν μὴ καθαιρεῖν τὰ τείχῃ.
ἐκείνῳ μὲν οὖν δικαστήριον παρασκευάσαντες καὶ
5 , ε me 2 5 ’ 4
εἰσελθόντες ot βουλόμενοι ὀλιγαρχίαν καταστήσα-
σθαι ἀπέκτειναν ἐν τῇ προφάσει ταύτῃ. Θηρα-
4 A ν 5 Ὁ“ 5 ’ὕ
μένης δὲ ὕστερον ἀφικνεῖται ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος.
προσιόντες δ᾽ αὐτῷ τῶν τε στρατηγῶν τινες καὶ
~ , @ > ’ ἈΝ /
τῶν ταξιάρχων, ὧν ἦν Στρομβιχίδης καὶ Διονυσό-
δωρος, καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς τῶν πολιτῶν εὐνοοῦντες
ε Lal ν 5 5 ᾽’, σ 5 , 7
ὑμῖν, ὥς γ᾽ ἐδήλωσαν ὕστερον, ἠγανάκτουν σφό-
> Ν , > , , ἃ ε nw
Spa. ἦλθε yap φέρων εἰρήνην τοιαύτην, ἣν ἡμεῖς
ἔργῳ μαθόντες ἔγνωμεν: πολλοὺς γὰρ τῶν πολι-
τῶν καὶ ἀγαθοὺς ἀπωλέσαμεν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν
, a , > \ > \ Ν ret es
τριάκοντα ἐξηλάθημεν. ἢν yap ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ ἐπὶ
δέκα στάδια τῶν μακρῶν τειχῶν διελεῖν ὅλα τὰ
A ,ὔ ’ὔ 5 A δὲ ἴω 2 >
μακρὰ τείχη κατασκάψαι, ἀντὶ O€ TOV ἀλλο TL ἀγα-
θὸν τῇ πόλει εὑρέσθαι τάς τε ναῦς παραδοῦναι τοῖς
/ Ν Ν \ Ν - na ~
Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τὸ περὶ τὸν Πειραιᾶ τεῖχος
περιελεῖν. ὁρῶντες δὲ οὗτοι οἱ ἄνδρες ὀνόματι
μὲν εἰρήνην γενομένην, τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ τὴν δημοκρα-
τίαν καταλυομένην, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἐπιτρέψαι ταῦτα
’,ὕ > > “a > ὟΝ > ἴω Ν
γενέσθαι, οὐκ ἐλεοῦντες, ὦ ἄνδρες Αθηναῖοι, τὰ
τείχη, εἰ πεσεῖται, οὐδὲ κηδόμενοι τῶν νεῶν, εἰ
Λακεδαιμονίοις παραδοθήσονται (οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτοῖς
4 “~ aA ε ἴω ε ’ Lal 5 »
τούτων πλειον ἢ ὑμῶν ἑκάστῳ προσῆκεν), ἀλλ
αἰσθόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ τρόπου τούτου τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆ-
, 5 5 ν 4 5
θος καταλυθησόμενον, οὐδ᾽ (ὥς φασί τινες) οὐκ
5 “Ὁ » ,ὔ’ ,ὔ Ε] A ,
ἐπιθυμοῦντες εἰρήνην γίγνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ βουλόμενοι

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 41

’ὔ 4 > 4 “~ 4 Bo. > ’
βελτίω ταύτης εἰρήνην τῷ δήμῳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
ta > / Ν 4 Ν 4
ποιήσασθαι. ἐνόμιζον δὲ δυνήσεσθαι, καὶ ἔπρα-

a A > ah Me fee , Liss ον
€av ἂν ταῦτα, εἰ μὴ ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ ἀπώ-
Ν. Ν lal y Ν ε >”
hovro. γνοὺς δὲ ταῦτα Θηραμένης καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι
ε > 4 ε ἴω ν 3 ’ ἃ ’
οἱ ἐπιβουλεύοντες ὑμῖν, OTL εἰσί τινες OL κωλύ-
σουσι τὸν δῆμον καταλυθῆναι καὶ ἐναντιώσονται
ἈΝ al 5 ’ὔ ν Ν Ν 5 ’
περὶ τῆς ἐλευθερίας, εἵλοντο, πρὶν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν
τὴν περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης γενέσθαι, τούτους πρῶτον εἰς
διαβολὰς καὶ κινδύνους καταστῆσαι, ἵνα μηδεὶς
5» nm ¢€ \ “A ε , la 5 4 >
ἐκεῖ ὑπὲρ TOU ὑμετέρου πλήθους ἀντιλέγοι. ἐπι-
Ν > 4 5 4 4
βουλὴν οὖν τοιαύτην ἐπιβουλεύουσι. πείθουσι
γὰρ ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονὶ μηνυτὴν κατὰ τῶν στρατη-
γῶν καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων γενέσθαι, οὐ ξυνειδότα
ἐκείνοις, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐδέν (οὐ γὰρ δήπου
“τς Y τ. > , » σ᾽ \
ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως ἀνόητοι ἦσαν καὶ ἄφιλοι, ὥστε περὶ
τηλικούτων ἂν πραγμάτων πράττοντες ᾿Αγόρατον
ε ἈΝ ἈΝ + A“ Ν 5 ’ 3,
ὡς πιστὸν καὶ εὔνουν, δοῦλον καὶ ἐκ δούλων ὄντα,
’ 5 5 5 ’ὔ » ~ - » rd
παρεκάλεσαν), ---- ahd ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς οὗτος ἐπιτή-
> 4 > 4 > ȴ nw
δειος εἶναι μηνυτής. ἐβούλοντο οὖν ἄκοντα δοκεῖν
αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ ἑκόντα μηνύειν, ὅπως πιστότερα ὑμῖν
ε is ε Se Ν 5 4 Ν ε Ὁ“ >
ὑποφαίνοιτο. ὡς δὲ ἑκὼν ἐμήνυσε, Kal ὑμᾶς οἶμαι
τῶν πεπραγμένων αἰσθήσεσθαι. εἰσπέμπουσι
Ν Ψ Ἀ ἈΝ Ν Ν A“ 4
yap εἰς τὴν βουλὴν [τὴν πρὸ τῶν τριάκοντα Bov-
λεύουσαν] Θεόκριτον τὸν τοῦ ᾿Ελαφοστίκτου κα-
λούμενον: 6 δὲ Θεόκριτος οὗτος ἑταῖρος ἣν τῷ
Ἂν Ὁ ’ ἈΝ 5 "ὃ ε δὲ β λ ‘\ ε Ἀ “~
γοράτῳ καὶ ἐπιτήδειος. ἡ δὲ βουλὴ ἡ πρὸ τῶν
4 4 4 Ν > ’
τριάκοντα βουλεύουσα διέφθαρτο καὶ ὀλιγαρχίας
5 / ε » 4 4 ’,ὕ ε
ἐπεθύμει, ὡς ἴστε, μάλιστα. τεκμήριον δέ: οἱ

19

20

42 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

Ν Ν ¢: 9 > ’ “Ὁ ig Ἀ «ε ’
γὰρ πολλοὶ οἱ ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς βουλῆς τὴν ὑστέραν
Ἀ ‘ t pk * , > , A >
βουλὴν τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα ἐβούλευον. τοῦ ὃ
. cal , uA 7 3 50. ἡ ν Ν ’
ἕνεκα ταῦτα λέγω ὑμῖν; ἵν᾽ εἰδῆτε ὅτι τὰ ψηφ΄-
x ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς βουλῆς οὐκ ἐπ᾽ εὐνοίᾳ TH
σματα τὰ ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς n 1 τῇ
ὑμετέρᾳ GAN ἐπὶ καταλύσει τοῦ δήμου Tod ὑμετέ-
μετέρῳ ye μ
at ..& ns > n
pov ἅπαντα ἐλέγετο, καὶ ὡς τοιούτοις οὖσιν αὐτοῖς
Ν lal , > Ν ἈΝ 5 ’ὔ Ν
21 τὸν νοῦν προσέχητε. εἰσελθὼν δὲ εἰς ταύτην τὴν
\ > > 4 / 4 7 ia
βουλὴν ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ Θεόκριτος μηνύει ote συλλέ-
γονταί τινες ἐναντιωσόμενοι τοῖς τότε καθιστα-
4 ’ Ν Ν > 5 ’, > »
μένοις πράγμασι. τὰ μὲν οὖν ὀνόματα οὐκ ἔφη
“- A 9
αὐτῶν ἐρεῖν καθ᾽ ἕκαστον" ὅρκους TE yap ὀμω-
μοκέναι τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐκείνοις, καὶ εἶναι ἑτέρου: οἵ
A » lal
ἐροῦσι Ta ὀνόματα, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐκ ἄν ποτε ποιῆσαι
22 ταῦτα. καίτοι εἰ μὴ ἐκ παρασκευῆς ἐμηνύετο, πῶς.
3 x 5 ’ ε Ν 5 Ὁ 4° > , ’
οὐκ ἂν ἠνάγκασεν ἡ βουλὴ εἰπεῖν τὰ ὀνόματα Θεό-
Ν Ν
κριτον καὶ μὴ ἀνώνυμον τὴν μήνυσιν ποιήσασθαι;
Ν Ν “ Ν
νυνὶ δὲ τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ψηφίζεται.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

2. ᾿Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐψηφίσθη,
,ὕ 5 . Ἂς > , 5» Ν wn ε
κατέρχονται ἐπὶ τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ οἱ
αἱρεθέντες τών βουλευτῶν, καὶ περιτυχόντες αὐτῷ
> > ὩΣ Ὶ , »” , de ,
ἐν ἀγορᾷ ἐζήτουν ἄγειν. παραγενόμενος δὲ Νικίας
A , A Ν , ε “~ A ’
καὶ Νικομένης καὶ ἀλλοι τινές, ὁρωντες τὰ πρᾶ-
γματα οὐχ οἷα βέλτιστα ἐν τῇ πόλει ὄντα, ἄγειν
μὲν τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον οὐκ ἔφασαν προήσεσθαι, ἀφῃ-
ροῦντο δὲ καὶ ἠγγνῶντο καὶ ὡμολόγουν παράξειν

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 43

εἰς τὴν βουλήν. γραψάμενοι δὲ οἱ βουλευταὶ τὰ
ὀνόματα τῶν ἐγγυωμένων καὶ κωλυόντων, ἀπιόντες
᾿», 3 3, ε δὲ A , Ν δον Ν
ᾧχοντο εἰς ἄστυ. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αγόρατος καὶ οἱ ἐγγυηταὶ
καθίζουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν Μουνυχίασιν - ἐπειδὴ
A > oe > 4 ΄ Ἁ bs 50. ἡ
δὲ ἐκεῖ ἦσαν, ἐβουλεύοντο τί χρὴ ποιεῖν. ἐδόκει
> » δᾷχ: ΣΦ a Ν in) ὦ ν 3 Ν
οὖν τοῖς ἐγγυηταῖς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἅπασιν ἐκποδὼν
> ¢ .
ποιήσασθαι τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον ws τάχιστα, Kal παρ-
’ὔ ’ ~ 4 > la > a
ορμίσαντες δύο πλοῖα Μουνυχίασιν ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ
Ν -“
παντὶ τρόπῳ ἀπελθεῖν ᾿Αθήνηθεν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔφα-
σαν συνεκπλευσεῖσθαι, ἕως τὰ πράγματα κατα-
’ td 4 > ’ 3 ν 4,
σταίη, λέγοντες ὅτι, εἰ κομισθείη εἰς τὴν βουλήν,
» :
βασανιζόμενος ἴσως ἀναγκασθήσεται ὀνόματα εἰ-
πεῖν ᾿Αθηναίων ὧν ἂν ὑποβάλωσιν οἱ βουλόμενοι
κακόν τι ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐργάζεσθαι. ταῦτα ἐκείνων
’ nw nw
δεομένων, καὶ παρασκευασάντων πλοῖα, καὶ αὐτῶν
ε ’ κι “~ > > 4, ’
ἑτοίμων ὄντων συνεκπλεῖν, οὐκ ἠθέλησε πείθεσθαι
5 = > ’, ε ’ ’ 5s 9 ’ὔ >
αὕτοις Ayopatos ovTool. KaiTol, ὦ Ayoparte, εἰ
5 4 Ν ’
μή τί σοι ἣν παρεσκευασμένον καὶ ἐπίστευες μη-
“ a » Ν
δὲν κακὸν πείσεσθαι, πῶς οὐκ ἂν ῴχου καὶ πλοίων
A“ A 4 4”
παρεσκευασμένων καὶ TOV ἐγγυητῶν ἑτοίμων ὄντων
lal “ ‘ »
σοι συνεκπλεῖν ; ἔτι γὰρ οἷόν τέ σοι ἦν, καὶ οὕπω

ἡ βουλή σου ἐκράτει. ἀλλὰ μὲν δὴ οὐχ ὅμοιά γε

24

25

27

Ν Ν 3 ’ ε “ lal ἈΝ ‘ >
σοὶ Kal ἐκείνοις ὑπῆρχε. πρῶτον μὲν yap ᾿Αθη-.

ναῖοι ἦσαν ὥστε οὐκ ἐδεδίεσαν βασανισθῆναι"
ἔπειτα πατρίδα σφετέραν αὐτῶν καταλιπόντες ἕτοι-
μοι ἦσαν συνεκπλεῖν μετὰ σοῦ, ἡγησάμενοι ταῦτα
μᾶλλον λυσιτελεῖν ἢ τῶν πολιτῶν πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγα-
θοὺς ὑπὸ σοῦ ἀδίκως ἀπολέσθαι. σοὶ δὲ πρῶτον

44 XIII, KATA ATOPATOY.

\ ’ > “ ε ΄ »»Ἤ
μὲν κίνδυνος ἦν βασανισθῆναι ὑπομείναντι, ἔπειτα
3 ig δ ΄ 4 9 > > Ν
28 οὐ πατρίδα ἂν σαυτοῦ κατέλιπες" ὥστ᾽ ἐκ παντὸς
4 Ν »" x > ’ 3 A ,
τρόπου σοὶ μᾶλλον ἢ ἐκείνοις ἐκπλεῦσαι συνέ-
φερεν, εἰ μή τι ἦν ᾧ ἐπίστευνες. νῦν δὲ ἄκων μὲν
προσποιῇ, ἑκὼν δὲ πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς ᾿Αθηναίων
3 ΄ ε Ν ΄ 9 δ 5» "
ἀπέκτεινας. ὡς δὲ παρεσκευάσθη ἅπαντα ἃ ἐγὼ
3 Ν lal
λέγω, Kal μάρτυρές εἰσι καὶ αὐτὸ TO ψήφισμα σοῦ
τὸ τῆς βουλῆς καταμαρτυρήσει.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

22 Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐψηφίσθη καὶ
ἦλθον οἱ ἐκ τῆς βουλῆς Μουνυχίαζε, ἑκὼν ἀνέστη
> / > Ν “ “ ,ὕ “ ,
Αγόρατος ἀπὸ τοῦ Bwpov: καίτοι νῦν ye Bia
φησὶν ἀφαιρεθῆναι. ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὴν βουλὴν
5 ᾽’ὔ 3 ’ 3 ’, “Ὁ Α͂,,
30 ἐκομίσθησαν, ἀπογράφει ᾿Αγόρατος πρῶτον μὲν
τῶν αὑτοῦ ἐγγυητῶν τὰ ὀνόματα, ἔπειτα τῶν στρα-
ἴω » a] / » Ν Ν »
τηγῶν καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων, ἔπειτα δὲ Kal ἄλλων
τινῶν πολιτῶν. ἡ δὲ ἀρχὴ αὕτη τοῦ παντὸς κακοῦ
ιν ε δὲ 3 ΄ » et Been > Ν
ἐγένετο. ὡς δὲ ἀπέγραψε τὰ ὀνόματα, οἶμαι μὲν
Ν 3.4% ε ’ 3 \ 4 8... > 4
καὶ αὐτὸν ὁμολογήσειν" εἰ δὲ μή, ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ
ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐξελέγξω. ᾿Απόκριναι δή μοι.

ἘΡΩΤΗΣΙΣ.

31 ᾿Ἐβούλοντο τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἔτι πλει-
ld 5» “Ὁ Ν > 4 > 4, 4 ,ὔ
ὄνων αὐτῶν τὰ ὀνόματα ἀπογράψαι ---- οὕτω σφό-

»¥ ε \ , > , Ν
Spa ἔρρωτο ἡ βουλὴ κακόν τι ἐργάζεσθα .--- καὶ

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 45

: > > , > Ὁ ν > “
αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ἅπαντα τἀληθῆ πω κατη-
γορηκέναι. τούτους μὲν οὖν ἅπαντας ἑκὼν ἀπο-
4 > Ὁ“ 3 2, | 4 : ¥ ‘ Ν Lal
γράφει, οὐδεμιᾶς αὐτῷ ἀνάγκης οὔσης. [pera Tod-
το προσαπογράφει ἑτέρους τῶν πολιτῶν.] ἐπειδὴ
δὲ ἡ ἐκκλησία Μο ΐ ἐν τῷ θεά ἐγί-
é€ ἡ ἐκκλησία Μουνυχίασιν ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ ἐγί

ὃ

A ὃ Ν > ΄»“»- Ψ Ν
γνετο, οὕτω σφοδρα τινὲς ἐπεμελοῦντο ὅπως καὶ

ἐν τῷ δήμῳ περὶ τῶν στρατηγῶν καὶ τῶν ταξι-
’ 4 4 ‘ Ν ~ 3, > 4

άρχων μήνυσις γένοιτο (περὶ δὲ τῶν ἄλλων ἀπέχρη
ἡ ἐν τῇ βουλῇ [μήνυσις] γεγενημένη), ὥστε καὶ
ἐκεῖ παράγουσιν εἰς τὸν δῆμον. Καί μοι ἀπόκρι-
ναι, ὦ ᾿Αγόρατε". ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ οἶμαί σε ἔξαρνον ἂν

΄ a's , > , ce ὦ ἃ 3 ,ὕ
γενέσθαι ἃ ἐναντίον ᾿Αθηναίων ἁπάντων ἐποίησας.

ἘΡΩΤΗΣΙΣ.

a ‘ Ν
Ὁμολογεῖ μὲν καὶ αὐτός, ὅμως δὲ καὶ τὰ ψηφί-
σματα ὑμῖν τοῦ δήμου ἀναγνώσεται.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑΤΑ.

, ε Ν a 3
Ὅτι μὲν ἀπέγραψεν ᾿Αγόρατος οὑτοσὶ των ἀν-
ὃ a > , gk Ge Ν Xie hy λῃ Ν
ρῶν ἐκείνων τὰ ὀνόματα, καὶ τὰ ἐν TH βουλῇ καὶ
ὰ ἐν τῷ δή ὶ ἔστι φονεὺς ἐκείνων, σχεδόν τι
τα ἐν TW Οοήμῳ, και εστι φονεὺς ε » TX
> A ε ΄ es
οἶμαι ὑμᾶς ἐπίστασθαι: ὡς τοίνυν ἁπάντων των
“ + “~ , > , \ ὑδ᾽ “ὙΦ. i 8
κακῶν αἴτιος TH πόλει ἐγένετο καὶ οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς
+ ΚΝ 4 > lal > ἈΝ > « Lal 3
αὐτὸν προσήκει ἐλεεῖσθαι, ἐγὼ οἶμαι ὑμῖν ἐν κεφα-
Lal 7
λαίοις ἀποδείξειν. ἐπειδὴ yap ἐκεῖνοι συλληφθέν-
> ‘\
τες ἐδέθησαν, τότε καὶ ὁ Λύσανδρος εἰς τοὺς

33

34

46 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

Ἀ A
λιμένας τοὺς ὑμετέρους εἰσέπλευσε, καὶ αἱ νῆες at
ε ’, ’, 2 Ν Ἂς
ὑμέτεραι Λακεδαιμονίοις παρεδόθησαν, καὶ τὰ
τείχη κατεσκάφη, καὶ οἵ τριάκοντα κατέστησαν,

lal lal Ὁ Ν

35 καὶ τί οὐ τῶν δεινῶν τῇ πόλει ἐγένετο; ἐπειδὴ

4

τοίνυν οἱ τριάκοντα κατεστάθησαν, εὐθέως κρίσιν

ts ἀνδρά 7 ἐποίουν ἐν τῇ βουλῃ, ὁ δὲ
τοῖς ἀνδράσι τούτοις τῇ ῇ;
Lal > “~ ’ 5 ’ 5 ’

δῆμος ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐν δισχιλίοις ἐψηφίσατο.

Καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι τὸ ψήφισμα.

WHOISMA.

36 = Bi μὲν οὖν ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐκρίνοντο, ῥᾳδίως
Ἅ 3 , . Ν no > , > a
av ἐσώζοντο" ἅπαντες yap ἤδη ἐγνωκότες ἦτε οὗ
ἣν κακοῦ ἡ πόλις, ἐν ᾧ οὐδὲν ἔτι ὠφελεῖν ἐδύνα-

“ 3 > Ν \ > Ν ν, 3 % “A
σθε: νῦν δ᾽ eis τὴν βουλὴν αὐτοὺς τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν
τριάκοντα εἰσάγουσιν. ἡ δὲ κρίσις τοιαύτη ἐγί-

ν x ε “Ὁ 3 ἈΝ - eee ε Ν

37 γνετο, οἵαν καὶ ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ ἐπίστασθε. οἱ μὲν

Ν ΄, νι τὴν ee. A , ἊΝ ae,
yap τριάκοντα ἐκάθηντο ἐπὶ τῶν βάθρων, οὗ νῦν
ε ’ ’ 4, \ , 3 ΜᾺ
ot πρυτάνεις καθέζονται: δύο δὲ τράπεζαι ἐν τῷ
πρόσθεν τῶν τριάκοντα ἐκείσθην τὴν δὲ ψῆφον

> > ’ > Ν Ν ιν Ν ’

οὐκ εἰς καδίσκους ἀλλὰ φανερὰν ἐπὶ τὰς τραπέζας
4 »» ’ Ἁ A lal > π
ταύτας ἔδει τίθεσθαι, THY μὲν καθαιροῦσαν ἐπὶ
\ ε ld 9 > 4 "g » /
τὴν ὑστέραν ...." ὥστε EK τίνος τρόπου ἔμελλέ
> ~ , ey Ν / 4 > ,

38 τις αὐτῶν σωθήσεσθαι; ἑνὶ δὲ λόγῳ, ὅσοι εἰς τὸ

’ : (Ὁ. A ’ > Lal
βουλευτήριον ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα εἰσῆλθον κριθη-
σόμενοι, ἁπάντων θάνατος κατεγινώσκετο καὶ οὐ-

ν > , \ > , Ah
δενὸς ἀπεψηφίσαντο, πλὴν ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουΐ"
τοῦτον δὲ ἀφεῖσαν ὡς εὐεργέτην ὄντα" ἵνα δὲ

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 47

εἰδῆτε ws πολλοὶ ὑπὸ τούτου τεθνᾶσι, βούλομαι

ὑμῖν τὰ ὀνόματα αὐτῶν ἀναγνῶναι.
ΟΝΟΜΑΤΑ.

ἈΝ > 3, ’, ,
᾿Επειδὴ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, θάνατος av-
a) , ‘ r+.) 3 Ν > /
τῶν κατεγνώσθη Kat ἔδει αὐτοὺς ἀποθνήσκειν,
4 > \ ’ ε A > ,
μεταπέμπονται εἰς TO δεσμωτήριον ὁ μὲν ἀδελφήν,
ε δὲ ’, ε δὲ a ε δ᾽ ν > ε ,
ὁ δὲ μητέρα, ὁ δὲ γυναῖκα, ὁ δ᾽ ἥ τις ἦν ἑκάστῳ
3 “A 7 ν
αὐτῶν προσήκουσα, ἵνα τὰ ὕστατα ἀσπασάμενοι
Ν eh Ψ Ν ’ ’ Ν Ἂν
τοὺς αὑτῶν οὕτω τὸν βίον τελευτήσειαν. καὶ δὴ
‘\ / / Ν 5 Ν \
καὶ Διονυσόδωρος μεταπέμπεται THY ἀδελφὴν τὴν
Ὅσο % “ lal >
ἐμὴν eis TO δεσμωτήριον, γυναῖκα ἑαυτοῦ οὖσαν.
’ > > / > La) 4 ε ,
πυθομένη δ᾽ ἐκείνη ἀφικνεῖται, μέλαν τε ἱμάτιον
> , ε ys > oh A 3 N 2 κα
ἠμφιεσμένη, .... WS εἰκὸς ἦν ἐπὶ τῷ ἀνδρὶ αὐτῆς
“ , Ν “A
τοιαύτῃ συμφορᾷ κεχρημένῳ. ἐναντίον δὲ τῆς
3 ~ A 3959 A / / 3 A x
ἀδελφῆς τῆς ἐμῆς Διονυσόδωρος τά TE οἰκεῖα τὰ
ε a / 7 > Lae > / Ν ὌΝ
αὑτοῦ διέθετο ὅπως αὐτῷ ἐδόκει, καὶ περὶ ᾽Αγο-
, ἂψ Ψ ¥ > A ,
ράτου τουτουὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι αἴτιος ἦν τοῦ θανάτου,
Ν Ν Ν , oh τ
καὶ ἐπέσκηπτεν ἐμοὶ καὶ Διονυσίῳ τουτωΐ, τῷ
ἀδελφῷ τῷ αὑτοῦ, καὶ τοῖς φίλ ᾶ ϊ
ω τῷ αὕτου, καὶ τοῖς φίλοις πᾶσι τιμωρεῖν
ε Ν ε a 3 / Ν “A ‘\ a ε “
ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ Ayopatov: καὶ τῇ γυναικὶ τῇ αὑτοῦ
“A ε lal Ν
ἐπέσκηπτε, νομίζων αὐτὴν κυεῖν ἐξ αὑτοῦ, ἐὰν
A An ΠῚ
γένηται αὐτῇ παιδίον, φράζειν τῷ γενομένῳ ὅτι
a>
τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ ᾿Αγόρατος ἀπέκτεινε, καὶ κελεύ-
a ee. ε a 54 >
EW τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ ὡς φονέα ὄντα. ὡς οὖν

ἀληθῆ λέγω, μάρτυρας τούτων παρέξομαι.

MAPTYPES.

39

40

41

42

48

43

44

45

46

XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

Οὗτοι μὲν τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὑπ᾽ *Ayo-
4, 5 4 > 4 > ἈΝ Ν 4
ράτου ἀπογραφέντες ἀπέθανον: ἐπεὶ δὲ τούτους
ἐκποδὼν ἐποιήσαντο οἱ τριάκοντα, σχεδὸν οἶμαι
ε “A > 4 ε Ν A Ν Ν lol
ὑμᾶς ἐπίστασθαι ὡς πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ μετὰ ταῦτα
τῇ πόλει ἐγένετο" ὧν οὗτος ἁπάντων αἴτιός ἐστιν,
ἀποκτείνας ἐκείνους. ἀνιῶμαι μὲν οὖν ὑπομιμνή-
σκων τὰς γεγενημένας συμφορὰς TH πόλει, ἀνάγκη
δ᾽ ἐστίν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἐν τῷ παρόντι καιρῷ,
σ » 5 -“ ε / e “ > “ , 5 ’
iv εἰδῆτε ὡς σφόδρα ὑμῖν ἐλεεῖν προσήκει ᾿Αγό-
ρατον. ἴστε μὲν γὰρ τοὺς ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος τῶν πο-
λιτῶν κομισθέντας, οἷοι ἦσαν καὶ ὅσοι, καὶ οἵῳ
5 ΄,΄ ε Ν al , > , » \
ὀλέθρῳ ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα ἀπώλοντο' LOTE δὲ
Ν 3 3 ial ε Ν ’ὔ ΄Ὁ απο
τοὺς ἐξ ᾿Ελευσῖνος, ὡς πολλοὶ ταύτῃ TH συμφορᾳ
> 4 4 ἈΝ ἈΝ Ἶ > 4 Ν Ν
ἐχρήσαντο: μέμνησθε δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἐνθάδε διὰ τὰς
307 3, 5 ὕ > Ν ld ἃ
ἰδίας ἔχθρας ἀπαγομένους εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον " ot
οὐδὲν κακὸν τὴν πόλιν ποιήσαντες ἠναγκάζοντο
» 4 A 5 4 5 4 5» ’ὔ ε
αἰσχίστῳ καὶ ἀκλεεστάτῳ ὀλέθρῳ ἀπόλλυσθαι, οἵ
μὲν γονέας [σφετέρους αὐτῶν] πρεσβύτας κατα-
’ Δ Ἂ ε Ν lal , > A
λείποντες, ot ἤλπιζον ὑπὸ τῶν σφετέρων αὐτῶν
4 / > A ’ A
παίδων γηροτροφηθέντες, ἐπειδὴ τελευτήσειαν τὸν
βίον, ταφήσεσθαι, οἱ δὲ ἀδελφὰς ἀνεκδότους, οἱ
δὲ τὸ ‘\ Lal 4 ’ ’ὔὕ
€ παῖδας μικροὺς πολλῆς ἔτι θεραπείας δεομένους
Y > Ὁ ΄, , \ ¥ ,
οὕς, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ποίαν Twa οἴεσθε γνώμην
Ν , ¥ a» ,ὔ AL ~ ,
περὶ τούτου ἔχειν, ἢ ποίαν Twa av ψῆφον θέσθαι,
εἰ ἐπ᾿ ἐκείνοις γένοιτο, ἀποστερηθέντας διὰ τοῦτον
“~ ε ’ὔ ” Ἀ Ν ’ ε ’ ΝῚ
τῶν ἡδίστων ; ἔτι δὲ τὰ τείχη ὡς κατεσκάφη, καὶ
at νῆες τοῖς πολεμίοις παρεδόθησαν, καὶ τὰ νεώρια
,’ A ,ὔ A 5» ’ὔ ε Lal
καθῃρέθη, καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι THY ἀκρόπολιν ὑμῶν

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 49

> US 8 , ν “ , λ 50
εἶχον, Kal ἡ δύναμις ἅπασα τῆς πόλεως παρελύθη,
ν Ν , lal > / 4 ‘\
ὥστε μηδὲν διαφέρειν τῆς ἐλαχίστης πόλεως τὴν

΄ x \ , ‘ 207 > + > ,
πόλιν. πρὸς δὲ τούτοις Tas ἰδίας οὐσίας ἀπωλέ-

Ν Ν ” ΄ bid Rinks
wate, Kal TO τελευταῖον συλλήβδην ἅπαντες ὑπὸ
τῶν τριάκοντα ἐκ τῆς πατρίδος ἐξηλάθητε. ταῦτα
> - ε 3 Ν » 3 / > ¥
ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ἄνδρες αἰσθόμενοι οὐκ ἔφασαν
» 4 Ν 3 4 > + 7 4
ἐπιτρέψαι τὴν εἰρήνην, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταΐ, ποιή-

a hi Se / ΄ 3 ,
σασθαι" ods σύ, “Aydpate, βουλομένους ἀγαθόν
τι πρᾶξαι τῇ πόλει ἀπέκτεινας, μηνύσας αὐτοὺς τῇ
πόλει ἐπιβουλεύειν [τῷ πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ], καὶ
αἴτιος εἶ ἁπάντων τῇ πόλει τῶν κακῶν τῶν γεγενη-
μένων. νῦν οὖν μνησθέντες καὶ τῶν ἰδίων ἕκαστος
δυστυχημάτων καὶ τῶν κοινῶν τῆς πόλεως, τιμω-
ρεῖσθε τὸν αἴτιον τούτων.

Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅ τί
ποτε τολμήσει πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀπολογεῖσθαι" δεῖ γὰρ
αὐτὸν ἀποδεῖξαι ὡς οὐ κατεμήνυσε τῶν ἀνδρῶν

, 50» » 3 ἊΨ > “A ΄ a >
τούτων οὐδ᾽ αἴτιος αὐτοῖς ἐστι τοῦ θανάτου, ὃ οὐκ
ἂν δύναιτο οὐδέποτε [ἀποδεῖξαι]. πρῶτον μὲν
γὰρ τὰ ψηφίσματα αὐτοῦ τὰ ἐκ τῆς βουλῆς καὶ
τοῦ δήμου καταμαρτυρεῖ, διαρρήδην ἀγορεύοντα
περὶ ὧν ᾿Αγόρατος κατείρηκεν - ἔπειτα ἡ κρίσις,
ἃ 3 ,ὕ Φι ῷ ἴω ’ὔ XN > ’ ,ὕ
ἣν ἐκρίθη ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα καὶ ἀφείθη, διαρρή-
ς

δὴν λέγει, “ διότι φησίν “ ἔδοξε τἀληθῆ εἰσαγ-

yethar.” Καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑΤΑ. TNOSIS. ΤΡΑΦΑΙ.

47

48

49

50 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

51

52

53

54

ε \ > > nee > N , ,
Ὡς μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἀπέγραψεν, οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ δύ.
> ἃ > ~ “A , ἃ Se Ὁ ε ’,
ναιτ᾽ ἂν ἀποδεῖξαι: δεῖ τοίνυν αὐτὸν ὡς δικαίως
ἐμήνυσε ταῦτα ἀποφαίνειν, ὁρῶν αὐτοὺς πονηρὰ
καὶ οὐκ ἐπιτήδεια τῷ δήμῳ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πράτ-
» 3 3 >) ἃ ~ > Ν 5 nw
TovTas. οἴομαι δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο αὐτὸν ἐπιχειρῆ-
> κ ¥
σαι ἀποδεικνύναι. οὐ yap δήπου, εἴ TL κακὸν TOV
lal lal ’ > /, c 4,
δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰργάσαντο, οἱ τριάκοντα,
’, is! 0 ’ “Ὁ ε δῆ an
δεδιότες μὴ καταλυθείη ἂν ὁ δῆμος, τιμωροῦντες
er r8 aA , Δ - N ἜΡΟΝ, 3 ἃ αὐ πῆς
ὑπὲρ τοῦ δήμου ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀπέκτειναν, ἀλλ᾽ οἶμαι
πολὺ τοὐναντίον τούτου.
3 3» "3 ἃ, “ Ν 3 4
ANN ἴσως φήσει ἄκων τοσαῦτα κακὰ ἐργάσα-
> 5S ” , >
σθαι. ἐγὼ δ᾽ οὐκ οἶμαι, ὦ avdpes δικασταί, οὐδ
57 ε “ ε 4, » ’ Ν 3 ,
ἐάν τις ὑμᾶς ὡς μάλιστα ἄκων μεγάλα κακὰ ἐργά-
& ‘\ er , > Ν ε ΄
σηται, ὧν μὴ οἷόν τε γενέσθαι ἐστὶν ὑπερβολήν,
3 4 A > ~ ε ΄“ > ’ὔ > Ν
οὐ τούτου ἕνεκα οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι. εἶτα δὲ
Ν > , / [2 eA > , hk
καὶ ἐκείνων μέμνησθε, ὅτι ἐξῆν ᾿Αγοράτῳ τουτωΐ,
Ἀ 5 Ν A n~ 7” > : pele, * ἴων
πρὶν εἰς τὴν βουλὴν κομισθῆναι, ὅτ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ
a 5 ’ἢ , ἴω \ A
βωμοῦ ἐκάθητο Μουνυχίασι, σωθῆναι: Kal yap
val ,
πλοῖα παρεσκεύαστο Kal οἱ ἐγγνηταὶ ἕτοιμοι ἦσαν
’ 7 > > ’ 5 , Ν > ’
συναπιέναι. καίτοι εἰ ἐκείνοις ἐπίθου καὶ ἠθέ-
aA 3 , φ δ ¥
Anoas ἐκπλεῦσαι μετ᾽ ἐκείνων, οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἑκὼν οὔτε
» , > , i ee A \
ἄκων τοσούτους ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπέκτεινας" νῦν δὲ
\ ey? @® s > , > A a
πεισθεὶς ὑφ᾽ ὧν τότε ἐπείσθης, εἰ τῶν στρατηγῶν
Ν ~ , Ν , »
καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων τὰ ὀνόματα μόνον εἴποις, μέγα
Ν > an
τι @ov Tap αὐτῶν διαπράξασθαι. οὔκουν τούτου
9 ~ > wn a
ἕνεκα δεῖ σε Tap ἡμῶν συγγνώμης τινὸς τυχεῖν,
Ἁ Ν ΄“ Ν a a » ἃ
ἐπεὶ οὐδὲ ἐκεῖνοι παρὰ σοῦ οὐδεμιᾶς ἔτυχον, ods
Ν > / a) © ’ Ν ε ᾿ ‘\
σὺ ἀπέκτεινας. Kat Ἱππίας μὲν ὁ Θάσιος καὶ

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.

= Le} ε Κ ὃ a Ar 8% a Pt > ς ΄
Ξενοφῶν ὁ Καριδεύς, ot ἐπὶ TH AUTH αἰτίᾳ τούτῳ
ae “ aA. , e \ > ΄
ὑπὸ τῆς βουλῆς μετεπέμφθησαν, οὗτοι μὲν ἀπέ-
θανον, ὁ μὲν στρεβλωθείς, Ἐενοφῶν, ὃ δὲ Ἱππίας
- ’ > » > ’ = Ud
οὕτω ...., διότι οὐκ ἄξιοι ἐδόκουν τοῖς τριάκοντα
σωτηρίας εἶναι (οὐδένα γὰρ ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπώλλυ-
σαν)" ᾿Αγόρατος δὲ ἀφείθη, διότι ἐδόκει ἐκείνοις
τὰ ἥδιστα πεποιηκέναι.
3 4 > 20 8 Ἀ > ’ > 4
Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ εἰς Μενέστρατον ἀναφέρειν
ἈΝ “a Len ΄ Ν ἈΝ ΄“ ’
τι περὶ τῶν γραφῶν τούτων. τὸ δὲ τοῦ Μενεστρά-
του πρᾶγμα τοιοῦτον ἐγένετο. ὁ Μενέστρατος
a > , en. κα an > , \
οὗτος ἀπεγράφη ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αγοράτου καὶ συλλη-
φθεὶς ἐδέδετο- ᾿Αγνόδωρος δ᾽ ἢν ᾿Αμφιτροπαιεύς,
δημότης τοῦ Μενεστράτου, Κριτίου κηδεστὴς τοῦ
A , - > 9 ε » ΄
τῶν τριάκοντα. οὗτος οὖν, ὅτε ἡ ἐκκλησία Μου-
, 5 “ , thee a4 \ /
νυχίασιν ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ ἐγίνετο, ἅμα μὲν Bovdo-
Ν / “A 7 δὲ ε ΄
μενος τὸν Μενέστρατον σωθῆναι, ἅμα δὲ ὡς πλεί-
στους ἀπογραφέντας ἀπολέσθαι, παράγει αὐτὸν
» ‘ “a Ἀ ε , > ~ Ν Ν ’
εἰς τὸν δῆμον, καὶ εὑρίσκονται αὐτῷ κατὰ τὸ ψή-
φισμα τουτὶ ἄδειαν.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

᾿Ἐπειδὴ δὲ τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐγένετο, μηνύει

ὁ Μενέστρατος καὶ προσαπογράφει ἑτέρους τῶν

πολιτῶν. τοῦτον μέντοι οἱ μὲν τριάκοντα ἀφεῖσαν
nd > Ld , ’ > “A >

ὥσπερ ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονί, δόξαντα τἀληθῆ εἰσαγ-

γεῖλαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον λαβόν-
> ὃ ’ ε > ὃ , 3, θ ’ὔ

τες ἐν δικαστηρίῳ ὡς ἀνδροφόνον ὄντα, θάνατον

51

55

56

52

57

58

59

60

XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

ὃ κ tw τ ψ φ , “ ὃ , ὃ Ν
ικαίως καταψηφισάμενοι, τῷ δημίῳ παρέδοτε, καὶ
ἀπετυμπανίσθη. καίτοι εἰ ἐκεῖνος ἀπέθανεν, ἢ
> ’ / ’ > A 9 ,
που ᾿Αγόρατός ye δικαίως ἀποθανεῖται, ὅς ye τόν
’ 3 4 » > 4 > Ν
τε Μενέστρατον ἀπογράψας αἴτιος ἐκείνῳ ἐστὶ
ἴω ‘4 “
Tov θανάτου, καὶ τοῖς ὑπὸ Μενεστράτου ἀπογρα-
φεῖσι τίς αἰτιώτερος ἢ ὁ εἰς τοιαύτην ἀνάγκην
ἐκεῖνον καταστήσας ;
᾿Ανόμοιος δέ μοι δοκεῖ ᾿Αριστοφάνει γενέσθαι
ᾧ Χολλείδῃ, ὃς ἐγγνητὴς τότε τούτου ἐγένετο καὶ
ἐς ey ee ST ae Y
A >
Ta πλοῖα παρασκευάσας Μουνυχίασιν ἕτοιμως ἢν
A“ Ν ω
συνεκπλεῖν μετὰ τούτου. καὶ TO γε ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον
> 3 , Ν yo HK > , 2»Qz > ,
εἶναι ἐσώθης, Kai οὔτ᾽ ἂν ᾿Αθηναίων οὐδένα ἀπώ-
λεσας οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς σὺ εἰς τοιούτους κινδύνους
la “~ Ν ~
κατέστης" νῦν δὲ καὶ τὸν σωτῆρα τὸν σαυτοῦ
οι 14 > “4 Ν 5 , > 4
ἐτόλμησας ἀπογράψαι, καὶ ἀπογράψας ἀπέκτεινας
al 4 an“
καὶ ἐκεῖνον καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἐγγυητάς. τοῦτον
ld ε 5 ~*~ > Lal ¥ > 4 ,
μέντοι ὡς ov καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖον ὄντα ἐβούλοντό
“ Ν Ν Ν
τινες βασανισθῆναι, καὶ τουτὶ τὸ ψήφισμα τὸν
lal /
δῆμον ἀναπείθουσι ψηφίζεσθαι.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

4 nw ’ ’ὔ A> ,
Mera τοῦτο τοίνυν προσιόντες τῷ ᾿Αριστοφάνει
οἱ πράττοντες τότε τὰ πράγματα ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ
κατειπεῖν καὶ σώζεσθαι, καὶ μὴ κινδυνεύειν ἀγω-
νισάμενον τῆς ξενίας τὰ ἔσχατα παθεῖν. ὁ δὲ
» Ὁ» » 4 9 Ν Ν Ν
οὐκ ἔφη οὐδέποτε: οὕτω χρηστὸς ἣν καὶ περὶ

A ld ‘ ἈΝ Ν ΄“ Ν > ,
τοὺς δεδεμένους Kal περὶ τὸν δῆμον τὸν ᾿Αθηναίων,

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.

ν ν ἴω 5 a. “ἡ “ 4
ὥστε εἵλετο μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν ἢ κατειπεῖν καὶ
» ’ A 5 ’ 5 “a Ν 4 .
ἀδίκως τινὰς ἀπολέσαι. ἐκεῖνος μὲν τοίνυν Kal
ε A nw > 4 Ν > 4 —
ὑπὸ σοῦ ἀπολλύμενος τοιουτοσὶ ἐγένετο [καὶ Eevo-
dav ὁ στρεβλωθεὶς καὶ Ἱππίας ὁ Θάσιος]: σὺ δ᾽
50 5 Pe Sy , ars , \ \
οὐδὲν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἐκείνοις συνειδώς, πεισθεὶς δὲ
ε 4 “ἡ 5 “ 5 7 , Lal ,
ὡς σύ γε, ἂν ἐκεῖνοι ἀπόλωνται, μεθέξεις τῆς τότε
πολιτείας καθισταμένης, ἀπέγραφες καὶ ἀπέκτεινας
᾿Αθηναίων πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθούς.
Βούλομαι δ᾽ ὑμῖν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἐπιδεῖξαι
ν > »“ 9 εν ,’ 5 4 > A
οἵων ἀνδρῶν ὑπὶ ᾿Αγοράτου ἀπεστερήθητε. εἰ μὲν
> a \ θ᾽ μ4 “ἡ Ν δ΄ νὰ 5 ,
ov πολλοὶ ἦσαν, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἂν περὶ αὐτῶν ἠκού-
nw 4 , A , ε A Ν
ετε, νῦν δὲ συλλήβδην περὶ πάντων. οἱ μὲν γὰρ,
στρατηγήσαντες ὑμῖν πολλάκις, μείζω τὴν πόλιν
τοῖς διαδεχομένοις στρατηγοῖς παρεδίδοσαν " οἱ δ᾽
»
ἑτέρας μεγάλας ἀρχὰς ἀρξαντες καὶ τριηραρχίας
Ν 4 > ὕ ε 5 ε “ 5»
πολλὰς τριηραρχήσαντες οὐδεπώποτε ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν οὐ-
δεμίαν αἰτίαν αἰσχρὰν ἔσχον. οἱ δ᾽ αὐτῶν περι-
γενόμενοι καὶ σωθέντες, ods οὗτος μὲν ἀπέκτεινεν
5 “~ A , 5 ΄“ ’ ε ἈΝ ’
ὠμῶς καὶ θάνατος αὐτῶν κατεγνώσθη, ἡ δὲ τύχη
A ε 4 ’ ’ Ν > 4 ὃ
καὶ ὁ δαίμων περιεποίησε" φυγόντες γὰρ ἐνθένδε
A 5 4 > Ν ε ,ὔ A
καὶ ov συλληφθέντες γε οὐδὲ ὑπομείναντες τὴν
4 ’ 5 ἈΝ ~ - ε > ε ~
κρίσιν, κατελθόντες ἀπὸ Φυλῆς τιμῶνται ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν
ε 3, 5 Wh. ς
ὡς ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ ὄντες.
,’ 4, 7 »Ὰ 5 , .
Τούτους μέντοι τοιούτους ὄντας ᾿Αγόρατος τοὺς
Ἀ ΓΑ ν ν δὲ 5 > a θ > ,
μὲν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δὲ φυγάδας ἐντεῦθεν ἐποίησε,
’, ΕΣ 3 ¢ ~ Ν Cog ee 559. 7 4 “ Ν
τίς ὧν αὐτός ; δεῖ γὰρ ὑμᾶς εἰδέναι ὅτι δοῦλος καὶ
5 4 5» ,ὕ 7 > > ~ a a ε nw > ,
ἐκ δούλων ἐστίν, ἵν εἰδῆτε οἷος ὧν ὑμᾶς ἐλυμαί-
Ν > 4
νετο. τούτῳ μὲν yap πατὴρ ἣν Evpapys, ἐγένετο

53

61

63

64

54 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

δὲ ὁ Εὐμάρης οὗτος Νικοκλέους καὶ ᾿Αντικλέους.
Καί μοι ἀνάβητε μάρτυρες.

ΜΑΡΤΎΡΕΣ.

65ς [Πολλὰ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅσα κακὰ
Ν 3 Ν Ν ’ Ν ~ , > cs
καὶ αἰσχρὰ καὶ τούτῳ Kal τοῖς τούτου ἀδελφοῖς
> ΄ ἣν", ἊΝ, ἊΨ. ¥ ΄ Ν Ν
ἐπιτετήδευται, πολὺ ἂν εἴη ἔργον λέγειν. περὶ δὲ
΄ ν 2 Xx ΄ 297
συκοφαντίας, ὅσας οὗτος ἢ δίκας ἰδίας συκοφαν-
“ 5 U4 x» ‘ ν 9 ’, “Δ 3
τῶν ἐδικάζετο ἢ γραφὰς ὅσας ἐγράφετο ἢ ἀπο-
Ν 3 ’ > 4 Ὁ > 4
γραφὰς ἀπέγραφεν, οὐδέν pe Set καθ᾽ ἕκαστον
λέγειν: συλλήβδην γὰρ ὑμεῖς ἅπαντες καὶ ἐν τῷ
δήμῳ καὶ ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ συκοφαντίας αὐτοῦ
κατέγνωτε καὶ ὥφλησεν ὑμῖν μυρίας δραχμάς,
66 ὥστε τοῦτο μὲν ἱκανῶς ὑπὸ ὑμῶν ἁπάντων μεμαρ-
τύρηται. γυναῖκας τοίνυν τῶν πολιτῶν τοιοῦτος
“ἃ ͵ὔ Ν ὃ 0 la 3 7 > ld
ὧν μοιχεύειν καὶ διαφθείρειν ἐλευθέρας ἐπεχεί-
Ν > ‘4 , Ἀ ’ ’ὔ ε
ρῆσε, καὶ ἐλήφθη μοιχός: καὶ τούτου θάνατος ἡ
ζημία ἐστίν. ‘Os δὲ ἀληθῆ λέγω, μάρτυρας κάλει.

MAPTYPES. |

67 Ἦσαν τοίνυν οὗτοι, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, τέττα-
ρες ἀδελφοί. τούτων εἷς μὲν ὁ πρεσβύτερος ἐν
Σικελίᾳ παραφρυκτωρευόμενος τοῖς πολεμίοις λη-

Ἀ ε Ν , 3 , ε δος
φθεὶς ὑπὸ Λαμάχου ἀπετυμπανίσθη. ὁ δὲ ἕτερος
εἰς Κόρινθον μὲν ἐντευθενὶ ἀνδράποδον ἐξήγαγεν,
> A 4 , > a > \ ¢\ 7
ἐκεῖθεν δὲ παιδίσκην ἀστῆς ἐξαγαγὼν ἁλίσκεται,

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 55

καὶ ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ δεδεμένος ἀπέθανε τὸν δὲ 68
τρίτον Φαινιππίδης ἐνθάδε λωποδύτην ἀπήγαγε,
καὶ ὑμεῖς κρίναντες αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ καὶ
καταγνόντες αὐτοῦ θάνατον ἀποτυμπανίσαι παρέ
δοτε. ὡς δὲ ἀληθῆ λέγω, καὶ αὐτὸν οἶμαι ὁμολο-
γήσειν τοῦτον καὶ μάρτυρας παρεξόμεθα.

ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.

Πῶς οὖν οὐχ ἅπασι προσήκει ὑμῖν τούτου κατα- 69
’ > ‘ , 4 5 A ε 4,
ψηφίζεσθαι; εἰ yap τούτων ἕκαστος δι᾿ ἕν ἁμάρ-
τημα θανάτου ἠξιώθη, ἦ που τοῦ γε πολλὰ ἐξη-

’ Ν ’ > ‘ , 5, ote >
μαρτηκότος καὶ δημοσίᾳ eis THY πόλιν Kal ἰδίᾳ εἰς
ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὧν ἑκάστου ἁμαρτήματος ἐν τοῖς

’ὔ’ Μ᾿ ε a > ’ »Ὁ ε al ,
νόμοις θάνατος ἡ ζημία ἐστί, δεῖ ὑμᾶς σφόδρα
θάνατον αὐτοῦ καταψηφίσασθαι.

ΕἾ A

Λέξει δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, καὶ ἐξαπατῆσαι 70
ὑμᾶς πειράσεται, ὡς ἐπὶ τῶν τετρακοσίων Φρύνι-

3 ΄ ἈΠ. 5 ‘ , z \ ΒΤ Ἂν 3
χον ἀπέκτεινε, καὶ ἀντὶ τούτου φησὶν αὐτὸν ᾿Αθη-

a N A , , > »
ναῖον τὸν δῆμον ποιήσασθαι, ψευδόμενος, ὦ ἄνδρες
δικασταί: οὔτε γὰρ Φρύνιχον ἀπέκτεινεν, οὔτε
3 “ Ἢ ὧς ε Lal > id ,
A@nvaiov αὐτὸν ὁ δῆμος ἐποιήσατο. Φρυνίχῳ 71

’ > » ’ “A 4 4 ε
γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταΐ, κοινῇ Θρασύβουλός τε 6
Καλυδώνιος καὶ ᾿Απολλόδωρος ὃ Μεγαρεὺς ἐπεβού-
λευσαν: ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐπετυχέτην αὐτῷ βαδίζοντι, ὁ

Ν 4 ’ Ν , ἈΝ
μὲν Θρασύβουλος τύπτει τὸν Φρύνιχον καὶ κατα-
βάλλει πατάξας, ὁ δὲ ᾿Απολλόδωρος οὐχ ἡψατο᾽
ἅμα τούτῳ κραυγὴ γίνεται καὶ ῴᾧχοντο φεύγοντες.

56 XIII. KATA ΑΤΟΡΑΤΟΥ.

> , κ᾿ ε N ¥ , ¥
Αγόρατος δὲ οὑτοσὶ οὔτε παρεκλήθη οὔτε Tape
,ὕ + 75 “~ ’ὔ ὃ ,ὕ ε A
γένετο οὔτε οἶδε τοῦ πράγματος οὐδέν. ὡς δὲ
ἀληθῆ λέγω, αὐτὸ ὑμῖν τὸ ψήφισμα δηλώσει.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

72 “Ore μὲν οὐκ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, ἐξ αὐτοῦ τοῦ
, ol 5 A /, > > ,
ψηφίσματος δῆλον - οὐδαμοῦ γάρ ἐστιν ᾿Αγόρατον
᾿Αθηναῖον εἶναι ὥσπερ Θρασύβουλον καὶ ᾿Απολλό-
δωρον" καίτοι εἴπερ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, ἔδει αὐ-
ἈΝ > nw 5 “ , 9 Ξ 4 A
τὸν ἐν TH αὐτῇ στήλῃ, Wa περ Θρασύβουλον Kat
᾿Απολλόδωρον, ᾿Αθηναῖον πεποιημένον .... τὰ
μέντοι ὀνόματα διαπράττονται τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν,
δόντες ἀργύριον τῷ ῥήτορι, προσγραφῆνγαι εἰς τὴν
4 ε » 4 »¥ A ε >. nw 4
στήλην ὡς εὐεργέτας ὄντας. Kal ὡς ἀληθῆ λέγω,

τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐλέγξει.

ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.

3 Οὕτω μέντοι οὗτος πολὺ ὑμῶν καταφρονεῖ, ὥστε
οὐκ ὧν ᾿Αθηναῖος καὶ ἐδίκαζε καὶ ἐξεκλησίαζε καὶ
‘ ‘ > > ’ > , > ,
γραφὰς τὰς ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἐγράφετο, ἐπιγραφό’
μενος ᾿Αναγυράσιος εἶναι. ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἕτερον
/ ’ ε > 5 ’ , 9 aA
μέγα τεκμήριον ὡς οὐκ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, Sv ὃ
3 “s,s nw ε ’ Ν by
Αθηναῖός φησι γεγενῆσθαι. ὃ Φρύνιχος yap οὗ-
τος τοὺς τετρακοσίους κατέστησεν" ἐπειδὴ δ᾽

> κα ἀν του ε ‘ val , ¥
ἐκεῖνος ἀπέθανεν, οἱ πολλοὶ τῶν τετρακοσίων ἔφυ-
74 γον. πότερον οὖν δοκοῦσιν ὑμῖν οἱ τριάκοντα καὶ
ε Ἀ ΜΝ ΗΝ Ὁ ΄“ ’ 4 a > Ν
ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα βουλεύουσα, Ot αὐτοὶ

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.

ἦσαν ἅπαντες τῶν τετρακοσίων τῶν φυγόντων,
9 A Δ , N , 3 ΄
ἀφεῖναι ἂν λαβόντες τὸν Φρύνιχον ἀποκτείναντα,
x la ε Ν ’, Ν lal a -
ἢ τιμωρήσασθαι ὑπὲρ Φρυνίχου καὶ τῆς φυγῆς ἧς
αὐτοὶ ἔφυγον; ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι τιμωρεῖσθαι ἄν.
εἰ μὲν οὖν μὴ ἀποκτείνας προσποιεῖται, ἀδικεῖ, ὡς
ἐγώ φημι" εἰ δὲ ἀμφισβητεῖς καὶ φὴς Φρύνιχον
> a A Ψ ΄ Ν A δῷ «τῇ
ἀποκτεῖναι, δῆλον ὅτι μείζω τὸν δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθη-
ναίων κακὰ ποιήσας τὴν ὑπὲρ Φρυνίχου αἰτίαν
πρὸς τοὺς τριάκοντα ἀπελύσω - οὐδέποτε γὰρ πεί-
> 4 > 4 ε uA > /
σεις οὐδένα ἀνθρώπων ws Φρύνιχον ἀποκτείνας
> , ἣν δὰ an , 3 N , ‘
ἀφείθης ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα, εἰ μὴ μεγάλα τὸν
δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ἀνήκεστα κακὰ εἰργάσω.
ΕΣ Ἁ > , , > “A 4
ἐὰν μὲν οὖν φάσκῃ Φρύνιχον ἀποκτεῖναι, τούτων
μέμνησθε, καὶ τοῦτον τιμωρεῖσθε ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἐποίη-
5Ν > > , » : δ. 2 ¢ Ἀ
σεν" ἐὰν δ᾽ οὐ φάσκῃ, ἔρεσθε αὐτὸν δι᾽ 6 τι φησὶν
“Ὁ -“ >” nw
᾿Αθηναῖος ποιηθῆναι. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἔχῃ ἀποδεῖξαι,
~ HTM 9 Ἀ 50. . Ν > ’
τιμωρεῖσθε αὐτὸν ὅτι καὶ ἐδίκαζε καὶ ἐξεκλησιάζε
A ¥
καὶ ἐσυκοφάντει πολλοὺς ws ᾿Αθηναῖος τοὔνομα
ἐπιγραφόμενος.
᾿Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν παρασκευάζεσθαι ἀπολογεῖσθαι
ὡς ἐπὶ Φυλήν τε ῴχετο καὶ συγκατῆλθε ἀπὸ Φυ-
λῆς, καὶ τοῦτο μέγιστον ἀγώνισμα εἶναι. ἐγένετο
δὲ τοιοῦτον. ἦλθεν οὗτος ἐπὶ Φυλήν - καίτοι πῶς
ΕΝ 4 ἊΝ ’ ν 3 Ν ν
ἂν γένοιτο ἄνθρωπος μιαρώτερος, ὅστις εἰδὼς ὅτι
εἰσί τινες ἐπὶ Φυλῇ τῶν ὑπὸ τούτου ἐκπεπτωκότων
ἐτόλμησεν ἐλθεῖν ὡς τούτους ; ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἶδον αὐ-
x , / » » e
τὸν τάχιστα, συλλαβόντες ἄγουσιν ἄντικρυς ὡς
> A a δ ἀν" ὧν 4 κὰν
ἀποκτενοῦντεές, οὗπερ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπέσφαττον,

57

75

76

78

58 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

79

80

81

" ἄγον κὰς a ,
εἴ τινα λῃστὴν ἢ κακοῦργον συλλάβοιεν. στρα-
τηγῶν δὲ “Avutos [ἐπὶ Φυλὴν] οὐκ ἔφη χρῆναι
ποιεῖν αὐτοὺς ταῦτα, λέγων ὅτι οὐχ οὕτω διακέ-
” A , a 5 A > \
owTo, ὥστε τιμωρεῖσθαί τινας τῶν ἐχθρῶν, ἀλλὰ
νῦν μὲν δεῖν αὐτοὺς ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν, εἰ δέ ποτε
οἴκαδε κατέλθοιεν, τότε καὶ τιμωρήσοιντο τοὺς
ἀδικοῦντας. ταῦτα λέγων αἴτιος ἐγένετο τοῦ ἀπο-
φυγεῖν τοῦτον ἐπὶ Φυλῇ - ἀνάγκη δὲ ἦν στρατη-
“A 3 ὃ Ν > “ 4 » dr θ 4,
you ἀνδρὸς ἀκροᾶσθαι, εἴπερ ἔμελλον σωθήσε-
> » Pk. 3, Ν / ,
σθαι. ἀλλ᾽ ἕτερον: οὔτε yap συσσιτήσας τούτῳ
ΕΝ
οὐδεὶς φανήσεται οὔτε σύσκηνος γενόμενος, οὔτε
ε ,ὔ 3 Ν \ , 5 > ¢
ὁ ταξίαρχος εἰς τὴν φυλὴν κατατάξας, ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ
ἀλιτηρίῳ οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων αὐτῷ διελέγετο. Καί
μοι κάλει τὸν ταξίαρχον.

MAPTY3.

᾿Επειδὴ δὲ ai διαλλάγαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐγένοντο
+. Ὁ ἫΝ , ε a > , Ν \
καὶ ἔπεμψαν οἱ πολῖται ἐκ Πειραιώς τὴν πομπὴν
> / c “Ὁ A ¥ “ nw a
εἰς πόλιν, ἡγεῖτο μὲν Αἴσιμος τῶν πολιτῶν, οὗτος
\ 9 ‘\ \ > eee 4 ,
δὲ οὕτω τολμηρὸς Kal ἐκεῖ ἐγένετο: συνηκολούθει
Ν \ ‘ 9 Ν , Ν \
yap λαβὼν τὰ ὅπλα Kal συνέπεμπε THY πομπὴν
A a a Ν Ν Ἂ > Ν \ Ν
μετὰ τῶν πολιτῶν πρὸς τὸ ἄστυ. ἐπειδὴ δὲ πρὸς
A , > . ¥ A Ae \ >
ταῖς πύλαις ἦσαν Kal ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, πρὶν εἰσι-
’ 5 ‘A Ἂ ε Ν Ἂν > 4 \
έναι εἰς TO ἄστυ, ὁ μὲν Αἴσιμος αἰσθάνεται Kal
προσελθὼν τήν τε ἀσπίδα αὐτοῦ λαβὼν ἔρριψε,
καὶ ἀπιέναι ἐκέλευσεν ἐς κόρακας ἐκ τῶν πολι-
“ > ‘ » ~ > / a~$ »”
τῶν: ov yap ἔφη δεῖν ἀνδροφόνον αὐτὸν ὄντα

XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 59

συμπέμπειν τὴν πομπὴν TH AOnva. τούτῳ τῷ
τρόπῳ ὑπὸ Αἰσίμου ἀπηλάθη. Ὥς δ᾽ ἀληθῆ λέγω,
κάλει μοι τοὺς μάρτυρας.

ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.

’ σὰ ’ > »” ὃ ὃ / Ν Φι Ἂς
Τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, καὶ ἐπὶ
» Ἀ ~
Φυλῇ καὶ ἐν Πειραιεῖ πρὸς τοὺς πολίτας διέκειτο "
οὐδεὶς γὰρ αὐτῷ διελέγετο ὡς ἀνδροφόνῳ 6 v
yap αὐτᾷ Ύετο ws ἀνδροφόνῳ ὄντι, TOD
Ν δ 9 μον. οὟἮὟῇ be δ 8: να + 2
τε μὴ ἀποθανεῖν “Avutos ἐγένετο αὐτῷ αἴτιος. ἐὰν
s “Ὃς α΄ κ Ν AN: ΄, A ε
οὖν τῇ ἐπὶ Φυλὴν ὁδῷ ἀπολογίᾳ χρῆται, ὑπολαμ-
’ Ν >» ΄“ »
βάνειν χρὴ εἰ “Avutos αὐτῷ ἐγένετο αἴτιος μὴ ἀπο-
“- , ΕΝ “-
θανεῖν ἑτοίμων ὄντων τιμωρεῖσθαι, καὶ ἔρριψεν
tists ¥ X > , ‘ > ¥ Ν A
αὐτοῦ Αἴσιμος τὴν ἀσπίδα Kal οὐκ εἴα μετὰ TOV
lal Ν ¥” Ν
πολιτῶν πέμπειν τὴν πομπήν, καὶ εἴ τις αὐτὸν
," > ’ ‘ /
ταξίαρχος εἰς τάξιν τινὰ κατέταξε.
, > A 3 a6 , , Δ
Μήτε οὖν ταῦτα αὐτοῦ ἀποδέχεσθε, μήτε ἂν
’, ν ἰδὲ ’ wa ’ >
λέγῃ ὅτι πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον τιμωρούμεθα. οὐ
γὰρ οἶμαι οὐδεμίαν τῶν τοιούτων ἀδικημάτων προ-
, > > τὰν Ὁ Ν 3 » > ὑθὺ »
θεσμίαν εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι, ett εὐθὺς εἴτε
cal nA “A >
χρόνῳ Tis τιμωρεῖται, τοῦτον δεῖν ἀποδεικνύναι ὡς
- e
οὐ πεποίηκε περὶ ὧν ἐστιν ἡ αἰτία. οὗτος τοίνυν
lal > ,ὕ ΕἸ ε > 7 , > / x
τοῦτο ἀποφαινέτω, ἢ WS οὐκ ἀπέκτεινεν ἐκείνους ἢ
’ “ -“ A
ὡς δικαίως, κακόν τι ποιοῦντας τὸν δῆμον τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων. εἰ δὲ πάλαι δέον τιμωρεῖσθαι ὕστερον
ε A , Ν ’ ’, ὰ » >
ἡμεῖς τιμωρούμεθα, τὸν χρόνον κερδαίνει ὃν ἔζη οὐ
»-»" » “Ὁ ε Ν + ε Ν ’ 3 Ν
προσῆκον αὐτῷ, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες ὑπὸ τούτου οὐδὲν

ΑΝ : ,
ἧττον τεθνήκασιν.

82

83

60

85

86

87

XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

᾿Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ διισχυρίζεσθαι, ὅτι ἐπ᾽
αὐτοφώρῳ τῇ ἀπαγωγῇ ἐπιγέγραπται: ὃ πάντων
ἐγὼ οἶμαι εὐηθέστατον: ὡς εἰ μὲν τὸ ἐπ᾽ αὐὖτο-
φώρῳ μὴ προσεγέγραπτο, ἔνοχος ὧν τῇ ἀπαγωγῇ "
4 Ν ~ vA ε ’ Ν
διότι δὲ τοῦτο προσγέγραπται, ῥᾳστώνην τινὰ
¥ eee. A κ᾿ 3 \ » »
οἴεται αὑτῷ εἶναι. τοῦτο δὲ οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ ἔοικεν
ἂν, a 3 A eS > ΄ , \
ἢ ὁμολογεῖν ἀποκτεῖναι, μὴ ἐπ αὐτοφώρῳ δέ, Kai
Ν , 4 ν > Ἁ me, >
περὶ τούτου διισχυρίζεσθαι, ὥσπερ, εἰ μὴ ἐπ᾽ av-
a 4 5» ,ὔ’ 4 7 4 7 5 Ν ’
τοφώρῳ μέν, ἀπέκτεινε δέ, τούτου ἕνεκα δέον αὐτὸν
’ mn 3. ἃν ε ν ε
σώζεσθαι. δοκοῦσι δ᾽ ἔμοιγε οἱ ἕνδεκα οἱ παρα-
δεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπαγωγὴν ταύτην, οὐκ οἰόμενοι
> 4 4 , Ν ,
Αγοράτῳ συμπράττειν τότε Kal διισχυριζόμενοι
σφόδρα ὀρθῶς ποιῆσαι Διονύσιον, τὴν ἀπαγωγὴν
/
ἀπάγειν ἀναγκάζοντες, προσγράψασθαι τότε ἐπὶ
αὐτοφώρῳ, ἢ ὅπου ἂν ἢ" πρῶτον μὲν ἐναντίον
, > A & Ls , > ΄
πεντακοσίων ἐν τῇ βουλῃ, εἶτα πάλιν ἐναντίον
"AGO: 4 ε 4 > “Ὁ ὃ ’ 3 ’ὔ Ν
ναίων ἁπάντων ἐν τῷ δήμῳ ἀπογράψας τινὰς
ἀποκτείνειε καὶ αἴτιος γένοιτο τοῦ θανάτου. οὐ
‘ ὃ ΄ “ , ¥ ee 3 , 27
yap δήπου τοῦτο μόνον οἴεται ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, ἐάν
7 “Δ ,ὔ ’ ’ > Ν »
τις ξύλῳ ἢ μαχαίρᾳ πατάξας καταβάλῃ, ἐπεὶ ἔκ
γε Tov σοῦ λόγου οὐδεὶς φανήσεται ἀποκτείνας
Ν 3, ὃ a \ > ,ὔ 4 Ν > 4
TOVS avopas οὺς σὺ ἀπέγραψας" οὔτε yap ἐπά-
ταξεν αὐτοὺς οὐδεὶς οὔτ᾽ ἀπέσφαξεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναγκα-
’ ε Ν al Cal » A 5» , >
σθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς σῆς ἀπογραφῆς ἀπέθανον. οὐκ
εὐ ε ¥ lal , e .: > ,
οὖν ὁ αἴτιος τοῦ θανάτου, οὗτος ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ
> 4 4 > » » a» Ν 3 4
ἐστί; τίς οὖν ἄλλος αἴτιος ἢ σὺ ἀπογράψας ;
΄ ry > > > > , Ν > ε 3
ὥστε πῶς οὐκ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ σὺ εἶ ὁ ἀπο-

κτείνας ;

XIII]. AGAINST AGORATUS. 61

’ > a. S, Ν ‘ A 7 Ν
Πυνθάνομαι δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ περὶ τῶν ὅρκων καὶ
\ a “-“ , / ε Ν 5.
περὶ τῶν συνθηκῶν μέλλειν λέγειν, ὡς Tapa τοὺς
ν Ν Ν 4 5 ’ A /
ὅρκους καὶ Tas συνθήκας ἀγωνίζεται ἃς συνεθέ-
Ν Ν 3 Ἂν ε » A“ “
μεθα πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ἄστει οἱ ἐν [τῷ] Πειραιεῖ.
σχεδὸν μὲν οὖν τούτοις ἰσχυριζόμενος ὁμολογεῖ
> , > 3 Ν a a gY x
ἀνδροφόνος εἶναι: ἐμποδὼν γοῦν ἢ ὅρκους ἢ συν-
θήκας ἢ χρόνον ἢ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ τι ποιεῖται, αὐτῷ
δὲ τῷ πράγματι οὔ τι πιστεύει καλῶς ἀγωνιεῖσθαι.
ca , > » , > ͵ Ν 4,
ὑμῖν δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οὐ προσήκει περὶ τού-
των ἀποδέχεσθαι: ἀλλ᾽ ὡς οὐκ ἀπέγραψεν οὐδὲ
ε »” lal ‘\ 4 7 ee"
οἱ ἄνδρες τεθνᾶσι, περὶ τούτων κελεύετε αὐτὸν
ἀπολογεῖσθαι. ἔπειτα τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τὰς συν-
θήκας οὐδὲν ἡγοῦμαι προσήκειν ἡμῖν πρὸς τοῦτον.
οἱ γὰρ ὅρκοι τοῖς ἐν ἄστει πρὸς τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ
γεγένηνται. εἶ μὲν οὖν οὗτος μὲν ἐν ἄστει ἡμεῖς
δ᾽ ἐν Πειραιεῖ ἦμεν, εἶχον ἄν τινα λόγον αὐτῷ αἱ
- a Ν Ν Ὁ > rip Ν
συνθῆκαι: νῦν δὲ καὶ οὗτος ἐν Πειραιεῖ ἦν καὶ
ἐγὼ καὶ Διονύσιος καὶ οὗτοι ἅπαντες οἱ τοῦτον
τιμωρούμενοι, ὥστε οὐκ ἔστιν ἡμῖν ἐμποδὼν οὐ-
id > 4 Ν 7 ε > “Ὁ om >
δέν - οὐδένα yap ὅρκον οἱ ἐν Πειραιεῖ τοῖς ἐν Πει-
ραιεῖ ὦὥμοσαν.
3 ἈΝ δὲ ’ » ὃ “ > eS
Ex παντὸς δὲ τρόπου ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ οὐχ ἑνὸς
, ¥ = Ψ x Η͂ δ. Ἂς A ,
θανάτου ἄξιος εἶναι, ὅστις φησὶ μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ δή-
Ν Ν a a OR ΄
μου ...., τὸν δὲ δῆμον, ὃν αὐτός φησι πατέρα
ε an 4 ΄ , \ > ‘ ἈΝ
αὑτοῦ εἶναι, φαίνεται κακώσας, καὶ ἀφεὶς καὶ προ-
δοὺς ἐξ ὧν ἐκεῖνος μείζων καὶ ἰσχυρότερος ἐγί-
γνετο. ὅστις οὖν τόν τε γόνῳ πατέρα τὸν αὑτοῦ

»» τ 3 Ν ~ ~ > ’ ’
€TUTTE και οὐδὲν πάρεχε τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, TOV TE

88

90

ΟΙ

62

93

94

XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.

Ν , 3 , a »> ε , 3 ,
ποιητὸν πατέρα ἀφείλετο ἃ ἦν ὑπάρχοντα ἐκείνῳ
ἀγαθά, πῶς οὐ καὶ διὰ τοῦτο κατὰ τὸν τῆς κακώ-

’ ¥ / > , lal
σεως νόμον ἄξιός ἐστι θανάτῳ ζημιωθῆναι ;
, 5. 26. τῶν a> , 9
Προσήκει ὃ υμιν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἅπασι
τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν ὁμοίως ὥσπερ
ἡμῶν ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ. ἀποθνήσκοντες γὰρ ἡμῖν ἐπέ-
aA Q A ΕἾ Ψ “
σκηψαν καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἅπασι τιμωρεῖν
ε \ “ | eed ed > 4 Ν ε ,
ὑπὲρ σφῶν αὐτῶν ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονὶ ὡς φονέα
ΕΝ \ ~ a pee. cee x »
ὄντα, Kal κακῶς ποιεῖν καθ᾽ ὅσον ἂν ἔμβραχυ
ἕκαστος δύνηται. εἶ τοίνυν τι ἐκεῖνοι ἀγαθὸν τὴν
’ “ἡ Ν a Ν ε id ’ὔ >
πόλιν ἢ τὸ πλῆθος TO ὑμέτερον φανεροί εἰσι TE
Ν a ε “A > 4,
ποιηκότες, ἃ Kal αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς ὁμολογεῖτε, ἀνάγκη
ε "-“ 5 , > ’ ’ Ἁ > ’
ὑμᾶς ἐστι πάντας ἐκείνοις φίλους καὶ ἐπιτηδείους
> 9 2O\ A ε κα x eS εν
εἶναι, ὥστε οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἡμῖν ἢ καὶ ὑμῶν ἑνὶ
ε / > , 4 » ν 4 /
ἑκάστῳ ἐπέσκηψαν. οὔκουν οὔτε ὅσιον οὔτε νόμι-
“a > /
μον ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀνεῖναι ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονί. ὑμεῖς
, we) > A \ ϑέντ τὰ DO a
τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, νυνὶ δή, ἐπεὶ ἐν TO
’ / > \ a 9 ~ > 6 5» 4“. »
τότε χρόνῳ, ἐν ᾧ ἐκεῖνοι ἀπέθνησκον, οὐχ οἷοί τε
ἐκείνοις ἐπαρκέσαι γεγόνατε διὰ τὰ πράγματα τὰ
®
περιεστηκότα, νυνί, ἐν ᾧ δύνασθε, τιμωρήσατε
Ν ’ wn
τὸν ἐκείνων φονέα. ἐνθυμεῖσθε δ᾽, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθη-
a ν ἈΝ , ¥
ναῖοι, ὅπως μὴ πάντων ἔργον σχετλιώτατον ἐργά-
3 Ἀ A > A
σησθε. εἰ yap ἀποψηφιεῖσθε ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουΐ,
> ‘ ‘al , > Ν Ν 3 ’
οὐ μόνον τοῦτο διαπράττεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐκείνων
lal “Ὁ lal A > a
τῶν ἀνδρῶν, os ὁμολογεῖτε ὑμῖν εὔνους εἶναι, TH
αὐτῇ ψήφῳ ταύτῃ θάνατον καταψηφίζεσθε: ἀπο-
» “
λύοντες yap τὸν αἴτιον ὄντα ἐκείνοις τοῦ θανάτου
> A »” 4 a» > 4 ’ ε Ν.
οὐδὲν ἄλλο γινώσκετε ἢ ἐκείνους δικαίως ὑπὸ

XIII. AGAINST .-AGORATUS.

΄ ΄, Ν ι x , ΄
τούτου τεθνηκέναι. καὶ οὕτως ἂν δεινότατα πάν-
, > e > ΄ > ~ ε ,
των πάθοιεν, εἰ οἷς ἐπέσκηπτον ἐκεῖνοι ws φίλοις
> A en ε κα ae woe >
οὖσι τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ αὑτῶν, οὗτοι ὁμόψηφοι κατ
ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν τοῖς τριάκοντα γενήσονται.
μηδαμῶς, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, πρὸς θεῶν ᾿Ολυμ-
πίων, μήτε τέχνῃ μήτε μηχανῇ μηδεμιᾷ θάνατον
3 ΄ “ > ~~ ΄ a Ν
ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν καταψηφίσησθε, οἱ πολλὰ
κἀγαθὰ ὑμᾶς ποιήσαντες διὰ ταῦτα ὑπὸ τῶν τριά-
δι
κοντα καὶ ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ ἀπέθανον. ἀναμνη-
σθέντες οὖν ἁπάντων τῶν δεινῶν, καὶ τῶν κοινῶν
Lal , A A“ 7Q7 7 ε ’ 3 ’ 5
τῇ πόλει καὶ τῶν ἰδίων, ὅσα ἑκάστῳ ἐγένοντο ἐπει-
΄- +
δὴ ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἄνδρες ἐτελεύτησαν, τιμωρήσατε TOV
¥” , > ΄, 7. eA 9 \
αἴτιον τούτων. ἀποδέδεικται δ᾽ ὑμῖν [ἅπαντα] καὶ
5 “ / ΦΥῊΝ “ > ~ % TS
ἐκ τῶν ψηφισμάτων καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἀπογραφῶν καὶ ἐκ
A ¥ os > , X > A ¥
Tov ἄλλων ἁπάντων Ayopatos ὧν αὐτοῖς αἴτιος
A 4 »» Ν Ν ’ aa, > ’
τοῦ θανάτου. ἔτι δὲ καὶ προσήκει ὑμῖν ἐναντία
a ’ὔ ’, - Ν ’ 3.5 “δὲ
τοῖς τριάκοντα ψηφίζεσθαι. ὧν μὲν τοίνυν ἐκεῖνοι
, , ε 3 ΄ - 3
θάνατον κατέγνωσαν, ὑμεῖς ἀποψηφίσασθε: ὧν ὃ
ἐκεῖνοι θάνατον οὐ κατέγνωσαν, ὑμεῖς καταγινώ-
σκετε. οἱ τριάκοντα τοίνυν τῶν μὲν ἀνδρῶν τού-
a > ©: # , , ΄ὕ
των, Ol ἦσαν ὑμέτεροι φίλοι, θάνατον κατέγνωσαν,
n~ nw >
ὧν Set ὑμᾶς ἀποψηφίζεσθαι- ᾿Αγοράτου δὲ ἀπεψη-
’ / > 4 4 4 > 4
φίσαντο, διότι ἐδόκει προθύμος τούτους ἀπολλύναι"
φΦ ld ΄, 38 > ὌΝ ,
. οὗ προσήκει καταψηφίζεσθαι. ἐὰν οὖν τὰ ἐναντία
lal 4 4 wm A 3 ε ,
τοῖς τριάκοντα ψηφίζησθε, πρῶτον μὲν οὐχ ὁμόψη-
φοι γίγνεσθε, ἔπειτα τοῖς ὑμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις
τετιμωρηκότες ἔσεσθε, ἔπειτα τοῖς πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ-
ποις δόξετε δίκαια καὶ ὅσια ψηφίσασθαι.

63

95

96

97

INTRODUCTION

TO THE

ORATION CONCERNING THE SACRED
OLIVE-TREE. |

An Athenian land-owner, name unknown, is charged by
a certain Nicomachus with having a number of years before
extirpated one of the sacred olive-trees of the state. The
trial is before the Areopagus. ‘The charge, if sustained, will
bring upon the offender the penalty of perpetual banishment
and the confiscation of his entire property.

A glance at some facts derived from this oration and other
ancient references to the subject reveals a peculiar phase of
the Athenian state system, and explains the sternness of the
Athenian code regarding this offence.

The olive-trees and groves of Attica formed then, as now,
a marked feature in the landscape, and the oil was an impor-
tant staple of commerce. As in the case of the grain trade,
there was a rigid official supervision of the oil product and
of the trees themselves. Provision was made by law against
any diminution in the number of fruit-bearing trees ; ‘a land-
owner was not allowed to cut down more than two a year
from his estate, unless by special permission. Especial care
was taken of the sacred trees dedicated to Athené, the pro-
tecting goddess of the state. The culture of the olive had
been, from the earliest times, closely connected with the

~

VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 65

religious legends and institutions of the country. Grafts and
shoots from the sacred olive-tree that stood on the Acropolis,
and had sprung from the rock at the bidding of Athené in
her contest with Poseidon, had become fruit-bearing trees in
various parts of the country; not only in the precincts of
temples, but also on private estates. These were the so-
called μορίαι, the sacred trees whose produce was forever
devoted to maintaining the worship of the goddess, and to
the support of her priests. The penalty for the extirpation
of one of these, even an old stump or decaying trunk, has
been already mentioned.

Crimes of impiety in general fell within the jurisdiction of
the Areopagus, and all matters pertaining to the care of the
sacred olives were especially committed to them. They
appointed from their own number curators and inspectors
(ἐπιμεληταί, γνώμονες), to whom was intrusted this department
of the public business, including the revision of the inven-
tories, the disposition of the produce to contractors, and other
like duties.

Before this Council, doubtless seated on the same rock-
hewn steps where Paul four centuries later addressed the
debating philosophers of Athens, Nicomachus — of whom
we only know that he was “a young man” — has brought
the defendant, a wealthy citizen in advanced life, but with-
out wife or children. An estate formerly belonging to Pi-
sander, who had been prominent in the oligarchy of the
Four Hundred, had come into his possession by purchase.
It is supposed to have been situated in the deme Acharne,
to the northward of the city, that being the deme to which
Pisander had belonged. It is charged that the defendant
has dug up the stump of a sacred olive that had formerly
stood on it, — one of the blackened stumps, it may be,
which the fires of foraging parties had left as traces of the
recent war. The defendant proceeds to show that since the

5

66 VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE.

purchase of the land from Anticles, in the spring of 403 8. ¢.,
it had been leased successively to Callistratus, Demetrius,
Alcias, and Proteas ; the lease of the latter having probably
expired shortly before the date (397 -- 6) of the alleged crime ;
and he proves by the testimony of several of these that there
had been no olive-tree at all upon the estate.

Inasmuch as the prosecution is not supported by the testi-
mony of any eye-witnesses, the remaining arguments of the
defendant, comprising the larger part of the oration, might
seem to be a work of supererogation. They seem, however,
partly designed to expose the malicious and mercenary pur-
pose of the accuser. Should four-fifths of the judges vote
for acquittal, he would not only lose his case, but would
be subjected to a fine.

The following is a brief analysis :

I. Exordium, ξξ 1-3.
II. Statement of the case, 88 4-8.
III. Refutation of the charge by positive evidence, 88 g-11.
IV. Refutation of the charge on the ground of its @ priori improbability
and the absence of any assignable motive. Maintained from

(1) The reputation of the defendant, $§ 12-14.

(2) The inevitable publicity of the act charged, 88 15-19; in con-
nection with which a strong argument is made from the
neglect of the accuser to produce witnesses, or lodge com-
plaint at the time, $$ 20-23.

(3) The circumstances of the alleged place, $$ 24-26.

(4) The circumstances of the alleged ime, ὃ 27.

(5) The difficulty of escaping the known vigilance of the authori-
ties, $$ 28, 29.

(6) The defendant’s course of life hitherto as an upright and
patriotic citizen, §§ 30-33.

V. Finally, the refusal of the accuser to take the testimony of the slaves
when offered, in contrast with the course of the defendant in
the case, affords a convincing argument that not only is the
charge without foundation, but it is brought from mercenary
and malicious motives, $$ 34-41.

VI. Peroration, recapitulating the leading points in the defence, 88 42, 43.

’

VII.

APEOIJIATITIKOS

ΠΕΡῚ TOY ZHKOY AITIOAOTLIA.

3 -
IT POTEPON μέν, ὦ βουλή, ἐνόμιζον ἐξεῖναι
a B λ , ε ’, » / OL ” ᾿
τῷ βουλομένῳ, ἡσυχίαν ἄγοντι, μήτε δίκας ἔχειν
5 |
μήτε πράγματα: νυνὶ δὲ οὕτως ἀπροσδοκήτοις
αἰτίαις καὶ πονηροῖς συκοφάνταις περιπέπτωκα,
ὥστ᾽ εἴ πως οἷόν τε, δοκεῖ μοι δεῖν καὶ τοὺς μὴ
, ΕΣ ΄ \ A , »
γεγονότας ἤδη δεδιέναι περὶ τῶν μελλόντων ἔσε-
σθαι: διὰ γὰρ τοὺς τοιούτους οἱ κίνδυνοι κοινοὶ
’ Ν mn δὲ iO “ Ν ΄“" Ν
γίγνονται καὶ τοῖς μηδὲν ἀδικοῦσι καὶ τοῖς πολλὰ
ε ’ 9 > »” ε 3 ’ ’,
ἡμαρτηκόσιν. οὕτω δ᾽ ἄπορος ὁ ἀγών μοι καθέ- 2
στηκεν, ὥστε ἀπεγράφην. τὸ μὲν πρῶσον ἐλαίαν
ἐκ τῆς γῆ ἀφανίζειν, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς eh cat
τοὺς καρποὺς τῶν i, ees πυνθανόμενοι προσή-
εσαν" ay Racy δ᾽ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ upc ἀδικοῦντά
με οὐδὲν ween ἐδυνήθησαν, νυνί με σηνόν φασῳ

ὑξςειν ενοι ἐ οἱ ὲν ταύτ V THV αἰτίαν
a τοὶ , 7D μ oh μὲν ταύτην τὴ
πρηῤόρβὴζαοι εἶναι ἀπε ἔγξαι, αὗτο ts δὲ ἐξεῖναι

scape ὅ τι ἂν βούλωνται λέγειν. καὶ δεῖ με, 3
περὶ ὧν οὗτος ἐπιβεβουλευκὼς ἥκει, ἅμ᾽ ὑμῖν τοῖς

68 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY.

ltteer
διαγνώσομένοις περὶ τοῦ Apa rer ἀκούσαντα, we

Kal περὶ Τῆς πατρίδος καὶ περὶ τῆς οὐσίας ἀγωνί-
σασθαι. ὅμως δὲ πειράσομαι ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὑμᾶς
διδάξαι. 1
- \ Ν a , Ν ,
4 Ἢν μὲν γὰρ τοῦτο Πεισάνδρου τὸ χωρίον, δη-
QZ μὰ ¥ > > ’ > 4 ε
μευθέντων τῶν. ὄντων δ᾽. ἐκείνου Ἀπολλόδωρος ὁ
Μεγαρεὺς ὦ δωρεὰν Tope Tov δήμου λαβὼν τὸν μὲν.
ἄλλον χρόνον ἐγεώβῤγεις ὀλίγῳ δὲ τ τῶν τριά-᾿ /
κοντα eres map αὐτοῦ CPO ebepi-
ω
σθωσεν'. ἐγὼ δὲ παρ᾽ ᾿Αντικλέους εἰρήνης, eR
5 ἐωνούμην. ἡγοῦμαι τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐμὸν pyr
ἀποδεῖξαι ὡς, er eid τὸ μκωρίον ἐ τησάμην, οὔτ᾽
ἐλαία οὔτε σηκὸς anid ἐν αὐτῷ. νομίζω yap τοῦ
μὲν προτέρου χρόνου, οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάλαι ἐνῆσαν μυ-
/ 3 a 4 aA > Ν Ἀ >
pia, οὐκ ἂν δικαίως ζημιοῦσθαι" εἰ yap pr δὲ
ἡμᾶς εἰσιν᾽ ἡφακσανναν οὐδὲν προσήκει περὶ
τῶν πλασηρίων ἁμαρτημάτων ὡς ἀδικοῦντας κιν-
bApeth ht
6 duvevew. πάντες γὰρ ἐπίστασθε ὅτι ὁ πόλεμος,
καὶ ἄλλων πολλῶν αἴτιος κακῶν Lhe beh καὶ
τὰ μεν. Toppe ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων pea are
δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων διηρπάζετο" ὥστε πῶς
ἂν δικαίως ὑπὲρ τῶν τῇ πόλει γεγενημένων συμ-
μὴν: 3 ‘ ‘\ di. ὃ ὃ ’ ¥ Ν
Φφορὼν ὦ νυνὶ δίκην. διδοίην ; ἄλλως τε καὶ
τοῦτο τὸ ΚΟΡΗ. ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ δημευθὲν a ἀὐ μα ίον.
7 ἣν πλεῖον ἢ τρία ἔτη. οὐ ϑαυμαστὸν δ᾽ εἰ τότε
ᾧ οὐδὲ τὰ ἡμέτερ᾽ αὐτῶν

φυλάττειν ἠδυνάμεθα. ἐπίστασθε δέ, ὦ βουλή,

> “A Ν 5
ὅσοι μάλιστα τῶν τοιούτων ἐπιμελεῖσθε, πολλὰ ἐν

τὰς μορίας ἐξέκοπτον, ἐ εν ω

VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 69

᾿νε" IO
Me

ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ δασέα ὄντα Bias | καὶ μορξαις
(ἐλαίαις, ὧν νῦν τὰ πολλὰ ἐκκέκοπται καὶ 7 i. εἶ
ψιλὴ γεγένηται: καὶ τῶν αὐτῶν καὶ ἐν “Τῇ, εἰρήνῃ. ὶ
καὶ ἐν FR, πολέμῳ κεκτημένων οὐκ ἀξιοῦτε, pias

αὐτῶν, ἑξέρων ἐκκοψάνεων, δίκην λαμβάνειν. καί- 8

τοι εἰ τοὺς διὰ παντὸς TOU χρόνου: Veep pias HbA

τῆς αἰτίας ἀφίετε, ἢ ἦ που χρὴ τούς γ᾽ ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ
πριαμένους ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀζημίους γεβέσθοι. ¥

᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ βουλή, περὶ μὲν τῶν πρότερον 9
γήμνυμένων πολλὰ ἔχων εἰπεῖν ἱκανὰ μομέξαι τὰ
εἰρημένα: ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ ἐγὼ παρέλαβον τὸ χωρίον,
πρὶν ἡμέρας πέντε γεῤάτθαι, ἀπέμίόϑωσα Καλ-
λιστράτῳ, ἐπὶ Πυθοδώρου ἄρχοντος - ὃς δύο ἔτη τὸ
ἐγεώργησεν, οὔτε ἰδίαν ἐλαίαν οὔτε μορίαν ᾿οὔτε
said παραλαβών. τρίτῴ δὲ ἔτει Δημήτριῶς οὗ-
τοσὶ εἰργάσατο ἐνιαυτόν - τῷ, δὲ ξετάρτῳ ᾿Αλκίᾳ
᾿Αντισθένους ἀπελευθέρῳ ἀμίσθώσα, ὃς τέθνηκε
ταῦτα τρία ἔτη. ὁμοίως καὶ Πρωτέας ἐμισθώ τς
σατο. Καί μοι δεῦρο ἴτε μάρτυρες.

ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.

Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν 6 χρόνος οὗτος ἐξήκει, αὐτὸς 11
n Ν δὲ ε ΄ τ τὰ (ὃ
γε ργῷ. φησὶ cP τζαπήγοβοὸς ᾿ ἐπὶ Σουνιάδου
ἄρχοντος σήκὰν ὑπ᾽ aioe ἐξκεκόφθαις ὑμῖν δὲ
βεναρτυρήεασιν οἱ πρότερον͵ ἐργαζόμενοι καὶ
πολλὰ ἔ ery παρ᾿ ἐμοῦ μεμισθωμένοι μὴ εἶναι͵ on-
Ww
KOV ἐν τῷ χωρίῳ. καίτοι πῶς av τις φανέρωτέρως

eae ae

70 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY.

ἐξελέγξειε ψευδόμενον τὸν κατήγορον; οὐ yap
οἷόν τε, ἃ πρότερον μὴ ἦν, ταῦτα τὸν ὕστερον
φρνθλόμεμον egies
12 "Ey τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐν μὲν τῷ, τέω χρόνῳ,
ὅσοι ἊΣ φάσζοιεν (δειμὸν εἶ εἶναι καὶ ΓΆΡ καὶ ¢ οὐ-
δὲν ἃ a ἰκῇ, καὶ Bie ἴσξος πούαθ τα ἠγανάκτουν
ἄν, αἱρούμενος cmd λέγεσθαι ὥς μοὶ Ἡροσῆκε:
νῦν δὲ πάντας ἂν baie βουλοίμην περὶ ἐμοῦ ταύ-
τὴν τὴν Prone? Exel, be Tviger ae σκοπεῖν a
εἴπερ τοιούτοις épyous ἐπεχείρουν, καὶ ὅ τι κέρ- |
δος ἐγένετο τῷ whats 0h Kal ἥτις he TO

aia αν ἐπ}: τί ἂν λαθὼν διεπραξάμην καὶ τί

vr (Ak
13 ἂν φανερὸς γενόμενήα, ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἔτασ ον. mies if
"| V
yap ἄνθρωποι τὰ τοιαῦτα οὐ x. ὕβρεως BOF SP hoa

Sous 4 ενεκα οιοῦσι καὶ ὑμᾶς Trost οὕτω σ σκοπεῖν,

καὶ τοὺς ἂντιδίκονς. ἐ ἐκ τούτων τὰς υϑορῦ ἐδ ν᾿ δἢ :
ΑΚ AAA

ποιεῖσθαι, dstocamtooeas ἥτις OPEN τοῖς ἀδι-

14 κήσασιν ae \/ οὗτος gorse οὐκ ἂν͵ ἔχοι ἀπο-
VAG, Ath 71 ἤ
δεῖξαι ο ὕθ᾽ ὡς ὑπὸ πενίας ἠναγκάσθην᾽ τοιούτοις

ἔργοις ἐπιχειρεῖν, οὔθ᾽ ὡς τὸ ΧΟΡΙΟΝ μοι Sua

ἢ φθείρεται τοῦ σηκοῦ ὄντος, οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἀμπενοῖς
anv 3"

. ποδὰ ἦν, οὔθ᾽ ὡς οἰκίας ἐγγύς, οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἐγὼ
fey

wate of τῶν Tap ὑμῖν κινδύνων. εἴ TL τούτων
ἔπραττον. ἐννν πολλὰς ἂν καὶ peyton ἐμαρτῷ
15 ζημίας γενομέναν ἐπλφύήναλμυ" ὃς Jain μὲν
μεθ᾽ ἡμέρα ἐξέκοπτον τὸν σηκόν, ὥσπερ οὐ πάν-
τας λαθεῖι, éov, δ; ἄντας ᾿Αθηναίους εἰδόαΐ

(he rv ὶ
καὶ εἰ μὲν αἰσχρὸν ἣν a TO πρᾶγμα, ἴσως av

i

ge"

aw ἢ

“VII. CONCERNING THE 9 OLIVE-TREE. 71

A. +e. o-t
Tis TOV παριόντων: ἠμέλησε a νῦν δ᾽ οὐ περὶ aioe

νης ἀλλὰ τ 7s μεγίστης δι μίας ὀκινδύνευον: πῶς τό

δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν ἦν ἀθλιώτατος ἀνθρώπ PI" εἰ
er gence ee. ΩΣ For
τοὺς ἐμαυτοῦ Oe ντας μηκέτι δούχους ἔμελλον ~~
a os ig Manns Ly

ἕξειν ἀλλὰ δεσπότας τὸν λοιπὸν βίον, Τ᾿ Τοιοῦτον

spyor δυγειδότας τῶστε εἰ καὶ τὰ μέγιστα εἰς

ἐμὲ ἐξημάρτανον, οὐκ ἂν οἷόν τε ἦν δίκην με map
αὐτῶν Sa oncateail εὖ yap, ἂν εἰ biter ἐπ᾽ ἐκεί-
νοις ἣν καὶ ἐμὲ τιμῶρηήδασθαι καὶ αὐτοῖς eRe
σασιν, ἐλεμθέροις γενέσθαι. Ve ἔτι τοίνυν, εἰ τῶν τ

AAS *

οἰκετῶν παρέστη μοι μηδὲν φροντίζειν, πῶς ἂν
ἐτόλμησα pore alle 2%; ἁπάντων τ

AA Gtr a Gr 6.
συνει ότων ἀφανίσαι τον σηκον ραχέος μὲν κέρΞ

δους €1 ενεκα, πῤοδεσμίας δὲ οὐδεμιᾶς οὔσης τῷ ἐκλύων
δύγῳ 1 τοῖς eipyan payers ἅπασι τὸ χώριαν ὁμοίως
προσ ηνον εἶναι ΘΟΘΕ τὸν σ oi KOD, ἵν εἴ τις αὐτοὺς
δ Und 4 Pea.
qraro, bs a ἀνενεγκεῖν hee rapeggray, υἱνῦν δὲ
AN %
Kal ἐμὲ ἐς πρλύσαντες φαίνονται, καὶ σφᾶς αὐτούς,
5 as ba κα
cine ψεύδονται, μετόχου: τῆς, αἰτίας καθιστάντες.
τα ἐλ

εἰ τοίνυν καὶ Ταῦτα; “παῤεσκευασάμην, πῶς ἂν οἷός 18
ard Ae ea
T ἣν πάντας πεῖσαι [τοὺς παριόντας, ἢ] τοὺς yee
wg hha οὐ Amen
‘TOvas,. | οἱ οὐ A β νον. ἀλλήλαν ταῦτ᾽ ἰσασιν ἃ πᾶσιν
ALL “-
ὁρᾷν ἔξεστω, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὧν ἀποκρυπτόμενοι

Bika" μηδένα τς πρθρῇ καὶ περὶ ἐκούνων, “seated
epTae j See τοίνυν τούτων οἱ μὲν sch οἱ δὲ
"διάφοροι περὶ τῶν ἐμῶν By νου ὄντες.λ οὕς το
ἐχρῆν τοῦτον παρασχέσθαι μάρτυρας, καὶ μὴ μό-
νον οὕτως τολμηρὰς κατηγορίας ποιεῖσθαι" ὅς

72

20

21

22

23

VII. TEPI TOY SHKOY.

e > Ἀ A 4 e > 5 ,
φησιν ὡς ἐγὼ μὲν παρειστήκειν, ot δ᾽ οἰκέται
5 4 \ 4 5 ,ὔ A ε ’
ἐξέτεμνον τὰ πρέμνα, ἀναθέμενος δὲ ὁ βοηλάτης
» 5 , Ἀ ξύλ 4 > N /
ὥχετο ἀπάγων τὰ ξύλα. καίτοι, ὦ Νικόμαχε,
χρὴν σε τότε καὶ παρακαλεῖν τοὺς παριόντας μάρ-
τυρας, καὶ φανερὸν ποιεῖν τὸ πρᾶγμα: καὶ ἐμοὶ

A > 4 “ἡ 5 ’ ε ’ 5 A 4
μὲν οὐδεμίαν ἂν ἀπολογίαν ὑπέλιπες, αὐτὸς δέ,
5 ͵ὔ 5 θ A > > ’ὔὕ Ὁ“ 4 > θ
εἰ μέν σοι ἐχθρὸς ἦν, ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἦσθα
ἄν με τετιμωρημένος, εἰ δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἕνεκα
¥ 9 > , > “Ἁ 280 >
ETPATTES, οὕτως ἐξελέγξας οὐκ ἂν ἐδόκεις εἶναι
συκοφάντης, εἰ δὲ κερδαίνειν ἐβούλου, τότ᾽ ἂν
πλεῖστον ἔλαβες: φανεροῦ γὰρ ὄντος τοῦ πρά-
> ,ὕ ” fe , “Ἅ > /

γματος οὐδεμίαν ἄλλην ἡγούμην ἂν εἶναί μοι σω-
τηρίαν ἢ σὲ πεῖσαι. τούτων τοίνυν οὐδὲν ποιήσας
ὃ Ν ‘ N , > an “4 ἢ , nt \
ιὰ τοὺς σοὺς λόγους ἀξιοῖς με ἀπολέσθαι, καὶ
κατηγορεῖς ὡς ὑπὸ τῆς ἐμῆς δυνάμεως καὶ τῶν
ἐμῶν χρημάτων οὐδεὶς ἐθέλει σοι μαρτυρεῖν.

, 5 4 ΠῚ »“" A , 5 /
καίτοι εἰ φήσας p ἰδεῖν τὴν μορίαν ἀφανίζοντα
τοὺς ἐννέα ἄρχοντας ἐπήγαγες ἢ ἄλλους τινὰς τῶν
sy? , , + Δ ¢ es ¥ ,
ἐξ ᾿Αρείου πάγου, οὐκ ἂν ἑτέρων ἔδει σοι μαρτύ-

[2 ‘A » 4 > “~ 4
ρων" οὕτω yap av σοι συνήδεσαν ἀληθὴ λέγοντι,
4 »
οἵπερ καὶ διαγιγνώσκειν ἔμελλον περὶ τοῦ πρά-
γματος. δεινότατα οὖν πάσχω: ὃς εἰ μὲν παρέ-
σχετο μάρτυρας, τούτοις ἂν ἠξίου πιστεύειν,
> A A 5 5 Ἀ » A > \ x 4 Ἀ
ἐπειδὴ δὲ οὐκ εἰσὶν αὐτῷ, ἐμοὶ καὶ ταύτην τὴν
ζημίαν οἴεται χρῆναι γενέσθαι. καὶ τούτου μὲν
» ,ὔ » A , “~ 9
ov θαυμάζω. οὐ γὰρ δήπου συκοφαντῶν ἅμα
τοιούτων γε λόγων ἀπορήσει καὶ μαρτύρων: ὑμᾶς
δ᾽ οὐκ ἀξιῶ τὴν αὐτὴν τούτῳ γνώμην ἔχειν.

ἀλλ᾽ ὡς τῷ βουλομένῳ τότε μᾶλλον ἐξῆν ἀδικεῖν
ANT

VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 73

emiag gods. γὰρ ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ πολλὰς βϑρίας οὔσας 24
καὶ πυρκαϊὰς ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις τοῖς ; ἐμοῖς χωρίοις, ἄς, Nite
εἶπερ ἐπεθύμουν. πολὺ ἣν ἀφφαλέστερον καὶ iba= ion:

ARG
νίσαι καὶ ᾿ἐκρόψαι καὶ ie esta Oowmep *

Rvyrt
ἧττον TO ἀδίκημα πολλῶν οὐσῶν ἔμελλε Siege
ἔσεσθαι. νῦν δ᾽ οὕτως αὐτὰς περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦ- 25

Biro: ὥσπερ καὶ τὴ πατρίδᾳ. καὶ τὴν ἀλληπὶ οὐσίαν,
Α Cg 1
“ἡγούμενος Pept ἀμφοτέρών" τούτων εἶναί pot τὸν
4 rede.
κίγδυνον. , αὐτοὺς τοίνυν ὑμᾶς τούτων μάρτυρας _
LAP WAAL VV WMA th

παρέξομαι, ἐπίρελομμένόνο μὲν ἑκάστου μηνός, Ἵ
τὰκ ἀνέρος ἜΣ cael 9 καθ᾽ cane ἀρ τ τες

ὧν οὐδεὶς πώποτ᾽ ἐζημίωσεν ὡς ἐ ὑγμζόμενον τὰ

περὶ τὰς popias capi: KaiTOL οὐ δήπου τὰς με 26
μικράν ζημίας οὕτω περὶ πολλοῦ ποιουμᾷς, τοὺς

δὲ wep TOU ἐν ἑπλων κινδύνους [οὕτω] περὶ οὐδε-

νὸς ἡγοῦμαι {καὶ τὰς τὰς μὲν πολλὰς ἐλαίας, εἰς ἃς

ἐξῆν μᾶλλον ἐξαμαρτάνείν, οὕτω θεραπεύων φαί- pf
Ῥομᾷν τὴν δὲ μορίαν, ἣν οὔχ- 4 fy τς ἦν, λαθεῖν
ἐξσρύξᾳ he ὡς ἀφανίζων νυνὶ pivopa ; vga ὧΣ
por δέ oe ἐς ig ἐὼ ἦν, ὦ βουλή, δημοκρατίας ᾽
οὔσης παρανομεῖν ἢ ἢ ἐ ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα; καὶ οὐ

λέγω ὡς τότε Sibdpevor ἢ ὡς νῦν διαβεβλημένος,

“Vv

Ὑ νυνί. ἐγὰ τοίνυν οὐδ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ οὔτε
τοιοῦτο οὔτε ἄλλο οὐδὲν κακὸν ποιήσας φανήσο" ie
Healt, Has ὁ ᾿ ἂν, εἰ μὴ πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐμαντῷ .28 y, 4.
Rakovovoraros ἦν, ὑμῶν οὕτως ἐπιμελουμένων Ὁ ;

ἐκ τούτου τὴν μορίαν ἀφανίζειν ἐπεχείρησα τοῦ

74

29

30

31

32

VII. HEPI TOY SHKOY.
to Oe
χωρίου, ἐν ᾧ δένδρον μὲν οὐδὲ ἕν ἐστι, μιᾶς

ε
ἐλαίας σηκός, ὡς οὗτός φησιν͵ εἶναμ,. ᾿κυκλόθεν, ἃς

ion b+

{κι rt HhAargye
σιν, AENPKTOV δὲ fect πανταχόθεν κάτοπτον: ἐστιν if

ὁδὸς ΤῊΝ ἀμφοτέρωθεν. δὲ γείτονε, περίοικοῦ-
ὥστε τίς ἂν ἀπετόλμησε, τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων,
ἐπιχειρῆσαι τοιούτῳ πράγματι; Δεινὸν δέ μοι
ἴων lal e wn
δοκεῖ εἶναι ὑμᾶς μέν, ols ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως TOV
ἅπαντα χρόνον προστέτακται τῶν μοριῶν ἐλαιῶν
9 A sno ie > , ᾽ὕ
ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, μήθ᾽ ὡς ἐπεργαζόμενον πώποτε Ly-
μιῶσαι μήθ᾽ ὡς ἀφανίσαντα εἰς κίνδυνον κατα-
a “ »* “A - ’
στῆσαι, τοῦτον δ᾽, ὃς οὔτε γεωργῶν ἐγγὺς τυγχά-
: ¥-> ὁ N ε ΄ Ἦν χδιΣ ὦ ΄, »
νει οὔτ᾽ ἐπιμελητὴς ἡρημένος οὔθ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἔχων
εἰδέναι περὶ τῶν τοιούτων, ἀπογράψαι με μορίαν
> /
ἀφανίζειν.
3 Ν rd dé ε A ἈΝ ‘ ¥ ,
Ἐγὼ τοίνυν δέομαι ὑμῶν μὴ τοὺς τοιούτους λό-
γους πιστοτέρους ἡγήσασθαι τῶν ἔργων, μηδὲ
περὶ ὧν αὐτοὶ σύνιστε, ταῦτ᾽ seme aie TOV
_— ἐχύρων cs cuba ἐνθυμουμένους καὶ ἐκ TOV
παν μέρων καὶ ἐκ τῆς ἄλλης πολιτείας. Ve ἐγὼ yap
τὰ ἐμοὶ προστεταγμένα ἅπαντα προθυμότερον πε-
Ν A /
Tonka, ὡς ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἠναγκαζόμην, Kal τρι-
ηραρχῶν καὶ εἰσφορὰς εἰσφέρων καὶ χορηγῶν καὶ
Lol - ἴω ἴω
τἄλλα λειτουργῶν οὐδενὸς ἧττον πολυτελῶς τῶν
πολιτῶν. καίτοι ταῦτα μὲν μετρίως ποιῶν ἀλλὰ
rt , ῳ. 5 ἃ \ A » 5 ee
μὴ προθύμως ovr ἂν περὶ φυγῆς οὔτ᾽ ἂν περὶ τῆς
Ἂ 5» 4 > ’ “f > 4 > 4
ἄλλης οὐσίας ἠγωνιζόμην, πλείω δ᾽ ἂν ἐκεκτήμην,
Exe! > A ἀν ὦ , ‘ > A ,
οὐδὲν ἀδικῶν οὐδ᾽ ἐπικίνδυνον ἐμαυτῷ καταστή-
‘ , a \ , a ,“,
σας τὸν βίον: ταῦτα δὲ πράξας, ἃ οὗτός μου

L011

VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 75

~ 5 ’ A > ’ 3 x δ᾽ »
κατηγορεῖ, ἐκέρδαινον μὲν οὐδέν, ἐμαυτὸν δ᾽ εἰς
ε
κίνδυνον καθίστην. καίτοι πάντες ἂν ὁμολογή- 33
σαιτε “δικαιότερον εἶναι τοῖς μεγάλοις χρῆσθαι
τεκμηρίοις περὶ τῶν μεγάλων, καὶ πιστότερα ἡγεῖ:
\ @ 9 ε ’ὔ -“ a a
σθαι περὶ Gv ἅπασα ἡ πόλις μαρτυρεῖ, μᾶλλον ἢ
περὶ ὧν μόνος οὗτος κατηγορεῖ.
“Ἔστι τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων σκέψασθε. 34
AAG VOW Ἀ ¥ » αὖ Τα ΄ 9
aptupas yap ἔχων αὐτῷ προσῆλθον, λέγων ὅτι
βάρτυρας yap ἔχων αὐτῷ ροαῆλθον, λέγων, ὅτι,
μοι πάντες εἰσὶν οἱ θεράποντες, obs ἐκεκτήμην
ἐπειδὴ παρέλαβον. τὸ χωρίον, καὶ ἕτ i εἰμι, £b
2 . a fu 7.» owt, ᾿ 2 Ἀ
τινα βούλοιτο, παραδοῦναι, βασανίζειν, ἡγούμενος
σ΄ d τς ὦ Ὁ ΑΝ eae ar ΄ a
οὕτως ἂν τὸν ἔλεγχον υρῤτερον γενέσθαι τῶν

’; ’ 4 A “~ 3, “ > “~ e >
τούτῳυ λόγων καὶ TOV. ἔργων τῶν ἐμῶν. οὗτος ὃ
γ Vehicle ΠΡ, 22: 35

iy f
οὐκ ἤθελεν, οὐδὲν Oe a SEE εἶναι τοῖς θερά-
+) τὸ \ 3 ee ἃ > \ eo“
movow. ἐμοὶ δὲ δοκεῖ δεινὸν εἶναι, εἰ περὶ αὑτῶν
ν ε , BARA, > sgt
μὲν οἱ ΟΜΝ κατηγοροῦσιν, εὖ εἰδότες
3 “: CAA > S
ὅτι ἀπόθανοῦνται, περὶ δὲ τῶν δεσποτῶν, οἷς TE, (
z Ahaiipyar ( τῇ yee δ υΐολ.-
φύκασι κακονόύστατοι, μᾶλλον ἂν ἐίλοντο ἀνέχε- Wes,
p (eae
σθαι βασανιζόμενοι ἢ | EE ESESS ἀπηλλάχθαι
~ A Ss table ied 2: ἢ
τῶν. παρόντων κακῶν. Veal μὲν δή, ὦ ουλή, φα- 36 βἢ.
x > > 7 > , OKRA A σαν
νερὸν οἶμαι εἶναι ὅτι, εἰ 'Νικομάχου͵ ἐξαιτοῦντος

Ἀ > , κ ΄ > inane? >
τους ἀνθρώπους μη παρεδίδουν, ἐδόκουν αν εμαυ-

a an > ¥ , of \ ΄
οὗτος παραλαβεῖν οὐκ ἤθελε, δίκαιον καὶ περὶ τού-

hort, »

TOV τὴν αὐτὴν γνώμην εἰν, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοῦ
Y

a ΄ > \ ΄ > oA ΄
Τῳ ξυνειδέναι - ἐπειδὴ FOG LU, παραδιδόντος

ὃ 4 > ¥ > 4” Ν 3 “~

κινδύνου οὐκ ἴσου ἀμφοτέροις ὄντος. περὶ ἐμοῦ 37
BH Oban

μὲν yap εἴ τι ἔλεγον, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἀπριοχύσασθαι μοι
oy

> id 4 > > ‘ ε an a es
ἐξεγένετο " τουτῳ ὃ ει μὴ ὡὠμο ουν GQ OUTOS

76 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY.
5 panghly LrothL
ἐβούλετο, οὐδεμιᾷ ζημίᾳ ἔνοχος ἦν. ὥστε πολὺ
μᾶλλον τοῦτον παραλαμβάνειν ἐχρὴν ἢ ἐμὲ παρα-
Ἐπ ~ Ἂν : Ving ΔΑ,
δοῦναι προσῆκεν: ἐγὼ τοίνυν εἰς τοῦτο προϑυμίας
aonb, Shak cM es Sa i Δ. ,
ἀφικόμην, ἡγούμενος pet ἐμοῦ εἶναι καὶ ἐκ βασά-
νων καὶ ex. μαρτύρων. καὶ ἐκ TeK; Σ ἴων, ὑμᾶς περὶ
-: apie th ἢ ae lie tS
38 τοῦ mpaypatos τἀληθῆ πυθέσθαι. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι
δὲ χρή, ὦ βουλή, «ποτέροις χρὴ πίστεύειν μᾶλλον,
@ . ᾿ Agr eA ar uae Ἶ «Ἐκ ο ον 4
οἷς πολλοὶ ERCP OR AES yD μηδεὶς Terohwiniess io
oe κΑ a alt
Kal πότερον εἰκὸς μᾶλλον τοῦτον ἀκινδύνως ψεύ- ΄.

δεσθαι ἢ μετὰ τοσούτου κινδύνου τοιοῦτον ἐμὲ
" - γυναι. \ , x > εἰ τὸν :
ἔργον ἐῤγάσασθαι, καὶ πότερον οἴεσθε αὐτὸν ὑπ ᾿
be 7 AAA a ty ~ 5 , OVAL
τῆς πόλεως βοηθεῖν ἢ συκοφαντοῦντα αἰτιάσα “ ᾿
5 ‘ Ἁ 5 4 ε na ε nw ν
39 σθαι; ἐγὼ μὲν [ἐγν κέναι] ὑμᾶς ἡγοῦμαι ὅτι
,ὔ εν vad A bg 4 PrAAALE a » κα
Νικόμαχος ὑπ ν ἐχθρῶν “εισθεὶς τῶν ἐμῶν
ς 4. 1G > ε > Oo Lo}
ava ἀγωνίζεται, οὐχ ὡς ἀδικοῦντα

τοῦτον τὸν
» 3 3 ε 5 ’ 3. .ἃ ἴω
€ Fone ἀποδείξειν, GAN ὡς ἀργύριον Tap ἐμοῦ

΄ Ὶ χὼ [ \ ε Pu ον
λήψεσ αι προσδοκῶν. σῷ γὰρ οἱ τοιοῦτοί εἰσὶν

ἐπαιτιώτατοι καὶ ἀπορῴτατοι τῶν κινδύνων, τοσού-
a , > Is φ aN > A δ >
40 τῳ πάντες αὐτοὺς φεύγουσι μάλιστα. ἐγὼ δέ, ὦ

βουλή, οὐκ ἠξίουν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδήπερ με ἠτιάσατο,
+ Py ein a
ἡ παρέσχον ἐμαντὸν ὅ τι Wide χρῆσθαι, καὶ

τούτου ἕνεκα τοῦ κινδύνου οὐδενὶ ἐγὼ τῶν ἐχθρῶν,

διηλλάγην, οἱ ἐμὲ ἥδιον κακῶς λέγουσιν ἢ σφᾶς Ἴ

Ἵ ‘ γ1 μας ἐν εὐ vy Ge 204 i 2
αὐτοὺς ἐπαινοῦσι, καὶ φανερῶς μὲν οὐδεὶς πώποτε

ἐμὲ αὐτῶν ἐπεχείρησε ποιῆσαι κακὸν οὐδέν, Tor
ούτους δὲ ἐπίπέμπουσί μοι, οἷς ὑμεῖς οὐκ, ἂν Se,
FAWN Ζ , . ἐσ οἱ Δ
41 καιως πϊῖστεύοιτε. Κ' πάντων γὰρ ἀθλιώτατος ἂν

, > ‘ 207 Bn , »
yYevolpypy, ει φυγὰς ἀδίκως κ αστΉήσομαι, ατραιῖς

͵

Kano τᾷ. Mar

VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE, 77
ον δ’ οὖ v

“μὲν ὧν καὶ μόνος, ἐρήμουῃ δὲ τοῦ οὔκ ου γεομένοι

la ὡς, δὲ πάντ ἐμδεοῦς, πατρίδος δὲ τοιάυτηξ: be

ἐπ᾽ gh Maras στίρηθεὶς αἰτίαις, πολλὰς μὲν ναυ-

μαχίας ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς IS PEDALS, πολλὰς δὲ μά-

χας μεμαχημένος, κόσμιον δ᾽ “ἐμαυτὸν καὶ ἐν ei τ ΟΝ

tyre
wey

κρατίᾳ Kat ἐν ὀλιγαρχίῳ παρασχών.
᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ βουλή, ταῦτα μὲν babe: οὐκ, οἶδ: 8:

ὅ τι δεῖ λέγειν. ἀπέδειξα δ᾽ δ᾽, ὑμῖν. ὡς ὡς οὐκ ἐνῆν, σή
HOS Use X χωρίῳ, καὶ μάρτυρας παρεσ όμην καὶ
τεκμήρια. ἃ χρὴ μ ιεμγημέμονς βιϑγιγνόσκεα, co =
τοῦ Ἐράγματος, καὶ ἀξιοῦν παρὰ τούτου πυθέσθαι
ὅτου ἕνεκα, ἐξὸν ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ ἐλέγξαι, τοσούτῳ
Χρόνῳ ὕστερον εἰς τοσοῦτόν με κατέστησεν ἀγῶνα,

ett a οὐδένα παράσχόμενος ἐκ τῶν λόγων 43
ζητεῖ πιστὸ γενέσθαι ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἔργοις ἀδι-
κοῦντα ἀποδεῖξαι, καὶ ἐμοῦ ἅπαντας διδόντος τοὺς
θεράποντας, ovs φησι παραγενέσθαι, παραλαβεῖν
οὐκ ἤθελεν.

INTRODUCTION

TO THE

ORATION AGAINST THE GRAIN-
DEALERS.

ee

You are doubtless aware that we of all people con-
sume the most imported grain.” ‘This remark of Demos-
thenes, in the Oration Against Lepiines, suggests a character-
istic feature of the Athenian political economy. The territory
of Attica embraced about goo square miles. The soil was
better suited to the fig and the olive than to wheat, and the
product of breadstuffs fell far short of the wants of its popula-
tion, — about half a million, as it is estimated, in the time of
Lysias.

In the following speech a member of the Senate of Five
Hundred, induced by circumstances occurring in one of their
sessions, which he clearly and satisfactorily explains, appears
against certain merchants, — who are perhaps in partnership
as a firm or company, — and prosecutes them for violation of
the existing grain-laws. ‘The grain-trade, both wholesale and
retail, was jealously watched by the government in order to
prevent extortion on the part of dealers, and to guard against
seasons of scarcity arising from unchecked speculation. Rig-
orous laws regulated the traffic, and special officers were
appointed to see to their execution. Besides the ἀγορανόμοι,
market-masters, charged with the general supervision of the
markets, there were the σιτοφύλακες, grain-inspectors, intrusted

XXII. AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 79

with the oversight of the grain-trade alone. According to
Boeeckh (Public Economy of the Athenians, p. 116) there were fif-
teen of the latter, five of them being stationed in the Pirzeus.

The importers were called ἔμποροι, the retail-dealers σιτο-
πῶλαι, Or contemptuously, κάπηλοι, hucksters. A large majority
both of the wholesale and retail dealers appear, as in the
present instance, to have been metics. Of the statutes then
in force, one, as appears from the oration, provided that no
σιτοπώλης should buy more than fifty μέδιμνοι (nearly seventy-

five bushels) at a time. Another statute restricted the dealer’s
profit to one obol on the medimnus. The penalty was death.

Of course such legislation was as futile as it was unjust and
unwise. ‘The severest penalties failed to check speculation.
Gain could no more be controlled by law in ancient Athens,
the great wheat-market of the Eastern Mediterranean, than in
modern Chicago the great wheat-market of the Western Con-
tinent. The Athenian courts, accordingly, were constantly
occupied with prosecutions of the grain-dealers. Often, no
doubt, the charges brought against them were false. They
were particularly liable to be preyed upon by’ the “syco-
phants,” as they were styled, —a class of men who became
informers from base and mercenary motives ; often they were
instigated by personal enmity, oftener still by the hope that
they would be privately bribed to withdraw the complaint ;
in case the prosecution succeeded, they had in prospect a
share of the fees.

This is one of the judicial processes technically called
eicayyehia. After a preliminary investigation before the
Senate, the case was brought before a Dicastery, or court
of Heliasts. The date of the oration is unknown ; judging
from ὃ 14, it belongs after 387 B.c. In arrangement and
style it is one of the best extant productions of Lysias. It is
also one of the shortest. If delivered as written, it could
scarcely have occupied more than twenty minutes, exclusive
of the intervals spent in the examination of witnesses.

NS

3

XXII.

KATA TON ΣΙΤΟΠΩΛΩΝ.

[Πολλοὶ μοι προσεληλύθασιν, ὦ ἄνδρες
δικασταί, θαυμάζοντες ὅτι ἐγὼ τῶν “σιτοπωλῶν
> lal biel / Ν td ν ε al
ἐν τῇ βουλῇ κατηγόρουν, καὶ λέγοντες ὅτι ὑμεῖς,
5 ε ’, 39 Ν > ~ ε ~ > Ν Ou
εἰ ὡς μάλιστα αὐτοὺς ἀδικεῖν ἡγεῖσθε, οὐδὲν Fr-
τον καὶ τοὺς περὶ τούτων ποιουμένους λόγους
συκοφαντεῖν νομίζετε. ὅθεν οὖν ἠνάγκασμαι
κατηγορεῖν αὐτῶν, περὶ τούτων πρῶτον εἰπεῖν
βούλομαι.

3 Ν Ν ε , > » 3 Ἀ

Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ οἱ πρυτάνεις ἀπέδοσαν εἰς τὴν
βουλὴν περὶ αὐτῶν, οὕτως ὠργίσθησαν αὐτοῖς,
ὥστε ἔλεγόν τινες τῶν ῥητόρων ὡς ἀκρίτους αὐὖ-
τοὺς χρὴ τοῖς ἕνδεκα παραδοῦναι θανάτῳ ζημι-
ὥσαι. ἡγούμενος δὲ ἐγὼ δεινὸν εἶναι τοιαῦτα
"527 a τ , > N > Ψ
ἐθίζεσθαι ποιεῖν τὴν βουλήν, ἀναστὰς εἶπον ὅτι
μοι δοκοίη κρίνειν τοὺς σιτοπώλας κατὰ τὸν νό-

’, > 4 > » ’ >
pov, νομίζων, εἰ μέν εἰσιν ἄξια θανάτου εἰργα-
σμένοι, ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ἧττον ἡμῶν γνώσεσθαι τὰ

’ > \ Ν > Le > “ > Ν 5 ’
δίκαια, εἰ δὲ μηδὲν ἀδικοῦσιν, οὐ δεῖν αὐτοὺς ἀκρί-
τους ἀπολωλέναι. πεισθείσης δὲ τῆς βουλῆς

XXII. AGAINST. THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 81

ταῦτα, διαβάλλειν ἐπεχείρουν με λέγοντες ὡς ἐγὼ
σωτηρίας ἕνεκα τῆς τῶν σιτοπωλῶν τοὺς λόγους
τούτους ἐποιούμην. πρὸς μὲν οὖν τὴν βουλήν, ὅτ᾽
ἣν αὐτοῖς ἡ κρίσις, ἔργῳ ἀπελογησάμην: τῶν γὰρ
ἄλλων ἡσυχίαν ἀγόντων ἀναστὰς αὐτῶν κατηγό-
ρουν, καὶ πᾶσι φανερὸν ἐποίησα ὅτι οὐχ ὑπὲρ
τούτων ἔλεγον, ἀλλὰ τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς κειμένοις
ἐβοήθουν. ἠρξάμην μὲν οὖν τούτων ἕνεκα, δεδιὼς 4
τὰς αἰτίας" αἰσχρὸν δ᾽ ἡγοῦμαι πρότερον παύσα-
σθαι, πρὶν ἂν ὑμεῖς περὶ αὐτῶν ὅ τι ἂν βούλησθε
ψηφίσησθε.

Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἀνάβηθι καὶ εἰπὲ σὺ ἐμοί, μέ- 5
τοικος εἶ; Ναί, Μετοικεῖς δὲ πότερον ὡς πεισό-
μενος τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς τῆς πόλεως, ἢἣ ὡς ποιήσων
ὅ τι ἂν βούλῃ; Ὡς πεισόμενος, “Ado τι οὖν
ἀξιοῖς ἢ ἀποθανεῖν, εἴ τι πεποίηκας παρὰ τοὺς
νόμους, ἐφ᾽ οἷς θάνατος ἡ ζημία; “Eywye, ᾿Από-
κριναι δή μοι, εἰ ὁμολογεῖς πλείω σῖτον συμπρί-
ασθαι πεντήκοντα φορμῶν, ὧν ὁ νόμος ἐξεῖναι
κελεύει. ᾿Εγὼ τῶν ἀρχόντων κελευόντων συνεπριυ-
άμην.

ἣΑΔν μὲν τοίνυν ἀποδείξῃ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὡς 6
ἔστι νόμος ὃς κελεύει τοὺς σιτοπώλας συνωνεῖς-
σθαι τὸν σῖτον, ἂν οἱ ἄρχοντες κελεύωσιν, ἀπο-
ψηφίσασθε: εἰ δὲ μή, δίκαιον ὑμᾶς καταψηφίσα-
σθαι. ἡμεῖς γὰρ ὑμῖν παρεσχόμεθα τὸν νόμον,
ὃς ἀπαγορεύει μηδένα τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει πλείω σῖτον
πεντήκοντα φορμῶν συνωνεῖσθαι.

6

Ὁ»
82 XXII. KATA TON BITOMOAON.

7

10

Χρῆν μὲν τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἱκανὴν
e
εἶναι ταύτην THY κατηγορίαν, ἐπειδὴ οὗτος μὲν
ὁμολογεῖ συμπρίασθαι, ὃ δὲ νόμος ἀπαγορεύων
φαίνεται, ὑμεῖς δὲ κατὰ τοὺς νόμους ὀμωμόκατε
4 9 ea a σ A Ν
ψηφιεῖσθαι: ὅμως δ᾽ ἵνα πεισθῆτε ὅτι καὶ κατὰ
lal \ ,
τῶν ἀρχόντων ψεύδονται, ἀνάγκη Kal μακρότερον

3 a Ν 3 “A > Ν Ν 8 ‘ “Δ ὰ
εἰπειν πέρι AVTWV. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ OUTOL Τὴν ALTLAV

> > , > 4 4 . »
εἰς ἐκείνους ἀνέφερον, παρακαλέσαντες τοὺς ap-
χοντας ἠρωτῶμεν. καὶ οἱ μὲν τέσσαρες οὐδὲν
», 5 4 » 4, » δ᾽ »¥
ἔφασαν εἰδέναι τοῦ πράγματος, “Avutos δ᾽ ἔλεγεν
An an Os
ὡς τοῦ προτέρου χειμῶνος, ἐπειδὴ τίμιος ἦν ὁ
“ , ε , 5 4 A A
σιτος, τούτων ὑπερβαλλόντων ἀλλήλους καὶ πρὸς
σφᾶς αὐτοὺς μαχομένων συμβουλεύσειεν αὐτοῖς
παύσασθαι φιλονεικοῦσιν, ἡγούμενος συμφέρειν
ὑμῖν τοῖς “παρὰ τούτων ὠνουμένοις ὡς ἀξιώτατον
τούτους πρίασθαι: δεῖν γὰρ αὐτοὺς ὀβολῷ μόνον
ρ γὰρ Dp Mb
πωλεῖν τιμιώτερον. ὡς τοίνυν οὐ συμπριαμένους
καταθέσθαι ἐκέλευεν αὐτούς, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀλλήλοις
> “A , - aR | A ae »
ἀντωνεῖσθαι συνεβούλευεν, αὐτὸν ὑμῖν ἤΑνυτον
’ aA
μάρτυρα παρέξομαι, καὶ ὡς οὗτος μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς προ-
,ὕ, lal , > Ν , & 5
τέρας βουλῆς τούτους εἶπε τοὺς λόγους, οὗτοι ὃ
ἐπὶ τῆσδε συνωνούμενοι φαίνονται.

ΜΑΡΤΎΡΙΑ.

9 Ν ’ > ε ‘ “ 5» /
Ori μὲν τοίνυν οὐχ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων κελευ-
σθέντες συνεπρίαντο τὸν σῖτον, ἀκηκόατε: ἡγοῦ-
5 «ε , ἈΝ , > Lal
par δ᾽, ἂν ὡς μάλιστα περὶ τούτων ἀληθῆ

~

XXII. SOR aaa GRAIN-DEALERS. 83

’, > ε Ἁ ε Led > Ἂν > /
λέγωσιν, οὐχ ὑπὲρ αὑτῶν αὐτοὺς ἀπολογήσεσθαι,
ἀλλὰ τούτων κατηγορήσειν: περὶ γὰρ ὧν εἰσι
νόμοι διαρρήδην γεγραμμένοι, πῶς οὐ χρὴ διδόναι
δίκην καὶ τοὺς μὴ πειθομένους καὶ τοὺς κελεύοντας
τούτοις τἀναντία πράττειν ;

᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οἴομαι αὐτοὺς
> aN. Ν a“ Ν ’ 3 5 ’ ὟΝ»
ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦτον τὸν λόγον οὐκ ἐλεύσεσθαι: ἴσως

> 3 “ 9 Ἁ 5» Ὁ ΄“ ε 9.33 > 4 2
ὃ ἐρουσιν, ὡσπερ καὶ ἐν TH βουλῇ, ὡς ἐπ εὐνοίᾳ

THS πόλεως συνεωνοῦντο τὸν σῖτον, ἵν ὡς ἀξιώ-
τατον ἡμῖν πωλοῖεν. μέγιστον δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐρῶ καὶ
περιφανέστατον τεκμήριον ὅτι ψεύδονται. ἐχρὴν
γὰρ αὐτούς, εἴπερ ὑμῶν ἕνεκα ἔπραττον ταῦτα,
φαίνεσθαι τῆς αὐτῆς τιμῆς πολλὰς ἡμέρας πωλοῦν-
τας, ἕως ὁ ἐξερ ροῦυ εἰμ αὐτοὺς ἐπέλιπε" νυνὶ δ᾽
ἐνίοτε τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας ἐπώλουν δραχμῇ τιμιώ-
τερον, ὥσπερ κατὰ μέδιμνον συνωνούμενοι. καὶ
τούτων ὑμῖν μάρτυρας παρέξομαι.

ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.
*> 5 Ν
Δεινὸν δέ μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, εἰ ὅταν μὲν εἰσφορὰν
3 lal ,ὕ ἃ ’, » ,ὔ
εἰσενεγκεῖν δέῃ, ἣν πάντες εἴσεσθαι μέλλουσιν,
ἃ, ὧν
οὐκ ἐθέλουσιν, ἀλλὰ πενίαν προφασίζονται, ἐφ᾽ οἷς
Ἂς, ’, ’ > ε ’ Ν “Ὁ > 2 ’
δὲ θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημία καὶ λαθεῖν αὐτοῖς συνέ.
A dF > , Ν ΚΆΣΙΟΝ ΄
φερε, ταῦτα ἐπ᾽ εὐνοίᾳ φασὶ TH ὑμετέρᾳ παρανο-
μῆσαι. καίτοι πάντες ἐπίστασθε ὅτι τούτοις
Ψ A
ἥκιστα προσήκει τοιούτους ποιεῖσθαι λόγους.
3 , Ν 3 A Ν “ ¥ /
τἀναντία yap αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις συμφέρει"

12

13

84

15

τό

XXII. KATA ΤῺΝ ΣΙΤΟΠΩΛΩΝ.

τότε γὰρ πλεῖστα κερδαίνουσιν, ὅταν κακοῦ τινος
ἀπαγγελθέντος τῇ πόλει τίμιον τὸν σῖτον πωλῶ-
σιν. οὕτω δ᾽ ἄσμενοι τὰς συμφορὰς τὰς ὑμε-
τέρας ὁρῶσιν, ὥστε τὰς μὲν πρότεροι τῶν ἄλλων
, \ 2 > \ A a N
πυνθάνονται, τὰς δ᾽ αὐτοὶ λογοποιοῦσιν, ἢ Tas
ναῦς διεφθάρθαι τὰς ἐν τῷ Πόντῳ, ἢ ὑπὸ Λακε-
’ὔ > 4 “ “ἡ Ν. 5 ’ὔ
δαιμονίων ἐκπλεούσας συνειλῆφθαι, ἢ τὰ ἐμπόρια
κ᾿ a \ Ἀ , > ,
κεκλεῖσθαι, ἢ τὰς σπονδὰς μέλλειν ἀπορρηθήσε-
Ἀ > ‘tJ ¥ 5 ’ὔ σ 3 »
σθαι, καὶ εἰς τοῦτ᾽ ἔχθρας ἐληλύθασιν, ὥστ᾽ ἐν
τούτοις τοῖς καιροῖς ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ἡμῖν, ἐν
οἷσπερ οἱ πολέμιοι. ὅταν γὰρ μάλιστα σίτου
τυγχάνητε δεόμενοι, ἀναρπάζουσιν οὗτοι καὶ οὐκ
527 “A 7 Ἀ A ~ a ,
ἐθέλουσι πωλεῖν, ἵνα μὴ περὶ τῆς τιμὴης διαφερώ-
μεθα, GAN ἀγαπῶμεν ἂν ὁποσουτινοσοῦν πριά-
> 5» “ 5 4 9 > > , 5 4
μενοι Tap αὐτῶν ἀπέλθωμεν'" ὥστ᾽ ἐνίοτε εἰρήνης
»” ε Ν , 4 9 QA ,
οὔσης ὑπὸ τούτων πολιορκούμεθα. οὕτω δὲ πά-
λαι περὶ τῆς τούτων πανουργίας καὶ κακονοίας ἡ
’ὔ ᾿ 4 » » Ν A “a » 5 ’
πόλις ἔγνωκεν, WOT ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς ἄλλοις ὠνίοις
ἅπασι τοὺς ἀγορανόμους φύλακας κατεστήσατε,
» Ca de 4 ld “ , Ν φύλ
ἐπὶ δὲ ταύτῃ μόνῃ τῇ τέχνῃ χωρὶς σιτοφύλακας
5 nw A ’ »” > > 4,
ἀποκληροῦτε: καὶ πολλάκις ἤδη παρ᾽ ἐκείνων
nw »” ’ Ἀ ’ 5 ’ὔ 9
πολιτῶν ὄντων δίκην τὴν μεγίστην ἐλάβετε, ὅτι
οὐχ οἷοί τ᾽ ἦσαν τῆς τούτων πονηρίας ἐπικρα-
τῆσαι. καίτοι τί χρὴ αὐτοὺς τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας
ε > ε » , c ’ A Ν 5 ,’
ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν πάσχειν, ὁπότε καὶ τοὺς οὐ δυναμένους

’ » ,
φυλάττειν ἀποκτείνετε ;

17 ᾿Ἐνθυμεῖσθαι δὲ χρὴ ὅτι ἀδύνατον ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀπο-

ψηφίσασθαι. εἰ γὰρ ἀπογνώσεσθε ὁμολογούντων

XXII. AGAINST “THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 85

f >
αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐμπόρους συνίστασθαι, δόξεθ
ε ~~ > 4 “ > , > Ν ες
ὑμεῖς ἐπιβουλεύειν τοῖς εἰσπλέουσιν. εἰ μὲν yap

ἂν Δ >
ἄλλην τινὰ ἀπολογίαν ἐποιοῦντο, οὐδεὶς ἂν εἶχε
a“ > 4 > “~ 55 ε “A Ν
τοῖς ἀποψηφισαμένοις ἐπιτιμᾶν: ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν γὰρ
ε ΄, ΄ ΄ κι δὲ A >
ὁποτέροις βούλεσθε πιστεύειν: νυν δὲ πῶς οὐ

ae? , a > N ε a
δεινὰ ἂν δόξαιτε ποιεῖν, εἰ τοὺς ὁμολογοῦντας
Ὁ“ > 4 > la > 4 ,
παρανομεῖν ἀζημίους ἀφήσετε; ἀναμνήσθητε δέ,
> Ὑ 5 ἤρα τ la 3» ae ,
ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅτι πολλῶν ἤδη ἐχόντων Tav-
ἈΝ 27 ld Ν ’

την τὴν αἰτίαν [λαμβάνειν] καὶ μάρτυρας παρεχο-
μένων θάνατον κατέγνωτε, πιστοτέρους ἡγησά-

μενοι τοὺς τῶν κατηγόρων λόγους. καίτοι πῶς

ΕΣ > δ ¥ > an > ne
ἂν ov θαυμαστὸν εἴη, εἰ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ἁμαρτη-
’ὔ ὃ ’ὔ lal > θ a Q ~~
μάτων δικάζοντες μᾶλλον ἐπεθυμεῖτε Tapa τῶν
ἀρνουμένων δίκην λαμβάνειν; Καὶ μὲν δή, ὦ av-
Spes δικασταί, πᾶσιν ἡγοῦμαι φανερὸν εἶναι ὅτι
οἱ περὶ τῶν τοιούτων ἀγῶνες κοινότατοι τυγχά-
νουσιν ὄντες τοῖς ἐν τῇ πόλει, ὥστε πεύσονται
ἥντινα γνώμην περὶ αὐτῶν ἔχετε, ἡγούμενοι, ἂν
μὲν θάνατον αὐτῶν καταγνῶτε, κοσμιωτέρους ἔσε-
σθαι τοὺς λοιπούς - ἂν δ᾽ ἀζημίους ἀφῆτε, πολλὴν
» > m3 , ¥ a 9 Δ
ἄδειαν αὐτοῖς ἐψηφισμένοι ἔσεσθε ποιεῖν ὅ τι ἂν
΄ κ᾿ "νῷ , \ ΄
βούλωνται. χρὴ δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, μὴ μόνον
τῶν παρεληλυθότων ἕνεκα αὐτοὺς κολάζειν, ἀλλὰ

κ , 9 A , ¥
Kal παραδείγματος ἕνεκα TOV μελλόντων ἔσεσθαι"
ν Ν » / > / > a Ν
οὕτω γὰρ ἔσονται μόγις ἀνεκτοί. ἐνθυμεῖσθε δὲ
ν “A “ A
ὅτι ἐκ ταύτης τῆς τέχνης πλεῖστοι περὶ TOD σώμα-
/ “-“
τός εἰσιν ἠγωνισμένοι" καὶ οὕτω μεγάλα ἐξ αὐτῆς

20

86 XXII. KATA TON SITOMNQAQN.

21

22

9 A ΟΣ aA ε a a eg
ὠφελοῦνται, ὥστε μᾶλλον αἱροῦνται καθ᾽ ἑκάστην
ἡμέραν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς κινδυνεύειν ἣ παύεσθαι
3 ε “~ > ’ Ἀ Ν ‘ 3 »
Tap ὑμῶν ἀδίκως κερδαίνοντες. καὶ μὲν δὴ οὐδ
a ΕἸ a cn Pore ’ 7 »
ἂν ἀντιβολῶσιν ὑμᾶς Kal ἱκετεύωσι, δικαίως ἂν
αὐτοὺς ἐλεήσαιτε, ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον τῶν τε πολι-
τῶν οἱ διὰ τὴν τούτων πονηρίαν ἀπέθνησκον, καὶ
τοὺς ἐμπόρους ἐφ᾽ ovs οὗτοι συνέστησαν οἷς
ὑμεῖς χαριεῖσθε καὶ προθυμοτέρους ποιήσετε, δί-
> > A 4 > Ν ’, 7.2
Knv παρ᾽ αὐτῶν λαμβάνοντες. εἰ δὲ μή, τίν
3 Ν » ’ ν > Ν 4
αὐτοὺς οἴεσθε γνώμην ἕξειν, ἐπειδὰν πύθωνται
9 na , A “ 5 4 ε Υ̓
ὅτι τών καπήλων, οἵ τοῖς εἰσπλέουσιν ὡμολόγησαν
ἐπιβουλεύειν, ἀπεψηφίσασθε;
Οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅ τι δεῖ πλείω λέγειν: περὶ μὲν γὰρ
» » tal > ΄ 9 , a
τῶν ἄλλων τῶν ἀδικούντων, ὅτε δικάζονται, Set
παρὰ τῶν κατηγόρων πυθέσθαι, τὴν δὲ τούτων
πονηρίαν ἅπαντες ἐπίστασθε. ἂν οὖν τούτων
΄ , , 4, 1 es. 4
καταψηφίσησθε, τά τε δίκαια ποιήσετε καὶ ἀξιώ-
τερον τὸν σῖτον ὠνήσεσθε" εἰ δὲ μή, τιμιώτερον.

INTRODUCTION

TO

THE FUNERAL ORATION.

6s

Ir was appointed by law in Athens,.that the obsequies
of the citizens who fell in battle should be performed at the
public expense, and in the most honorable manner. Their
bones were carefully gathered up from the funeral pyre where
their bodies were consumed, and brought home to the city.
There, for three days before the interment, they lay in state
beneath tents of honor, to receive the votive offerings of
friends and relatives,— flowers, weapons, precious ornaments,
painted vases (wonders of art, which after two thousand years
adorn the museums of modern Europe), — the last tribute of
surviving affection. ‘Ten coffins of funereal cypress received
the honorable deposit, one for each of the tribes of the city ;
and an eleventh in memory of the unrecognized, but not
therefore unhonored, dead, and of those whose remains could
not be recovered. On the fourth day the mournful procession
was formed: mothers, wives, sisters, daughters, led the way,
and to them it was permitted by the simplicity of ancient
manners to utter aloud their lamentations for the beloved and
the lost ; the male relatives and friends of the deceased fol-
lowed ; citizens and strangers closed the train. Thus mar-
shalled, they moved to the place of interment in that famous
Ceramicus, the most beautiful suburb of Athens, which had

88 II. FUNERAL ORATION.

been adorned by Cimon, the son of Miltiades, with walks and
fountains and columns,— whose groves were filled with altars,
shrines, and temples,— whose gardens were kept forever
green by the streams from the neighboring hills, and shaded
with the trees sacred to Minerva and coeval with the founda-
tion of the city, — whose circuit enclosed

**the olive-grove of Academe,
Plato’s retirement, where the Attic bird
Trilied his thick-warbled note the summer long,”

— whose pathways gleamed with the monuments of the illus-
trious dead, the work of the most consummate masters that
ever gave life to marble. There, beneath the overarching
plane-trees, upon a lofty stage erected for the purpose, it was
ordained that a funeral oration should be pronounced by
some citizen of Athens in the presence of the assembled
multitude.”

This eloquent description by Edward Everett, in the
“Address at the Consecration of the National Cemetery at
Gettysburg,” fitly introduces the Funeral Oration ascribed by
the ancients to Lysias. There are four others remaining: the
celebrated oration of Pericles over the first slain of the Pelo-
ponnesian War, preserved, though only in substance, in the
history of Thucydides ; the second, in the Platonic dialogue
Menexenus, Socrates being made to rehearse it as a discourse
he had learned from Aspasia ; a third, bearing the name of
Demosthenes, but unquestionably spurious and altogether
unworthy of such authorship; the fourth, that delivered by
Hyperides over the Athenians who had fallen in the Lamian
War.

Besides the Forensic and the Deliberative, the ancient
writers made a third class, the Epideictic or “ Panegyric ”
orations, embracing those that were designed not so much
to secure any immediate practical result, as to furnish a

Il. ΕὔΝΕΒΑΙ, ORATION. 89

display of eloquence for public ceremonies and festivals,
In this class belonged the funeral oration, and the one before
us was early celebrated as a masterpiece of its kind.

It purports to have been composed for one of the funeral
ceremonies referred to above, during or soon after the Corin-
thian War (B. c. 394-387). The most decisive engagements
of the war were naval. On land, Corinth was the base of
operations against Sparta; it was held by the anti-Spartan
party of its citizens, aided by the allied Beeotian, Argive, and
Athenian forces, against the Lacedamonians and their allies
collected from the Peloponnesus. On the part of the Athe-
nians, Iphicrates and his peltasts distinguished themselves
in several minor engagements.* The title below is supposed
to refer to those who fell in some of the earlier skirmishes
(perhaps B. c. 392); but the allusions, in ὃ 59, to the con-
dition to which Greece was reduced by the Peace of An-
talcidas (387), if indeed they formed a part of the original
discourse, would require us to assign a date as late as the
close of the war.

It is aside from the purpose of this Introduction to enter
into the critical controversy concerning its authorship, or its
merits in point of style. “ Pulcherrima et ornatissima oratio,”
says Muretus; Blass, on the other hand, pronounces it a
“Schaustiick sophistischer Beredsamkeit,’ decorated “mit
dem eitelsten Flitter.” The reader will at once perceive the
difference between this and the other compositions of Lysias.
Its merits and its defects, however, are to a great extent those
of this species of oratory. The festival and the oration in
honor of the dead had become an annual celebration in the
time of Plato and Lysias. ‘These annual discourses appear
to have been cast in a common mould, mainly following the
same order of topics, and abounding in elaborately turned

* Grote, History of Greece, Vol. IX. p. 335 seg.

90 II. FUNERAL ORATION.

phrases that in the lapse of time became the commonplaces
of the rhetoricians. In view of the conformity to a fixed type,
and the reluctance of all Greek art to disregard traditionary
limitations, it would be idle to seek in the funeral oration of
that period marked originality either of thought or of style ;
it is to be remembered, too, both of this and of the Menexenus,
that they are eulogies, not histories; hence they are not
documents of historical accuracy. As to the authorship of
this, not a few critics refuse to include it in the productions
of Lysias. But Grote believes it to be genuine, and that the
Menexenus was written in competition with it. “Though the
name of Lysias,” he says, “is not mentioned in the AZenexe-
nus, yet the rivalry between him and Plato is clearly pro-
claimed in the Platonic /Predrus, and the two funeral
harangues go so completely over the same ground, that
intentional competition on the part of the latest is the most
natural of all hypotheses.”* Aristotle (/¢/e/., III. 15) quotes
from ὃ 60, referring to it as “the funeral oration” (τῷ ἐπιτα-
giv), but without naming the author.

Whoever the author, and whenever written or delivered,
it illustrates admirably the patriotic eloquence of the time.
The recent dead and the surviving mourners form the theme
of the closing portion only ($$ 67 -- 81) of the discourse. In
the main it is an exultant review of the glorious part taken
by Athens in Hellenic history. Beginning with the mythical
age of the Amazons, glancing at the autochthonous origin
of the Attic people, and lingering longest on the Persian
wars, the speaker tells again the oft-told deeds of old heroic
days, rehearsing the achievements of the dead as an example
and an inspiration to the living.

* Grote’s Plato, Vol. 111. p. 8.

If.

ENITA®IOS

ΤΟΙ͂Σ KOPINOIOQN BOHOOIS.

Η Ν ε ’ es > > ’ 2%
I μὲν ἡγούμην οἷόν τε εἶναι, ὦ παρόντες ἐπὶ
“ ΄Ὸ ΄ ΄ “ \ τῶ 3 ,
τῷδε τῷ τάφῳ, λόγῳ δηλῶσαι THY τών ἐνθάδε κει-
μένων ἀρετήν, ἐμεμψάμην ἂν τοῖς ἐπαγγείλασιν
> 5 > ey > 2\7 ε μῆς ΄ > δὴ δὲ
ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς ἐξ ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν λέγειν " ἐπειδὴ δὲ
πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 6 πᾶς χρόνος οὐχ ἱκανὸς λόγον
ἴσον παρασκευάσαι τοῖς τούτων ἔργοις, διὰ τοῦτο
> ε ’ ~ 4 A“ 5 ’
καὶ ἡ πόλις μοι δοκεῖ, προνοουμένη τῶν ἐνθάδε
λεγόντων, ἐξ ὀλίγου τὴν πρόσταξιν ποιεῖσθαι,
Ἅ
ἡγουμένη οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα συγγνώμης αὐτοὺς
παρὰ τῶν ἀκουσάντων τυγχάνειν. ὅμως δὲ ὁ μὲν
λόγος μοι περὶ τούτων, ὁ δ᾽ ἀγὼν οὐ πρὸς τὰ
’ » 3 Ν ‘ Ἁ / 39. » > “a
τούτων ἔργα ἀλλὰ πρὸς τοὺς πρότερον ET αὐτοῖς
>
εἰρηκότας. τοσαύτην yap ἀφθονίαν παρεσκεύ-
ασεν ἡ τούτων ἀρετὴ καὶ τοῖς ποιεῖν δυναμένοις
Ν “Ὁ al A
καὶ τοῖς εἰπεῖν βουληθεῖσιν, ὥστε Kaha μὲν πολλὰ
Wty 4 Ν > “ > A Ν Ν ‘
τοῖς προτέροις περὶ αὐτῶν εἰρῆσθαι, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ
δ al ε s \ \ “ >
ἐκείνοις παραλελεῖφθαι, ἱκανὰ δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἐπι-
γιγνομένοις ἐξεῖναι εἰπεῖν: οὔτε γὰρ γῆς ἄπειροι

92 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

3, ’ὔ > ral “ Ν A Ν)
οὔτε θαλάττης οὐδεμιᾶς, πανταχῇ δὲ καὶ παρὰ
“~ > ’ἅ “ nw
πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ot τὰ αὑτῶν πενθοῦντες κακὰ
τὰς τούτων ἀρετὰς ὑμνοῦσι.
“Ὁ Ν > Ν Ν , “
3 Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν τοὺς παλαιοὺς κινδύνους τῶν
’ δί ,ὔ Ν an , ,
προγόνων δίειμι, μνήμην Tapa τῆς φήμης λαβών:
ἄξιον γὰρ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις κἀκείνων μεμνῆσθαι,
ὑμνοῦντας μὲν ἐν ταῖς @dats, λέγοντας δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς
τῶν ἀγαθῶν γνώμαις, τιμῶντας δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς
τοῖς τοιούτοις, παιδεύοντας δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς τῶν τεθνεώ-
των ἔργοις τοὺς ζῶντας.
¥
4 ᾿Αμαζόνες yap “Apews μὲν τὸ παλαιὸν ἦσαν
θυγατέρες, οἰκοῦσαι δὲ παρὰ τὸν Θερμώδοντα
, , A ε vi , Lal A
ποταμόν, μόναι μὲν ὡπλισμέναι σιδήρῳ τῶν περὶ
5 , “~ A “ ’; 5 > ¢ 5» Lal
αὐτάς, πρῶται δὲ τῶν πάντων ἐφ᾽ ἵππους avaBa-
a > , 35 ΄ cal > ,
σαι, οἷς ἀνελπίστως Sb ἀπειρίαν τῶν ἐναντίων
ν Ἀ Ν 4 > / δὲ ἈΝ
ἥρουν μὲν τοὺς φεύγοντας, ἀπέλειπον δὲ τοὺς
διώκοντας ἐνομίζοντο δὲ διὰ τὴν εὐψυχίαν μᾶλλον
» a Ν κ ΄ a , ‘
ἄνδρες ἢ Sia τὴν φύσιν γυναῖκες" πλέον yap
5» ,ὕ » ΕῚ al »" Lal ὃ ͵ “Ὁ nw
ἐδόκουν τῶν ἀνδρῶν ταῖς ψυχαῖς διαφέρειν ἢ ταῖς
5 ἰδέαις ἐλλείπειν. ἄρχουσαι δὲ πολλῶν ἐθνῶν, καὶ
»ἬΆ A Ν A > Ἀ ὃ ὃ λ 4 ,
ἔργῳ μὲν τοὺς περὶ αὐτὰς καταδεδουλωμέναι, λόγῳ
δὲ περὶ τῆσδε τῆς χώρας ἀκούουσαι κλέος μέγα,
πολλῆς δόξης καὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος χάριν παρα-
λαβοῦσαι τὰ μαχιμώτατα τῶν ἐθνῶν ἐστράτευσαν
» Ἁ ’ὔὕ 4 , “ δ᾽ 5 θῶ » ὃ Lal
ἐπὶ τήνδε THY πόλιν. τυχοῦσαι δ᾽ ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν
ε ,’ > 4 4 Ν “ ’ A >
ὁμοίας ἐκτήσαντο τὰς ψυχὰς TH φύσει, καὶ ἐναν-
τίαν τὴν δόξαν τῆς προτέρας λαβοῦσαι μᾶλλον
> a ΄ a > A , ¥ >
ἐκ τῶν κινδύνων ἢ ἐκ τῶν σωμάτων ἔδοξαν εἶναι

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 93

A ’ > > “ > > 4 > a:
γυναῖκες. μόναις δ᾽ αὐταῖς οὐκ ἐξεγένετο ἐκ τῶν 6
an “ »¥
ἡμαρτημένων μαθούσαις περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἄμεινον
4 > > ¥ > 4 > lal
βουλεύσασθαι, οὐδ᾽ οἴκαδε ἀπελθούσαις ἀπαγγεῖ-
λαι τήν τε σφετέραν αὐτῶν δυστυχίαν καὶ τὴν τῶν
ἡμετέρων προγόνων ἀρετήν: αὐτοῦ γὰρ ἀποθα-
νοῦσαι, καὶ δοῦσαι δίκην τῆς ἀνοίας, τῆσδε μὲν
»-" ld Ν Ἀ > Ἀ > ’ ’,
τῆς πόλεως διὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν ἀθάνατον μνήμην
> ΄ Ν δὲ ε a (ὃ ὃ Ν Ν > 0 (ὃ
ἐποίησαν, τὴν δὲ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδα διὰ τὴν ἐνθάδε
συμφορὰν ἀνώνυμον κατέστησαν. ἐκεῖναι μὲν
> cy ΄ Cay eee ΄ \ ε
οὖν τῆς ἀλλοτρίας ἀδίκως ἐπιθυμήσασαι THY ἕαυ-
τῶν δικαίως ἀπώλεσαν.
᾿Αδράστου δὲ καὶ Πολυνείκους ἐπὶ Θήβας στρα- 7
τευσάντων καὶ ἡττηθέντων μάχῃ, οὐκ ἐώντων
Καδμείων θάπτειν τοὺς νεκρούς, ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἡγη-
σάμενοι ἐκείνους μέν, εἴ τι ἠδίκουν, ἀποθανόντας
δίκην ἔχειν τὴν μεγίστην, τοὺς δὲ κάτω τὰ αὑτῶν
οὐ κομίζεσθαι, ἱερῶν δὲ μιαινομένων τοὺς ἄνω
Ν > “~ Ν A “~ ’ 4
θεοὺς ἀσεβεῖσθαι, τὸ μὲν πρῶτον πέμψαντες κή-
ρυκας ἐδέοντο αὐτῶν δοῦναι τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναίρε-
’ὔὕ 5 Lal A 5» wn > “~
σιν, νομίζοντες ἀνδρῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν εἶναι ζῶντας 8
Ἁ 5 Ν 4 > 4 Ν ’
τοὺς ἐχθροὺς τιμωρήσασθαι, ἀπιστούντων δὲ σφί-
~ -“ “
σιν αὐτοῖς ἐν τοῖς τῶν τεθνεώτων σώμασι τὴν
> ’ > 4 > , Ν 4
εὐψυχίαν ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, ov δυνάμενοι δὲ τούτων
τυχεῖν ἐστράτευσαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, οὐδεμιᾶς διαφορᾶς
πρότερον πρὸς Καδμείους ὑπαρχούσης, οὐδὲ τοῖς
“ > ’ ’ > Ν. Ν aes
ζῶσιν ᾿Αργείων χαριζόμενοι, ἀλλὰ τοὺς τεθνεῶτας 9
ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ ἀξιοῦντες τῶν νομιζομένων τυγχάνειν
πρὸς τοὺς ἑτέρους ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων ἐκινδύνευσαν,

94 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

Io

11

12

ε Ν A -“ ν 5 Ν νος 3
ὑπὲρ μὲν τῶν, ἵνα μηκέτι εἰς τοὺς τεθνεῶτας ἐξα-
, ’ὔ Ν Ν ‘ > ’
μαρτάνοντες πλείω περὶ τοὺς θεοὺς ἐξυβρίσωσιν,
ὑπὲρ δὲ τῶν ἑτέρων, ἵνα μὴ πρότερον εἰς τὴν
αὑτῶν ἀπέλθωσι πατρίου τιμῆς ἀτυχήσαντες καὶ

ε “ lal
Ἑλληνικοῦ νόμου στερηθέντες καὶ κοινῆς ἐλπίδος
ἡμαρτηκότες. ταῦτα διανοηθέντες, καὶ τὰς ἐν τῷ
πολέμῳ τύχας κοινὰς ἁπάντων ἀνθρώπων νομί-
Ν Ν ’ 4 Ν A
ζοντες, πολλοὺς μὲν πολεμίους κτώμενοι, TO δὲ
δίκαιον ἔχοντες σύμμαχον ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι. καὶ
οὐχ ὑπὸ τῆς τύχης ἐπαρθέντες μείζονος παρὰ
Καδμείων τιμωρίας ἐπεθύμησαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνοις μὲν
> \ ~ > 4 Ν ε A > \ > ὃ ,
ἀντὶ τῆς ἀσεβείας THY ἑαυτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο,
αὐτοὶ δὲ λαβόντες τὰ ἄθλα ὧνπερ ἕνεκα ἀφίκοντο,
‘\ > ’ ’ » > “Ὁ ε “A >
τοὺς ᾿Αργείων νεκρούς, ἔθαψαν ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν ᾿Ελευ-
σῖνι. περὶ μὲν οὖν τοὺς ἀποθανόντας τῶν ἑπτὰ
-" κ 4 ral ,
ἐπὶ Θήβας τοιοῦτοι γεγόνασιν.
«ε ’ Ν Υ͂ > be “ Ν > >
Ὑστέρῳ δὲ χρόνῳ, ἐπειδὴ Ἡρακλῆς μὲν ἐξ av-
’ » ’ ε A Lal > nw »
θρώπων ἠφανίσθη, οἱ δὲ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἔφευγον
Ν > 4 > ’ δὲ ε Ν ’, ων
μὲν Εὐρυσθέα, ἐξηλαύνοντο δὲ ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν
al »
Ἑλλήνων, αἰσχυνομένων μὲν τοῖς ἔργοις, φοβου-
’ Ν Ἀ > ld , > / >
μένων δὲ τὴν Εὐρυσθέως δύναμιν, ἀφικόμενοι eis
4, ἈΝ 4 ε ’ δι Ν A “Ὁ > 4
τήνδε τὴν πόλιν ἱκέται ἐπὶ τῶν βωμῶν ἐκαθέζοντο"
> -“
ἐξαιτουμένου δὲ αὐτοὺς Εὐρυσθέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐκ
ἠθέλησαν ἐκδοῦναι, ἀλλὰ τὴν Ἡ ρακλέους ἀρετὴν
A > ω Δ ‘ , \ 5 A >
μᾶλλον ἠδοῦντο ἢ τὸν κίνδυνον τὸν ἑαυτῶν ἐφο-
al “ Ν
βοῦντο, καὶ ἠξίουν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀσθενεστέρων μετὰ
τοῦ δικαίου διαμάχεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ τοῖς δυναμέ-
νοις χαριζόμενοι τοὺς ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων - ἀδικουμένους

Il. FUNERAL ORATION. 95

> Lal > 4, > > ,’ Ν.
ἐκδοῦναι. ἐπιστρατεύσαντος: δ᾽ Εὐρυσθέως μετὰ
τῶν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ Πελοπόννησον ἐχόντων,
οὐκ ἐγγὺς τῶν δεινῶν γενόμενοι μετέγνωσαν,
> Ν \ > Ν > 4 4 /
ἀλλὰ τὴν αὐτὴν εἶχον γνώμην ἤνπερ πρότερον,
3 Ν Ν 3 Ν > ’, ε Ν “ Ν 5 “A
ἀγαθὸν μὲν οὐδὲν idia ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν
πεπονθότες, ἐκείνους T οὐκ εἰδότες ὁποῖοί τινες
ΕἾ » , ’ Ν ’
ἄνδρες ἔσονται γενόμενοι" δίκαιον δὲ νομίζοντες
εἶναι, οὐ προτέρας ἔχθρας ὑπαρχούσης πρὸς Εὐρυ-
θέ. ὑδὲ / ὃ ΄ Ν ὃ , 3
σθέα, οὐδὲ κέρδους προκειμένου πλὴν δόξης ἀγα-
an A ~ »
Ons, τοσοῦτον κίνδυνον ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἤραντο, τοὺς
Ν LO / > A ‘ δ᾽ ε ’
μὲν ἀδικουμένους ἐλεοῦντες, τοὺς ὑβρίζοντας
μισοῦντες, καὶ τοὺς μὲν κωλύειν ἐπιχειροῦντες,
αν 232 “Ὁ 3 ΄““ ε ’ > ’
τοῖς δ᾽ ἐπικουρεῖν ἀξιοῦντες, ἡγούμενοι ἐλευθερίας
μὲν σημεῖον εἶναι μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄκοντας, δικαιοσύ-
vns δὲ τοῖς ἀδικουμένοις βοηθεῖν, εὐψυχίας δ᾽
ὑπὲρ τούτων ἀμφοτέρων, εἰ δέοι, μαχομένους ἀπο-
’ Le 22 ’ 5 id A >
θνήσκειν. τοσοῦτον δ᾽ ἐφρόνουν ἀμφότεροι, ὥσθ
ε Ν » > ’ > Ν ϑι κα ’ὔ 5 Y
ot μὲν μετ᾽ Εὐρυσθέως οὐδὲν παρ᾽ ἑκόντων ἐζήτουν
εὑρίσκεσθαι, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ οὐκ ἠξίουν Εὐρυσθέα
αὐτὸν ἱκετεύοντα τοὺς ἱκέτας αὐτῶν ἐξελεῖν. πα-
ραταξάμενοι δ᾽ ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει τὴν ἐξ ἁπάσης Πελο-
ποννήσου στρατιὰν ἐλθοῦσαν ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι,
Ν a ε ’ὔὕ , Ν A 4 >
καὶ Tov “Hpaxdéovs παίδων τὰ μὲν σώματα εἰς
Ἂν 7 3 ’ Ν A ,
ἄδειαν κατέστησαν, ἀπαλλάξαντες δὲ τοῦ δέους
Χ Ν Ν 5 ’ὔ ‘ \ Ν ~
Kal Tas ψυχὰς ἠλευθέρωσαν, διὰ δὲ τὴν τοῦ πα-
τρὸς ἀρετὴν ἐκείνους τοῖς αὑτῶν κινδύνοις ἐστε-
φάνωσαν. τοσοῦτον δὲ εὐτυχέστεροι παῖδες ὄν-
τες ἐγένοντο τοῦ πατρός: ὁ μὲν γάρ, καίπερ ὧν

13

15

17

18

19

20

Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

3 an la »¥ A > 4 δε, Φ'
ἀγαθῶν πολλῶν αἴτιος ἅπασιν ἀνθρώποις, ἐπί-
. Ἷ , A / ε »“.
πονον καὶ φιλόνεικον καὶ φιλότιμον αὑτῷ κατα-
’ὔ wt 4, A A 3, 5 nw
στήσας τὸν βίον τοὺς μὲν addous ἀδικοῦντας
» ’ 5 4 A Ν 5 Ν » A >
ἐκόλασεν, Εὐρυσθέα δὲ καὶ ἐχθρὸν ὄντα καὶ εἰς
αὐτὸν ἐξαμαρτάνοντα οὐχ οἷός τε ἦν τιμωρήσα-
σθαι: οἱ δὲ παῖδες αὐτοῦ διὰ τήνδε τὴν πόλιν
A >A “Ξ aioe ΄ 3 ὦ a , \
τῇ αὐτῇ εἶδον ἡμέρᾳ τήν θ᾽ ἑαυτῶν σωτηρίαν καὶ
τὴν τῶν ἐχθρῶν τιμωρίαν.
Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν ὑπῆρχε τοῖς ἡμετέροις προγό-
νοις μιᾷ γνώμῃ χρωμένοις περὶ τοῦ δικαίου δια-
’ ν A 5 Ν ΄“ ’ ,’ »
μάχεσθαι. ἥ τε γὰρ ἀρχὴ τοῦ βίου δικαία: οὐ
γάρ, ὥσπερ οἱ πολλοί, πανταχόθεν συνειλεγμένοι
καὶ ἑτέρους ἐκβαλόντες τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ᾧ
ρους ς τὴ ρίαν ᾧκησαν,
» 5 3 ’ὔὕ 2 Ν » ἈΝ 5 ᾽ὔὕ A
ἀλλ᾽ αὐτόχθονες ὄντες τὴν αὐτὴν ἐκέκτηντο Kal
μητέρα καὶ πατρίδα. πρῶτοι δὲ καὶ μόνοι ἐν
ΕῚ , ΄-“ ΄ > B X , Ἂ, Ν φί
ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ ἐκβαλόντες τὰς παρὰ σφίσιν
αὐτοῖς δυναστείας δημοκρατίαν κατεστήσαντο,
ἡγούμενοι τὴν πάντων ἐλευθερίαν ὁμόνοιαν εἶναι
’ A > > , A 5 Lal ὃ ’
μεγίστην, κοινὰς ὃ ἀλλήλοις τὰς ἐκ τῶν κινδύνων
5 / , > , aA cal ᾿
ἐλπίδας ποιήσαντες ἐλευθέραις ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐπολι-
τεύοντο, νόμῳ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς τιμῶντες καὶ τοὺς
κακοὺς κολάζοντες, ἡγησάμενοι θηρίων μὲν ἔργον
εἶναι ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων βίᾳ κρατεῖσθαι, ἀνθρώποις δὲ
,ὕ ’ὔ A ε ,’ ἈΝ 4 ’ A
προσήκειν νόμῳ μὲν ὁρίσαι TO δίκαιον, λόγῳ δὲ
πεῖσαι, ἔργῳ δὲ τούτοις ὑπηρετεῖν, ὑπὸ νόμου μὲν
͵ὔ ε Ν ’ὔ A /
βασιλευομένους, ὑπὸ λόγου δὲ διδασκομένους.
. 4 4 4 “ . ’ὔ
Καὶ γάρ τοι καὶ φύντες καλως καὶ γνόντες
- Ν . A A Ν ε ,
ὅμοια, πολλὰ μὲν καλὰ καὶ θαυμαστὰ οἱ πρόγονοι

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 97

τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων εἰργάσαντο, ἀείμνηστα δὲ
καὶ μεγάλα καὶ πανταχοῦ ot ἐξ ἐκείνων γεγονότες
τρόπαια διὰ τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν κατέλιπον. μόνοι
Ν ε Ν ε ’ aA ε 4 Ν A
yap ὑπὲρ ἁπάσης τῆς Ἑλλάδος πρὸς πολλὰς μυρι-
’ “~ 4 ’ ε Ν Lal
ddas τῶν βαρβάρων διεκινδύνευσαν. ὁ yap τῆς
3 / Ἁ > > “ <> e ’
Ασίας βασιλεὺς οὐκ ἀγαπῶν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν
ἀγαθοῖς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλπίζων καὶ τὴν Εὐρώπην δουλώσε-
σθαι, ἔστειλε πεντήκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάν.
ε , , > , N ΄, Rite aA
ἡγησάμενοι δέ, εἰ τήνδε THY πόλιν ἢ ἑκοῦσαν
φίλην ποιήσαιντο ἢ ἄκουσαν καταστρέψαιντο,
ῥᾳδίως τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων ἄρξειν, ἀπέβησαν εἰς
Μαραθῶνα, νομίσαντες οὕτως ἂν ἐρημοτάτους εἶναι

21

συμμάχων ἔτόνς Navas], εἰ ἔτι στασιαζούσης.

τῆς Ἑλλάδος ᾧ τινι χρὴ di TOUS ἐπιόντας ἀμύ-
νασθαι, τὸν gto iste nian ἔτι δ᾽ αὐτοῖς
ἐκ τῶν aoe ἔργων σερὶ τῆς πόλεως τοιαύτῃ
δόξα παρεισνῆκες ὡς εἰ μὲν πρότερον ἐπ᾽ ἄλλην
πόλιν ἴασιν, ἐκείνοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις πολεμήσουσι"
4 Ν “Ὁ > 4 μ᾿ ’
προθύμως γὰρ τοῖς ἀδικουμένοις ἥξουσι βοηθή-
σοντες εἰ δ᾽ ἐνθάδε πρῶτον ἀφίξονται, οὐδένας
ἄλλους τῶν Ἑλλήνων τολμήσειν ἑτέρους σώζοντας
φανερὰν ἔχθραν πρὸς ἐκείνους ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν κατα-
θέσθαι. οἱ μὲν τοίνυν ταῦτα διενοοῦντο" οἱ δ᾽
ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι οὐ λογισμῷ .... εἰδότες τοὺς
> a“ 4 ’ > Ν ’ Ν >
ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ κινδύνους, ἀλλὰ νομίζοντες τὸν εὐ-
“ ’ > /, ‘\ “A > A ’
κλεᾶ θάνατον ἀθάνατον περὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν καταλεί-
πειν λόγον, οὐκ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναν-
’ 5 Ν a Θ᾽... σὲ > “A a es
τίων, ἀλλὰ TH avT@v ἀρετῇ μᾶλλον ἐπίστευσαν.
7

22

93

24

25

26

Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

eee , Y > ε , . A 9
καὶ αἰσχυνόμενοι ὅτι ἦσαν οἱ βάρβαροι αὐτῶν ἐν
“ 4 > > 4 4 > A “~
τῇ χώρᾳ, οὐκ ἀνέμειναν πυθέσθαι οὐδὲ βοηθῆσαι
τοὺς συμμάχους, οὐδ᾽ ὠφήθησαν δεῖν ἑτέροις τῆς
7 4 5 4 5 Ν / > = Ἁ
σωτηρίας χάριν εἰδέναι, ἀλλὰ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τοὺς
ἄλλους Ἕλλ U L γνώ Ἵ
ς ἡνας. ταῦτα μιᾷ γνώμῃ πάντες γνόντες
> ‘3 5 ’ Ν. , > , Ν 3
ἀπήντων ὀλίγοι πρὸς πολλούς - ἐνόμιζον yap ἀπο-
θανεῖν μὲν αὐτοῖς μετὰ πάντων προσήκειν, ἀγα-
Ν 5 > > 5 ’ \ Ν A Ν
θοὺς δ᾽ εἶναι per ὀλίγων, καὶ τὰς μὲν ψυχὰς
ἀλλοτρίας διὰ τὸν θάνατον κεκτῆσθαι, τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ
“ , 7 3 ‘A 4 5 ’ὔ
τῶν κινδύνων μνήμην ἰδίαν καταλείψειν. ἠξίουν
δ᾽, obs μὴ μόνοι νικῷεν, οὐδ᾽ ἂν μετὰ συμμάχων
’ Ν ε 4 \ >\ 7 ea ᾿Ξ
δύνασθαι: καὶ ἡττηθέντες μὲν ὀλίγῳ τῶν ἄλλων
“ ,ὕ Ν Ν Ν Ν»
προαπολεῖσθαι, νικήσαντες δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους
> a ὃ 3 5 ‘\ ld Ν
ἐλευθερώσειν. ἄνδρες δ᾽ ἀγαθοὶ γενόμενοι, καὶ
“ Ν 4, > ’, ε A ἈΝ a 5
τῶν μὲν σωμάτων ἀφειδήσαντες, ὑπὲρ δὲ τῆς ἀρε-
nw > 4 Ν Lan Ν ᾽
τῆς οὐ φιλοψυχήσαντες, καὶ μᾶλλον τοὺς παρ
αὑτοῖς νόμους αἰσχυνόμενοι ἢ τὸν πρὸς τοὺς πολε-
μίους κίνδυνον φοβούμενοι, ἔστησαν μὲν τρόπαια
ὑπὲρ τῆς Ἑλλάδος τῶν βαρβάρων ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν,
ε Ν ’ > Ν 3 ’, 3 ,
ὑπὲρ χρημάτων eis τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ἐμβαλόντων,
παρὰ τοὺς ὅρους τῆς χώρας, οὕτω δὲ διὰ ταχέων
Ν ’, > , ν ε > Ν “ »
τὸν κίνδυνον ἐποιήσαντο, ὥστε οἱ αὐτοὶ τοῖς ἀλ-
λοις ἀπήγγειλαν τήν τ᾽ ἐνθάδε ἄφιξιν τῶν βαρ-
βάρων καὶ τὴν τῶν προγόνων νίκην. καὶ γάρ τοι
> ἈΝ “ » »» ε \ lel ,
οὐδεὶς τῶν ἄλλων ἔδεισεν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέλλοντος κιν-
΄ 3 S49 4 ε Ν al cm > ’
δύνου, ἀλλ᾽ ἀκούσαντες ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν ἐλευθερίας
wa - 3 Ν ’ ud nw
ἥσθησαν. ὥστε οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, πάλαι τῶν
ἔργων γεγενημένων, ὥσπερ καινῶν ὄντων ἔτι καὶ

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 99

» A 5 Ἁ > ~ ec Ἀ ’ 5 ’ὔ
νῦν τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων
ζηλοῦσθαι.

Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα Ξέρξης ὁ τῆς ᾿Ασίας βασιλεύς, 27
καταφρονήσας μὲν τῆς Ἑλλάδος, ἐψευσμένος δὲ
τῆς ἐλπίδος, ἀτιμαζόμενος δὲ τῷ γεγενημένῳ,
> , A - “Ὁ 5 ’ὔ δὲ σὰ
ἀχθόμενος δὲ τῇ συμφορᾷ, ὀργιζόμενος δὲ τοῖς

> > \ se th an , » > ὃ a
αἰτίοις, ἀπαθὴς δ᾽ ὧν κακῶν καὶ ἄπειρος ἀνδρῶν

- ’
ἀγαθῶν, δεκάτῳ ἔτει παρασκευασάμενος χιλίαις

Ἀ Ἀ ,’ A > 4 nw δὲ nw
μὲν καὶ διακοσίαις ναυσὶν ἀφίκετο, τῆς δὲ πεζῆς

7 nw > 9 ‘
στρατιᾶς οὕτως ἄπειρον TO πλῆθος ἦγεν, ὥστε Kat

Ν » A > 5» “ >] ’ A a
τὰ ἔθνη τὰ per αὐτοῦ ἀκολουθήσαντα πολὺ ἂν
» ¥ , Ν Ν id -~” “A
ἔργον εἴη καταλέξαι: τὸ δὲ μέγιστον σημεῖον τοῦ 28
πλήθους - ἐξὸν γὰρ αὐτῷ χιλίαις ναυσὶ διαβιβά-
σαι κατὰ τὸ στενώτατον τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου τὴν

ἈΝ Ν > nw > ’ » A > 4
πεζὴν στρατιὰν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίας εἰς THY Εὐρώπην,
οὐκ ἠἡθέλ ε ’ A ὃ βὴ ε -“
ἠθέλησεν, ἡγούμενος τὴν διατριβὴν αὑτῷ
πολλὴν ἔσεσθαι: ἀλλ᾽ ὑπεριδὼν καὶ τὰ φύσει 29
, A Ν ~ ’ A x >
πεφυκότα καὶ τὰ θεῖα πράγματα Kat Tas ἀνθρω-

’ ,’΄ ε Ν A A nw ’ 5 ’
πίνας διανοίας ὁδὸν μὲν διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης ἐποιή-
σατο, πλοῦν δὲ διὰ τῆς γῆς ἠνάγκασε γενέσθαι,
ζεύξας μὲν τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον, διορύξας δὲ τὸν
ἴἼΛθω- ὑφισταμένου οὐδενός, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν ἀκόν-
των ὑπακουόντων, τῶν δὲ ἑκόντων προδιδόντων.

ε A Ν » 4 | > > 4 ε » ι- A
οἱ μὲν yap οὐχ ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν ἀμύνασθαι, ot δ᾽ ὑπὸ
χρημάτων διεφθαρμένοι. ἀμφότερα δ᾽ ἣν αὐτοὺς
τὰ πείθοντα, κέρδος καὶ δέος. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δ᾽ οὕτω 30

’ ~ ες ’ἅ » Ἀ Ἁ > A “~ >
διακειμένης τῆς Ελλάδος αὐτοὶ μὲν εἰς τὰς ναῦς ἐμ-

, re -D 4 > 4 ,
βάντες ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ἐβοήθησαν, Λακεδαιμόνιοι

100 Il. EMITA®IO“.

δὲ Ν sad , » > uA 39 ca
€ Kal τῶν συμμάχων ἔνιοι εἰς Θερμοπύλας ἀπήν-
τησαν, ἡγούμενοι διὰ τὴν στενότητα τῶν χωρίων
31 τὴν πάροδον οἷοί τ᾽ ἔσεσθαι διαφυλάξαι. γενο-
μένου δὲ τοῦ κινδύνου κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον
᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν evi. τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, Λακεδαιμό
ηναῖοι μὲν ἐνίκων τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, Λακεδαιμόνιοι
δέ, οὐ ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐνδεεῖς γενόμενοι, ἀλλὰ τοῦ
πλήθους ψευσθέντες καὶ ods φυλάξειν ᾧοντο καὶ
Ν ἃ ὃ 7 ἅν" 3 ε ’
πρὸς οὗς κινδυνεύσειν ἔμελλον, .... οὐχ ἡττηθέν-
΄““ > 4 > > > , es > ’
τες τῶν ἐναντίων, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποθανόντες οὗπερ ἐτάχθη-
32 σὰν μάχεσθαι, τούτῳ δὲ τῷ τρόπῳ τῶν μὲν δυστυ-
χησάντων, τῶν δὲ τῆς παρόδου κρατησάντων, οἱ
Ν 3 4 βίος ἢ 4 Ν , e 2 =¢ ’ὔ
μὲν ἐπορεύοντο ἐπὶ τήνδε τὴν πόλιν, οἱ δ᾽ ἡμέτεροι
πρόγονοι πυθόμενοι μὲν τὴν γεγενημένην Λακεδαι-
μονίοις συμφοράν, ἀποροῦντες δὲ τοῖς περιεστη-
κόσι πράγμασιν, εἰδότες δ᾽ ὅτι, εἰ μὲν κατὰ γὴν
Lal ἊΣ > , > ’ ’
τοῖς βαρβάροις ἀπαντήσονται, ἐπιπλεύσαντες χιλί
Ἀ 5 ’ ‘ / 4 > Ν 5
ais ναυσὶν ἐρήμην τὴν πόλιν λήψονται, εἰ δὲ εἰς
τὰς τριήρεις ἐμβήσονται, ὑπὸ τῆς πεζῆς στρατιᾶς
ε , > , δὲ 3 ὃ ΄ 3 ΄
ἁλώσονται, ἀμφότερα O€ οὐ δυνήσονται, ἀμύνα-
33 σθαΐ τε καὶ φυλακὴν ἱκανὴν καταλιπεῖν, δυοῖν δὲ
προκειμένοιν, πότερον χρὴ τὴν πατρίδα ἐκλιπεῖν
Ἅ Ν ων , , ,
ἢ μετὰ τῶν βαρβάρων γενομένους καταδουλώ-
\ 7 ε ’ a
σασθαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ἡγησάμενοι κρεῖττον εἶναι
ἘΣ. Penns \ ΄ ν a > , x
per ἀρετῆς καὶ πενίας καὶ φυγῆς ἐλευθερίαν 7
ot SS (ὃ Ἀ , ὃ , Lal (ὃ
μετ᾽ ὀνείδους καὶ πλούτου δουλείαν τῆς πατρίδος,
ἐξέλιπον ὑπὲρ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος τὴν πόλιν, ἵν᾿ ἐν μέρει
Ν ε ’ὔ > ‘ A Ν > 4 9 4
πρὸς ἑκατέραν ἀλλὰ μὴ πρὸς ἀμφοτέρας ἅμα Tas
34 δυνάμεις κινδυνεύσωσιν, ὑπεκθέμενοι δὲ παῖδας

II. FUNERAL ORATION. ΙΟΙ

ΟΝ A ‘\ , 3 a ΄
καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ μητέρας εἰς Σαλαμῖνα, συνή-.

θροιζον καὶ τὸ τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων ναυτικόν.
οὐ πολλαῖς δ᾽ ὕστερον ἡμέραις ἦλθε καὶ ἡ πεζὴ
Ν Ν ‘ Ν) Ν. A ’ ἃ ’
στρατιὰ καὶ τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ὃ τίς
οὐκ ἂν ἰδὼν ἐφοβήθη, ὡς μέγας καὶ δεινὸς τῇδε τῇ
πόλει κίνδυνος ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερίας
» ’ ’ Ν ’ » x» ε 4
ἠγωνίσθη ; ποίαν δὲ γνώμην εἶχον ἢ ot θεώμενοι
τοὺς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐκείναις, οὔσης καὶ τῆς αὑτῶν
σωτηρίας ἀπίστου καὶ τοῦ προσιόντος κινδύνου,
x» ε 4 ’ ε ἈΝ A ,
ἢ οἱ μέλλοντες ναυμαχήσειν ὑπὲρ τῆς φιλότητος,
τς A ¥ A > A a A
ὑπὲρ τῶν ἄθλων τῶν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι; οἷς τοσοῦτον
πανταχόθεν περιειστήκει πλῆθος πολεμίων, ὥστε
ἐλάχιστον μὲν αὐτοῖς εἶναι τῶν παρόντων κακῶν
‘ Δ Ν ε “ 4 4
τὸ θάνατον τὸν αὑτῶν προειδέναι, μεγίστην δὲ
, aA ε Ν Ὁ 4, > ’
συμφοράν, ἃ ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων εὐτυχησάντων
‘ ε ’ ᾿», ’, > \
τοὺς ὑπεκτεθέντας ἤλπιζον πείσεσθαι. ἢ που διὰ
ἣς ε ’ὔ > ’ ’ Ν. 5 7
τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀπορίαν πολλάκις μὲν ἐδεξιώ-
σαντο ἀλλήλους, εἰκότως δὲ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ὠλοφύ-
> / Ν Ν ’ὔ ~ > /
pavto, εἰδότες μὲν tas σφετέρας vais ὀλίγας
¥ ε κα \ \ \ a , 4
οὔσας, ὁρῶντες δὲ πολλὰς Tas τῶν πολεμίων, ἐπι-
’ Ν Ν Ν 7 > 4 Ἀ Ν
στάμενοι δὲ τὴν μὲν πόλιν ἠρημωμένην, τὴν δὲ
χώραν πορθουμένην καὶ μεστὴν τῶν βαρβάρων,
ἱερῶν δὲ καιομένων, ἁπάντων δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὄντων τῶν
al > 4 > > > ~ ’
δεινῶν, ἀκούοντες δ᾽ ἐν ταὐτῷ συμμεμιγμένου
ε Ὁ“ Ὁ“ ἴω,
Ἑλληνικοῦ καὶ βαρβαρικοῦ παιᾶνος, παρακελευ-
“ » > 4 Ν -“ ~
σμοῦ δ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων καὶ κραυγῆς τῶν διαφθειρο-
μένων, καὶ τῆς θαλάττης μεστῆς τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ
ΑΝ Ν ’ Ν ’, Ν ’
πολλῶν μὲν συμπιπτόντων καὶ φιλίων καὶ πολεμίων

35

36

37

38

102 Il. EMITA®IOS.

39

40

41

42

, 5 ’ὔ’ A A ’ὔἅ ¥ »".
ναυαγίων, ἀντιπάλου δὲ πολὺν χρόνον οὔσης τῆς
ναυμαχίας δοκοῦντες τοτὲ μὲν νενικηκέναι καὶ

cal A > e ~ Ν 5 4
σεσῶσθαι, τοτὲ δ᾽ ἡττῆσθαι καὶ ἀπολωλέναι.
ἢ που διὰ τὸν παρόντα φόβον πολλὰ μὲν wHAOn-
σαν ἰδεῖν ὧν οὐκ εἶδον, πολλὰ δ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι ὧν

> » » > > ε a a ΕΣ.
οὐκ ἤκουσαν. ποῖαι δ᾽ οὐχ ἱκετεῖαι θεῶν ἐγέ-

“Δ la 5 la » ld , ν
vovto ἢ θυσιῶν ἀναμνήσεις, ἔλεός τε παίδων καὶ
γυναικῶν πόθος οἶκτός τε πατέρων καὶ μητέρων,
λογισμὸς δ᾽, εἰ δυστυχήσειαν, τῶν μελλόντων
» Lon ’ 5 xX “ 5 4 5 A
ἔσεσθαι κακῶν ; τίς οὐκ ἂν θεῶν ἠλέησεν αὐτοὺς
ε x al , lal , a» , > ,
ὑπὲρ Tov μεγέθους τοῦ κινδύνου; ἢ τίς ἀνθρώ-

3 ΕΝ δα. aK , a / 3 Q
πων οὐκ ἂν ἐδάκρυσεν ; ἢ Tis τῆς τόλμης αὐτοὺς

> “Δ > , > A ~ > ω Ν
οὐκ ἂν ἠγάσθη; ἢ πολὺ πλεῖστον ἐκεῖνοι κατὰ
A 5» A ε ’ » 7 ’ A >
τὴν ἀρετὴν ἁπάντων ἀνθρώπων διήνεγκαν καὶ ἐν
nw , A 5 ” [ων 4 a
τοῖς βουλεύμασι καὶ ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πολέμου κινδύ-

5» ’ὔ A A ’ » A Qn >
νοις, ἐκλιπόντες μὲν τὴν πόλιν, εἰς τὰς ναῦς ὃ
5» , A > ε ΄“ Ἀ 5» ’ » 5
ἐμβάντες, τὰς δ᾽ αὑτῶν ψυχὰς ὀλίγας οὔσας ἀντι-
τάξαντες τῷ πλήθει τῷ τῆς ᾿Ασίας. ἐπέδειξαν δὲ
πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις, νικήσαντες τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, ὅτι

~ » ΕῚ , 4 ε ἈΝ nw
κρεῖττον μετ᾽ ὀλίγων [πολιτευομένων] ὑπὲρ τῆς
ἐλευθερίας κινδυνεύειν ἢ μετὰ πολλῶν βασιλευο-

4 ε A wn ε “a 4 nw A Ἀ
μένων ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν δουλείας. πλεῖστα δὲ καὶ
κάλλιστα ἐκεῖνοι ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθε-

’ , Ν A La
ρίας συνεβάλοντο, στρατηγὸν μὲν Θεμιστοκλέα,
ἱκανώτατον εἰπεῖν καὶ γνῶναι καὶ πρᾶξαι, ναῦς

A / “ »” 4 » > >
δὲ πλείους τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων, ἄνδρας ὃ ἐμ-
πειροτάτους. καίτοι τίνες ἂν τούτοις τῶν ἄλλων

Ἑλλήνων ἤρισαν γνώμῃ καὶ πλήθει καὶ ἀρετῇ ;

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 103

΄ , Ν > 7’ 5 -“ nw
ὥστε δικαίως μὲν ἀναμφισβήτητα τἀριστεῖα τῆς
ναυμαχίας ἔλαβον παρὰ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος, εἰκότως δὲ
τὴν εὐτυχίαν ὁμονοοῦσαν τοῖς κινδύνοις ἐκτή-
σαντο, γνησίαν δὲ καὶ αὐτόχθονα τοῖς ἐκ τῆς
5 ,ὕ 4 A ε ΄" 5» Ν 5 ’ὕ
Ασίας βαρβάροις τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο.
ΕῚ Ν > “Ὁ , , ε Ν
Ἐν μὲν οὖν τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ τοιούτους αὑτοὺς
παρασχόντες καὶ πολὺ πλεῖστον τῶν κινδύνων
’ὕ “ > 4 > “ A Ἀ 5 4
μετασχόντες TH ἰδίᾳ ἀρετῇ κοινὴν τὴν ἐλευθερίαν
Ἀ -“ ΕἿΣ > 4 y Ν
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐκτήσαντο" ὕστερον δὲ Πελοπον-
νησίων τειχιζόντων τὸν Ἰσθμόν, καὶ ἀγαπώντων
A “Ὁ , , 5 5 4 nw
μὲν TH σωτηρίᾳ, νομιζόντων δ᾽ ἀπηλλάχθαι τοῦ
Ν ’ἢ 4 A ’ A
Kata θάλατταν κινδύνου, καὶ διανοουμένων τοὺς
ἄλλους Ἕλληνας περιιδεῖν ὑπὸ τοῖς βαρβάροις
4 > 4 > Lal 4
γενομένους, ὀργισθέντες ᾿Αθηναῖοι συνεβούλευον
αὐτοῖς, εἰ ταύτην τὴν γνώμην ἕξουσι, περὶ ἅπα-
A ’ ~ ~ > Ἀ
σαν τὴν ἸΤελοπόννησον τεῖχος περιβαλεῖν " εἰ γὰρ
5 Ἀ ε A Ὁ» ε ’ , A a“
αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων προδιδόμενοι μετὰ τῶν
, »Ἤ ν 55 5 , , , :
βαρβάρων ἔσονται, οὔτ᾽ ἐκείνοις δεήσειν χιλίων
-" Ε2 ’ὕ 3 , Ν 5 3 “ nw
νεῶν οὔτε τούτους ὠφελήσειν TO ἐν ᾿Ισθμῷ τεῖχος '
> 4 » » A nn ’ 5 A
ἀκινδύνως yap ἔσεσθαι τὴν τῆς θαλάσσης ἀρχὴν
4 ys : οἷ A ’ὕ > A
βασιλέως. διδασκόμενοι δὲ καὶ νομίζοντες αὐτοὶ
μὲν ἀδικά τε ποιεῖν καὶ κακῶς βουλεύεσθαι, ᾿Αθη-
’ A ’ ’ὔ ’ A Ν ’ὕ » ~
vaious δὲ δίκαιά τε λέγειν καὶ τὰ βέλτιστα αὐτοῖς
“Ὁ > ’ 5 4 5» ’ὕ
παραινεῖν, ἐβοήθησαν εἰς Πλαταιάς - ἀποδράντων
δὲ ὑπὸ νύκτα τῶν πλείστων συμμάχων ἐκ τῶν
τάξεων διὰ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν πολεμίων, Λακεδαιμό-
Ν ἈΝ lal A ’ > ,ὕ
νιοι μὲν καὶ Τεγεᾶται τοὺς βαρβάρους ἐτρέψαντο,
᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ καὶ Πλαταιεῖς πάντας τοὺς Ἕλληνας

43

44

45

46

104 II. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι τοὺς ἀπογνόντας τῆς ἐλευθερίας
ἈΝ ε ’ Ἁ ’ὔ > > 4 A ΄“
47 καὶ ὑπομείναντας τὴν δουλείαν. ἐν ἐκείνῃ δὲ τῇ
ἡμέρᾳ καλλίστην τελευτὴν τοῖς προτέροις κινδύ-
3 ’ 4 Ν Ν 5 ’ “
νοις ἐπιθέντες, βέβαιον μὲν τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῇ
Εὐρώπῃ κατειργάσαντο, ἐν ἅπασι δὲ τοῖς κινδύ-
νοις δόντες ἔλεγχον τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἀρετῆς, καὶ μόνοι
καὶ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, καὶ πεζομαχοῦντες καὶ ναυμα-
χοῦντες, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς βαρβάρους καὶ πρὸς τοὺς
Ἕλληνας, ὑπὸ πάντων ἠξιώθησαν, καὶ μεθ᾽ ὧν
ἐκινδύνευον καὶ πρὸς ods ἐπολέμουν, ἡγεμόνες
γενέσθαι τῆς Ἑλλάδος.
4 ᾽Ὑστέρῳ δὲ χρόνῳ Ἑλληνικοῦ πολέμου κατα-
4 Ν “ a id \ U
στάντος διὰ ζῆλον τῶν γεγενημένων καὶ φθόνον
τῶν πεπραγμένων, μέγα μὲν ἅπαντες φρονοῦντες,
μικρῶν δ᾽ ἐγκλημάτων ἕκαστοι δεόμενοι, ναυμα-
’ 3 ’ Ν > , Ν Ν 5 ’
χίας ᾿Αθηναίοις πρὸς Αἰγινήτας καὶ τοὺς ἐκείνων
συμμάχους γενομένης ἑβδομήκοντα τριήρεις αὐὖὐ-
“ > ee 4 Ν Ν Ν >
49 Tov ἐλάμβανον. πολιορκούντων δὲ κατὰ τὸν ad-
Ν ’ 4 ld Ν » Ἀ »Ὁ»
τὸν χρόνον Αἴγυπτόν τε καὶ Αἴγιναν, καὶ τῆς
ἡλικίας ἀπούσης ἔν τε ταῖς ναυσὶ καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ
7) Ἢ é f
στρατεύματι, Κορίνθιοι καὶ οἱ ἐκείνων σύμμαχοι,
ε , a > ¥ Ν ’ 3 “ a 3
ἡγούμενοι ἢ εἰς ἔρημον τὴν χώραν ἐμβαλεῖν H ἐξ
Αἰγίνης ἄξειν τὸ στρατόπεδον, ἐξελθόντες πανδη-
50 μεὶ Γεράνειαν κατέλαβον" ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ τῶν μὲν
3 ’ “- δ᾽ > ‘ ») ὑδέ Δ ΕΣ
ἀπόντων, τῶν δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὄντων, οὐδένα ἐτόλμησαν
,ὔὕ Lal 5 ε “ ΄“ ,ὕὔ
μεταπέμψασθαι: ταῖς δ᾽ αὑτῶν ψυχαῖς πιστεύ-
σαντες καὶ τῶν ἐπιόντων καταφρονήσαντες οἱ
γεραίτεροι καὶ ot τῆς ἡλικίας ἐντὸς γεγονότες

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 105

> fd > Ν , ‘ ¢ ὃ ld 0 ε
ἠξίουν αὐτοὶ μόνοι τὸν κίνδυνον ποιήσασθαι, οἱ
A > , Ν 5 ’ ε Ν ’ὔ ’
μὲν ἐμπειρίᾳ τὴν ἀρετήν, οἱ δὲ φύσει κεκτημένοι "
καὶ οἱ μὲν αὐτοὶ πολλαχοῦ ἀγαθοὶ γεγενημένοι,
οἱ δ᾽ ἐκείνους μιμούμενοι, τῶν μὲν πρεσβυτέρων
ἄρχειν ἐπισταμένων, τῶν δὲ νεωτέρων τὸ ἐπιτατ-
τόμενον ποιεῖν δυναμένων, Μυρωνίδου στρατη-
γοῦντος ἀπαντήσαντες αὐτοὶ εἰς τὴν Μεγαρικὴν
ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι ἅπασαν τὴν δύναμιν τὴν ἐκείνων
A a »
τοῖς ἤδη ἀπειρηκόσι Kal Tots οὔπω δυναμένοις,
Ἀ 3 ‘ , > a > 4 >
(τοὺς εἰς τὴν σφετέραν ἐμβαλεῖν ἀξιώσαντας εἰς
4 > ’ 3 la / Ν ’
τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ἀπαντήσαντες) τρόπαιον δὲ στή-
σαντες καλλίστου μὲν αὐτοῖς ἔργου, αἰσχίστου δὲ
τοῖς πολεμίοις, οἱ μὲν οὐκέτι τοῖς σώμασιν, οἱ δ᾽
3» ’, »Ὁ»Ἤ Ν A 3 / 4
οὔπω δυνάμενοι, ταῖς δὲ ψυχαῖς ἀμφότεροι κρείτ-
’ὔ Ν ’ E > Ν ε
τους γενόμενοι, μετὰ καλλίστης δόξης εἰς τὴν αὖ-
ἴω > , ε Ν ΄ 5 7 ε Ν
τῶν ἀπελθόντες οἱ μὲν πάλιν ἐπαιδεύοντο, οἱ δὲ
Ἀ “ “ > £
περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἐβουλεύοντο.
Kal” ἕκαστον μὲν οὐ ῥάδιον τὰ ὑπὸ πολλῶν κιν-
rd ε 3. δἰ Ν ε “ > Ν Ν 5 bid ~
δυνευθέντα ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς ῥηθῆναι, οὐδὲ τὰ ἐν ἅπαντι TO
’, , > ”~ ε / a ee
χρόνῳ πραχθέντα ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ δηλωθῆναι. τίς
s Ἃ x , x , MOTs ε Ν ΄,
γὰρ ἂν ἢ λόγος ἢ χρόνος ἢ ῥήτωρ ἱκανὸς γένοιτο
μηνῦσαι τὴν τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων ἀνδρῶν ἀρετήν ;
μετὰ πλείστων γὰρ πόνων καὶ φανερωτάτων ἀγώ-
ἈΝ / 4 > , A > /
νων καὶ καλλίστων κινδύνων ἐλευθέραν μὲν ἐποίη-
σαν τὴν Ἑλλάδα, μεγίστην δ᾽ ἀπέδειξαν τὴν
ε ~ ’ὔ ε ’ Ν »» lal
ἑαυτῶν πατρίδα, ἑβδομήκοντα μὲν ἔτη τῆς Oa-
¥”
λάττης ἄρξαντες, ἀστασιάστους δὲ παρασχόντες
τοὺς συμμάχους, οὐ τοῖς ὀλίγοις τοὺς πολλοὺς

51

52

55

56

106 Il. EMITA®IOS“.

, > , > ἈΝ , » » .
δουλεύειν ἀξιώσαντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἴσον ἔχειν ἅπαντας
ἀναγκάσαντες, οὐδὲ τοὺς συμμάχους ἀσθενεῖς
ποιοῦντες, ἀλλὰ κἀκείνους ἰσχυροὺς καθιστάντες,
καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν δύναμιν τοσαύτην ἐπιδείξαντες,
- 2 ε 4 Ν > / A > /
ὥσθ᾽ ὁ μέγας βασιλεὺς οὐκέτι τῶν ἀλλοτρίων
> , > > > , a“ e “~ Ν x A
ἐπεθύμει, add’ ἐδίδου τῶν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ περὶ τῶν
d ἮΝ 9 β A \ »¥ , > 2% a

57 λοιπῶν ἐφοβεῖτο, καὶ οὔτε τριήρεις ἐν ἐκείνῳ TO
’ὔ 5 “ 3 ’ὔ »Ά + 4 >
χρόνῳ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίας ἔπλευσαν, οὔτε τύραννος ἐν
τοῖς Ἕλλησι κατέστη, οὔτε Ἑλληνὶς πόλις ὑπὸ
τῶν βαρβάρων ἠνδραποδίσθη: τοσαύτην σωφρο-
σύνην καὶ δέος ἡ τούτων ἀρετὴ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις
παρεῖχεν. ὧν ἕνεκα δεῖ μόνους καὶ προστάτας
“ ε la Ν ε / ΄“ / ,
tov Ἑλλήνων καὶ ἡγεμόνας τῶν πόλεων γίγνε-
σθαι.
58 ᾿Επέδειξαν δὲ καὶ ἐν ταῖς δυστυχίαις τὴν ἑαυ-
~ 5 ’ὔ 3 ’, Ν a“ “A > «ε
τῶν ἀρετήν. ἀπολομένων γὰρ τῶν vewv ἐν Ἐλλη-
σπόντῳ εἴτε ἡγεμόνος κακίᾳ εἴτε θεῶν διανοίᾳ, καὶ
la ἈΝ ε -“
συμφορᾶς ἐκείνης μεγίστης γενομένης καὶ ἡμῖν
a A » 2
τοῖς δυστυχήσασι καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἕλλησιν, ἐδή-
lal 9 “ /
λωσαν od πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον ὅτι ἡ τῆς πόλεως
, A ε , > , ae \
59 δύναμις τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἦν σωτηρία. ἑτέρων yap
ἡγεμόνων γενομένων ἐνίκησαν μὲν ναυμαχοῦντες
‘ 7 ε ’ὔ > Ἀ ’ὔ »
τοὺς Ἕλληνας οἱ πρότερον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν οὐκ
ἐμβαίνοντες, ἔπλευσαν δ᾽ εἰς τὴν Εὐρώπην, δου-
λεύουσι δὲ πόλεις τῶν “Ἑλλήνων, τύραννοι δ᾽ ἐγκα-
θεστᾶσιν, οἱ μὲν μετὰ τὴν ἡμετέραν συμφορᾶν, οἱ
60 δὲ μετὰ τὴν νίκην τῶν βαρβάρων. ὥστ᾽ ἄξιον ἣν
ἐπὶ τῷδε τῷ τάφῳ τότε κείρασθαι τῇ Ἑλλάδι καὶ

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 107

“ Ἀ > 4, / ε
πενθῆσαι τοὺς ἐνθάδε κειμένους, ὡς συγκαταθα-
πτομένης τῆς αὑτῶν ἐλευθερίας τῇ τούτων ἀρετῇ "
ε Ν Ν δ᾽. 4 Ν 4 > ὃ “ 5
ὡς δυστυχὴς μὲν ἡ Ἑλλας τοιούτων ἀνὸρῶν op-
Ν ’, 5 ἈΝ αι “A > ’ Ν
φανὴ γενομένη, εὐτυχὴς δ᾽ ὁ τῆς ᾿Ασίας βασιλεὺς
ἑτέρων ἡγεμόνων λαβόμενος - τῇ μὲν γὰρ τούτων
, / Y ihe. ee > ȴ >
στερηθείσῃ δουλεία περιέστηκε, τῷ δ᾽ ἄλλων ἀρ-
ἕάντων ζῆλος ἐγγίνεται τῆς τῶν προγόνων δια-
νοίας.
᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν ἐξήχθην ὑπὲρ πάσης ὀλο- ὅτ
φύρασθαι τῆς Ἑλλάδος - ἐκείνων δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν
LE i ἰδί i ὃ ia μεμνῆσθαι, ot φεύ-
ἄξιον καὶ ἰδίᾳ καὶ δημοσίᾳ μεμνῆσθαι, ot φεύ
γοντες τὴν δουλείαν καὶ περὶ τοῦ δικαίου μαχό-
μενοι καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς δημοκρατίας στασιάσαντες,
πάντας πολεμίους κεκτημένοι εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ κα-
a 5 ε Ν ’ > 4 > > ε Ν
τῆλθον, οὐχ ὑπὸ νόμου ἀναγκασθέντες, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ
τῆς φύσεως πεισθέντες, καινοῖς κινδύνοις τὴν πα-
λαιὰν ἀρετὴν τῶν προγόνων μιμησάμενοι, ταῖς 62
ε “a - \ ‘ ’ὔ Ν Lal >”
αὑτῶν ψυχαῖς κοινὴν τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις
κτησάμενοι, θάνατον μετ᾽ ἐλευθερίας αἱρούμενοι
a ’ Ν ’ὔ 5» X29 lal -“
ἢ βίον μετὰ δουλείας, οὐχ ἧττον ταῖς συμφοραῖς
αἰσχυνόμενοι ἢ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ὀργιζόμενοι, μᾶλλον
βουληθέντες ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν ἀποθνήσκειν ἢ ζῆν τὴν
η ἢ νήσκειν ἢ ζῆν τὴ
ἀλλοτρίαν οἰκοῦντες, συμμάχους μὲν ὅρκους καὶ
συνθήκας ἔχοντες, πολεμίους δὲ τοὺς πρότερον
ε la Ν ‘ ’ Ν ε “A > >
ὑπάρχοντας Kal τοὺς πολίτας τοὺς ἑαυτῶν. ahd 63
ὅμως οὐ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναντίων φοβηθέντες, ἀλλ᾽
ἐν τοῖς σώμασι τοῖς ἑαυτῶν κινδυνεύσαντες, τρό-
παιον μὲν τῶν πολεμίων ἔστησαν, μάρτυρας δὲ

108 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.

τῆς αὑτῶν ἀρετῆς ἐγγὺς ὄντας τοῦδε TOD μνήματος

τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίων τάφους παρέχονται. καὶ γάρ
, A > Ν ΄“ 5 / Ν ,

TOL μεγάλην μὲν ἀντὶ μικρᾶς ἀπέδειξαν τὴν πόλιν,

ὁμονοοῦσαν δὲ ἀντὶ στασιαζούσης ἀπέφηναν, τεί-

ἈΝ 3 Ν ~ 4 > ” ε Ἀ

64 χη δὲ ἀντὶ τῶν καθηρημένων ἀνέστησαν. οἱ δὲ
κατελθόντες αὐτῶν, ἀδελφὰ τὰ βουλεύματα τοῖς
» “A > 4, 4 > , > > 4
ἔργοις τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων ἐπιδεικνύντες, οὐκ ἐπὶ

’ A“ > “Ὁ 3 > SN ’ A ’
τιμωρίαν τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ σωτηρίαν τῆς πό-
> ’ Ν » 5» > la) ¢
ews ἐτράποντο, καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἐλαττοῦσθαι δυνάμενοι
¥ 3 > Ν ’ ¥ , A Ν ε “Ὁ
οὔτ᾽ αὐτοὶ πλέον ἔχειν δεόμενοι τῆς μὲν αὑτῶν
ἐλευθερίας καὶ τοῖς βουλομένοις δουλεύειν μετέ-

“ $9 / / > Ν / >
δοσαν, τῆς δ᾽ ἐκείνων δουλείας αὐτοὶ μετέχειν οὐκ
> ’ » Ν ’ ‘\ ’,

65 ἠξίωσαν. ἔργοις δὲ μεγίστοις καὶ καλλίστοις
ἀπελογήσαντο, ὅτι οὐ κακίᾳ τῇ αὑτῶν οὐδ᾽ ἀρετῇ
τῶν πολεμίων πρότερον ἐδυστύχησεν ἡ TOUS? εἰ

Ν ’ Ν > ’ὔ ’ ’ὔ
γὰρ στασιάσαντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους βίᾳ παρόντων
wn ΕἾ a Ν
Πελοποννησίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἐχθρῶν εἰς τὴν
e δὲ 24.»ὕ ΤΟΥ λθ “ δὴλ 9 ε δί
αὑτῶν οἷοί τε ἐγίνοντο κατελθεῖν, δῆλον ὅτι ῥᾳδίως
ἂν ὁμονοοῦντες πολεμεῖν αὐτοῖς ἐδύναντο.

6 Ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὖν διὰ τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ κινδύνους
ε Ν ’ > 4 nw » de \
ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων ζηλοῦνται: ἄξιον δὲ καὶ

‘4 , Ν > / 4 > 4, aA
τοὺς ξένους τοὺς ἐνθάδε κειμένους ἐπαινέσαι, ot
a 4 ’ Ἀ Ν Lal ε ,
τῷ πλήθει βοηθήσαντες καὶ περὶ τῆς ἡμετέρας

Ἁ ε ,
σωτηρίας μαχόμενοι, πατρίδα THY ἀρετὴν ἡγησά-
μενοι, τοιαύτην τοῦ βίου τελευτὴν ἐποιήσαντο"

»
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἡ πόλις αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐπένθησε καὶ ἔθαψε
A σ΄

δημοσίᾳ, καὶ ἔδωκεν ἔχειν αὐτοῖς τὸν ἅπαντα
χρόνον τὰς αὐτὰς τιμὰς τοῖς ἀστοῖς.

II. FUNERAL ORATION. 109

Οἱ δὲ viv θαπτόμενοι, βοηθήσαντες Κορινθίοις
eek” A , LO 4 \ ΄
ὑπὸ παλαιῶν φίλων ἀδικουμένοις καινοὶ σύμμαχοι
γενόμενοι, οὐ τὴν αὐτὴν γνώμην Λακεδαιμονίοις
» ε Ν Ν “ > A > a > ’
ἔχοντες (οἱ μὲν γὰρ τῶν ἀγαθῶν αὐτοῖς ἐφθόνουν,
ε ἈΝ 5 ia > Ν 5 ’, > “ ’
οἱ δὲ ἀδικουμένους αὐτοὺς ἠλέουν, οὐ τῆς προτέ-
» ’ > Ν ᾿ A“
pas ἔχθρας μεμνημένοι, ἀλλὰ τὴν παροῦσαν φι-
λίαν περὶ πολλοῦ ποιούμενοι) πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις
Ν Ν ea 3 \ > 8 ΄ > of
φανερὰν τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο. ἐτόλμη-
A ΄ La ‘ ε (ὃ > ,
σαν yap μεγάλην ποιοῦντες τὴν Ελλάδα ov μόνον
ε Ν an δι ἊἱΝ 4 ὃ ’ 3 Ν Ν
ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν σωτηρίας κινὸυνεύειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ
ε A ἴω “ ’ 5 θ 4 > 0 ,
ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν πολεμίων ἐλευθερίας ἀποθνήσκειν "
τοῖς γὰρ Λακεδαιμονίων συμμάχοις περὶ τῆς ἐκεί-
νων ἐλευθερίας ἐμάχοντο. νικήσαντες μὲν γὰρ
5 ’ ΄“- > A > ’ ὃ ’ Ν ’
ἐκείνους τῶν αὐτῶν ἠξίουν, δυστυχήσαντες δὲ βέ
Δ \ ΄ A > a ΄
βαιον ἂν τὴν δουλείαν τοῖς ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ
κατέλιπον.
> 4 Ν > 4 ὃ ’ ε ’
Exéivois μὲν οὖν οὕτω διακειμένοις ὁ Bios
> ‘ ἣν Ὁ 4 > ’ δὲ \ “
οἰκτρὸς καὶ ὁ θάνατος εὐκτός: οὗτοι δὲ καὶ ζῶν-
ΣΝ , ΄ ὃ , \ >
Tes καὶ ἀποθανόντες ζηλωτοί, παιδευθέντες μὲν ἐν
τοῖς τῶν προγόνων ἀγαθοῖς, ἄνδρες δὲ γενόμενοι
τήν τε ἐκείνων δόξαν διασώσαντες καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν
> Ν > ὃ ’ lal Ν Ν Ν Aa
ἀρετὴν ἐπιδείξαντες. πολλῶν μὲν yap καὶ καλῶν
αἴτιοι γεγένηνται τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι, ἐπηνώρθω-
δὲ Ν Δὲ δὲ ὃ θέ 4 8”
σαν δὲ Ta ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων δυστυχηθέντα, πόρρω
ἀπὸ τῆς αὑτῶν τὸν πόλεμον κατέστησαν. ἐτελεύ-
δὲ Ν ’ 9 - ‘ Ν > ‘
τησαν δὲ τὸν βίον, ὥσπερ χρὴ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς
ἀποθνήσκειν, τῇ μὲν γὰρ πατρίδι τὰ τροφεῖα
3 ὃ ΄ Vag de / ΄ ΄
ἀποδόντες, τοῖς δὲ θρέψασι λύπας καταλιπόντες.

67

69

7°

11O Il. EMITA®IOS.

71

72

73

74

7 ¥ A a , aA Ἀ A
ὥστε ἄξιον τοῖς ζῶσι τούτους ποθεῖν καὶ σφᾶς
> Ν 5 4 A Ν ’ > “~
αὐτοὺς ὀλοφύρεσθαι καὶ τοὺς προσήκοντας αὐτῶν
> La) “A > ’ ld ’ Ν 5 “ »
ἐλεεῖν τοῦ ἐπιλοίπου βίου. τίς γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἔτι
ἡδονὴ καταλείπεται τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν θαπτομένων,
ot πάντα περὶ ἐλάττονος τῆς ἀρετῆς ἡγούμενοι
αὑτοὺς μὲν ἀπεστέρησαν βίου, χήρας δὲ γυναῖκας
> ’ > Ν A Ν ε “ Ὁ“ 3 ’
ἐποίησαν, ὀρφανοὺς δὲ τοὺς αὑτῶν παῖδας ἀπέλι-
» ’ > > Ν. \ 4 A 4
Tov, ἐρήμους δ᾽ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ πατέρας καὶ μητέ-
4 ΄“ Ἀ ἈΝ “ ε
ρας κατέστησαν; Πολλῶν δὲ καὶ δεινῶν ὑπαρ-
χόντων τοὺς μὲν παῖδας αὐτῶν ζηλῶ, ὅτι νεώτεροί

> x» ν 5 i ν , 5 ’,
“ELOW Ἢ WOTE εἰδέναι οἰῶν TATEPWV EOTEPHVTAL,

> e 3 a , > , 9 ,
ἐξ ὧν δ᾽ οὗτοι γεγόνασιν, οἰκτείρω, ὅτι πρεσβύ-
εὐ ὦ > , a , A
Tepo. ἣ ὥστε ἐπιλαθέσθαι τῆς δυστυχίας τῆς
ἑαυτῶν. τί γὰρ ἂν τούτων ἀνιαρότερον γένοιτο,
ἢ τεκεῖν μὲν καὶ θρέψαι [καὶ θάψαι] τοὺς αὑτῶν,
ἐν δὲ τῷ γήρᾳ ἀδυνάτους μὲν εἶναι τῷ σώματι,
“ἢ > > 7 ~ > 4 » ’
πασῶν δ᾽ ἀπεστερημένους τῶν ἐλπίδων ἀφίλους
καὶ ἀπόρους γεγονέναι, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν πρό-
΄“ A lal > al ,
τερον ζηλοῦσθαι καὶ νῦν ἐλεεῖσθαι, ποθεινότερον
᾽ > «A > Q , A , 9 ν
δ᾽ αὐτοῖς εἶναι τὸν θάνατον τοῦ βίου; ὅσῳ γὰρ
ἄνδρες ἀμείνους ἦσαν, τοσούτῳ τοῖς καταλειπομέ.
\ , A A > > κ᾿ κ A ‘
vous TO πένθος μεῖζον. πῶς δ᾽ αὐτοὺς χρὴ λῆξαι
τῆς λύπης ; πότερον ἐν ταῖς τῆς πόλεως συμφο-
n > Ν , > A : ‘\ Ν »
pais; ἀλλὰ τότε αὑτῶν εἰκὸς καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους
~ > > > ~ 5» ,ὔ A A
μεμνῆσθαι. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ταῖς εὐτυχίαις ταῖς κοιναῖς ;
» > ε A Lal La! A ta 4
ἀλλ᾽ ἱκανὸν λυπῆσαι, τῶν μὲν σφετέρων τέκνων
τετελευτηκότων, τῶν δὲ ζώντων ἀπολαυόντων τῆς
, >. A 5 ᾽ » “ > ’ ’ὔ 9
τούτων ἀρετῆς. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις κινδύνοις, ὅταν

Il. FUNERAL ORATION. 111

ε aA \ Ν ’ 3, ’ ,
ὁρῶσι τοὺς μὲν πρότερον ὄντας φίλους φεύγοντας
A ε a > ’ Ν > > Ν ’,
τὴν αὑτῶν ἀπορίαν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐχθροὺς μέγα φρο-
νοῦντας ἐπὶ ταῖς δυστυχίαις ταῖς τούτων; Μόνην
δ᾽ ἄν μοι δοκοῦμεν ταύτην τοῖς ἐνθάδε κειμένοις
ἀποδοῦναι χάριν, εἰ τοὺς μὲν τοκέας αὐτῶν ὁμοίως
Y a ‘ A ΄ θ \ δὲ
ὥσπερ ἐκεῖνοι περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοίμεθα, τοὺς δὲ
lal 7 3 ’ ν > Ν ’
παῖδας οὕτως ἀσπαζοίμεθα ὥσπερ αὐτοὶ πατέρες
ΕἾ » A ἈΝ > ’ Ν ε “
ὄντες, ταῖς δὲ γυναιξὶν εἰ τοιούτους βοηθοὺς ἡμᾶς
~ Lal >
αὐτοὺς παρέχοιμεν, οἷοίπερ ἐκεῖνοι ζῶντες ἦσαν.
΄, N x SoZ epee a a 9 θ ἊΝ
τίνας γὰρ ἂν εἰκότως μᾶλλον τιμῷμεν τῶν ἐνθάδε
κειμένων ; τίνας δ᾽ ἂν τῶν ζώντων δικαιότερον
περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοίμεθα ἢ τοὺς τούτοις προσήκον-
ἃ A Ν 4, 5 lal δ Ψ - »
Tas, Ol τῆς μὲν τούτων ἀρετῆς TO ἴσον τοὶς ἄλλοις
4 ~
- ἀπέλαυσαν, ἀποθανόντων δὲ μόνοι γνησίως τῆς
δυστυχίας μετέχουσιν.
᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ 6 τι δεῖ τοιαῦτα ὀλοφύρε-
> Ν > 4, ε A > Ν 3»,
σθαι: οὐ γὰρ ἐλανθάνομεν ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς ὄντες
’ὔ WA ’ “A A ’ “~ ’
θνητοί: ὥστε τί δεῖ, ἃ πάλαι προσεδοκῶμεν πεί-
ey ΄ A ¥ x , Ψ
σεσθαι, ὑπὲρ τούτων νῦν ἄχθεσθαι, ἢ λίαν οὕτω
/ / ὍΡΑ, “A A 4 A“
βαρέως φέρειν ἐπὶ ταῖς τῆς φύσεως συμφοραῖς,
ἐπισταμένους ὅτι ὁ θάνατος κοινὸς καὶ τοῖς χειρί-
στοις καὶ τοῖς βελτίστοις ; οὔτε γὰρ τοὺς πονη-
Ν ε Led + » ἈΝ 3 ΥῪς ’ὔ 3 >
povs ὑπερορᾷ οὔτε τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς θαυμάζει, ἀλλ
¥ Ν an
ἴσον ἑαυτὸν παρέχει πᾶσιν. εἰ μὲν yap οἷόν τε
> a Ν 5 A , , a
Hv τοῖς τοὺς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ κινδύνους διαφυγοῦσιν
10 ’ὔ > A ἈΝ , ΕἿΣ -“
ἀθανάτους εἶναι τὸν λοιπὸν χρόνον, ἄξιον τοῖς
nw 9 nw “~
ζῶσι τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον πενθεῖν τοὺς τεθνεῶτας "

“A δὲ 9 ’ Ἀ ld 4 Ν ΄
νῦν δὲ ἢ τε φύσις καὶ νόσων ἥττων καὶ γήρως,

75

76

78

712 Il. EMITA®PIOS.

79

80

81

9 4 ε Ἂς αν τ ’ “ὦ 3 Ἀ 3
ὅ τε δαίμων ὁ τὴν ἡμετέραν μοῖραν εἰληχὼς ἀπα-
9
ραίτητος. ὥστε προσήκει τούτους εὐδαιμονεστά-
τους ἡγεῖσθαι, οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῶν μεγίστων καὶ
4 , 9 Ν ’ > ”
καλλίστων κινδυνεύσαντες οὕτω τὸν βίον ἐτελεύ-
nw ~
τησαν, οὐκ ἐπιτρέψαντες περὶ αὑτῶν TH τύχῃ,
> > > 4 Ν 5 ’ὔ ’ > >
οὐδ᾽ ἀναμείναντες τὸν αὐτόματον θάνατον, ἀλλ
5 ’ Ν ’ Ν Ud > ’
ἐκλεξάμενοι τὸν κάλλιστον. καὶ γάρ τοι ἀγή-
Ν > “~ ε A Ν Ν ε Ἃ ’
ρατοι μὲν αὐτῶν αἱ μνῆμαι, ζηλωταὶ δὲ ὑπὸ πάν-
3 ’ ε 4 ἃ lal Ν Ν
των ἀνθρώπων ai τιμαί: ot πενθοῦνται μὲν διὰ
Ἀ ’ ε ’, ε A Ν ε > ,
τὴν φύσιν ws θνητοί, ὑμνοῦνται δὲ ws ἀθάνατοι
διὰ ΤΥ > 4 Ν ’ὔ θ ’ δὴ ’
nv ἀρετήν. καὶ γάρ τοι θάπτονται δημοσίᾳ,
Ν 3 “Ὁ / δι. > “A \ Ae of \ ’
καὶ ἀγῶνες τίθενται ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς ῥώμης καὶ σοφίας
Ν ’ ε 3 ’ὔ κέ Ν 5 “~ /
Kal πλούτου, ws ἀξίους ὄντας τοὺς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ
΄“ nw “ ‘ ‘
τετελευτηκότας ταῖς αὐταῖς τιμαῖς καὶ τοὺς ἀθα-
νάτους τιμᾶσθαι. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν αὐτοὺς καὶ μακα-
7 “A ’ Ν ~*~ Ν ’ ’
ρίζω τοῦ θανάτου καὶ ζηλώ, καὶ μόνοις τούτοις
> a > 9
ἀνθρώπων οἶμαι κρεῖττον εἶναι γενέσθαι, οἵτινες,
A 4,
ἐπειδὴ θνητῶν σωμάτων ἔτυχον, ἀθάνατον μνήμην
ἴω -ν Be ΄
διὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν αὑτῶν κατέλιπον " ὅμως δ᾽ ἀνάγκη
a “Ὁ Ν
τοῖς ἀρχαίοις ἔθεσι χρῆσθαι, καὶ θεραπεύοντας
Ν 4 , ? ’ \ ’,
τὸν πάτριον νόμον ὀλοφύρεσθαι τοὺς θαπτομέ.
νους.

NOTES.

ABBREVIATIONS.

BAW ancien adverb, adverbial, etc.

Ua Opa ee agree, agreeing, etc.

ChE Ts ae τε νον CLAUSE.

Class. Dict... .. Anthon’s Classical Dictionary.

πα ΡΑΕ ΤΕ ἘΡῚ ἊἋ depend, dependent, etc.

Dict. Ant. ..,. Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, 3d Amer. Ed.
Dict. Geog.. ... Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geography.

BAS σα, τος Ὁ ς editor, edition, and the plural,

CAIV Ss οτος equivalent.

ROU iecieer sn: follow, following, etc.

Frohb....-.. , ἡ Frohberger.

G. or Goodw, .. Goodwin’s Greek Grammar; Rev. Ed. 1892.
Gr. Moods .... Goodwin’s Greek Moods and Tenses,
H. ....+..+... Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar.

ind. disc....... indirect discourse.

ANGLO τον ss introduce, introducing, etc.; also, Introduction.

PGND, το τους Kiihner’s Greek Grammar; Edwards and Taylor’s translation.

ROD aaah hale Liddell and Scott’s Greek Lexicon; the 6th Ed., when referred to,
e is expressly named.

ee eae literal, literally.

part., partt..... participle, participles.

Pear feiss i’ predicate.

Publ. Econ. ... Boeckh’s Public Economy of the Athenians; Lamb’s translation.
TRAM ΚἈΝ ΨΚ ΔΝ Rauchenstein.

AE ICE refer, referring, etc.

Rete se aks 85-4 relative.

AS ae sentence,

ee synonym, synonymous, etc.
Ae re tS

a Westermann.

NOTES ON ORATION XIL.

In connection with Orations XII. and XIII. the student should read, if possible,
Chap. LXV. in Grote’s History of Greece, “ From the Battle of Arginusz to the
Restoration of the Democracy of Athens after the Expulsion of the Thirty”; also
Chap. 1. Book V. of Curtius’s History of Greece, “ Athens under the Thirty.” The
articles “ Dicasterion” and “ Dicastes,” in Dict. Ant., explain briefly the constitu-
tion of the Athenian Heliastic courts; see also Grote, Vol. IV., p. 140 seg., and
Vol. V., p. 378 seg. In the title ὅν has λόγος understood for its anteced.

1. ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, judges; Eng. gentlemen of the jury; H. 625, a.
As tothe use of ἄνδρες, see the faulty rendering in the Eng. version of
Acts vii. 2; κατηγ.: H. 738; 6. 1099. — mauve. λέγοντι, Zo leave off
speaking, H. 981; G. 1580. The part. agr. with μοί instead of the subj.
of mavo., H. 941; Goodw. 928, 1. — αὐτοῖς: H. 769; 6. 1186; péye-
Qos, πλῆθος: accus. of specif.; elpy. (ἐργάζομαι) : passive, as also in § 37.
— ὥστε!. κατ., so that not even if one should utter falsehood would he be
able to bring more terrible accusations than the existing ones; ἄν belongs
with δύνασθαι. On yevd., see H. 969, ἃ; G. 1563, 5, — εἰπεῖν has rad. for
its obj. and is understood with ἅπαντα. --- ἀνάγκη : subj. of (ἐστί), and
having the foll. infinitives dep. on it; tr. oz the contrary, either the accuser
must fail from exhaustion, or the time run short.

2. πεισ. (πάσχω), to be about to experience the opposite of (what we have
experienced in) “mes past; évavr. has a compar. force, hence foll. by %,
than; πρὸ τοῦ, before this, former, here used as adj.; cf. H. 655, d;
G. 984. The contrast referred to is explained in what follows, i. e. there
is on this occasion no need for the accuser to explain the motive of the
prosecution, ¢he occasion of enmity (ἔχθραν). In τὴν ἔχθ., notice the pro-
lepsis, H. 878. The terms usually applied to parties in a trial are :

ὁ διώκων, the prosecutor, the complainant ; cf. in Scotch law “ pursuer.”
ὁ κατηγορῶν, the accuser, he who makes the accusing speech.
ὁ φεύγων, the accused, the defendant.

— εἴη : opt. of ind. disc., H. 932,2; G. 1481, 2. ἥτις... €., what ground
of enmity they had towards the state. — ἀνθ᾽ ὅτον.. .. ἔτολ,, that they dared ;

116 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

_a causal clause, this rel. phrase being freq. used as a causal conj. — τοὺς i.
ποιοῦμαι, 7 make my plea, speak what I have to say ; ποιοῦμαι, mid., is thus
freq. used in the Attic orators as syn. with λέγω ; see XXII. 1, 3, 13 e¢ αἰ.
ὡς is used with the part. to denote an assigned or supposed cause: 7102,
however, that I argue as one who ts without private grievances and in-
jwies, H. 978; Goodw. 1574. —épy{. dep. on ἀφθον.; freely, as if
all had abundant reason to be indignant.

3. otre...mpdtas, having never conducted a case either for myself or an-
other ; πράγματα, business, here, as often in judicial orations, has specific
ref. to business in court, hence @ cause, a case. ‘The fact here stated is for
us the special point of interest in the introduction. The rest is in the
routine style common to the judicial oratory of the time. — κατέστην,
being used with πολλάκις, is better rendered by our perfect, H. 837. —
ph... ποιήσωμαι : H. 887; G. 1378. --- ds... &ax., as briefly as Tecan; an
adv. cl. dep. on δίδαξαι, H. 916; G. 1434.— διδάξαι, Zo znform you (of
the facts); the latter object of the verb is easily supplied from the con-
text, and thus omitted in the Greek.

4. οὑμός: H. 76,aandb; G. 43 and 45; cf. τοὐναντίον, above. —
οὐδενί, after ἐδικ. as indir. obj., esther bring suit against any one or sustain
α suit, This was much to say in the Athens of that time. Notice the
current judicial phrases: δίκην τινὶ δικάζεσθαι, to bring any one to trial;
δίκην φεύγειν, to be brought to trial. —8ypoxp., temporal, while the democ-
racy continued, that is, up to the time of the overthrow of the democratic
constitution by the Thirty.

5. κατέστησαν, 2d aor., were placed in office ; μέν and δέ serve to con-
trast the two participial phrases, both used attributively. — καθαρὰν, x. τ. Δ.»
to purify the state, a fair phrase to gloss foul work ; doubtless well worn in
the mouths of the revolutionists. Their’ method of purification is but too
well known to the student of this period of Athenian history. Revolutions
in other Greek states were attended with even greater cruelties. Observe
the pres. tense of the part., denoting its repetition. — πολύτας : subj. of
τραπέσθαι. --- λέγοντες resumes the preceding with an adversative force,
although they said ; οὐ.. «ποιεῖν ἐτόλμων, they were not the men to do; Tod-
μᾶν and τλῆναι foll. by an infin. have a variety of meanings similar to this,
depending on the connection in which they are used: το have the spirit to,
to bring one’s self to, etc. See L. ἃ S. — ἀναμνῆσαι : (ἀναμιμνήσκω).

6. Theognis,mentioned by Xenophon as one of the Thirty, was also a
tragic poet. We know him mainly by what Lysias here recounts, and by
Aristophanes’s ridicule of his frigid and dreary iambics. Of Piso little is
known save his membership in the Thirty and the events here related.
γάρ : epexegetic, generally to be omitted in Eng. — ἐν rots τριάκοντα, 77
the sessions of the Thirty. — dev: H. 932, 2. G. 1487. --- τῇ πολιτείᾳ, “he

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 117

administration, i. e. the existing form of government. — καλλίστην... πρό-
φασιν, that there was, therefore, a most excellent pretext ; Soxeiv and xpnp.
depend on πρόφασιν, H. 952; G. 1521. — πάντως δέ, but at any rate.

7. περὶ οὐδενὸς ἡγοῦντο, they considered of no consequence ; wept...iyet-
σθαι and περὶ... ποιεῖσθαι are syn. expressions, see Lex. περί ; περί is used
thus with certain genitives to denote estimated worth, e. g. πολλοῦ, πλείονος,
πλείστου, ἐλάττονος ; cf. Jelf, 632, 2, g. — ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς, they resolved
therefore. —avrois, poss. dat., tr. that they might have, etc.; for ἦ in subj.
see H. 881,a; G. 1369. --- πέπρακται, γεγένηται : render by the Eng.
pluperf. Why? — ὥσπερ... πεποιηκότες : the part. agrees with the logical
subj. implied in αὐτοῖς 7 = ἔχωσι, H. 1063; cf. Kriiger, 56, 9, 4; tr. as if
they had done anything else justifiably ; εὐλόγως, justifiably, with any good
reason to show for tt.

8. διαλαβόντες, simply Aeving assigned, or, allotted, that is, those to
which they should go; no special ref. to the appropriation to their own
use, as if it were an indir. mid. — ἐβάδιζον, they went their way. —éorr-
ὥντα: H. 982; G. 1582. καταλαμβάνω is often used in the sense of
to come upon, meet, find ; cf. §§ 13 and 31. --- τὸ -ἐργαστ., the factory, i.e.
ours; H. 658; Goodw. 949. This was the shield manufactory, and con-
nected with Lysias’s dwelling in the Pirezus. Not less than 120 slaves
were employed in it at the time, as will be observed in the narrative far-
ther on.— βούλοιτο: indir. qu, H. 932, 2; G. 1487. What would the
direct form be?—e πολλὰ εἴη, (that he would) if there were much ;
changed from the direct form ἐὰν... ἢ, because after a verb of past time.

9,10. ἠπιττάμην μὲν οὖν, ow 7 knew, etc. — νομίζει, that he regarded ;
H. 932, 1;G. 1487.—AaPety: subj. of εἶναι ; H. 945; G.1517.— ἐπαρώμενος
(ἐπαράομαι) : imprecating; used adv. to state a circumstance additional to
ὥμοσεν, H. 968: G. 1563, 3-— λαβών may be taken as used conditionally,
if he should receive, or, on condition of receiving. — τάλαντον : τό de-
fines τάλαντον as something previously referred to; cf. H. 657, a. The
student should notice carefully the various uses of the article in this section.
— κιβωτός, chest; the Eng. word ark, e. g. Noah’s ark, the ark of the
covenant, is κιβωτός in the Greek of the Septuagint and the NV. Ζ:

II. οὐκ... ὠὠμολογ. : notice the position of the neg.; it belongs to the rel.
cl. and is to be tr. #o¢ only, as the foll. ἀλλά shows. — κυζικηνούς, Cys:-
cenes, staters of Cyzicus, a gold currency named from the place where
minted. Give the deriv. of δαρεικούς. Estimating the silver drachma as
= about 20 cents, we may reckon the Attic talent roundly as = $1200.
The Cyzicene gold piece = 28 drachmas; the Daric, a little more. The
entire sum seized amounted therefore to more than $6400. How large a
sum this was at that time may be understood by a comparison of prices as
given in Boeckh’s Pudi. Econ., Ch. X. seg. Prices were higher in Athens

118 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

than anywhere else in Greece, but even there it is estimated that $ 25 would
meet the year’s outlay for an economical citizen for food, clothes, and house-
rent. An ox could be bought for from $10 to $20; wheat in Lysias’s time
probably averaged over two drachme per bushel. For convenience is sub-
joined the following

TABLE OF ATTIC MONEY.

1Chalcis = less than ἃ cent.
8 Chalci = 1 Obolus, about 34 cents.
6 Oboli = 1 Drachma, a 20.
too Drachmze = 1 Mina, τ $20.
60 Mine = 1 Talent, fe $1200.

Cf. Dict. Ant., “ Aes,” ‘‘ Drachma,” ‘ Talent.” — φιάλας, godleds ; hence
our ‘‘vial,” a differently shaped vessel. The Greek φιάλη was a broad-
mouthed drinking-vessel. — ἀγαπήσειν.. σώσω : in the direct form both
verbs would be indic. fut.; as if: you will get off well, if you save, etc.

12. πρὸς... θύραις, just at the gate; this was the main entrance to both
the house and factory. Melobios and Mnesithides, leaving the factory, met
them as they were coming from Lysias’s dwelling. These two were also
members of the Thirty. — ὅπῃ B., where we are going. What would the
direct form be in Greek? — εἰς. ἐμοῦ, τὺ my brother's; H. 730, a; cf.
G. 953. The idiom in Eng. is the same as in Greek ; cf. εἰς Δαμνίπ-
mov, below. Frohb. has εἰς τὰ τοῦ, x. τ. X., to my brother's place. — oné-
Ψψηται; H. 881,a; G. 1369. Coming to plunder, they called it “‘search.”
— βαδίζειν : as in ὃ 8.

13.. προσελθὼν... μοι maper., came to me and exhorted me. In many
such cases the Greek part. is equiv. to a co-ordinate verb in Eng. It is the
circumstantial part. denoting a preliminary or attendant action. In tr. it
should be observed how often our language replaces the Greek part. by a
finite verb or clause. — ὡς... ἐκεῖσε, since he was to come there; the part. is
causal, and ws represents the exhortation as founded on what was in the
mind of the speaker. — @...@xovro, 20 whom they delivered me and were off
again; H. 827 ; Goodw. 1256. —év τοιούτῳ, ix such (peril); κινδυ-
νεύειν, fo risk something, to run some risk; it has an indef. object. —
03... ἤδη, considering that death certainly was already at hand; the infin. is
used as subst. with the art. in gen, abs.; the part. denotes cause; ὡς is
used as above.

14. τάδε, as follows ; notice the succession of abrupt clauses spoken in
haste and terror. — τὴν ofv: H. 675; cf. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ τοῦ ἐμοῦ, above.
—ratra πάσχοντί μοι, mow that 7 am suffering these things ; πρόθυμον
usually is an adj. applied to persons, here agrees with duv.; render freely :
zealously do what is in your power. — μνησθῆναι, 20 mention ; this aor., it

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 119

will be remembered, has a mid. meaning. — διδοίη : indir. form for the
subj. with ἐάν, H. 932, 2, a; G.1497; ἅπαν, everything, anything, in a dis-
tributive sense, as πᾶν in ὃ 84. The reader will perhaps recall little Paul’s
question in Dombey and Son: ‘* Money, Paul, can do anything.” “ Any-
thing means everything, doesn’t it, Papa?”

15. οἰκίας : after ἔμπειρος, H.753,d; G. 1140; γάρ here does not
introduce a reason for what goes before, but a parenthetical explanation of
what follows : now J happened, etc.; &ppl0.: witha rear as well as a front
entrance. — ταύτῃ, iz this way, i.e. availing himself of this result of his
own observation, rather than of the intervention of Damnippus. — ἐὰν... σω-
θήσομαι : this cond. sent. retains jts direct form ; then a new constr. begins
with the infinitives ἀφεθησ. and ἀποθαν. dep. on ἡγούμην. The analysis
of it may be represented as follows :

, ι a i μὲν.. «λαβεῖν, οὐδὲν ἧττον ἀφεθήσεσθαι
0 δέ, ἐὰν And sale
Ayotway δέ, POH, a δὲ μή, ὁμοίως ἀποθανεῖσθαι.

--- ἀφεθήσεσθαι (ἀφίημι), that I should none the less be released.

16. τὴν >. ποιουμ., keeping guard, The αὔλειος θύρα is the front en-
trance to the house, usually a folding door, opening into the vestibule or
covered way leading to the court. See Dict. Ant., ‘House (Greek),” and
the diagram there given. Of the three doors mentioned in the next sen-
tence, two were inside and one a rear door communicating with the street.
-- οὐσῶν : the circumst. part., equiv. to a parenthetic cl. of preliminary
explanation ; ἂς...διελθεῖν, wich 7 had to pass through ; ἀνεῳγ. (ἀνοίγνυμι) :
H. 984; G. 1586.— εἰς "Apx.: cf. εἰς Δαμνίππου, ὃ 12; ἄστυ: art.
omitted; H. 661. Ref. to the upper city, it has the force of a proper
name, as e.g. “ The City,” now only a part of London. — ἀπαγάγοι,
has led.

17. Μεγαράϑδε: H. 217; G.293. — τὸ... παράγγελμα, their customary
notice ; ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων, lit. by them, is after an implied pass. (παραγγέλεσθαι)
dep. on the part. Some edd. have it ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνων. The cup of hemlock-
juice was in Athens the usual means of inflicting capital punishment upon
citizens; it is implied here that when a warrant was served by thé Thirty
it was usually a death-warrant. Cf. note on §96.— πρὶν... εἰπεῖν : dep. on
παρήγγειλαν : H. 955, Ὁ; G.1470.— οὕτω... ἀπολογ., so much did he lack,
or, more freely, so far was he from being tried, etc. The infinitives after
ἐδέησε take the place of an obj. acc.

18. οἰκῶν : H. 971, c; G. 1563, 6; 1568. How much stress was laid on
funeral ceremonies in Athens may be seen from Becker’s Charicles, Ex-
cursus on ‘‘ Burials.’’ The corpse, arrayed in white, usually lay for one day
before burial in the front part of the house. The terms designating the
laying-out (πρόθεσις) and the funeral procession (ἐκφορά) correspond to the

120 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

verbs here used. —atrotow : not the same as τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν, but agr. with αὐὖ-
τοῖς understood, referring to the friends mentioned afterwards, δ his friends
who requested them. — ὃ δὲ.. ἔτυχεν : sc. δούς governing ὅτι : may be ren-
dered and each of the others contributed as it happened ; the last obj. of ἔδωκεν
is the clause.

19. τῶν ἡμετέρων, probably neut., of our property ; H.621,b; G.932, 1.
- χαλκόν : for use in the shield factory. — ὅσα... κτήσασθαι, more than
they ever thought of getting ; notice the Greek idiom as many as never, for
more than ever ; it is found in Demos. Olynth., I. 9 and 19, and frequently
elsewhere ; κτήσασθαι is a timeless infin., neither the time nor the duration
of the action being thought of; cf. Gr. Moods, ὃ 96; H. 851. —éls ro-
σαύτην.. ἀφίκοντο, weit so ,ar in their greed, etc.; it is foll. by καὶ... ἐποιή-
σαντο, that they made, etc., which is equiv. to a cl. of conseq., though
grammatically co-ordinate ; γάρ then introduces an explanatory instance,
justifying the assertion. Frohb. takes a different view of this constr., as
also of XIII. 80, making the cl. of conseq. implied by τοσαύτην to be
introd. afterwards by yap. — ὅτε τὸ πρῶτον, as soon as; cf. Lat. guum pri-
mum; does this clause limit the preceding or the following verb ?— ὦτων :
H. 181; 116, 15; Goodw. 291, 27; 128. --- The outrage by Melobius, if
we may trust Lysias’s statement, does indeed illustrate the way things were
done under the Thirty, and the personal traits of at least one of these
καλοὶ κἀγαθοί. Still more worth attention is the hurried inventory here
given of the personal property found on the estate of a wealthy Athenian
resident. A large part of it consisted of slave workmen. Thus also the father
of Demosthenes owned fifty slaves, mostly employed in the sword factory.
The institutions and social life of the Athenian state can be but imperfectly
comprehended by one who does not bear in mind that it was mainly a com-
munity of slaves. According to the census of the population of Attica taken
about three centuries B. C., there were 21,000 free citizens, 10,000 resident
foreigners, and 400,000 slaves. Concerning the price and treatment of
slaves, interesting details will be found in Becker’s Charicles, Excursus VII.
Closely connected with this state of things was the growing contempt of
manual labor and trade by the Athenians and Greeks generally, as unworthy
of a freeman, —a contempt which in the time of the Roman dominion set
them to living by their wits, and made them the sharpers and adventurers
of the ancient world. ;

20, 21. κατά, in respect to; ἐλέου: H. 739; G. 1099.— οὐκ ἄν be-
long with an ind. understood, as others would not have done; ἔχοντες con-
tains the condition implied by ἄν, and the’phrase may be rendered, had they
been indignant at, or, on account of indignation at.—ob...8vTas, who certainly
did not deserve this ; a falling circumflex on deserve will show the kind of
emphasis intended by γέ. --- πόλει : after ἄξιος ; H. 771; G. 1172. The

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 121

foll. partt. are attrib., like ὄντας. Notice the appropriate difference of their
tenses. The services here mentioned were the chief civil functions devolving
upon a wealthy Athenian in private life; they are often referred to in
orations. As to what the choregy, ‘he maintenance of a chorus, was, see
Dict. Ant., *‘ Choragus.” — κεκτημένους : H. 849; Goodw. 1263. — Then
follows the abrupt exclamation, — notice the absence of a connective, —
such treatment did they deem us worthy of; pero. agr. with ἡμᾶς under-
stood atter ἠξ., lit. 20¢ being metics in like manner as, etc.; the thought is,
we served the state better as resident-foreigners, than ¢#ey did as citizens. —
ἀτάφους ἐποίησαν : why was it considered one of the greatest of crimes
among the Greeks to leave the dead unburied? See Dict, Anz, ‘‘ Funus.”
—<dripous...xatert., deprived of the rights of citizenship, disfranchised ;
πόλεως : H. 753, c; G. 1140.

22. τόλμης : H. 730, e; G.1088.— ἥκουσιν ἀπ., they are here to defend
themselves; that is, in the person of Eratosthenes and his advocates. —
ἐβουλόμην dv: H. 903; Gr. Moods, 246; compare also 425. And 7
would that they were speaking the truth; éy is emphatic ; ἐβουλόμην ἄν
(often with ἄν omitted), almost exactly corresponds to the Eng. wozdd, pret.
of wz//, that is used to express a present wish for that which is not or can-
not be. — μέρος : subj. of μετῆν, which is not impers. here; 207 (in that
case) the largest share...would fall, etc.; no one would have been benefited
more than myself, had they refrained from the crimes charged against them.
See Jelf’s Greek Grammar, 535, Obs. 1, for a fuller explanation of the con-
struction here employed.

23. νῦν δέ, dut as it is; cf. ὃ 29; so νυνί, XIII. 22. — αὐτοῖς... ὑπ᾿,
neither...do such things belong to them as regards the city, etc., i. 6. they are
not entitled to any such plea. — ἀπέκτεινεν, £2//ed, was the means of his
death ; the word as used in the Attic courts allowed this latitude. — προθύ-
pos ἐξ., willingly acting in obedience to his own lawlessness.

24. ἀναβιβ... ἐρέσθαι, to have him mount the witness-stand and to inter-
rogate him. Either party in a suit had the right to interrogate the opposing
party, or his witnesses. They were obliged to answer. How effectually,
by means of the cross-examination, Socrates disposed of the charge
brought by one of his accusers may be seen in Plato’s Afol., Ch. 12; cf.
Orat. XXII. 5; also XIII. 30, 32, where the record of the questions and —
answers is omitted. The witness-stand (πόδιον) stood off on one side from
the speaker’s platform (βῆμα). --- τοιαύτην γάρ : rhetorically introducing the
justification of his holding any converse with his brother’s murderer, allud-
ing to the custom by which the surviving relative religiously abstained even
from mentioning the murderer’s name in conversation. — τούτου : i. 6. Era-
tosthenes ; mpds...8tadey., even to converse with another concerning him ;
diadey. subj. of εἶναι, of which ἀσεβές is pred. — kal... τοῦτον, even (to

122 ΝΟΤΕΒ ON ORATION XII.

converse) with this one himself; ὅσιον and εὐσεβές agr. with the inf.
understood.

25. δεδιώς, out of fear ; H. 969,b; Greek Moods, 838. — συνηγόρενες,
did you concur. — ἀποθάνωμεν : H. 881,2; G. 1369. — τοῖς κελεύουσιν :
Theognis, Piso, and others referred to in ὃ 6. — ἡγούμενος, πάσχειν : what
time denoted? force of the pres. tense? H. 851; Gr. Afoods, 117 and 139.

26. εἶτα, 4 orator’s word, appropriately begins the indignant questions ;
used twice in this section. τὸ πλῆθος, cre majority; used differently in
ὃ 42; σωτηρίας : after κύριον, H. 753,5; G. 1140. --- ἐπὶ ool...éyev., 77
depended upon you; L. ἃ S., IV. 2. --- καὶ σῶσαι.. καὶ μὴ (σῶσαρ) : since
these are alternatives, it accords better with Eng. usage to say whether...or.
— ἀξιοῖς, do you claim? χρηστός, here specifically, zzsocent, more freq.
with the larger signif., good, worthy. — ἀντειπών, συλλαβών, denote means
partly; H. 969, a; G. 1563. The thought: Do you claim merit on
account of an ineffectual remonstrance, and at the same time evade responsi-
bility for the arrest which procured his death? — δοῦναι : cf. κτήσασθαι,
ὃ 19. τουτοισί; H. 274; G. 412.

27. τοῦτο: obj. of mior., ref. to ws...mpocerdxOn. Observe the differ-
ence of the Greek idiom, delieve this to him, from the Eng. believe him in
this. — οὐ... ἐλάμβανον : an obscure sentence. As Rauch. and Frohb,
understand it : for not in the case of the metics, surely, were they going to
take a guaranty from him. The Thirty took pains to implicate in their
crimes as many prominent citizens as possible, thus making them interested
as a matter of personal safety in the continuance of the oligarchy. They
ordered Socrates, for instance, to take part in the arrest of Leon. The
speaker, then (according to the interpretation mentioned above), means to
assert that this proceeding against the metics was evidently not one in which
the Thirty would force Eratosthenes to guarantee his fidelity. On the
impf., cf. H. 832; Greek Moods, 56. --- ἣ.. ἐτύγχανε, than just (γέ) the
one who chanced to have opposed ; τῷ : interrog. pron.; προσταχ. is subj.

28. τῶν yeyev., of what has been done; ἱκανὴ... πρόφασις... ἀναφέρειν,
α sufficient excuse for throwing the blame upon, etc., H. 952; G. 1521 ;
cf. § 6. — σφᾶς αὐτούς : Eratosthenes would have said, and rightly : They
do not inculpate ¢hemselves, but one another, ἀλλήλους. The orator uses
the fallacy of division and composition, so called ; it should be said, how-
ever, that the reflexive may be used in a reciprocal sense ; cf. H. 686, Ὁ ;
G. 996.

29. εἰ.. ἣν, if there had been; H. 895,a; Greek Moods, 410; ‘* The
context must decide to which time the imperf. refers,” whether past or
present. — αὐτῆς, “han ilse/f, i. e. the ἀρχή of the Thirty. Is αὐτός ever
properly a demonstrative equiv. to éiis or that? cf. Goodw. 1007, Observe
that αὐτῆς is not the antec. of ἧς. --- viv δέ, but as it is; cf. § 23; whom

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 123

pray WILL you punish? the intensive force of καί, which belongs on Any.,
is best reproduced in Eng. by emphasizing the auxiliary. Cf. XXIV. 12,
τί γὰρ av καὶ ἔλεγεν, for what WOULD ke say? Also Thuc., I. 15, 2.

30. καὶ μὲν δή, furthermore ; joining a new argument to those already
adduced in the preceding three sections ; μέν in this phrase = μήν. The
phrases καὶ μήν, καὶ μὲν δή, and καὶ μὲν δὴ καί are of freq. occurrence in the
orators ; μήν and δή are both confirmative ; δή has the force of 2 particu-
lar, especially, and singles out for special attention what is thus introduced.
- παρόν: H.973,a; Greek Moods, 851; σώζειν is used in a double sense :
both to save him and to keep, etc. So Plato, σώζειν τοὺς νόμους, to keep the
Jaws. Keeping to the letter of the decree, — this seems the meaning, — he
was not required to arrest him anywhere except in his house. — ὅσοι : its
antec. the obj. of ὀργεΐ.

31. τοῖς.. ἀπολέσασι, those who destroy; cf. κτήσασθαι, ὃ 19, and the
note ; ἐκείνοις : Athenians ref. to in ὃ 28, who engaged in these outrages
under constraint of the Thirty. — κίνδυνος, k. τ. A., for ἐέ was dangerous to
them when sent, etc.; apv. as pred. adj. agrees with the dat. understood
after ἣν ; ἐξ, γεν. = to deny. —€wara, in the next place (to say). — ὥστε
introduces εἶναι ; οἷός τε: see L. ἃ S., III. 2. — βουλομένων, wishing it,
or, wish tt as they might; ταῦτα refers to εἶδεν. Eratosthenes, had he so
desired, might have avoided meeting the victim; or, had he met him, no
one could have proved that he had seen him.

32. χρῆν...σέ, you ought ; on this and similar verbs, as used in the apo-
dosis without ἄν, see Gr. Moods, 415, and especially p. 410, where the
constr. here an in ὃ 48 are compared. This seems to me, however, to be
a case of the first class, and thus different from the sentence in § 48. You
say you were a good man; granted; it was your duty, then, to forewarn
innocent men who were in danger of death. In § 48 the truth of the claim
is not thus (for the sake of the argument) admitted. — μηνυτήν : here, as in
ὃ 48, used in its good sense. — av. γεγένηται, have become manifest ; more
freely, are manifestly not those of one displeased, etc. — τοῖς γιγνομένοις :
cf. τῶν γεγενημένων, § 28, and explain the time denoted in each case.

33. Wajdov: observe the connection of this word with ψήφισμα, decree.
λαμβάνοντας agrees with τούσδε, and its obj. is ταῦτα understood antec. of
&; taking as proofs of what was said at that time (τῶν τότε dey.) that which
. they know to have been αἴογεδ. ---- τεκμήρια is the word rendered in our ver-
sion of Acts i. 3, ‘‘infallible proofs.” — παρεῖναι, Zo de present ; i. 6. at the
sessions of the Thirty. παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς, αΖ home, i.e. in our country; H. 686;
Goodw. 995. — ἐπί, in the power of; cf. ἐπὶ σοί, ὃ 26. eipyac., after
having wrought ; notice that this is not an attrib. part.; why not?

34. οὐ φεύγω, 7 do not evade. The asserted remonstrance shall have
due weight given it, though, as I have shown, the Thirty took effectual

124 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

precautions against the possibility of any counter-testimony. — συνειπών, if
you had concurred ; condit.; ἀντειπεῖν φάσκων : equiv. to a concess. cl.,
as if to say, despite your asserted remonstrance. — φέρε δὴ, τί ἂν (ἐποιήσατε),
come now, what would you do, addressed to the judges. καὶ... καί are not
co-ordinate, but each gives emphasis to the word following it. — ἀπεψηφ.
(sc. ἄν), would you acquit him? The question being what they would do
now, on a certain supposition, we should perhaps expect the imperf. instead
of the aor.; but the action seems in this case merely conceived of by the
speaker as such, without special regard either to its time or continuance ;
H. 895, a; likewise in regard to ἐποίησας, above. — θάτερον : H. 77, ἃ,
and 82; G. 46; and 93. — ὁμολόγηκεν : in ὃ 25.

35. καὶ μὲν δή: cf. § 30. --- εἰσόμενοι, in order to ascertain; τούτων
includes the others of the Thirty. — oi... ὄντες, those who are, is the subj.;
ἀπίασιν: H.828,a; Goodw. 1257. μαθόντες is not temporal, but de-
notes a condition or circumstance of the subj., or the occasion of the action;
H. 967; Gr. Moods, 836 and 843.— ὧν ἂν ἐξαμ., whatever offences they com-
mit ; strictly, shall have committed ; ὧν for τούτων &; H. 996, a; G. 1031,
and 1032.— πράξαντες. .. ἐφίενται, if they succeed in what they aimat; dv:
H. 739; G. ἡ 1099 ; ὑμῖν: after ἴσον, H. 773; G.1175. Lysias insists that the
trial is to teach a political lesson, — whether an unsuccessful attempt to
overthrow the government is to be held in Athens as ἃ failure merely, or also
as a crime. —8o0t... ἐπιδ., the strangers who are staying here, i.e. Greeks
from other cities. — éxxnp., ave excluding by proclamation, The remnant
of the Thirty and such of their adherents as still followed their fortunes were
at this time standing at bay in Eleusis ; but some of the number had, it
would seem, sought refuge in other Grecian cities. — λαβόντες, having had
them in custody. — σφᾶς αὐτοὺς... περιέργους, that they take needless pains.

36. ϑεινόν agrees with the remainder of the sentence, in which, however,
there is a break in the construction, beginning with οὐκ dpa, so that τούτους,
which begins the second number of the conditional cl., has no verb. The
clause εἰ.. ἀποκτιννύναι is really subst., — condit. only in form; εἰ fre-
quently introduces such clauses after words expressive of wonder, surprise,
etc., and thus is equiv. to “that”; Gr. Moods, 494; Kiihner, 329, R. 7. —
οἷοί te: agr. with subj. of εἶναι, H. 940; Goodw. οΟ27. --- τοὺς ἐκ τ΄ θ..-
the survivors, and the bodies of the dead left on the disabled Athenian
vessels after the battle of Arginusz, B. Cc. 406. Six of the ten generals were
put to death. Cf. Smith’s Hist. of Greece, Ch. XXXII. —dperq: dat. of
adv. after λαβεῖν ; for other exx. of the dat. thus used to express out of
respect to, in honor to, the gods, for instance, see Kiihner’s Ausf. Gr., 11.
Ρ. 366. — érolnoay...vavpay., caused (you) to be defeated in a naval battle ;
the battle of ASgospotami, — a disaster very generally attributed at the time
to the corrupt connivance of some of the generals belonging to the oligarchic

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 125

party. — ἀποκτιννύναι : the time denoted is given in the clause ἐπειδὴ
...kat., which depends on this infin.; wet on putting to death. —ov« ἄρα,
ought not, then, they and their children? ‘The sentence is closed with a
new question, leaving the former construction unfinished. How extensively
the criminal jurisprudence of the Greeks was moulded by the patriarchal
conception, that the unit of society was the family, is a question too large to
be more than suggested here. By ancient law, the penalty of great crimes
was often shared by the children and family of the criminal; and the
justice of the law was unchallenged, even when not actually carried into
effect. Cf. Maine’s Ancient Law, Ch. IV. The argument in support of
the indictment ends here. The court, however, was to decide not merely
on the guilt or innocence of the prisoner, but also whether he should be
punished, and what the penalty should be. The defendant in such cases
was wont to dwell on past services and every mitigating circumstance.
Lysias accordingly takes a review of the political history of the prisoner and
his associates, — especially Theramenes. Technically the remaining argu-
ment is called λόγος ἔξω τῆς γραφῆς.

37. τοίνυν, 7, then ; the particle is retrospective and inferential, implying
in view of all these things. — μέχρι, x. τ. X., freely, for this is as far as 7
think one ought to continue the accusation ; θανάτον.. ἄξια, crimes worthy
of death ; δόξῃ : H. 921 and Rem.; Gr. M7, 613,5; τῷ φεύγοντι: H. 769;
G. 1186. — δίκην : pred. accus., H. 726; Goodw. 1080. Eng., this is the
extreme penalty which, εἴς. -- ὅτι, why; H.719, c; G. to6oand 1061.—
οὐδὲ... δὶς ἀποθ., ot even by suffering two deaths ; the part. has a condit.
force, as the foll. verb indicates.

38. γάρ refers back to the first statement in § 37, giving a further reason;
τοῦτο refers to what follows ἐστί ; ὅπερ introd. a parenthetic, not a restric-
tive rel. clause. — ἐξαπατῶσιν : we should expect an infin., to make the
antithesis exact ; it will be convenient in rendering to make the first verb
correspond to the others ; they make no defence, etc. — tpinpapx.: one of
the responsible and expensive duties that devolved upon an Athenian citizen
of wealth. Cf. Dict. Ant., ‘‘Trierarchia,” I., 11. --- πολεμ. οὔσας, which
had been hostile ; one adj. is pred. after the partic., the other after the verb.

39. ἐπεί: syn. with γάρ, for; it introd. the imperat. κελεύετε as the
means of confirming the assertion made above, οὐδὲ τοῦτο προσήκει. ---
πολιτῶν : partit. gen. after ὅσους. --- οἵαν... κατεδ., as yours which they
enslaved ; untranslatable literally. τὴν tuer. is in definitive appos. with
οἵαν. The reader should pause to notice in this sentence the meaning of
οἷος and ὅσος, for which we have no proper equivalents in English, and are,
therefore, compelled to render by as.

40. ἀλλὰ γάρ : ““ἀλλά is often used to break off the previous discourse,
and introduce a question or demand” (H. 1046,2,b. Cf. also XXIV. 21.)

126 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

As to γάρ (here to be omitted in translation), see L. ἃ S., IV. 1. The next
ἀλλά is a repetition (the figure called ‘‘anaphora”’) of the initial word,
frequent in animated discourse. In Eng. tr. we simply substitute ‘ o7.”? —
τοσαῦτα ὅσαπερ., just as many as. On the disarming of the citizens by
order of the Thirty, see Grote, VIII. p. 247. — πατρίδος : limiting ofa. It
is substantially the same construction as τὴν ὑμετέραν, above ; φρούρια : it
is not certain to what extent this demolition of the fortifications of Attica
was carried by the oligarchs in order to put the country more completely
into the power of the Lacedzemonians. Taking this passage as his authority,
Curtius (Hist. of Greece, IV. p. 45) says: The Thirty had in the interest of
Sparta not only deprived Athens of its strong walls, but also pulled down
or dismantled its frontier fortresses. The whole district of Attica was to be
a defenceless country, which was precisely what the Spartans had demanded
after the Persian wars.” Ina note: ‘But Phyle had remained a χωρίον
ἰσχυρόν, Eleusis likewise.” — προσταττόντων : causal, as the foll. cl. shows:
even the Pireus they dismantled, not because the L. required it, but, etc.
The aristocratic party in Athens always looked with a jealous eye on its
commercial and maritime interests, viewing them as the sources of strength
to the democracy. — τὴν ἀρχήν, their supremacy in the government.

41. πολλάκις... ἐθαυ., 7 have often wondered, or, I often wonder, equally
frequent in Eng. Essentially this is the same as the so-called gnomic aor.,
simply naming the action as taking place; its time is defined only by the
adv. elements of the sentence ; τόλμης: H. 742; G. 1102. --- τῶν αὐτῶν :
H. 732; G. 1094, 1. — τοὺς τοιούτους, such as do them; made more
definite by the art.; G. 947. αὐτούς is emphatic, agr. with the subj. of
épyag., not merely used as a personal pronoun.

42. yap: explaining πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα. The previous record of Era-
tosthenes and his colleagues made the effrontery of their advocates and
apologists more surprising. — τῷ dper. πλήθει, fo you the people ; a current
phrase for the democracy, used in addressing the people, and especially
frequent in Lysias. So § 43, and XIII. 16; cf. the diff. phrase in ὃ 26,
and note. — ἐπί, in the time of; B.C. 411. — ἔφευγεν : give καθιστάς its
proper force as a pres. ρατί. --- τριήραρχος : appos. with subj.; freely,
having abandoned the ship of which he was trierarch. — ἔπραττε, κ. τ΄ i.,
was acting in opposition to those who wished, etc,

43. The testimony of the witnesses having been delivered, and written
down by the clerks (γραμματεῖς), the speaker proceeds. . Ordinarily in an
Athenian court no oath was administered to a witness, unless when brought
forward he denied any knowledge of the case. τοίνυν. παρήσω, now 7
will pass over ; the particle is transitional, —in Eng. ordinarily there would
be none. — ἧ vavpax. Kal ἡ συμφορά : a comprehensive and well-under-
stood phrase for Aigospotami and its consequences. — οὔσης : the partic.

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 127

here is equiv. to a parenthetic clause ; it is of the nature of an adv. element,
and thrown in to call attention to the revolutionary nature of the transaction.
— ὅθεν, whence, has its proper antec. in what follows ; we may render: five
men (and with this they began the sedition) were appointed, etc.; κατέστη-
σαν : here intrans., in the next section trans. Observe that ἔστησαν is the
only form of the verb common to both aorists. — ἄρχοντες, directors. —
συνωμοτῶν : so called because of their oaths to maintain mutual fidelity and
inviolable secrecy. They styled themselves ἑταΐροι. --- ἔφοροι, ἑταίρων :
** As soon as the city surrendered, and while the work of demolition was yet
going on, the oligarchical party began to organize itself. The members of
the political Clubs again came together, and named a managing Committee
of Five, called Ephors in compliment to the Lacedzemonians, to direct the
general proceedings of the party.” So Grote, VIII. p. 235, taking this
passage as his chief authority. The career and character of Critias, the
leading spirit of this revolution, are ably set forth in Curtius’s Ast. of
Greece, 111. pp. 573 - 578.

44. φυλάρχους, phylarchs, commanders of cavalry. There were ten of
them in the Athenian service, one for the cavalry of each φυλή. --- παρήγ-
γέλλον, issued orders, characterizing, as does κύριοι, below, this systematic
completeness of the conspiracy ; εἴ τι ἄλλο, whatever else ; εἴ τι being equiv.
to ὅ τι ; for δέοι and the foll. eae: see H. 917; G. 1431, 2. — ἔσεσθε :
a change from opt. to fut. indic., H. 911 ; G. 1372.— ἐπεβουλεύεσθε : by
the measures already detailed, the ee form of government was made
the instrument of its own overthrow.

45, 46. ἄλλως : i. 6. unless brought into this condition of destitution and
suffering (πολλῶν ἐνδεεῖς). --- κακῶς πραττόντων, if you should suffer mis-
Sortune ; notice that δυνήσονται takes the place of the equiv. οἷοί re ἔσονται.
— τῶν.. κακῶν : after ἀπαλλαγῆναι. ---- οὐκ évOup., would be unmindful of.
- ἐφόρων : pred. gen., partitive. — μάρτυρας : defined by the foll. subst.
partt. used appositively. — οὐ.. δυναίμην : on account of the oaths by which
they were bound ; see § 47.

47. karen. ἂν αὐτῶν, ciey (i. e. their fellow-conspirators) would testify
against them. — τοὺς ὅρκους... πιστοὺς ἐνόμιζον, consider their oaths bind-
ing ; observe that οὐκ qualifies both predicates together (i. e. ἐνόμιζον, παρέ-
Bawov), not each separately; as if to say: those who withhold their
testimony consider binding the oaths which they took on becoming ‘*Com-
panions,” but are violating those they took on becoming citizens, — which
they would not do, if they were wise; cf. the note on ἃ 80; ἐπί has the
same meaning as in § 26; it gives the sense well to render it freely, where
it concerns, or, with a view ἕο. ---- κάλει : addressed to the herald (κῆρυξ) of
the court ; κάλεσον is the word in Orat. XXI. 10. — ἀνάβητε : cf. ἀνάβηθι,
§ 24. Possibly the decree of Demophantus (Grote, VIII. p. 80) was still in

128 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

force (cf. Grote, VIII. p. 298); if so, such oaths as are alluded to in the
first cl. of this section were not by law binding. The oaths which they had
shown themselves ready to violate were their oaths of allegiance, and those
taken in any official service to the state. On being enrolled in his eighteenth
year, every citizen took a prescribed oath of citizenship.

48. τὸ τελ.: H. 719,b; G. 1060. —els τὴν ἀρχὴν κατ᾿: as in §§ 5 and
29. — ἄλλων : i. e. κακῶν ; Attic, or rather Greek euphemism. — ἐχρῆν ἂν
οοὐμὴ παρανόμως ἄρχειν, Le must needs have ruled according to the laws;
χρή : used here in its first, not its second meaning ; cf. L. ἃ S. — ἔπειτα,
in the next place ; δέ is usually omitted with this ady., whether it denotes
succession of time or of thought. μηνυτὴν y.: also in ὃ 32; 0 disclose, to
give information, —émacreav: the force of its emphatic position may be
given by rendering it with the next clause: that they were αὐ false. —
ἀλλὰ... εἰσαγγέλλουσι, dut were bringing in charges fabricated by the
Thirty ; also to be joined with ὅτι, and belonging to the time of ἐχρῆν,
which the context shows refers to the past.— In Orat. VIL., Against Andoc-
ides, the speaker pronounces Batrachus ‘‘the basest of all the informers
during the administration of the Thirty,” except Andocides. Of Aischy-
lides nothing further is known.

49. καὶ μὲν δή: as in §§ 30, 35, 89. See note to § 30. — οὐδὲν... σιω-
πῶντες, were none the worse off for being silent; notice that ἔλαττον is not
obj., but used as an adv. accus.; cf. ἔχειν κακῶς, to be badly off; with an
adv. ἔχω = 20 be. —trepor ἦσαν ot λέγοντες, there were others who said;
the constr. is: ér. subject, of Aey. in appos. So Anad., 11, 4. 5, ὁ ἡγησό-
μενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται, there will be no one to act as guide, Without the art. the
part. would stand in simple adj. agreement with the subj.; the art. added
makes the action of the verb apply to some case definitely understood or
referred to. For further illustration of this distinction, see Kriiger’s Grzech-
ische Sprachlehre, 50, 4; A. 3, and A. 4.— dv: gen. after the compar.;
its antec. is obj. of the part. —ma@s...@afav, why did they not show it then?
The foll. partt. denote manner. The argument of this section is : Silent
acquiescence was no proof of good-will to the people ; under the circum-
stances, it was the easiest thing to do; the only way in which such good-
will could be shown was by openly advocating better counsels, and
endeavoring to restrain the evil-doers. The obvious reply, that to do this
at that time was dangerous, is met in what follows.

50. ὅπως: H. 886; Goodw. 1352. — ἐν τῷ λόγῳ, in the course of the
discussion, —é δὲ ph, otherwise ; σκοπείτω is to be understood ; ἐνταυθοῖ
= ἐνταῦθα, herein ; ὅτι...τε.. καί, not only that...but also that. — xpiv δ᾽
avrov...éxayv, dul he ought to have had; cf. § 32; ἀλλὰ ph, instead of.
The argument : Let him beware of saying that he opposed the Thirty (see
§ 25), when the matter was under advisement ; otherwise, the history of the

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 129

transaction will make it appear not only that he was satisfied with the
measures finally adopted, but also that he was sufficiently influential in the
body to be quite free from any reason to fear.

«BI. ὡς ἀμφ. ταῦτα, doth which things, lit. as both these; ταῦτα is direct
obj.; the Eng. does not allow the repetition of the previous obj. after ‘‘ as.”
— καὶ τὰς.. διαφορὰς... γιγνομένας, azd (shall show) that their repeated dis-
putes...arose; for the part., see H. 981: G. 1588; its tense shows the
continued, or repeated action. — ὁπότεροι, which of the two, i. e. the
two factions of the oligarchic party, one headed by Critias, the other by
Theramenes; it introd. an indir. question in appos. with διαφοράς. See
Gr. Moods; 669, τ end.

52. wod...qv, when would it have been nobler ? H. 895, Note a. Φυλῇ:
see note XIII. 63. Thrasybulus, the leader in the return of the exiles,
who afterwards usually bore the name οἱ ἐκ Φυλῆς, or of ἀπὸ Φυλῆς:
here it is of ἐπὶ Φυλῇ, the men on Phyle. —’Edevoivdde: cf. Μέγαράδε,
§ 17. — μιᾷ ψήφῳ: “ There was a rule in Attic judicial procedure, called
the psephism of Kannonus, — originally adopted, we do not know when,
on the proposition of a citizen of that name, as a psephism or decree
for some particular case, but since generalized into common practice, and
grown into great prescriptive reverence, — which peremptorily forbade any
such collective trial or sentence, and directed that a separate judicial vote
should in all cases be taken for or against each accused party.” Grote,
VIII. p. 196. On the -proceedings at Eleusis and Salamis, read Grote,
VIIL. p.,266 seg.; or Smith, Ch. XXXIIL., ὃ 15.

53. ἤλθομεν : identifying himself with those who joined Thrasybulus ;
see Introd., ‘‘On the Life and Writings of Lysias.””—at tapaxat, the
tumudlts ; gently said, rather than remind those before him how a few
months before Athenians had fought Athenians in the very streets of the
Pirzeus. Xenophon gives a full account of the battle in /ed//., II. 4; see
Grote, VIII. p. 268 seg. — ot λόγοι, “he conferences. — ἔσεσθαι : after
ἐλπιδ.; H.952; G. 1521; that we should be towards one another as we both
showed (ourselves to be afterwards). ὡς denotes manner, corresp. to the
ady. expression πρὸς ἀλλ. The phraseology is certainly unusual ; Frohb.
has emended the text. — of...é« Tlapatas : = οἱ ἐκ Φυλῆς, a current phrase
to distinguish them from the oligarchic faction, who were called oi ἐν ἄστει,
οἱ ἐξ ἄστεος. --- γάρ : our allowing them (the men of the city) to depart
unmolested after the skirmish was a proof of our confidence in a speedy
reconciliation.

54. ἀρχ.... εἵλοντο, chose as archons; ἐκείνοις : i.e. the Thirty. — ἄν
belongs with the inf.; τῶν αὐτῶν ; Lysias recurs in § 57 to the fact that the
Thirty were so avowedly and thoroughly hostile to the democracy, — now
prominently represented by the returned exiles, the ‘‘ Pirzeus-men,” — that
the same person could hardly be friendly to both sides.

130 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

55. The following passage, to § 61, gives some facts not elsewhere stated
concerning the δεκαδοῦχοι, the Board of Ten, who succeeded the Thirty in
the government of the city after the expulsion of the latter. Eratosthenes
seems not to have been a member of it, as stated by Grote ; but Phidon,
with whom he stood in close political affiliation, represented the spirit and
aims of both, and showed the intense hostility felt toward the democracy by
even the Moderates. — τούτων : i.e. the Ten. ‘‘ The members of the new
government were selected from the Thirty, from the oligarchic Senate, and
from the number of those who generally shared their political views. Of the
Thirty, Phidon was chosen, who, next to Theramenes, was known to have
most vigorously opposed Critias and Charicles. Hippocles, Epichares, and
Rhinon were of the same shade of party. These men were the moderate
oligarchs, who had been driven into the back-ground by the death of Thera-
menes, and whom it was now intended to place at the helm of the state.”
(Curtius, IV. p. 52.) — τῇ ἐκ. ἑταιρείᾳ, their club; cf. note on ὃ 43 ; Char-
icles, next to Critias, was the leader of the Thirty. — τοῖς ἐξ ἄστεος, fo the
party of the city ; dat. after ἐποίησαν. The party hatred and hostility were
augmented, not allayed, under the Ten.

56. ols, dy which, i. e. proceedings; Frohb. and Rauch. have @ — τῶν
...@OAX., those who were perishing, i. e. under the rule of the Thirty. —
οἱ τεθν,, of μέλλοντες : ref. to those who had fallen or were to fall in the
civil war, now openly begun. — καὶ πλουτοῦντες, and who were getting rich
faster.

57, 58. λαβόντες... τὰς ἀρχάς, Laving gained possession of the offices. —
tois...elpy. καὶ... πεπονθόσι : in appos, with ἀμφοτέροις. --- ἐκεῖνοι, i. 6. the
Thirty. — ἑτέρων ἔργων : the emphatic position of these words entitles them
to emphasis in translation: for surely it was not for having been guilty of
other deeds that, etc, — τῶν avrav...perctxe, Zook part in the same deeds as
Eratosthenes ; ’Epat.: H. 773; G. 1175; γνώμῃ: H.776; G. 1181; it is
dat. of manner; αὑτῶν, than themselves; 8vd, through, = by the aid, or
agency, of; often thus used with accus. of a person. — ἔπειθεν, was endeav-
oring to persuade them, i. e. the Lacedeemonians. — διαβάλλων, maliciously
asserting; Bowrt.: pred. gen. The Boeotians gave assistance to Thrasy-
bulus and the exiles, and this would be enough to arouse jealousy at Sparta.
The remnant of the Thirty, after taking refuge in Eleusis, had also sent to
Sparta for aid against the constitutional party, the democracy.

59. τούτων, his, i. 6. that the Lacedzemonians should take the field. —
εἴτε Kal...Bovd., or because they were not inclined. —®aveloaro : the Lace-
dzmonian government was now in funds. Lysander, the year before, had
returned from the Asiatic campaign, bringing back not less than 470 talents
in addition to the other trophies and spoils of war. See Grote, VIII. p. 238.
This loan was afterward repaid from the state treasury, though with

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 121

opposition. — ἄρχοντα, as commander, i. 6. of the military force, which
would also put him in command of the city. Lysander was a genuine
Spartan in his dislike of Athens and popular government, as well as in his
personal incorruptibility.

60. πάντας av0., αὐ men, men from every quarter ; the absence of the
art. shows the vagueness of the phrase ; Frohb., ‘‘ ad/e Welt.” — érayovres,
calling in the aid of ; τέλευτ. : H. 968, a; G. 1563, 1; cf. τὸ τελευταῖον,
§ 48. — οὐ διαλλάξαι : cf. αἱρεθεὶς ὑμᾶς διαλ., § 55. — εἰ μή, κ, τ᾿ λ., had it
not been for true men; the omission before εἰ μή suggests itself at once :
and they would have destroyed it. — ois... ϑηλώσατε : H. 999, a; Gr.
Moods, 519; imperative ina rel. cl.; we may render: whom ἐξ is yours
to show by inflicting, etc. In Eng. an imperat. is allowed in a rel. cl. only
when the latter is really equiv. to a demonstrative.

61. καὶ αὐτοί, yourselves. —bpws δέ, sc. παρέξομαι. --- ἀναπαύσασθαι :
if the speech is written as delivered, Lysias could not have been speaking
much more than half an hour; he may, however, have been on his feet
a much longer time, and perhaps engaged during a part of it in cross-
examining the witnesses who had been previously called up. The time ‘to
rest himself” would be welcome to a speaker unaccustomed to address so
large an audience as was doubtless gathered at this trial, and would perhaps,
as Lysias intimates, afford an agreeable change to the listeners. All the
evidence cited, it will be borne in mind, was produced by each party during
his own speech, and the time thus occupied was not to be reckoned in the
time legally allowed the speaker. Hence his direction to have the time-
piece stopped when witnesses were called ; see XXIII. 11; καί μοι ἐπίλαβε
τὸ ὕδωρ. See Dict. Ant. ‘‘Martyria,” and cf. also note on § 24. — ὡς
πλείστων : Η. 742,c; G. 1103.

62. In this passage (62-78), the course of Theramenes is sketched with
an unsparing hand ; it is the sketch not of an historian, but of an adversary ;
yet all the facts stated accord, so far as known, with other received authori-
ties. He had the talents of a demagogue with the temper of an aristocrat.
His virtue as a politician was moderation, and it is this that must have
commended him to Aristotle, who pronounced him one of the best of
Athens’ citizens, — a verdict that subsequent history has been far from rati-
fying. His polished, persuasive eloquence commended him to the people,
and undoubtedly in foresight and other intellectual qualities he stood among
the foremost men of the latter half of the Peloponnesian War. But he was
destitute of fixed principles ; he seems to have been wholly controlled by
personal vanity and ambition. His political instability won for him, acc. to
Xenophon, the nickname of Cothurnus, the stage-shoe that fitted either
foot. His moderation, indeed, seems hardly to deserve the name of a
virtue ; he was not like Halifax, as described by Macaulay, a ‘ Trimmer”

132 NOTES ON ORATION: XII.

on principle, but by policy ; nor does he deserve, either as a statesman or as
a patriot, to be ranked with the English nobleman. Unless history has
much distorted the facts of his conduct in the trial of the six generals after
the battle of Arginusze, and during the siege of Athens after ASgospotami, he
richly deserved the fate that befell him. That very death, however, par-
tially redeemed his reputation. He had fallen a victim to a more vindic-
tive, if not a wilier foe of the people, — the insatiably ambitious and the
relentless Critias. With this temporary halo of martyrdom around him,
brightened by the memory of his eloquence and his gallant bearing when
taken to be executed, his name was put forward by the Moderates of the
oligarchy as a mediator with the now triumphant democracy. Lest the
guilty actors in the tragedy now over should thus be screened from jus-
tice, the orator aims to set Theramenes in a true light before his country-
men.

φέρε δή : cf. ὃ 34. — ds...818.: cf. § 3, where we have ἐλαχίστων instead
of βραχυτάτων. --- καὶ... παραστῇ, and let this suggest itself to no one, let no
one think ; κινδυνεύοντος : gen. absol. with Epar., concessive ; while it is
Lratosthenes who is on trial. — ταῦτα ἀπολ,, that he will make this defence ;
H. 716, Ὁ; Goodw. 1054. — ἐκείνῳ, i. 6. Theramenes,

63. καίτοι, κ. τ. X., yet without doubt, 7 suppose, if he had taken part in
public affairs with Themistocles, he would claim that he took measures,
etc.; σφόδρα emphasizes the sneering irony ; it is a modal adv., I think ;
not an adv. of manner with προσπ. --- ὁπότε: the words to fill out this cl.
are to be supplied from the preceding. — od...-yeyevfjr@ar: a good specimen
of the rhetorical figure litotes, in which the form of expression suggests more
than is said. The remark is significant ; just at this time many were dis-
posed to look upon Theramenes as a martyr to liberty and the state. The
γάρ gives the reason for taunting Eratosthenes with his avowed adherence to
Theramenes ; as if to say: he does not seem to me to be a second Themis-
tocles. — Aak. ἀκόντων, against the will of the Lacedemonians; con-
cessive.

64. τοὐναντίον ἤ : see note on § 2. — ἄξιον : sc. ἂν ἣν, it were fitting ;
᾿ Greek Moods, 415; Kiihn., 260, Rem. 3. — προσαπολωλέναι, fo perish
too, to perish with him; observe the force of the prep. — πλὴν εἴ τις ἐτύγχα-
γεν, unless there chanced to be one. — εἰς.. ἀναφερομένας, appealing to; an
indication of the reaction in public opinion in favor of Theramenes ; the
supporters of the overthrown oligarchy who still remained in the city were
now claiming to have adhered to him. — ἀλλ᾽ od: cf. ἀλλὰ μή, § 50.

65. προτέρας dAry., i. 6. the Four Hundred; H. 753, e; G. 1140. —
πολιτείαν : for the main features of the scheme of government thus intro-
duced, see Grote, VIII. p. 36; πείσας : the power of insinuating persuasive
speech, Theramenes seems to have had in a high degree. — ταῦτ᾽ ἔπραττεν,

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 133

was engaged in these proceedings. The Probuli, a provisional committee of
ten, appointed at the close of the Sicilian expedition, to take measures for
the public safety ; see Dict. Ant. Theramenes’s adopted father, Hagnon,
son of Nicias, is here referred to. He was active and prominent in public
affairs during the earlier years of the Peloponnesian War. — τοῖς πράγμασι,
to the measures then in progress, the cause, the revolution, favored and pro-
moted by the Probuli, who were of oligarchic proclivities. Frohb. renders :
**der Ordnung der Dinge, der Verfassung,” Zo the order of things, the con-
stitution, but wrongly, I think ; cf. the use of πράγματα in XIII. 60.

66. Pisander had been from the beginning the leader in the movement.
See Grote, VIII. p. 19, and also p. 58, where he says: ‘‘ The representa-
tion of the character and motives of Theramenes, as given by Lysias,” in
Orations XII. and XIIL., ‘‘is quite in harmony with that of Thucydides.”
Calleeschrus, the father of Critias, and one of the leaders of the ultra wing
of the Four Hundred. — προτέρους αὑτοῦ, more influential than himself,
that is, in the counsels of the party ; as stated in the next clause, they were
losing their ascendency over the democracy. — τότ᾽ ἤδη, αὐ /ast. — τῶν
᾽Ἄριστ. ἔργων : Aristocrates is mentioned by Thucydides as along with
Theramenes heading this opposition to the Ultras of the Four Hundred. —
7d...8€0s : the fear inspired by you; observe the precision of this and the
preceding phrase.

67, 68. ἀπέκτεινεν, caused the death of; cf. § 23. Of this transaction
Grote gives an interesting account ; Vol. VIII. pp. 83-87. — ἅμα μὲν...δέ,
not only...but also; the accessible facts concerning Theramenes seem to
justify the taunt of Lysias concerning his double-edged ‘‘ good faith.” —
αὐτὸς éray., having promised of his own accord; αὐτός emphatically re-
peated. The speaker passes over the intervening six years ; we know that
he was repeatedly elected general. — πρᾶγμα, «. τ᾿ X., @ great and impor-
tant thing ; a vague and mysteriously uttered phrase, which helped Theram-
enes once more to gain the confidence of the people. — μήτε.. δοὺς μήτε,
without either giving pledges, or; H. 1027.

69. πραττούσης : this and the foll. partt. are concessive. That the
Senate of the Areopagus were already taking measures for the safety of the
city, was a reason for not committing them entirely into the hands of one
man. — ot ἄλλοι ἀνθ., the rest of men, i.e. men generally. — εἰδότες δέ :
Gr. Moods, 876. ---τὰ ἀπόρρητα : i.e. secrets of state; οὐκ ἠθέλησεν,
refused, would not; yet he could hardly have been required to tell his
plans in the open assembly, — that would have been communicating them
to the enemy. — πατρίδα, x.t.A.: H.660,a. “In vain many thoughtful
citizens urged their objections; they guessed his traitorous intentions,
and warned the assembly against intrusting their all to the hands of a The-
ramenes. In vain the Areopagus offered to take the negotiations for peace

134 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

into its own hands. The large majority of the citizens, whose only anxiety
was for peace, were captivated by his speech and would not relinquish the
hopes aroused by it ; the conspirators exerted their influence to foster this
feeling ; and Theramenes received the desired powers.” Curtius, III.
Ρ. 568.

70. av: H. 996 and a; G. 1031 and 1032.— οὕτως : the consequent is ὥστε;
he had so firmly made up his mind that it was requisite, etc., that. — wept
ὧν : after ἐμνήσθη ; its antec. is ταῦτα ; render, which no one either of the
enemy mentioned, or of the citizens expected, — αὐτὸς... ἔπαγγ. : cf. § 68. —
εὖ εἰδώς : causal, = for he well knew. — ταχεῖαν : pred. position ; render
emphatically, speedy would be the vengeance which, etc.

71. οὐ πρότερον εἴασε.. ἕως, he did not permit,...until ; πρότερον is not
essential to the meaning, and is sometimes omitted ; the foll. verbs are co-
ordinate after ἕως. --- tm’ ἐκείνων : the Lacedzemonians. — στρατόπεδον :
troops from the army of occupation at Decelea. The assembly referred to
here, and mentioned in the foll. section, was ‘‘the assembly concerning a
change in the constitution,” — the assembly which passed the motion of
Dracontides, establishing the Thirty in power, and virtually abrogating the
constitution. It seems to have been held shortly after the surrender of
Athens to Lysander, which took place (acc. to Scheibe) March 29, 404 B. Cc.
The assembly (or assemblies, — there seem to have been several subsequent
sessions) ‘* concerning the Peace,” which was held the day after the return
of Theramenes from his final mission, is not referred to here. Its delibera-
tions are referred to in Oration XIII., § 15 seg. On the order of the suc-
cessive sessions, see Curtius, Vol. III., App., Note XII.

72. τότε... ὕπαρχ., this being the condition of affairs at that time, —
ἐποίουν, convened ; Philochares and Miltiades are not elsewhere mentioned
in the extant accounts of this period. — μήτε. .. τέ: H. 1044, a. Notice
also that μήτε... μηδείς make one negative in translation; H. 1030;
G. τόιρ. --- τἀκείνοις δοκοῦντα, what pleased them.

73. It will be seen, by consulting the histories, that the present oration
is the chief authority concerning the deliberations of this assembly. The
narrative of Diodorus Siculus is considered to have little weight, where it
differs from the account here given. τῇ πολ. χρῆσθαι, Zo adopt the form of
government, — ἀπέφαινεν, announced, not proposed ; the word is significant
of the forced revolutionary character of the proceeding ; ὅμως... διακ,, a/-
though thus situated ; ὅμως, yet, belongs with the principal verb, but is often
brought in earlier in the sentence; it shows that the part. is concessive ;
H. 979.— ἐθορυβεῖτε : in all the Athenian meetings, in courts as well as
in the political assemblies, free expression was given to approval or dis-
approval ; this word is used of both, meaning ¢o applaud, and to murmur
dissent, not exactly 40 make an uproar, which is too rude a definition ;

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 135

though often enough in the gatherings of the intractable Demos the rising
murmurs made uproar enough to drown the tones of a Stentor. — δουλείας
καὶ ἐλευθ. : it was a question of slavery ov freedom, as we should say.

74. ὅτι... μέλοι, that he cared nothing for your noise; οὐδέν: adv. accus.
- τοὺς... πράττοντας : used substantively as pred. accusative after εἰδείη :
H. 726; G.1077. The direct obj. may often be distinguished from the
pred. accus. by the art. with the former; in constr. like thé present, the
contrary may be the case; the principle is the same as that given in the note
on ὃ 49. Frohb. is surely mistaken in considering πολλούς pred., and that
᾿Αθηναίων limits robs... πράτ. ---- αὑτῷ : after ὅμοια : H. 773 andb;G. 1175
and 1178. — δοκοῦντα : though without the art., probably used substan-
tively; Gr. Moods, 827 (a); λέγοι is also to be connected with ἐπειδή ;
for the mood of εἰδείη and λέγοι, see H. 932, 2, a; G.1497-— Kal... ἔχοι,
but also that he considered you to have violated the treaty. “He told them
in a menacing and contemptuous tone that Athens was now at his mercy,
since the walls had not been demolished before the day specified, and
consequently the conditions of the promised peace had been violated.”
(Grote, VIII. p. 235.) — ὅτι... ἔσται, κελεύει : forms of direct discourse ;
H. 932; G. 1497 and 1498.

75, 76. γνόντες, x. τ. X., recognizing the plot; ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί, true men,
or brave men, as ὃ 97, in simple contrast with the assumed distinctive name
of the aristocrats ; cf. § 86 and note. In § 94, Lysias claims for the former
the title ἄριστοι. --- ᾧχοντο ἀπιόντες, hastily departed; H. 985; Goodw.
1587. — σφίσιν αὐτοῖς : H. 775; G.1179. Notice the force of the prep. in
συν-είδησις, Lat. con-scientia, from which our ‘‘consciousness” and ‘‘con-
science,” each with new and deeper meaning. It may be questioned
whether those who remained and kept silent, or those who quit the assem-
bly, adopted the better policy as patriotic citizens, —as ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί. ---
καὶ.. κακῶς ; i. 6. some of them ‘‘bad” men, and others ‘‘ ill-advised”;
the connectives καὶ... καί assign the attributes divisively ; so also ὃ 26. —
τὰ προσταχθέντα : cf. ἀπέφαινεν, ὃ 73, and παρηγγέλλετο, below ; it was
the vote of a deliberative assembly only in pretence. — κελεύοιεν ; H. 916,
934, 937; G. 1434; 1484; 1502, 1. “Ephors,”’—a word which gives
the new committee of managers a quasi-official recognition ; cf. ὃ 43. The
method of nomination is known to us only from this account. — oft...
ἑώρων, so well did they see. — ὥστε... ἤδεσαν, that they knew beforehand.

77. οὐκ ἐμοί, not on my testimony ; cf. note on ὃ 27. --- ἐν τῇ βουλῇ : to
be taken with ἀπολογ. The defence made by Theramenes just before his
’ seizure and execution is referred to. — φεύγουσιν : the tense has no special
meaning ; this is one of the participles which came to be used with a subst.
force of its own; here, the recent exiles. — ov8tv...Aax., the Lacedemo-
nians being nowise solicitous for it, — rois...petéxovow : his colleagues of

126 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

the Thirty. — ὅτι., τοιούτων τυγχάνοι, that he was meeting with such a
requital; the part. before is concessive: although he had been the chief
agent in, etc.; on the position of ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, cf. H. 667, a. Frohb. remarks
that this is the only instance in Lysias where a limiting phrase is thus sep-
arated from its part. by an interposed subst.

78. καὶ... καὶ... καὶ, καὶ.. καὶ, καὶ...καί : the polysyndeton (as the Greek
grammarians termed it), the multiplication of connectives, serves here to
give greater weight to the sentence ; the pair at the end may be rendered
both...and, — ὑπὲρ.. «πονηρίας, for his own villany ; ὑπέρ here = because
of, in the preceding clause, iz behalf of ; we may render by for in both, and
preserve the antithesis. — κατέλυσε: H. 837. — δικαίως δ᾽ ἄν : δίκην δόντος
is understood, H. 987 and b; G. 1299, 1, and 1308; render: and would
justly have suffered punishment. — δίς : first in the tyranny of the Four
Hundred, and the second time in that of the Thirty. — τῶν... καταφ., Tov...
ἔπιθ. : broadly but significantly characterizing his restless ambition. These
sonorous antitheses abound in the speeches and rhetorical productions of
Lysias’s time. ‘‘ Be content with the present,” orépye τὰ παρόντα, was an
oft-quoted maxim among the Greeks, in substance or in form; cf. in
Heb. xiii. 5: ἀρκούμενοι τοῖς παροῦσιν. — ὀνόματι : “Ὁ Liberty! what
crimes are committed in thy name!” said Mme. Roland. What this fairest
of phrases was that cloaked most dreadful deeds, we are left to infer.

79. ἐν ᾧ.. εἶναι, on which it needs not that there be pardon and pity. —
τονυτουΐ, Ais, pointing at him; H. 274; Goodw. 412, — μηδὲ.. ἐχθρῶν, and
not by fighting be victorious over your enemies in the field, and yet by your
verdict be subject to your personal foes. It is the object here to shut off
compassion, by reminding the auditors that the Thirty and their adherents
not only were now in arms against them (at Eleusis), but had also been their
bitterest personal enemies.

80. μηδὲ... πλείω χάριν... ἴστε, and do not be more grateful; “to be
grateful for anything” is usually expressed in Greek by ἔχειν χάριν τινός, or
εἰδέναι χάριν τινός ; ὧν = τούτων ἅ, the gen. depending on χάριν. --- ὀργί-
ἵεσθε : prob. imperat.; cf. § 60. — μηδὲ.. ἀφῆτε : the neg. belongs to both
cl.; cf. ὃ 47. In such cases the thought is often better set forth in Eng. by
making the first cl. subordinate: and do not, while you are devising
measures against, etc. For mode of ἀφῆτε, see H. 874, a; G. 1346. So
βοηθήσητε, below. — τυχῆς : after κακίον, ---- τούτους : as before observed,
Phidon, as well as Eratosthenes, is supposed to have been in Athens at this
time; others deeply implicated in the crimes of the conspiracy are also
doubtless meant.

81, 82. κατηγόρηται δή, “ie accusation is now complete ; δή, besides its
original temporal force (from ἤδη), marks the transition in a spirited way. —
ols...dvoloa, to whom he will appeal in defence ; espec. ref. to Theramenes,

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 137

Observe that the clause is parenthetic, not restrictive. — ἐξ ἴσου, on equal
terms ; comparing the present trial with the pretended judicial proceedings
under the Thirty. — καθέσταμεν, we stand, we are placed, i. e. in accordance
with the forms of law. — ἀκρίτους : pred. adj.; one of these trials that were
not trials is described in XIII. 36 seg.; those after the restoration were κατὰ
τὸν νόμον. --- οὐδὲ.. λαμβάνειν, rot even if you should wish to inflict punish-
ment illegally ; ἄν belongs with the foll. opt.; ὧν : by attr. for the cogn.
ace. &. — τί παθόντες : H. 969,b; G. 1563, 3; dy what suffering. — τὴν
ἀξίαν : the adj. emphasized by the art.; H. 668; G. 959, 2 and 953; “he
punishment deserved by their deeds ; for the periphrastic form of the verb,
see G. 733.

83. αὐτοὺς kal τοὺς παῖδας : see note on ὃ 36; πότερον : sign of alterna-
tive question, but not to be tr. — ὧν ; antec. in λάβοιμεν. --- ἀλλὰ γάρ :
instead of the expected 4, ov, after πότερον. As to its freq. use in intro-
ducing a question, see note on § 40. — τὰ φανερά : not merely a fine, but
confiscation of their entire property ; φανερὰ οὐσία is the term for lands,
buildings, furniture, slaves, etc., as opposed to cash assets ; the latter were
called οὐσία ἀφανής, or simply ἀργύριον ; see ΒΎΟΒΌ. --- καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι;
would it be well; i. 6, fair, satisfactory. — Hs: limits πολλά,

84. πῶς οὐκ: = Lat. nonne; πῶς is prefixed to the negative for the
sake of rhetorical emphasis, and not merely in its proper sense of how or
why, as, for instance, in § 49; in XXII. 17, on the other hand, it is used as
here. It is a distinct use of πῶς, and should be separately noted in our lexi-
cons. — kal ἡντινοῦν : an emphasized indef. demonstrative, as the form in
-owv always is ; H. 285 and 1002, a. — πᾶν... ἂν... τολμῆσαι, that one would
dare anything ; ὅστις.. ἥκει, who has come; τούτου, simply is ; ὅστις and
its antec., though indef., ref. with sufficient distinctness to Eratosthenes. —
ἑτέροις : the adherents of the oligarchic party ; many of these were still in
the city, and of these not a few sitting as jurors in the present case, as
appears from the speech. ,

85. ὧν ἀμφοτ.: neut. gen. after émmed.; lit. both which, i. 6. his con-
tempt of you and his reliance upon the other party ; render: in either case
it is worth your concern ; in the first case (καταπεφρόνηκεν ὑμῶν), the men-
tion of the fact is enough ; in the second (ἑτέροις πεπίστ.), he goes on to
show why the subject demands their indignant attention. — μὴ ἑτέρων
oupt., 2f (these) others had not co-operated. — οὐ τούτοις... βοηθ., xot in
order to succor these, that is, mot merely; οὐ often thus before ἀλλά ; cf.
§ 11. The pl. here, τούτοις, though Eratosthenes was the only one on trial,
shows that it was looked upon as a test case. Other indictments were
doubtless hanging over the heads of the prominent supporters of the Thirty.
— ἄδειαν is foll. by the limiting gen. and by ποιεῖν; H. 952; G. 15213
ample security for the past and the future.

138 NOTES ON ORATION XII.

86. καὶ τῶν ξυνερούντων : H. 733; ref. is made in this and the following
section to two classes of the οἵ... βοηθήσοντες, above mentioned ; first, the
influential friends who by presence or by speech were to appear in his
favor ; and second, those who were summoned as witnesses for the defence.
It was common in the Athenian courts for parties less skilled in public
speaking to speak but briefly themselves, and leave the pleading mainly to
be done by professional advocates (oi συνδικεῖν ἐπιστάμενοι, as they are
called in Xen., AMemorad. I. 2. 51). Notice that συνηγόρευες, ὃ 25; συν-
εἰπών, ὃ 34; and ξυνερούντων, here, were to the Greek ear one word in three
tenses. — καλοὶ κἀγαθοί : the favorite party-name of the aristocracy ; ‘‘ the
good and honorable men, the elegant men, the well-known, the temperate,
the honest and moderate men, etc., — to employ that complimentary phrase-
ology by which wealthy and anti-popular politicians have chosen to designate —
each other in ancient as well as in modern times.” Grote, VIII. 16. —
πλείονος ἀξίαν, as outweighing the villany of these. — ἐβουλόμην dv: cf.
§ 22; 7 would, though, that they were as zealous. — ἢ.. ἀπολογήσονται,
or whether as powerful ‘speakers they will plead for the defendant. Itis
difficult to reproduce the slur contained in Lysias’s time in the words δεινὸς
λέγειν, when used to warn a court against the persuasive power of an op-
ponent. The sophists and rhetoricians of the time were proverbially δεινοὶ
λέγειν, and apt to make the worse appear the better reason. See the opening
of Socrates’s defence, as given by Plato.

8). εὐήθεις, good-natured, in the sarcastic tone that pervades the whole
passage. — el... ἡγοῦνται : dep. on νομίζοντες. τοῦ ὑμετέρου πλήθους -
Scheibe has the accus., but I follow Frohb. in preferring the gen. of the
MSS.; the first διά is through ; the second, because of; the two clauses con-
nected by μέν and δέ are both co-ordinately dep. on ἡγοῦνται, but it will be
seen that the sense is better preserved in Eng. by making the latter sub-
ordinate with adthough ; the principle is the same as noticed in ὃ 47. —
ἐπ᾿ ἐκφορὰν ἐλθεῖν : Frohb. appropriately quotes from Afsch. IIT. 235:
‘The Thirty did not allow the relatives of the deceased even to come to
the funeral ceremonies and burial of the dead.”

88. σωθέντες, if they should be released ; H.969, ἃ; cf.900; G, 1413;
1563, 5; cf. 1408.—éxetvor δέ : there is plainly no antithesis here, as the sen-
tence is completed. Possibly the emotion of the speaker has diverted his
thought, and the sentence should read: but they whom these destroyed, hav-
ing ended life, are beyond the vengeance of their foes. Cf. τὸ...δέος, in § 66. —
δεινὸν εἰ: cf. § 36; αὐτοὶς : intens. with τοῖς ἀπολ., which is dat. of ad-
vantage. —6émdre, since, now that. The defendant’s funeral (to take place
on the execution of the anticipated sentence) was likely to be a large
one; this is sarcastic and harsh, but in keeping with the increasing bitter
ness of the speaker as he recalls the past.

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 139

89. καὶ μὲν δή, and of atruth; cf. § 30. The line of thought is a
continuation of the preceding : And in thus undertaking the defence (βοη-
θεῖν) of Eratosthenes they certainly have a heavier task than it would have
been to remonstrate with the Thirty and prove your innocence (ἀντειπεῖν).
“τι ῥᾷον : the MSS. have ῥάδιον, but the emendation here given is that
adopted by most edd. — καίτοι λέγουσιν, dicey say, though ; *"Epar.: dat. of
the agent after the perf. pass.; ἐλάχ. τῶν τρι,, Zeast of the Thirty; ἐλάχ. is
prob. adverbial. —rav...mwdetora, more than any other of the Greeks ; this
superl, with the gen. of distinction is a favorite usage in Greek ; H. 755, b.

90. δῆλοι ἔσεσθε ὡς dpy., you will show yourselves to be indignant ;
H. 981; Goodw. 1589; for ὡς, see H. 978; the above translation would
_ be correct, were ὡς omitted ; its use, however, marks what is manifest not
“* as an absolute fact, but zz the view, or judgment, of the persons referred to.
— ὀφθήσεσθε : syn. with δῆλοι ἔσεσθε. --- οὐχ ἕξετε : in allusion to the cur-
rent plea ; cf. §§ 27 and 29.

QI. τούτων ἀποψηφ., dy acguitting these ; the plur. pron., as in § 85. —
κρύβδην : not that each one’s ballot was cast so as to be publicly known, —
the Athenian law guaranteed the secrecy of the ballot. But it would be
known, in case of acquittal, that it was due to the votes of the city-party
among the judges, and they would be held responsible in the judgment of
the community. In the next oration, § 36 seg., it is described how the
judicial proceedings under the Thirty disregarded the provision above
named of the constitution. Another instance is that of the celebrated trial
of the six generals after the battle of Arginusze. 5

92. ἑκατέρους, cach party of you, explained by the foll. appos. phrases ;
for the double accus., see H. 724 ; Goodw. 1106; 1069. The tone adopted
toward the sympathizers with the oligarchy who sat among the judges, is
quite different from that toward such as were appearing among the witnesses
or advocates for the defence. — παραδείγματα, as warning examples. Note
the order of the words in the preceding partic. phrase, and cf. with two similar
phrases in § 77; this is the preferable order; see H. 667, a; Κύμη. 245,
Rem. 8. — σφ. ἤρχεσθε, were under so violent a rule; from ἄρχομαι. ---
Tovodrov...év @, such that in it, a rel. cl. of consequence; ἡττηθέντες...
νικήσαντες, wow that you have been defeated,...if you had been victorious ;
τὸ ἴσον : cf. ὃ 35.

93. οὗτοι: still ref. to the Thirty; οἴκους, estates, property; Xen. defines
it in his @ceonomicus, κτῆσις ἡ σύμπασα. --- μεγάλους : pred. adj., after
ἐκτήσαντο, rendered; so πιστούς, below. — συνωφελεῖσθαι, Zo share the
benefit ; it is pass. — πιστοὺς... ἐκτῶντο, were attempting to gain your
fidelity ; Ἡ. 832 ; Goodw, 1255. — ζοντο εἶναι, were expecting you to be;
the pres. inf., rather than the fut., after οἴομαι in this sense, is similar to the
constr, in § 19.

ἀπ ν το NOTES ON ORATION XII.

94. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν: ἀντί, in return for, gives ἀνθ᾽ ὧν and ἀνθ᾽ ὅτου the causal
meaning of wherefore. — καθ᾽ ὅσον : i. 6. so far as you have them in your
power. — τιμωρήσασθε: a freq. word in Lysias, both in act. and mid.; /o
avenge, to take vengeance ; if foll. by a word denoting the injury for which
vengeance is taken, this is put in the gen., alone or with ἀντί, ὑπέρ, or περί.
Usually, however, ὑπέρ is used with persons, = 7 behalf of, as here and
in § 35. --- νῦν : hyperbaton ; cf, XXIV. 21. — τοῖς πολεμίοις : now in
Eleusis. —wepl τῆς πόλεως : the state was still in peril. — τῶν ἐπικούρων :
the treason of the conspirators reached its climax when the Spartan Cal-
libius with his garrison of 700 men was stationed in the Acropolis.

95. εἰπεῖν : after πολλῶν, H. 952, a; ἃ. 1526; τοσαῦτα from the context
implies a negative, ¢his only, only so much, ref. to what has been said in
§§ 92-94. --- εἰρήνης οὔσης, 172 a time of peace ; τὰ ὅπλα is emphatically
repeated. — ἐξεκηρύχθητε : the number of fugitives and exiles is estimated
by Isocrates at 5000, by Diodorus at a much larger number, more than half
of the citizens ; so Frohb. — ὑμᾶς... ἐξητοῦντο, demanded your rendition.

96. The appeal to revenge and party animosity continues with increased
vehemence ; ὀργίσθητε, εξ your indignation be kindled ; note the tense. —
ot...dméxteway, k. τ. X.: this is not a restrictive, but an explanatory relative
clause ; its antec. αὐτῶν is simply the unemphatic pers. pron.; see Goodw.
1007. The better punctuation therefore, as preventing a misapprehension
of the true construction, is a colon after αὐτῶν, rather than a comma, as
most edd. have it. — φονέας αὑτῶν : by drinking the cup of hemlock-juice,
cf § 17. The mode of execution is not mentioned as in itself one of the
items of tyranny, for it was that which the law gave to capital offenders who
were of free birth; but that the victims were by arbitrary force made to take
their own lives. It heightened the outrage against the dead that the burial
rites, sanctioned by social custom and by religion, were denied them ;
adding arrogance and impiety to oppression. — τῆς.. τιμωρίας : after the
compar.; a similar phrase in § 88.

97. διέφυγον : the antec. of ὅσοι is in second pers. (see ἤλθετε, below) ;
H. 1063. — wavr. ἐκκηρυττόμενοι : the same verb in §§ 35 and 95. The
sufferings of the banished population must have been very great, especially
as the most of the cities of Greece refused to harbor them, being either in
alliance with Sparta or overawed by her ; it was in the winter time, more-
over, that the stress was felt, the three months following October, 404 B. 6.
— ἐν πατρίδι, in your native land, (then) hostile. — dOere...Tlap.: cf. εἰς
τὸν II. κατῆλθον, 11. 61; this section is similar to séveral passages in the
oration cited ; cf. II. 69, 72.

98. Kal...qpaprnre, and had failed in this; H. 748; G. 1099.— ἂν
δείσαντες &., would have become terrified, and would (now) be in exile ;
ders. is incep, aor., H. 841; Goolw. 1260; μὴ πάθητε : dep. on ἐφ, ---

AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 141

a: the antec. are ἱερά, βωμοί; καί = even ; τρόπους, conduct, proceedings.
— ὅσοι..-ἦσαν : a condit. relat. clause, equiv. to ef τινες ἦσαν ; H. 914;
G. 1430, 1440; Gr. Moods, 525 — ἐπὶ ξένης : cf. ἐν ξένῃ γῇ, above ; συμ-
βολαίων, debts ; the word denotes both the evidence of indebtedness (note
its etymological meaning) and the indebtedness itself. — ἂν.. ἐδούλευον :
by “ the old harsh law of debtor and creditor, once prevalent in Greece,
Italy, Asia, and a large portion of the world.” See further, Grote, III.
Ρ. 94 Seq.

99. ἀλλὰ γάρ: see VII. 9.— τὰ μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι, lit. those things
which would have been about to be ; as is evident from the context, the part.
is used as an imperf. (Gr. Moods, 140) and ἄν is omitted with it, as often
with ἔμελλεν ; Gr. Moods, 428 (a); Kiihn. 260, Rem. 3. — τῆς.. ἐλλέ-
λειπται, there has been no lack of seal on my part; the verb I take to be
impers. (H. 819, a) and foll. by the gen. of want, and οὐδέν as accus. of
specif. — ἃ... ἀπέδοντο : the selling of temple properties is not definitely
attested, but was by no means uncommon in revolutions, on one pretext or
another. — ἐμίαινον : because perjured and polluted by judicial murder. —
τῶν νεωρίων, the ship-yards, including the docks, ship-houses, and the
arsenal. Isocrates (Areopfag. 67) mentions that these had been erected by
the city at the cost of 1000 talents, and that the Thirty sold them for
demolition for three talents. — ἀποθανοῦσι, now that they are dead ; βοηθή-
ware: imperat. as pred. of a relat. clause, as in § 60 and § 80.

100. tpav...pépovras, are both listening to us, and will recognize you as
you cast your votes ; an opinion in harmony with the popular belief, but to
which a widely current scepticism at this period refused acceptance. This
is one of the very few passages in Lysias that give the slightest clew to his
religious beliefs. On θεός, cf. note on XIII. 63. — αὐτῶν... καταψηφ., τοῖν
be condemning them to death; its subj. is τοσούτους ὑμῶν, antec. of ὅσοι;
vividly and powerfully transferring those past issues of life and death to the
present ; the case is still pending; there is a new hearing before a new
tribunal. The force of the appeal rests on the truth indicated in the
significant words of Matt. xxiii. 25. — πεποιημένους ἔσεσθαι : a periphrastic
fut. perf.; Greek Moods, 80. — Aristotle, at the close of his treatise on
Rhetoric, commends a conclusion similar to this for its omission of con-
nectives.

NOTES ON ORATION ΧΗ].

In the MSS. ἐνδείξεως is added to the title; it is probably a mistake of the ancient
editors who confounded the two very similar legal processes ἔνδειξις and ἀπαγωγή.
See Introduction.

I. τιμωρεῖν : see XII. 94; τῷ πλήθει, τῷ dper.: on this phrase, which
occurs repeatedly in this oration, see note on XII. 42; ὄντες : merely an
attrib, part. — κηδεστής, in general ὦ relation by marriage, here a brother-
in-law.— ἐμοί, πλήθει : dat. of poss. after brdpx. Noticeable is the avowed
recognition in the judicial orations of a personal feud or hostility (ἔχθρα),
if based on actual injury received, as the rightful motive of prosecution ; cf.
XII. 2. — δι’ &, that on account of them ; ὅς, inst. of the regular correl. οἷος
(cf. § 36), following τοιοῦτος, as in § 13; XII. 92, e¢ ad. —7é: used asa
single connective chiefly in poetry, but also in Thucydides and Plato ; cf.
§ 82; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ: cf. Lat. dis volentidus, and later, in Christian writers,
Deo volente. The use of θεός in the sing. in this current phrase of the
Greeks is worthy of note.

2. ὧν δή, whose names indeed ; to be read in the document mentioned in
ὃ 38; δή is used after a relative in a great variety of finely shaded meanings ;
here it seems mainly intended to give greater prominence to the clause,
which is a so-called explanatory or parenthetic one. — dv8pas...a-ya8ovs :
see XII. 75; γενόμενος, dy becoming; part. of manner, H. 969, b; G. 1563, 3.
— ἰδίᾳ, individually, as dist. from κοινῇ. --- οὐ μικρά, not a little ; an ex.
of the emphasis gained by litotes ; cf. with μεγάλα, just before, and see οὐχ
ἥκιστα, above.

3. δίκαιον καὶ ὅσιον : distinguished as the Lat. jus and fas, law human
and law divine. — ποιοῦσι : condit., as shown by the foll. infin. with ἄν
(taking the place of a pot. optat., H. 964; G.1308);. ἄμ.... γίγνεσθαι, chat
we should fare better, lit. it would become better to us; παρά, from.

4. The division indicated extends to § 42, as follows:

πρῶτον μέν, including 88 5-17: the overthrow of the democracy ;
ἔπειτα, including §§ 18-38: the crime of Agoratus ;
καὶ δή, including §§ 39-42: the last injunctions of the deceased.

AGAINST AGORATUS. 143

— μαθόντες, on learning; it has the force of a condit., as ποιοῦσι in ὃ 3;
ἄν belongs with the opt. The more the details of history should be known,
the greater would be the pleasure and the plainer the duty of pronouncing
the prisoner guilty. — rovrovt: H. 274; Goodw. 412. This inseparable
demonstrative affix belongs to the familiar rather than to the elevated style ;
its frequent use by the speaker, as he points to Agoratus (cf. §§ 1, 33, 41,
56), accords with the contemptuous freedom with which he treats him
throughout, as one of slave origin and base associations. — ἐντεῦθεν, ὅθεν :
thence, whence ; we may render them together: were. A Greek would
say : Begin thence, i. e. from that point, where we should say: Begin shere,
i. e. at that point,

5, 6. γάρ, not for ; it gives no reason ; it refers to the previous mention
or promise; technically called γάρ epexegetic, and usually omitted in Eng. ;
in XII, it is found at the beginning of ὃ 6, but omitted in ὃ 4. The battle
of A2gospotami forms the starting-point of the narrative. —ov...torepov, not
long afterwards, added to ἐπειδή, making it more definite. —Kal ἅμα...
ἐγίγνοντο, and at the same time conferences were taking place; imperf.
joined with aguxv., an historical present; H. 828. — τῆς εἰρήνης : restrict.
art., the peace which terminated the war-—vedrepa πράγματα, a revolu-
tion , Lat. nove res. — εἰληφέναι, that they had found; its subj. the same
as of νομίς --- καταστήσασθαι : after καιρόν ; H. 952; G. 1521.

7. σφίσιν: after ἐμποδών, G.1174; cf. H. 765, under which adverbs
should be included. — προεστηκότας, /eaders ; a word syn. with δημαγωγοί,
but without its bad flavor; the orators, the so-called demagogues, not neces-
sarily like those next named holding any official position. — ἀμωσγέπως :
some edd. give the Attic form with the rough breathing; somehow or other ;
the word is literally somehow at least.— βούλοιντο: cf. κελεύοιεν in XII. 76.—
ἐπέθεντο, se¢ upon. Cleophon, ‘‘the most influential demagogue,” as Dio-
dorus says, during the closing period of the Peloponnesian War, has had
scant justice done him by many of the historians. Frohb. says: “ἃ thorn
in the eye of the oligarchic conspirators, he was, notwithstanding his reck-
lessness and terrorizing, at bottom an honest and disinterested patriot, though
not over-conscientious in the choice of his political methods.”

8. ἐγίγνετο, was in session. This assembly was held about the beginning
of the year B. Ὁ. 404, acc. to Xenophon ; thus some 4 or 5 months after the
battle of AEgospotami. — ἐφ᾽ ots, 0” what terms ; H. to11, and a; G. 1600;
the simple relative used in an indirect question, where we oftener have ὅστις ;
cf. § 4, ᾧ τρόπῳ. --- εἰ κατασκ.;: a subst. cl. in appos. with οἷς, εἰ to be ren-
dered that. —émi δέκα στάδια, as much as ten stadia; the phrase is used
substant. and is subj. of the verb ; H. 600, b.—-rére: correl. of ὅτε, above.
— οὐκ ἠνέσχεσθε, did not endure, foll. by supplem. part.; explain the form
of the verb; H. 361; Goodw. 544.— εἴη: for ἐστί of the direct form.

144 NOTES ON ORATION XIil.

The proceedings here narrated, beginning with this section, were glanced
at in Orat. XII. 68. See the story as told by Grote, VIII. p. 226 seg., and
in a more intelligible form by Curtius, III. p. 566 seg.

9. αὐτοκράτορα, with full power, plenipotentiary ; ὅτι is not followed
by its appropriate verb, but by ποιήσειν instead (an allowable anacoluthon).
— ὥστε... διελεῖν, so as neither to tear down any part of the walls. — ἄλλο
οὐ μηδέν, in any other respect ; διελεῖν and ἐλαττῶσαι refer to Theramenes
as their subj., acc. to Frohb., who compares this constr. with XII. 68; it
seems better to consider the subj. general, referring to the government or
citizens of Athens. — οἴοιτο : continuation of the indir. disc. after λέγει ὅτι,
above.

10. ἐκεῖνον, that one, him; more emphatic than αὐτόν. The rejection
of Theramenes, here mentioned, must have been within a year after the
battle of Arginusze and the unjust condemnation of the six generals ; the
disapprobation of the people may have been in consequence of the part he
had taken in that trial. The strategi were not among the officers chosen by
lot (for others see Dict. Ant. ‘* Archairesiai”); after election they were
liable to the trial of qualifications, before the Senate or a dicastery, and
might then be rejected. See Dict. Ant., “" Docimasia.”

11. εἰς Λακεδαίμονα : in this account Lysias briefly blends together the
‘two missions of Theramenes, — one to the camp of Lysander, and the other
to Sparta. It was in the former that he remained three months. — ἐλθών :
temporal ; καταλιπών : descriptive (G. 1563, 7); εἰδώς : concessive ; vopt-
tev: causal. We may render: went to Sparta and remained,...leaving
you besieged, though he was aware, Frohb. considers καταλιπών to be causal
after εἰδώς. The partt. in this and ὃ 9 deserve special attention. — τοὺς
πολλούς, the mass of the people, with ὄντας, in the same constr. as τὸ... πλῆθος
υὐνἐχόμενον. --- εἰ... ἀπόρως, if he should bring you into extremity, as he
actually did, —movavrwoitv, of any sort whatever; H. 285; see Lex.,
ὁποῖος.

12. δέ: connects with ἐκεῖνος μέν, above. — πρόφασιν : adv. accus., so
also τὸ δ᾽ ἀληθές. The same occurs in Thucyd., VI. 33; dévam., iz order
to rest; the phrase ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅπλα is general, and may refer to an evasion
of hoplite service, or of military duty in any branch, — ἐκείνῳ, for Aim ; for
the trial of his individual case a court was made up, — a jury packed ;
παρασκευάσαντες is significant of the illegality; καθίσαντες is the usual
term. This section closes the narrative concerning Cleophon, beginning at
§ 7 with πρῶτον μέν ; ὃ 13 goes on with δέ,

13. Strombichides, a commander whose name frequently occurs in the
history of the Peloponnesian War, of strong democratic sympathies, as the
customary phrase εὐνοοῦντες ὑμῖν indicates. — προσιόντες, visiting, having
an interview with, —v, as; after τοιαύτην, where we usually find οἵαν ;

AGAINST AGORATUS. ee 4 Κ

cf, note on § 1. --- ἔργῳ, by deed, i. 6. by actual experience. — ἀπτωλέσαμεν,
we lost.

14. γάρ: cf. ὃ 5; fv: subj. κατασκάψαι : i¢ was (in the treaty) 20
demolish the long walls entirely. With ἐπὶ δέκα, cf. § 8. --- ὅλα : evidently
emphatic, though not necessarily so from its pred. position. — τὲ, παρα-
δοῦναι,... καὶ τὸ.. περιελεῖν : both are co-ord. with κατασκάψαι. Observe
the diff. bet. περιελεῖν and διελεῖν, and cf. note on ὃ 9. In XII. 40, καθεῖ-
λον, demolished, occurs as a syn. of κατέσκαψαν.

15, 16. ὀνόματι : the full antithesis would require the article, as in
XX. 17, τῷ μὲν ὀνόματι. ---- τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ : observe the force of the pres. in
καταλ. --- οὐκ ἔφασαν, refused ; the foll. tense is not to be explained by the
rules for indir. disc.; cf. the infin. in XII. 19, after govro. It is not what
they said, but the act, the determination that is thought of ; οὔ φημι is often
thus used. — τείχη : by prolepsis placed before the clause where it logically
belongs; H. 873; we may render: mot because they were sorry that the
walls were to fall. The clause εἰ.. παραδοθ. is also in its nature a subst. cl.,
εἰ being whether. —atroits: H. 764, 2; Goodw. 1161. — τούτων:
H. 734; G. 1097, 2. Let the student remember that a so-called Literal
translation of a sentence-like this is not a translation into English. — τὸ dp.
πλῆθος : the syn., observe, of τὴν δημοκρατίαν, above. — οὐδ᾽... οὐκ ἐπιθυ-
μοῦντες, or (was it) because they did not desire, still explaining οὐκ ἔφασαν,
above. An eloquent vindication of the motives of the democratic leaders.
--- τῷ 8. τῶν ᾿Αθ.: observe the partit. force of the gen. in this position ;
H. 730, d.

17. ταῦτα anticipates the cl. ὅτι εἰσέ, which is in appos. with it. — εἰσί,
κωλύσουσι : H. 932,1; G. 1497.— τὴν περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης : the assembly held
after Theramenes’s return. Frohb. brackets these words as spurious, con-
sidering them inconsistent with § 15 ; but the inconsistency is only imagi-
nary. — πρὶν τὴν éxk....yev., defore the assembly concerning the peace was
held, A word here on an alleged inaccuracy of Lysias. Grote has placed
these proceedings, related in §§ 18-38, after the surrender of the city and
the entrance of Lysander (VIII. 235), referring especially to Xenophon,
fell. 11. 2, 22, in proof that Lysias has misdated the occurrences in order
to strengthen his plea. But the two accounts are not in conflict. Xenophon
condenses into less than a dozen lines the announcement of the conditions of
peace, their acceptance and ratification, the triumphant entrance of Lysan-
der into the city, and the beginning of the demolition of the walls in accord-
ance with the terms of the treaty. It is fair to interpret his statement in
the light of Lysias’s circumstantial narrative, instead of assuming that the
announcement of Theramenes and the final vote on the acceptance of the
peace both took place on one day in one session of the assembly. Had the
advocates for the prosecution presumed on the poor memories of the entire

146 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

body of judges concerning events so recent and well known, the documents
brought into court must of themselves have made such a distortion of facts
ineffectual. The narrative given by Plutarch in the life of Lysander also
implies that some days intervened between the assembly mentioned by
Xenophon and the entrance of Lysander. It is an assumption on the part
of Blass that they took place on the same day ; a statement that Xenophon
is by no means responsible for. — εἰς διαβολάς : καθιστάναι τινὰ εἰς δ. = fo
bring one into ill-repute; καθεστηκὼς ἐν ταῖς δ. = to be in ill-repute. —
τοιαύτην : followed by γάρ, as in ὃ 7.

18. ov ξυνειδ. ἐκείνοις, mot that he was privy to their plans, i.e. the
plans of the generals and the taxiarchs ; instead of a corresponding causal
part., afterwards we find ἐδόκει ; οὐδέν is adv. accus., in any respect; its
position makes it emphatic. — qwep\...mparrovtes, engaged in ; the phrase is
rare ; πιστόν, ¢rustworthy. — Sothov καὶ ἐκ δούλων : a frequent missile of
invective in the courts, and, unless accompanied by proof, often to be taken
with deductions. The ancient as well as the modern bar allowed consider-
able freedom in using the vocabulary of assault. Cf. § 64.—avrots: i. 6.
Theramenes and his confederates.

19. ἄκοντα, ἑκόντα : pred. adj. agree with αὐτόν ; they wished him, there-
Sore, to seem to make his disclosures reluctantly, and not willingly. —8mras
πιστότερα ὑμῖν ὑποφαίνοιτο : thus the MSS. Frohb. suggests ὅπως πιστο-
τέρα ἡ μήνυσις φαίνοιτο. As it stands in the text, the subj. is τὰ μηνυ-
θέντα understood ; ὑποῴ. is difficult to explain; Rauch. ‘‘ might gradually
appear”; L. ἃ S. ‘‘ might just appear”; might appear somewhat more
credible to you, is perhaps nearly the meaning. Kayser emends the text so
as to read οὕτω φαίνοιτο. --- Kal ὑμᾶς, that you also, — τὸν tod’ EX. xan,
known as the son of Elaphostictus ; the name (ἔλαφος and orixros, Spotted
Deer) probably of some slave or freedman.

20. διέφθαρτο : it had become the tool of the oligarchic conspirators ;
one of their first steps was to get control of the Senate. — τεκμήριον :
H. 626 and a.—oi...moddol, the majority ; ἐπί, during the administra-
tion of. —- ἐβούλευον : render, were members of; βουλὴν βουλεύειν usually
means 20 give counsel. In the sense 20 be a Senator it is not often foll. by a
cogn. acc., as here; ὑστέραν, i. 6. of the succeeding year. — er εὐνοίᾳ τῇ
tper., out of good-will to you; H. 694; Goodw. 999.— τοῦ δήμου τοῦ ὑμ.:
evidently syn. with τοῦ ὑμ. πλήθους ; but Lysias only uses it, says Frohb.,
in one other place; cf. § 51. — ἐλέγετο, were adopted; strictly, were pro-
posed. — αὐτοῖς : ref. to τὰ ψηφίσματα. --- καὶ... προσέχητε, and that you
may regard them as such.

21, 22. ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ, sc. οὖσαν, when in secret session; ordinarily the
sessions were public. — τότε καθ., ‘hen in progress; observe the force of
the pres. — μὲν οὖν : marking the transition to a special point ; now their

AGAINST AGORATUS. 147

names, etc. One expects an adversative particle. —ré... «al: connect
dup. and εἶναι (in ind. disc. after ἔφη), which give the two assigned rea-
sons; the subj. of dup. refers to Theocritus; ἐκείνοις ; H. 773; G. 1175.—
ἐμηνύετο denotes past time, as shown by the foll. aor.; H. 895, N. a;
G. 1397; by what tense to be rendered? — ἀνώνυμον, without furnishing
names ; the reader will note that azonymous in Eng. has usually a more
restricted sense than the Greek word. — νυνὶ δέ: cf. XII. 23, note.

23. ἐπί, “ for, after, in quest of” (L.& S.); ἄγειν, to bring, the context
implying ἕο αγγεσέ. --- παραγενόμενος : H. 616; Goodw. 924 (b); cf. γνούς,
§ 17. Who the Nicias and Nicomenes mentioned were, is not known.
They and their companions were of the popular party, while Agoratus (so
the foll. argument seeks to prove) was acting ἐκ παρασκευῆς with the oligarchy.
- οἷα βέλτ.: strengthened superl.; H. 651. Observe the litotes ; the con-
dition of things in the city was anything but satisfactory to the popular
party. — οὐκ.. -προήσεσϑαι, declared that they would not allow ; the subj.
of ἄγειν is understood ; μέν contrasts not ἄγειν, but the whole clause, with
what follows.

24, 25. τῶν éy....KwAvévtev: pres. of continued action; they took
down the names in the midst of the proceedings; ἀπιόντες ox.: H. 985;
Goodw. 1587-— Movv : H. 220; Goodw. 296; cf. ᾿Αθήνηθεν, below. This
altar was in the temple of Artemis, a famous asylum in those times. —
παρορμίσαντες : παρά = alongside, i. e. of the shore; παντὶ τρόπῳ, dy all
means ; dat. of manner, equiv. to a modal adv. limiting the infin.; αὐτοῦ:
δέομαι, fo entreat, is generally foll. by the gen., as in its original sense. —
ἕως.. κάταστ.: dep. probably on an implied verb ; they promised to remain
with him until the affairs of the city were restored to a better condition;
αὐτοί: agrees with the subj. of συνεκπλευσ., i.e. the sureties; H. 940, b;
‘Goodw. 927.— εἰ κομισθείη ; ind disc. after a past tense for ἐὰν κομισθῇ5.
A similar constr. in XII. 14, last sentence; H. 932, 2; G.1497; ὑποβάλω-
σιν : the form of the hypoth. relat. cl. is unchanged from dir. disc.; see
Gr. Moods, 690.

26. ταῦτα : cogn. acc. The foll. partt. are plainly concessive. — αὐτῶν:
intens.; to accompany him ¢hemselves. —tt wor...wapeox., there had been
something concerted by you; see ἐκ παρασκευῆς, ὃ 22. — πῶς.. -ᾧχου, would
you not have gone ?

27, 28. ἀλλὰ μέν δή strongly emphasize the negative: may more, you
and they were not in like condition ; γέ belongs with ὅμοια somewhat as γέ
with ἀξίους, XII. 20. On the exemption of Atl enian citizens from tor-
ture, see Dict. Ant., “ Basanos.” — oder. αὐτῶν : H. 691; Goodw. toor;
ταῦτα p. λυσιτ., that this was better, more advantageous. — τῶν.. ἀγαθούς,
many good citizens; ὑπό after ἀπολέσθαι, owing to the implied passive force

of the verb. —BacaveOivar: dep. on κίνδυνος, subj. of ἦν ; μᾶλλον...

ἘΣ

148 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

συνέφερεν, 11] was more advantageous ; observe the omiss. of ἄν; H. 895,
Note ; Goodw. 1402. --- ἄκων: agr. with σύ, the implied subj. of the inf. which
is to be supplied from the foll. ἀπέκτεινας, ‘hat (you did it) unwillingly. —

een after xarayapr. A marked instance of hyperbaton for the sake of

asis ; emphasis is, s/evidently laid on the second pers. pron. throughout
this passage.

29, 30. οἱ ἐκ τῆς B., the committee from the Senate; doubtless mentioned
in the decree just read ; perhaps composed of the same persons as before,
and sent back to Munychia with the necessary instructions ; Movvux(ate :
see reff. on Μουνυχίασιν in § 24, and H. 219,a.— ἀπογράφει, deposes to; in
this oration generally fo inform against, denounce ; the clerk recording the
names given in. — ἡ... ἀρχή: pred. after éyévero. All the subsequent
calamities followed, so the orator views it, because of the murder of the
patriotic leaders, and this murder is laid to Agoratus; see ὃ 33. — ἐπ᾿
αὐτοφώρῳ : see Introd.; used here loosely, dy incontestable facts. For an
example of the ἐρώτησις, see XII. 25.

31. οὕτω.. ἔρρωτο, so strongly determined was the Senate; καὶ... ἐδόκει,
besides, he himself did not seem ; two reasons are parenthetically given by
the speaker ; their own persistency and the demeanor of Agoratus himself
both led them to seek for further disclosures; as to its being “he truth,
that is the speaker’s irony. There was evidently more that he might be
induced to tell. — rovrovs...émravras, αὐ these therefore ; i. e. those referred
to in ὃ 30; the antithesis indicated by μέν is not given. The point
made by the speaker is that up to a certain limit no reluctance had
been shown by Agoratus in making his disclosures. Frohb..and Rauch.
omit the words in brackets. In both these sections the MS. readings are
unsatisfactory.

32. θεάτρῳ: the Dionysiacum, the theatre situated on the western slope
of the hill of Munychia; an unusual and irregular place of meeting. — καὶ ἐν
τῷ δήμῳ, also in the popular assembly ; as well as in the Senate, — in order
to give more nearly the semblance of legality to their proceeding, especially
in the case of these officers who were elected by popular vote. — ἀπέχρη:
not impersonal, as usually employed ; its subj. is 7...yey. — ἔξαρνον... γενέ-
σϑαι, fo deny; see XII. 31. Some gesture or word of reluctance on the
part of Agoratus may explain the ἀλλά.

33, 34. The decrees read at this point in the trial, — decrees passed by
this assembly in Munychia, — were of course concerning the arrest and
examination of the persons denounced. — καὶ τὰ... δήμῳ : sc. ἀπογραφέντα.
- σχεδόν τι.. ἐπίστ., pretty well understand ; σχεδόν is freq. used with otda
and like verbs; cf. Demosth., OZ IIL. 9: σχηδὸν ἴσμεν ἅπαντες δήπου. ---
οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, not even by one ; the two separate words more emphatic than
οὐδενός, The cl. ὡς... ἐγένετο... προσήκει is obj. of ἀποδείξειν.

AGAINST AGORATUS. 149

35. τότε: then and not till then could the disgrace of the surrender and

the oligarchic revolution be consummated ; λιμένας : a good map of Athens
will show how the Pirzeus peninsula was indented with harbors. — tf...éyé-
vero: this abrupt, indignant question closes the sentence with great force. —
κατεστάθησαν: cf. XIL. 5: εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστησαν, this latter form being
more commonly employed. — κρίσιν... ἐποίουν, they instituted a trial;
δέ, but, or, while on the contrary. — ἐν τῷ....δισχιλίοις ; Frohb. supposes
these words to be cited from the decree ; ἐν δισχ., before two thousand ; ἐν
freq. = Lat. coram ; see Lex.; κρίσιν ποιεῖν completes the construction ;
ἐψηφίσατο, had decreed; H. 837; Greek Moods, 58. As Frohb. re-
marks, the number of judges named in the decree of the assembly shows the
great importance attached to this trial ; only two cases are known in which
this number was exceeded. — ἀνάγνωθι : to the clerk of the court, 6 ypayu-
ματεύς.
., 26. éexply., ἐσώζ., instead of the aor., though ref. to past time, perhaps
because of the number of persons referred to; making it, as it were, a case
of repeated action. Cf. Plato, Gorg. 516, E., as quoted in Gr. Moods,
410. — ἅπαντες γάρ, k.t.d., for all of you were at length convinced in what
evil plight the city was ; κακοῦ: gen. after adv., H. 757; G. 1148; ἐν ᾧ,
when. — νῦν δέ, but as it was ; ref. to the supposition above. The same use
of νῦν as in XII. 23.

37. βάθρων: scats by the bema, either in front or on each side. It is
worth while to picture this proceeding clearly to one’s self, and to under-
stand in what respects it differs from a lawful trial. On the usual method
of voting in the Athenian courts, see a good account given in Dict. Ant.,
“* Psephos.” — τραπέζας : the ballots were deposited on the tables, rather
than as usual in urns (καδίσκοι), in order to make the vote as public as
possible. Each Senator, it will be observed, deposited only one ballot, —
if he voted to acquit, on the table farther forward, and nearer to the seats
of the Thirty. The usual method of having two ballots cast by each dicast,-
as well as the use of urns, contributed to insure the privacy of the vote ; the
dicasts having one ballot of each kind, — for acquittal and condemnation,
the former white, and the latter black, say, —could prevent any one’s
knowing which had been placed in the judgment urn ; and the more easily,
because the second urn enabled them to dispose of the unused ballot in an
equally unobserved manner.

38, 39. οὐδενὸς... πλὴν ᾿Αγοράτου : for this fact we have only the state-
ment of the speaker ; if there were other instances of acquittal, they were
doubtless sufficiently rare. On the escape of Menestratus, see ὃ 55. — ἀφεῖ-
σαν: (ἀφίημυ. --- ὡς πολλοί : also in ὃ 44. It fixes attention upon the
number, and thus is not precisely the same as ὅσοι, which is often rendered
how many, without emphasizing upon the number. — The prison-scene here

150 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

described must have been of frequent occurrence during these times;
μεταπέμπ....ὃ μὲν ἀδελφήν, one sends for a sister to come to the prison. —
ὃ δ᾽ ἥ τις... προσήκουσα, and others for whatever female relative each of
them had. A similar clause in XII. 18, ---τὰ ὕστατα: H. 725 ; G. 1054,
N. 2; τούς before αὑτῶν disregards the gender of the nouns to which it
refers, the thought being of the kindred in general.

40. καὶ δὴ καί, likewise Dionysodorus also; καὶ δή = and truly, and
especially, even so; cf. ὃ 4; μέλαν τε: τέ here would seem to require καί
with another part. (perhaps ἀποκειραμένη, shorn in token of grief) after it.
Black was the mourning color among the Greeks generally ; in Argos white
also was worn. — ἐπὶ τῷ ἀνδρὶ... κεχρημένῳ, on account of her husband’s
having experienced, etc.; the prep. belongs not to the noun alone, but to
the part. with its subject-noun. There is a similar example in Demosth.,
Phil, 1. 51; for a fuller discussion of such constructions, see an article by
the editor in the Zransactions of the American Philological Association for
1872.

41, 42. διέθετο, disposed of, bequeathed. Notice the full weighty form
τῆς ἀδελφῆς THs ἐμῆς, as above ; the full and careful use of the pronouns in
this passage brings the various persons concerned into more distinct view ;
τιμωρεῖν : see note on XII. 94. — ἐὰν γένηται, if a child should be born;
rendered by should because of the ind. disc. — φράζειν τῷ γενομένῳ, fo ex-
plain to the child; part. neut., according to Frohb., but it may be taken as
masc.; notice the use of this aor. part. having the force of a fut. perf. We
see how revenge was transmitted from generation to generation in ancient
times, and wrought into the very system of law.

The statement of facts, which properly ends with § 42, is continued to
§ 48, giving another glance at the calamities drawn upon the state and the
citizens of Athens.

43, 44. ἀπογραφέντες : see note on ὃ 30; ὑπό may be taken with both
verbs. — ἀπ. αὐτούς, by having caused their death, — ἀνιῶμαι... ὑπομ.γ now’
Zam sorry to be recalling. ‘This is the resumplive use of οὖν ; see L. ἃ S.,
IL.; on the use of the part. here instead of the infin., see H. 986; more
fully, Κύμη. 311. — ὡς σφόδρα... προσήκει, how exceedingly you ought to
pity ; some of the earlier editors, Docti viri ! used to emend by inserting οὐ,
being unable or unwilling to see the irony. —tév πολιτῶν : partit. gen.
after τοὺς... κομισθέντας, H. 966, a; an exceptional arrangement (H. 730, d),
and in Lysias, according to Frohb., only found once. On the arrest and
wholesale execution of citizens resident in Eleusis and Salamis, cf. XII. 52.
The execution of Leon of Salamis attracted special attention ; see Grote,
VIII. p. 244. These two cities were at this time Attic demes, and not
cities in the full Greek sense. — ἰδίας ἔχθρας : a time of settling up long
standing feuds and grudges.

AGAINST AGORATUS. I51r

45, 46. αἰσχίστῳ... ἀπόλλυσθαι, 20 perish by a most disgraceful and in-
glorious death. —atrév: H. 691; G. 1001; αὐτῶν, just below, has the
same const. — καταλείποντες : the progress. pres. accords with the imperf.
ἠναγκάζοντο, ref. to the repeated instances ; οἱ μέν is correlative with of δὲ
...08 δέ, below. — τελευτήσειαν : opt. of ind. disc., instead of the subj. with
ἄν; H. 932, 2, a; G. 1502, and 3.— ταφήσεσθαι (θάπτω) ; the classical stu-
dent needs hardly to be reminded of the weight and solemnity attached to
the obligation of children and surviving friends to bury the dead with due
ceremony and honors. — θεραπείας : gen. after a verb of need. — ots: a
question is begun with a rel. much oftener in Greek than would be allow-
able in Engl.; for ποίαν τινά, what sort of a, see H. 702. — τῶν ἡδίστων,
of the dearest possessions ; probably neut. — ds κατεσκάφη : to be connected
with tore and μέμνησθε, in ὃ 44; so that ὃ 45 and ὃ 46, down to ἔτι, are
parenthetical ; νεώρια: cf. XII. 99. --- ἡ ϑύναμις.... παρελύθη, the whole
power of the city was broken, strictly, relaxed, or, to use the Greek word,
paralyzed.

47, 48. τὸ τελευταῖον, finally ; adv. accus.; ἀπωλέσατε : cf. ἀπωλέσα-
μεν, ὃ 13. — ovAANPSyy...€nAGOnTE, you were driven forth in a body; the
number of those forced into exile, Isocrates says, was about 5,000; accord-
ing to Diodorus, more than half of the citizens, which would be more than
10,000 ; this must be intended to include the large class who took up their
residence in the Pirzeus, or else it is an exaggerated estimate. — οὐκ ἔφασαν
ἐπιτρέψαι : see § 15, and note. — οὗς... βουλομένους, k. τ. X., and these, who
wished to secure some advantage to the state. —atrws εἶ, art the cause of,
art responsible for ; as in § 43. — καὶ τῶν ἰδίων...καί, zot only cach one his
ows misfortunes, but also; note the mid. τιμωρεῖσθε, and cf. XITZ 94.

49, 50. ὅ τί wore, ix what possible way. — ὅπερ, precisely which ; the
clause more freely, which is just what he would never be able to prove ;
with Frohb., I retain the second ἀποδεῖξαι. ---- τοῦ δήμου, of the people, i. e.
τῆς ἐκκλησίας, as in ὃ 32; αὐτοῦ follows the compound xaray.; as to its
position, cf. σοῦ, § 28. — ἣν ἐκρίθη, which was pronounced upon him, lit.
as to which he was sentenced; H. 725, 6; Goodw. 1076; 1239. — καὶ
ἀφείθη, and was acquitted; appended to the rel. cl., not a part of it. —
φησίν, saith it; the conversational repetition of λέγει ; εἰσαγγέλλω is syn.
with μηνύω ; see §§ 19, 48, etc.; cf. ἀπογράφω.

The omitted documents are called: DECREES, SENTENCE, INDICT-
MENTS. The γνῶσις is mentioned above as 7 κρίσις, the sentence or verdict.
Properly it denotes the judicial investigation itself ; here, its result or record.
Frohb. omits the third title, γραφαί, as their reading is not called for by the
orator.

51, 52. ὡς Sux... ταῦτα, that he brought these charges justly, i. e. that
they were well founded ; ὁρῶν, decause he saw. — τῷ δήμῳ : see § 20, and

152 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

note. — τὶ κακόν : first obj..of εἰργ.; δεδιότες, x. τ. A. (δείδω), for fear that
the democracy would be overthrown ; on ἄν, see Greek Moods, 368; the
part. is causal, as ὁρῶν, above; ἂν.. ἀπέκτειναν : qualified by οὐ at the be-
ginning of the sentence. — πολὺ τοὐναντίον τούτου, (that they would have
done) guzte the opposite of this. — οὐκ οἶμαι : this sentence is noticeable for
its negatives ; οὐκ οἶμαι οὐδέ form one negative expression, acc. to H. 1030;
G. 1619; οὐ before τούτου is a usual repetition of the negative on account
of the interposed clauses ; οὐ before δεῖν belongs to the last phrase alone. —
οὐδ᾽ ἐάν τις... ὡς μάλιστα, even if one ever so undesignedly ; for the latter
phrase, see note XXII. 1. — ὦν; gen. after ὑπερβολήν ; in this instance, the
limiting gen, seems to denote distinction ; render, which cannot be exceeded.
The more distinctly these scenes of outrage and blood come into view, the
more we wonder at the restraint rather than at the exaggeration of the con-
temporary orators ; οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι, shat you ought not to punish
him. ---- ἐκείνων, this; ref. to what follows; H. 696,b. As to the fact
mentioned, cf. § 24.

53, 54. καίτοι, and yet; adversative to an implied: ‘‘ You did not do
this.” — εἰ.. ἐπίθον, 7f you had yielded; H. 895; G. 1307. --- viv δέ: cf.
note on § 36. — εἰ.. εἴποις depends upon διαπράξασθαι ; it may be regarded
as the indirect form for ἐὰν.. εἴπω, like εἰ... κομισθείης in ὃ 25; see note.
On @ov (fr. οἴομαι) with aor. inf., cf. XII. 19; μέγα te: easy vernacular for
some great reward. — οὔκουν τούτου ἕνεκα δεῖ σε, you ought not, therefore,
on that account. —6 ἹΚαριδεύς, of the Phrygian city Caris (not mentioned
in Dict. Geog.).— τῇ αὐτῇ αἰτίᾳ τούτῳ, on the same charge as he ; H.773
and a; 6. 1175 and 1178. — 6 μὲν... Ξενοφῶν : Zev. in apposition with
5 μεν. —otrw: in some edd, (the MSS. vary) there is no lacuna after
οὕτω, and it is interpreted as a colloquial so or merely so, i. 6. in the usual
manner. — τὰ ἥδιστα : here is the bitterness of tone that is constantly
reappearing in the orations subsequent to the war. The horrible scenes
of the tyranny were to the Thirty τὰ ἥδιστα.

55. εἰς Μενέστρατον, x. τ. X., chrows some of the blame concerning the
depositions upon Menestratus; πὶ : obj. of ἀναφέρειν, to charge blame or
responsibility upon. —8ypdtns τοῦ Mev., of the same deme as M.; the
pred. is ἣν, and there was, etc, — ἡ ἐκκλησία : referred to in § 32. — ἅμα
μὲν.. ἅμα δέ, αὐ he same time.. and; ἄπογ. ἀπολέσθαι, should be informed
against and put to death; cf. § 43.

56, 57. καὶ προσαπογράφει, and in addition (to those informed against
by Agoratus) denounces. — δόξαντα... εἰσαγγ.: causal ; decause he seemed,
etc.; possibly quoted from the decree or record, — λαβόντες ἐν δικαστηρίῳ,
having gotten him into court; cf. XII. 35; πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον, a long
time afterward, is particularly stated by way of answer to an objection about
to be mentioned in § 83. --- τῷ 8Syplw: the executioner is oftener called

AGAINST AGORATUS. 153

ὁ δημόσιος. Beating to death with a club was a frequent punishment for
murderers, kidnappers, and like criminals. — εἰ... ἀπέθανεν : H. 893;
G. 1390. — ἧπου ᾿Αγόρατός ye, surely Agoratus; an emphatic falling
circumflex on the name best reproduces γέ. --- ὅς ye, K. T. A., since at least
he, having informed against Men., is the cause. —tls αἰτιώτερος, who is
more responsible ; τοῦ θανάτου is understood ; a sudden change in the
sentence to the livelier interrogative form.

58, 59. καὶ τό ye ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον εἶναι, and at least as far as it depended
upon him ; én’ ἐκείνῳ is more common, but both the dat. and accus. are in
use; the infin. is uséd as a kind of adv. accus.; H.956; G. 1534 and 1535.—
οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς ov..xatréorys, or would you yourself have been brought ;
the protasis is to be supplied : “ If you had followed his advice.” —viv δέ,
but as it is, — οὐ καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖον ὄντα: for one to be καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖος,
both his father and mother had to be Athenians. The decree of the assem-
bly here read seems to have instituted a process depriving Agoratus of his
rights of fafizenship:

60, 61. οἱ πράττοντες, K. τ. A., those who hed the administration of
affairs at that time ; i. 6. those who were active in the revolution ; κατειπεῖν,
to disclose. — ἀγωνισάμενον τῆς ξενίας, being tried for usurping the rights
of citizenship; H. 745; Goodw. 1121. An alien found guilty of having
usurped Athenian citizenship was liable to confiscation of property, and to
be sold into slavery. Aristophanes was in danger of this, and also of being
tortured for disclosures concerning the so-called treasonable plots. See
Dict. Ant., “ ξενίας γραφή." — περὶ τοὺς δεδεμένους, with respect to, or

toward, those who had been imprisoned; his fellow-prisoners.” — καὶ ὑπὸ
σοῦ ἀπολλύμενος, even when suffering death from you; τοιουτοσί : note
the deictic force: ‘*‘ Look on this picture, and then on that!” — ov8év...

συνειδώς : cf. note, § 18. — πεισθεὶς δὲ.. μεθέξεις, yet being persuaded that
you would share ; τότε qualifies καθισταμένης, which, contrary to the usual
order in such cases, is placed after the noun.

62. οὐ πολλοί, few ; οὐ belongs closely with the adj., as if the two made
a compound word, and hence it is not changed to μή on account of the cl.
being conditional ; H. 1028. Frohb; endeavors to explain it on the principle
of ind. disc. — viv δὲ συλλήβδην, διέ now (I will speak, — or ἀκούσεσθε
understood) of them in general. —ot μὲν... παρεδίδοσαν: I have adopted
Rauchenstein’s punctuation, as representing the more probable construction ;
for some (of them), etc., delivered over...the city increased in power
(μείζω). ---- οἱ δ᾽ ἄρξαντες, while those who held other high offices. Then
follows, in § 63, a brief, broken utterance, suitable to the emotions sug-
gested, in honor of the living as well as the dead, — making grateful men-
tion of their preservation, and of their return for the deliverance of their
country.

154 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

63. οἱ δ᾽ αὐτῶν, and some of them; this nom. remains without a verb,
the constr. abruptly changing after reper. — οὗτος μὲν... ἡ δέ : boldly and
strikingly put; Ze slew them, fortune and the deity saved them. — τύχη,
δαίμων : a glimpse, though vague, of Lysias’s religious conceptions. Both
words occur again in XXIV. 22, with no sharp distinction between them.
But ὁ δαίμων is more distinctly personal, the god, the personal power con-
trolling any human destiny. The words in II. 78, ‘*the god to whom our
destiny is allotted,” point to the prevailing polytheistic view. According to
Frohb., θεός is nowhere found in Lysias, except in the stereotyped phrase
ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ. --- Φυλῆς : ‘‘On the straight foot-path from Athens to Thebes,
beneath vertical walls of rock which are visible from Athens, lay the fort of
Phyle, a small castle with a circumference of about 900 feet, completely
shutting off the narrow mountain-path, and from its elevation (2,000 feet
above the sea) offering an open view over the whole plain of Athens, and
over the Saronic Gulf as far as the coasts of Peloponnesus. The castle-hill
itself has a precipitous declivity, and is only on the east side accessible by
a small path; further down wooded gorges descend, which in the winter
render the locality still more difficult of access ; while at the base of the
mountain-range is spread out the broad district of Acharnze, whose peasants
were the most vigorous and liberty-loving among the inhabitants of Attica.”
Curtius, History of Greece, Vol. IV. p. 45. --- κατελθόντες... τιμῶνται, δεν
returned and are honored ; the latter part. is more closely connected with
the pred. than the others. The first three, indeed, may be considered as
causal and explanatory to κατελθ.

64. τούτους μέντοι, these men, J say; the particle has its positive, con-
firmative tone here, I think ; yet as an adversative it serves to mark a sharp
return to the topic in hand. —tls dv αὐτός͵ dut who was he ?— ϑοῦλος : see
§ 18; ἐγένετο, belonged to, was the property of; the circumstances of the
case show that the foll. are genitives of possession.

65. These sections (65, 66) are regarded by Scheibe, Rauch., and others
as spurious. πολλά : obj. of λέγειν ; arrange: τἄλλα κακὰ καὶ αἰσχρά, doa, —
τοῖς τούτου ἀδελφοῖς : this mention of the brothers of Agoratus does not
seem to come in suitably before § 67. It is one of the reasons for consider-
ing this passage to be an interpolation. — περὶ δὲ συκοφαντίας, but as to the
crime of sycophancy, announces the topic of the sentence in so general a
way that the art. is omitted. — beas...dméypadev, freely, either how many
private suits he brought as a malicious informer, or how many public
prosecutions he instituted, or how many denunciatory lists he handed in. —
συκοφαντίας αὐτοῦ κατέγνωτε, found him guilty of sycophancy. συκ. is
gen. of cause (H. 745; G. 1121), and αὐτοῦ after the comp. verb; this
verb usually has an accus. instead of the first gen.

66. ὥφλησεν (ὁφ λισκάνω) : ὧφ λεν is the usual form. — τοιοῦτος Sy...

AGAINST AGORATUS. 155

ἐπεχείρησε, though he was such (i. e. of slavish origin), he attempted ; ddev-
θέρας, /ree-born women, agrees with γυναῖκας.

67, 68. ὁ πρεσβύτερος : English usage in such cases is to say, the eldest,
but Lat. and Greek alike often use the compar. — rrapadpuxtwpevopevos...
ληφθείς, having been caught treacherously making signals to the enemy ;
the first part. is used predicatively after the second ; H.982; G. 1582. Cf.
ἐλήφθη μοιχός, ὃ 66. The meaning of παρά in this compound is aside,
amiss, hence the sense of falsely, treacherously. — ἀπετυμπανίσθη : cf. ὃ 56;
ἕτερος, second. — ἐκεῖθεν, i. e. from Corinth; παιδίσκην ἀστῆς, α female
slave of a woman who was a citizen of Corinth. An ἀνδραποδιστής, hid-
napper, whether of free persons or slaves, was punished with death. —
λωποδύτην, as a thief; here in its generic sense; but observe its original
meaning. — ἀποτυμπανίσαι, infin. of purpose after mapédore.

69-71. ἢ wov...yé: as in ὃ 57. — τοῦ.. ἐξημαρτ. is the obj. of καταψη-
φίσασθαι, but is repeated in αὐτοῦ ; it may be rendered by a clause: surely,
since he has committed many offences, etc. — ὧν.. ἁμαρτήματος, of cach of
which offences ; the antec. of ὧν is πολλά. --- Φρύνιχον : Phrynichus, with
Antiphon, was a leader of the ultra faction among the Four Hundred,
411 B. C.; as was Critias in the second oligarchy, the Thirty. Concerning
his assassination, see Curtius, III. p. 480 seg., or Grote, VIII. p. 66.
The discordance between the accounts given by Thucydides and Lysias
(referred to by Grote in his note, p. 85), is not material. The statement of
the former evidently needs to be supplemented and corrected by that of
Lysias, whose several references to this event are consistent with each other,
and in part corroborated by other sources. The speaker’s rehearsal of some
of the details (not elsewhere given), is necessary in order to show that Ago-
ratus has not the slightest legitimate claim to citizenship, —a fact doubtless
sufficient, if proven, to turn the verdict against him. In § 75 he further
turns the argument into a dilemma. Suppose Agoratus did have a hand in
the assassination of Phrynichus ; the latter was an oligarch whose death the
present oligarchy, the Thirty, would have been only too ready to avenge
upon Agoratus when he came into their power, had he not earned their
favor by doing irreparable damage to the popular party. Among other
_ rewards for this assassination, Apollodorus received an estate in the out-
skirts of the city that had belonged to Pisander, and had been confiscated ;
mentioned in Orat. VII. 4. — βαδίζοντι, as he was walking. — καταβάλλει
πατάξας, γε) him with a blow; the part. is adverbial; H. 969, a ; G. 1563, 3.
The speaker has in mind to show that the manner of Phrynichus’s death
gave no room for the assistance of Agoratus. — ἅμα τούτῳ, thereupon. — οὔτε
παρεκλήθη, was neither called in to help.

72. οὐδαμοῦ yap ἐστιν, for nowhere is it; i. 6. is it written; ἐστίν in the
sense of ἔνεστιν, having εἶναι for its subj.; cf. ἦν, § 14. — ἔδει : ἄν omitted ;

156 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

H. 895, N; G. 1400; render: his having been made an Athenian ought
(to have been inscribed) om the very same pillar with Thrasybulus and
Afpollodorus. Besides an infin. (γεγράφθαι), there seems to have been lost
the mention of some other persons besides Agoratus, whom the speaker
believes to have obtained recognition and record on the part of the assembly
as public benefactors; ἵνα is adv. of place; note the force of πέρ. --- τῷ
ῥήτορι: it was the orators who took the active part in the proceedings of the
assembly, hence resolutions of this sort would be offered and urged by them;
but by giving money to the orator they get their own names inscribed, etc.
It is remarkable that within a few years, more than twenty-two centuries
after the trial, the speaker’s words have found partial corroboration in the
marble archives of the ancient city. Out of the ruins of the Acropolis were
dug up, in 1845, some fragments recording, it would seem, the decree pro-
posed by Diocles, conferring the gift of citizenship upon a certain Thrasy-
bulus of Calydon and others, — the very document, doubtless, which Lysias
causes to be read in evidence on this trial. The orator speaks of this record
as also containing the names of those who had rendered services and were,
therefore, acknowledged as benefactors (εὐεργέται), though not rewarded
with citizenship. It is found that these fragments include among the latter
the name of Agoratus (KAIATOPATO), with the final sigma missing.

73. οὕτω : emphatic position ; ow so much does he despise. —-ypacas...
ἐγράφετο, brought all manner of indictments ; a colloquial use of the phrase
ἐξ ἀνθ. Cf. Plato, Theat. 170: τὰ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων πράγματα παρέχουσί μοι,
they make me no end of trouble; ἐδίκαζε and ἐξεκλησ. refer to the two
prominent civic duties of an Athenian, as juror and assembly-man. —
ἐπιγραφ.... εἶναι, having himself entered as an Anargyrasian ; i. e. in the
making out of the said indictments. ‘ Anargyrus was a deme of the tribe
Erechtheis. — δι’ 8, dy reason of which. Following most edd., I have
omitted ἄν before ἀπέκτεινε. ---- γάρ (omit in translation) introduces this argu-
ment (τεκμήριον), extending through § 76. — ot πολλοί, the majority ; pos-
sibly exaggerated (see Thucydides, VIII. 98), yet the larger number may
have temporarily withdrawn to Decelea and elsewhere on the downfall of
their administration. It seems, too, that τῶν τετρακοσίων, here and below,
is loosely applied so as to include the Four Hundred and their active
adherents. Otherwise it would hardly be said that they afterwards com-
posed the whole body of the Thirty, besides the Senate convened under
them. It is to be said, however, that of the whole argument this portion,
§§ 73-76, will least bear inspection. The argument implies a wholesale
and violent expulsion of the oligarchs, such as did not by any means take
place. Nor was the death of Phrynichus in any such degree the cause of
the overthrow of their government, that it should have been a main point
with the party to avenge his death, when another revolution restored them

AGAINST AGORATUS. 157

to power in the city. The Thirty, especially, were less likely to be the
avengers of Phrynichus, since Critias, their leading spirit, had been his
active opponent. Intent on constructing an effective dilemma, the orator
misrepresents the situation, without making statements directly false. What
is said in § 76 is more to the point.

74. ἡ... βουλεύουσα, which was in session under the tnihialeheciin of
the Thirty. — ἀφεῖναι ἂν...τὸν.- ἀποκτείναντα, after getting possession of
the slayer of P., would have released him ; ἄν also belongs with the foll.
infin. — τῆς aves «ἔφυγον, the banishment which they had themselves bf:
fered ; as to the rel., see H. 994; G. 1031.

75,76. μὴ ἀποκτείνας, without having slain him; supply ἀποκτεῖναι
with mpoor.; ἀδικεῖ, ἐς gui/ty ; namely, of illegal assumption of the rights
of citizenship. — φής, assert, insist. — μείζω... κακὰ ποιήσας, by having done
greater evil. — τὴν... ἀπελύσω, you purged yourself to the Thirty of the
charge concerning Phrynichus ; lit. the charge (brought) ix behalf of Phryn-
ichus. —robrav μέμνησθε, remember this (H. 635), ref. to the infin. —
ἐὰν δ᾽ οὐ φάσκῃ, bet if he deny it; H. 1028; see note, ὃ 62.— δέ ὅ τι, on
what account; to be taken with ποιηθῆναι ; not, why he says. — τοὔνομα,
his name.

77. ἀπολογεῖσθαι, to allege in defence, is frequently followed by an obj.
cl., cf. ὃ 89; to have been with the men of Phyle became no slight glory
in the times succeeding the Restoration. The modern poet repeats their
fame : —

“ Spirit of freedom! When on Phyle’s brow
Thou satst with Thrasybulus and his train.”
Childe Harold, Canto 11. Stanza 74.

— ἀγώνισμα, strongest plea ; the telling stroke in his defence. — καίτοι...
ὅστις, and yet how could there be a greater wretch,— one who, etc.
Strictly, I suppose the antec. of ὅστις to be an indef. τινός after the compar.
A diff. explan. in Frohb.

78. ἐπειδὴ.. τάχιστα, as soon as, Lat. guum primum; seldom thus
separated. Frohb. places the comma before τάχιστα, and doubtless that
punctuation would express the construction as it was in the earlier stages of
the language, the adverb at first being intended simply to qualify the prin-
cipal verb. — ovAdaB....dvrixpus, they seize and straightway lead. — οὗπερ
kal, (to) che very spot where. — &...cvddaB.: H. 894, 2; G. 1387, I, (b), 2.—
"Avvutos: this is the Anytus who afterwards doomed himself to an inglorious
immortality by becoming prosecutor of Socrates. — οὐκ ἔφη χρῆναι, said that
they must not. The context will allow us to render χρῆναι by must; its
subj. is αὐτοὺς ποιεῖν. --- λέγων : foll. by the forms of ind. disc.; Svax. and
τιμωρήσοιντο take the place of the indic.; for εἰ...κατέλθοιεν the direct form
would be ἐὰν... κατέλθωμεν ; H. 932, 2; G. 1497.

158 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

79. στρατ... ἀνδρός : H. 625, a. — ἀλλ᾽ ἕτερον, but again, i. 6. another
point introd. by the foll. γάρ : no one will be found either to have messed
with him. —raflapxos: the ten taxiarchs commanded the ten τάξεις or
divisions of the Athenian infantry, corresponding to the ten tribes or phylee.
Each taxiarch held the muster-roll of his tribe. Agoratus was not enrolled
or assigned -to duty in any division ; εἰς τὴν ¢.: the same as els τὴν τάξιν,
§ 82. --- ὥσπερ ἀλιτηρίῳ, just as if he were accursed. —rov tag., i. e. of the
tribe of Erechtheis, in which Agoratus claimed citizenship.

80, 81. πομπήν : “On the 12th of Boédromion, 403 (Sept. 21st), the
associates of Thrasybulus celebrated the day of their return to Athens ; the
well-won day of honor on which they reaped the reward of their bravery
and patriotism. They halted before the great entrance-gate, the Dipyplum.
Here Thrasybulus came forward for the last time in his character of general ;
he held a muster, and availed himself of it to eject as impure from the ranks
such as were unanimously held unworthy to enter the city in the ranks of
the liberating army, — in particular Agoratus, who, as will be remembered,
had served as aider and abettor in the most shameful intrigues. Thereupon
the men disposed themselves as a festive procession, which was conducted
by a certain AZsinus.” Curtius (IV. p. 61), following Lysias. Thereafter
it was regularly observed by the Athenians as an annual festival, — the
Thanksgiving-day of Freedom (Χαριστήρια édevbepias). — οὕτω.,.καί ; see
note on XII. 19. --- λαβὼν τὰ ὅπλα, in hoplite armor. ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα,
halted, i. e. in order to close up the ranks, and enter the city in marching
order. — προσελθών : not co-ordinate with λαβών ; hence with no connec-
tive ; it is temporal before the following predicates, while λαβών is closely
joined with ἔρριψε, seized and flung down ; τᾷ is correl. with the foll. cai. —
am....¢¢ κόρακας, cursed him; bade him go and be hanged, \it. go to the
crows; this not infrequent imprecation being sufficiently explained when we
consider the dread felt by the Greeks of being left unburied.

82. Tovrw...déxero: freely, this was the relation in which he stood to the
citizens, etc. — ὑπολαμβ., fo retort (with the question), — τοῦ... μὴ ἀποθα-
νεῖν, of his not being put to death ; after αἴτιος ; as to τέ, see note on § 1, —
εἰ ΓΑνντος.. ἐγένετο, whether A. was not, etc.; in Eng., diff. from Greek,
we insert of in a question of doubt with whether, if we mean to imply the
probability of the affirmative. Socrates illustrates the uncertainty of human
expectations by saying, that he who marries a lovely woman, hoping to be
happy with her, does not know whether he shall not be tormented by her (el
διὰ ταύτην ἀνιάσεται). Xenophon, Memorad, I. 1. 8. — ὄντων : H. 972, a.
—Kal οὐκ εἴα, and did not refuse to permit; εἰς τάξιν.. κατέταξε: cf. ὃ 79.

83, 84. ταῦτα : i. 6. these pleas in his defence, especially his part in the
death of Phrynichus, and in the expedition from Phyle ; after the foll. μήτε,
dod. has as an object a pronoun referring to the clause ὅτι... τιμωρούμεθα.

AGAINST AGORATUS. 159

— προθεσμίαν : limit of time fixed by law within which an indictment for a
given offence must be brought ; render freely : that there is any statute of
limitations applying to such offences. —yxpéve, after a time ; τιμωρεῖται, is
brought to punishment, — τοῦτον : ref. to tis; H. 697. — ποιοῦντας, decause
they were doing ; agr. with the obj. of ἀπέκτεινε understood before δικαίως.
— πάλαι δέον τιμωρεῖσθαι, when we ought to have inflicted punishment long
ago; H. 973, a; G. 1569. — προσῆκον : sc. ζῆν; accus. abs. denoting
time. Agoratus has been the only gainer, — having lived longer than his
due, — the slain were as dead as ever. This is sarcastic enough, but hardly
touches the point of law, and would alone lead us to suspect that there was
something in the claim of the defendant.

85. διισχυρίζεσθαι, relies upon; perhaps, Jays stress upon; namely,
upon the fact ὅτε... ἐπιγ. --- ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, in flagranti delicto, subj. of érvy.;
ἀπαγωγῇ : applied to the writ as well as to the process. — πάντων. «εὐηθ.,
silliest of all, — ὡς ... ἔνοχος Sv, as if he would be subject to the process of
apagogé; the part. introd. by ὡς (H. 978; Goodw. 1574) is put in the
nom. by anacoluthon, as if duox. were in the indic. — ῥᾳστώνην τινά, some
relief, that is, by rendering the whole process illegal. — δὲ.. οἴεται, and (as
if) he thought ; δέ connects οἴεται (by anacoluthon) with ὦν. --- τοῦτο δὲ...
ὁμολογεῖν, but this is just like admitting. — armep...cdter Oar, just as if he
ought to be spared, provided that, though not indeed taken in the very act, he
nevertheless killed him, The speaker fallaciously shifts his ground from the
legal point in question to the actual guilt of the defendant.

86. A passage (§§ 86, 87) ‘‘corrupt and unintelligible,” as it stands in
the MSS. Scheibe, the editor of the present text, gives the original of ὃ 86
with little change, simply supplying οὐκ before οἴομενοι. I have placed the
comma before Διονύσιον. The general drift of the argument is clear. — ot
ἕνδεκα : this board had preliminary jurisdiction in cases of apagogé ; see
Dict. Ant., *‘ Apagogé.” — καὶ διισχ., κ- τ. A, and being very confident
that they acted rightly. — τὴν ἀπ. ἀπάγειν, to bring the accusation of ap-
agogé, technically said of the complainant ; in the law phrase, notice the cogn.
accus, — ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφ., ἢ ὅπου ἂν ἦ : these words are quoted from the writ, it
would seem ; grammatically the obj. of rpooy., which depends on dvayx.,
above. — ἐναντίον πεντ.: to be taken with ἀπογράψας. --- ἀποκτείνειε, chat
he had slain ; opt. of ind. disc., suggesting the reason in the minds of the
Eleven. But all explanations of the syntax of this section must be as con-
jectural as the text.

87. οἴεται : i.e. Agoratus ; the second person would correspond with the
latter clause. The condit. cl. is in appos. with τοῦτο : that this alone is IN
FLAGRANTI, if, etc, — ἐπεὶ.. λόγου, since by your argument at least; to
Agoratus. — οὔτ᾽ ἀπέσφαξεν, or cut their throats. Your denunciation was ᾿
the murderous blow, that compelled them to take the fatal cup of hemlock.

3)

160 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.

— οὔτος.. ἐστί, is not he (emphatic) in flagranti-? The phrase is here used
adjectively in the pred.; as if: Is not he a murderer taken in the very act?
Below the phrase is used adverbially. —% σὺ ἀπογράψας, than you by
having informed against them. —éw αὖτ....ὃ ἀποκτείνας, their murderer
IN FLAGRANTI. A persistent ignoring of the clear distinction between the :
manner of the criminal’s detection and the manner of the crime.

88. ὅρκων καὶ συνθηκῶν, oaths and compacts; the current phrase applied
to the articles of agreement and amnesty, with which a reconciliation of the
civil discord was concluded ; it is also applied to other treaties. — παρὰ...
ἀγωνίζεται, is being tried contrary to, in violation of. — οἵ ἐν τῷ IL, we of
the Pireus ; οἱ ἐν Π. (without the article) is the usual phrase. — σχεδόν :
with ὁμολογεῖ. --- ἐμποδὼν ... ποιεῖται, ‘interposes ; ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ ti: con-
temptuous indefiniteness. — καλῶς ἀγωνιεῖσθαι, that he will come out of the
trial successfully.

89, 90. περὶ τούτων ἀποδέχεσθαι, fo accept his defence on these points ;
the direct obj. omitted. — κελεύετε : imperat. — οὐδὲν προσήκειν ἡμῖν, 27: 20
wise pertains to us, are in no wise binding upon us. — εἶχον... αὐτῷ, would
have some reference to him. —%v: agreeing with the nearest subject ;
H. 616; Goodw. 9c1.—4#, after οὐδένα, τε: εἰ μή, except. This is, doubt-
Jess, too limited an interpretation of the amnesty. It must have been
meant to cover all prosecutions of this character. On one pretext and an-
other, however, in spite of its guaranties, the demand for vengeance was
sometimes complied with.

QI. ὅστις, kK. τ. r., any one who declares that he has been adopted by the
people; to be read thus, if with Reiske we fill the lacuna with πεποιῆσθαι,
perf. pass. of the mid. ποιεῖσθαι, to adopt as one’s child. — φαίνεται κακώ-
σας, ἐξ found to have maltreated ; κάκωσις γονέων, maltreatment of parents,
was an indictable offence ; it might be by blows or words, or by refusing
them the means of subsistence. — ἐξ dv...éylyvero, (those) dy whom it was
becoming, etc.; i. 6, the Athenian people, his foster-father. — ὅστις οὖν...
ἔτνπτε, one, therefore, who was wont to strike his own father ; his father by
nature (γόνῳ), as distinguished from his father by adoption (ὁ δῆμος), just
spoken of. This hint of brutal treatment by Agoratus of his slave father is
left unverified and unexplained. — ἃ.. ἀγαθά, goods which belonged to him.
— πῶς ov Kal διὰ τοῦτο, is he not on this account also; his depriving the
state of its best citizens is viewed as robbery of a parent.

92, 93. Cf. the opening of the oration. — ἀποθνήσκοντες : temporal.
To you as well as us, his relatives, were made the last requests of the
deceased. — ἔμβραχυ : used in indef. rel. clauses somewhat as ever; we may
render: as far as ever each one can, — πεποιηκότες : H. 981; G. 1580.
— ἐκεῖνοι, “hey, i. 6. the deceased. — 4, as; lit. which things. — ἀνεῖναι, éo
release ; occasionally used as a syn. for ἀφεῖναι. Cf. ἀπολύοντες in ὃ 94. —

AGAINST AGORATUS. 161

νυνὶ δή, ow, at dast; wow is repeated below. — οὐ.. διαπράττεσθε, you are
not only effecting this, i. e. his acquittal ; notice the livelier present for the
future, which would properly correspond to the protasis ; H. 828, a.

94, 95. ἀπολύοντες, in acguitting. — οὐδὲν., ἤ, you are simply deter-
mining, you are coming to no other conclusion than; γιγνώσκω is very
frequent in Attic prose in the sense to judge, to conclude. — ἂν.. «πάθοιεν,
would suffer; stated, as if the fate of the deceased still after all hung un-
certain in the scale. — ὁμόψηφοι... γενήσονται, shall cast the same vote. —
μηδαμῶς, x. τ. A.: a slowly spoken, impressive sentence, Notice the
accumulation of long vowels ; also the negatives. — prjre...pnSepla, either
by any art or contrivance, in any way or manner ; in earnest deprecation.
Cf. οὔτε τέχνῃ οὔτε μηχανῇ οὐδεμίᾳ, in the oath quoted by vee
XXIV. 150.

96, 97. ἐναντία.. ψηφ.: below it is τὰ ἐναντία. They are used fins inter-
changeably in XII. 42 and 43. — τοίνυν : marking another step in the
argument, well then, or now. — ὧν... .«ἀποψ.: i.e. to declare your belief in
their innocence by reversing, as far as possible, the verdict of the Thirty. —
οὐχ Op. γίγνεσθε : i. e. you free yourselves from complicity in their verdict.
- αὐτῶν : H. 691; G. τοοι.

NOTES ON ORATION VIL.

The title is: “A Defence before the Areopagus concerning the Sacred Olive-Tree.”
APEOII. : adj. masc.; sc. λόγος: ἈΠΟΛΟΓΊΑ : in appos. with λόγος understood,
ΣΗΚΟΥ͂ : σηκός originally signified a fen or enclosure; next, a sacred enclosure or
sanctuary, often, for instance, an olive-yard, or vineyard; finally it came to be ap-
plied, in a still more specific sense, to the old trunk or stump of a sacred olive.
This last signification, it will be observed, is distinctively Athenian, as is the use of
the word μορία. See L. & S., on ἐλαία (the true Attic form was é\da) and popla,

᾿Ελαιών, an olive-yard (cf, H. 463,c), is the Greek name for the Mt. of Olives, near
Jerusalem.

=

1. βουλή : the court of the Areopagus was addressed by the same title as
the Senate of Five Hundred. — ἄγοντι : H. 969, d; G. 1563, κ.---πράγματα :
often a difficult word to translate ; in XII. 3, it refers to Zitigation ; here,
more general, difficulties. — συκοφάνταις : H. 775 ; G. 1179; see also note
on XXII. 1.— εἴ πως : the clause to be completed from what follows, i. e.
τοὺς ... ἔσεσθαι. --- Seiv...€8., that even unborn children must now be
afraid ; humorously hitting off the Athenian φιλονεικία, that had become in
Lysias’s time so serious an evil ; on μή, see H. 1025, 1026; G. 1612.—
κοινοί: pred. adj. foll. by dat.; the perils are becoming common, i.e. like
perils befall the innocent and guilty.

2. ὥστε: following οὕτω, as here, it should properly introduce a cl. of
manner ; but the speaker omits that, and proceeds in this cl. to explain the
cause of his embarrassment. Render: and the trial is made embarrassing
to me in this respect, namely, that at first, etc. The sent. fully expressed
would read: the trial is made so embarrassing to me, that (I am required
to meet a changed indictment ; for) a¢ first, etc. — δὲ., νυνὶ... ἀφανίζειν,
now, on the contrary, they assert that it was an olive-stump I removed ;
the time denoted by ἀφαν. in both cl. is to be understood from the context ;
cf. Greek Moods, 96; προσήεσαν : i. 6. those who conducted the prosecu-
tion, — seeking from those who had formerly been contractors for the annual
product evidence that there had formerly been a fruit-bearing olive-tree on
this estate of the defendant; οὐδέν: cogn. acc, after ddux.; ἀπελέγξαι :
H. 952; G. 1528.

ΓΙ

CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 163

3. περὶ ov: after ἀκούσαντα ; the prep. governs the implied antec., and
the rel. is put in the gen. by attr. instead of the accus. after éri8. We may
render freely : chough I have just heard of what he has contrived against me
and brings into court, at the same time as you who are to judge concerning
the case; lit. of those things which having contrived against (me) he has
come, referring to the change of accusation after the appearance of the par-
ties in court. After ἀκούσαντα I have added a comma to the text. Baur
takes περὶ ὧν as ref. to πατρίδος and οὐσίας, Both text and rendering are
uncertain.

4. Πεισάνδρου : H. 732,8 ; G. 1094,1. This is the Pisander who was
prominent in the revolution of 411. See Grote, VIII. p. 13 seg.; on the
confiscation here mentioned, see p. 88, 2did. — ὄντων : τὰ ὄντα is sometimes
syn. with ἡ οὐσία; H. 966, a. Apollodorus was one of the two who
claimed to have slain Phrynichus, and this gift seems to have been part of
his reward. Cf, XIII. 71. —éwvotpyyv: the aor. ἐωνησάμην not being used
in Attic, the imperf. appears to be sometimes used with an aor. meaning
instead of ἐπριάμην. --- εἰρήνης : i.e. the peace after the Restoration by
yi tai in the spring of 403.

. ἡγοῦμαι... ἀποδ., 7 consider it therefore my task to shown: — τοῦ..
Py Jor the previous period ; gen. after ζημιοῦσθαι, acc. to the principle
stated in H. 745; G. 1121. It should be observed, however, that the
grammars give no similar instance of the gen. with this verb. The meaning
is: that he should not suffer the penalty for trespasses committed during the
period before he came into possession of the property. — δι᾿ ἡμᾶς : see note
XII. 58; oddtv...xww5., we ought by no means to be indicted as criminals
for the offences of others. The conclusion of an abridged syllogism, but
stated in such a form as to suggest the requisite major premise. The reason-
ing is: No one ought to be held guilty of crime committed by another ; if,
therefore, the offence charged was not committed by us (and it was not), we
ought not to be held guilty.

6-8. τὰ μὲν πόρρω, the remote districts ; τῶν φίλων, our friends. After
the occupation of Decelea, in 413, the Athenians themselves took care to
leave in the outlying fields and farms near the city as little as possible that
could afford plunder to the foraging parties of the Spartans. The use of the
word φίλων seems to refer to the foraging parties from the Pirzeus after the
civil war began, though that period does not properly belong to the προτέρου
χρόνου required by the argument. —&Adws τε καί, especially since ; ὅτι or
ἐπεί is to be supplied. — ἄπρακτον, uncultivated. — οὐ θαυμαστὸν δέ, and
no wonder. —tv ᾧ, when, as in XIII. 36; H. 813, a; αὐτῶν: H. 691;
Goodw. τοοι. --- ὅσοι : ref. to the ἐπιμέληται, see Introd. — πολλὰ... ὄντα,
that there were many; χωρία understood; as to the part., see H. 982;
G. 1588.—év...7& πολλά, che great fart of which ; it seems necessary to

-that of the lease of Proteas ; concerning which, no doubt, exact information

164 NOTES ON ORATION VII.

consider ὧν fem., though the constr. is unusual. — καὶ. κεκτημένων, even
when the same persons have been in possession, etc. See remark on τέθηκε.
§ 10. — τῇ εἰρήνῃ : cf. ὃ 4.

9, 10. ἀλλὰ γάρ : here used, as frequently, to break off the previous dis-
course, and introduce a new topic or division of the argument. The pre-
ceding context shows the thought to be: Bw I will proceed with the main
argument (cf. § 5), for. — γενέσθαι : H. 955,b; G. 1470. --- émh...dipyx.: i the
archonship of Pythodorus ; i. 6. the year 404-3 B.C. His magistracy was,
however, deemed illegal ; whence the name, the Year of Anarchy. — ἐνιαυ-
τόν: accus. of duration ; the obj. of elpy. is understood. — τέθνηκε, Aas deen ~
dead ; ordinarily it signifies, he ἐς dead (H. 849 ; Goodw. 1263); but the
Eng. expressions are rendered into Greek by the one form. On the freed-
men in Athens, see Becker’s Charicles, p. 372.

11. αὐτὸς γεωργῶ, 7 have been cultivating it myself; Goodw. 1258; see
also Greek Moods, 26, and H.-698. The time ref. to (ὁ χρόνος otros) is

was given in the testimony. — pyot...éxxendpOan, declares it to have been
cut up from the roots ; the mention of Suniades, as archon, fixes the date as
397-6 B. C., about seven years after the purchase of the property. — μεμι-
σϑθωμένοι : mid., see ἐμισθώσατο, above; the neg. with εἶναι is μή, an
exception to the rule for ind. disc. Cf.. H. 1624; G. 1611.— τὸν...
épyat.: subj. of the infin, — ἃ... ἣν, chose things which before were not ;
H. 1021; G. 1610,

12. ἐν.. χρόνῳ, hitherto ; τοίνυν, moreover; its metabatic force, marking
the transition to a new topic. The argument from circumstantial evidenc®
begins at this point. — ἠγανάκτουν ἂν, ὅσοι.. φάσκοιεν, 7 was wont ἐο be
indignant at any who said; H.835,914,B.2; 1296 and 1431. — δεινόν,
shrewd, sharp ; characterizing a man who has too keen an eye to his own
interest. With an apparent good-humored simplicity, he hints at what his
neighbors think of him, and proceeds to turn it to account in the argument,
— ὥς μοι προσῆκε, as was suitable to me; i.e. I preferred that what was
said of me should be in accordance with my real character. — σκοπεῖν, that
1 kept in view ; ἔπεχ.: H. 893 ; G. 1300. --- τῷ ποιήσαντι, fo the perpetra-
tor, lit. to him who did it; simply repeating the meaning of ἀφαν., as we
use the verb do in Eng.; éyévero: a gnomic aor. Scheibe, Frohb., and
Rauch. have ἐγίνετο, but there seems to be no valid objection to the reading
of the MSS, —xal...Svempag., and so what I should gain, if I escaped detec-
tion ; another ex. of καί = and so, used to introduce a statement repeated
in another form, may be found in Demosth., O/ynth., 11. 24.

13, 14. ἐκ τούτων, from this point of view, in accordance with this, i. 6.
the fact mentioned before ; it is further explained by ἀποῴ., dy showing. In
§ 14 he shows that he could have been actuated by no one of the supposed

CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 165

motives. — διαφθείρεται. ὄντος, was receiving injury by the olive-stump
being there; σηκοῦ: gen. 805. ; κινδύνων: H.753,d; Goodw. 1140. -- ἂν
«Ὑενομένας, would have resulted ; ἄν belongs also with the opt.; the con-
dit. cl. dep. on γενομένας ; the part. takes the place of the hypoth. indic. ;
H. 987, "Ὁ; G. 1308. In place of the incomplete sentence in Scheibe, I have
adopted Frohb.’s emendation.

15, Ss...pe0” ἡμέραν, who in the daytime; a rel. cl. with causal force ;
as if saying, especially should I have exposed myself to punishment; for, if
the accusation is to be believed, I proceeded in the daytime to dig up, etc.
— ὥσπερ.. δέον, as if it were not needful for me to avoid the notice of all,
rather than that all the Athenians should know it; H. 973,a; G. 1569;
εἰδέναι : sc. δέον. --- ἂν...ἠμέλησε, would have been indifferent to; speaking,
as if he assumed the truth of the statement made in the indictment ; so also
with νῦν δὲ... ἐκινδύνευον, dut as it is 7 was making myself liable. It ex-
posed the offender, if convicted, to banishment and the confiscation of his
entire property.

16. πῶς... ἣν, but should I not be; see note on XII. 84. — εἰ.. ἐξημάρ-
tavov, if they committed even the greatest offences ; note the imperf.: now,
or at any time; on εἰ καί, cf. H. τοξ3,11. --- καὶ... γενέσθαι, and to become
Sree by informing (against me); αὐτοῖς and ἔλευθ. both agree in form with
ἐκείνοις, but in sense with the subj. of the inf., the latter as pred. adj.

17. ἔτι τοίνυν, furthermore; εἰ.. παρέστη μοι, if 1) had been in my
mind. — συνειδότων : also gen. abs.; and αἰ being aware, i. e. of the
existence of this olive-tree. — προθεσμίας : see Dict. Ant., ““ Prothesmia.” Ὁ
An action brought for injury to the sacred olives is known to have been one
of those to which there was no statute of limitation ; τοῖς elpy. is dat. after
προσῆκον, an accus, abs. — ἵνα.. εἶχον : H. 884; G. 1371. The thought
in this sentence is closely condensed ; we might render freely: How should
I have dared...... considering on the one hand that the gain was but slight ;
and on the other, that, on account of there being no statutory limitation to
the liability for such offences, it was for the interest of all alike who had culti-
vated the ground that the olive-stock be preserved, in order that they might
be able...... to shift the charge upon him to whom they had delivered the
estate.

18, 19. τοίνυν, moreover; marking an advance in the argument. Here,
as in § 37, the context might seem to require an adversative sense, however;
but it is doubtful whether it is ever used in this sense, at least by the Attic
orators ; Kal...mapeok., 7 had provided against this ; if I had arranged mat-
ters with the previous lessees, so that they would not testify against me. ---
ἀλλήλων : H. 733; Kiihn. 273, Rem. 20. — ἀλλὰ... εἰδέναι, but also what
we conceal, and think no one to be aware of; ἐκείνων is gram. antec. of ὧν.
The MSS. have ἀποκρυπτόμεθα μηδένα εἶναι, for which Scheibe and. Rauch.

166 NOTES ON ORATION VII.

have adopted the reading in the text. Perhaps it were as well to allow the
original text to remain, though I know of no parallel use of ἀποκρύπτομαι.---
τοίνυν... οἱ μέν, zow some of these, i.e. neighbors; φίλοι and διάφ. are pred.
adj. — ἐχρῆν τοῦτον παρασχέσθαι, καὶ μὴ... ποιεῖσθαι, Ae ought to have
produced, and not merely to be making ; with the latter inf. ἐχρῆν is used
acc. to H. 834. — ὅς φησιν, for he says; cf. ὃ 15. — @xero ἀπάγων, drove
off with ; βοηλάτης : oxen were used in Greece for drawing loads, as well
as for ploughing.

20, 21. μάρτυρας, as witnesses; χρῆν : augm. omitted. — αὐτὸς δὲ
Teripwp.,, and you would have avenged YOURSELF, etc.; αὐτός is to em-
phasize the implied reflexive ; H. 688. — εἰ μέν, ....εἰ δέ,... εἰ δέ : instancing
the three supposable motives for the prosecution : desire for revenge, for the
public. weal, and for gain; H. 895; G. 1397; render érparres by the pro-
gressive pluperf., 7f you had been doing. — πεῖσαι : said persuasion to be
effected, of course, by pecuniary means. — τούτων τοίνυν : the particle, as
in § 18, has its looser inferential force : mow, without having done any of
these things ; δυνάμεως, influence.

22. φήσας, having stated; i.e. if he had made a statement before the
archons of what he had seen, and immediately brought them to the spot ;
not necessarily the nine archons in a body, but particularly the King Archon,
whose jurisdiction extended to crimes of impiety and sacrilege. — ἢ ἄλλους,
or else; this gives the force that ἄλλος often has, a signif. grammatically ex-
plained by considering it as used substantively, and having the foll. noun in
appos. See H. 705, and cf. the similar use in § 25 and § 32, and the
notes thereon. It is, therefore, not implied here that the archons were mem-
bers of the Areopagus, though they became members of it on retiring from
office. — διαγιγνώσκειν : cf. διαγνωσομένοις, ὃ 3 ; οὕτω, in that case.

23. ὃς... ἂν ἠξίου, for he would demand ; equiv. to a causal cl.; cf. § 23.
- καὶ.... ζημίαν : subj. of γενέσθαι. --- τούτου : i. 6. Nicomachus ; Reiske,
Baur, and West. take it as neut., but see the contrast between τούτου μέν and
ὑμᾶς δέ. --- συκοφαντῶν dpa: H. 976; Goodw. 1572. --- οὐ.. ἀπορήσει,
he will not be unprovided with. In lieu of arguments and witnesses, he
wishes you to accept it as positive proof of my guilt that witnesses cannot be
induced to testify against me; ‘‘and witnesses” is added ironically; the
only witness he brings is that he has no witnesses.

24. τῷ πεδίῳ, the Plain; the Athenian Plain, in the southern part of
which lay the city. See Dict. Geog., Vol. I. p. 332. The estate in ques-
tion, being in the deme of Acharnz, was also in the Plain. — πυρκαϊάς : a
word not elsewhere found in the sense required here ; it is generally taken
to mean frees of the wild after-growth, i. e. the offshoots from a stock which
had been burned away. The tenacious life of olive-trees is well known ;
unless the roots are destroyed, they will send out a vigorous second growth.

CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 167

— ἔπεργάσασθαι, fo encroach upon; a technical term deseriptive of tilling
the soil closer to the trees than was allowed ; see épyag. in ὃ 25. — ἔμελλε,
was about to be, was likely to be ; πολλῶν : gen. abs.

25. οὕτως... ὥσπερ καί, J value them just as highly as; on the verb, cf. °
note to XII. 7. — τὴν GA. οὐσίαν, my property besides; cf. ὃ 22; ἀμφοτ.
τούτων : should those trees be missing, he was liable to lose both country
and possessions. — ἐπιμελομένους, who take the oversight of them. A com-
mission, composed of members of the Areopagus, held sessions monthly ;
all matters pertaining to the preservation and control of this portion of the
religious property of the state then came under their notice ; γνώμονας, 77-
spectors. — ἔζημίωσεν : sc. μέ.

26, 27. περὶ... ποιοῦμαι, περὶ... ἡγοῦμαι : see XII. 7, for the phrases used
together. As to the penalty for the respective offences, see Introd. On οὐ,
as denying both members of the antithesis, cf. notes on XII. 47 and 80. —
οὕτω.. φαίνομαι, is 2 manifest that I take such care of; ἔζῆν μᾶλλον : cf.
§ 2; λαθεῖν ἐξ.: Η. «84; G. 1586. — ds... διαβεβλημένος, as one who had
influence at that time (i. e. under the Thirty), ογ as now in ill-repute, lit.
talked against; ἀλλ᾽ ὡς, but (1 simply say) éhat; λέγω transitive is to be
supplied. For years afterwards, it is evident, the adherents of the Thirty
were still exposed to public odium. The last clause indicates strikingly how
truly the government of the Thirty was a misgovernment, a no-government;
under it wrong-doing was made easier.

28, 29. πῶς δ᾽ ἄν.. ἔπεχ., how should I have ventured ? — ὑμῶν : gen.
abs., denoting time: whd/e you were, etc.; τούτου agr. with χωρίου : H. 1062.
— οὐδὲ ἕν, not even one, not a single. — εἶναι, that there was ; inf. used in
ind. disc. to represent the imperf.; Gr. Moods, 119. In the absence of
witnesses to the contrary, this argument (one in the series of @ friori argu-
ments adduced) becomes a strong one. — μήθ᾽... καταστῆσαι, never fined
me as a trespasser upon the ground, nor brought me to trial for removing a
tree; cf. § 24. — ἐπιμελητής, curator. — ἡλικίαν... εἰδέναι, old enough to
know ; Nicomachus, as it thus appears, being a young man.

30, 31. τῶν ἔργων, than the facts. — heyévrev: used with ἐχθρῶν as a
suppl. or obj. to ἀνασχέσθαι ; H. 983; G. 1580; ταῦτα : obj. of λεγόντων.
The thought is : do not allow yourselves to be informed by my enemies of
what you are already fully informed of, i. 6. through your ἐπιμεληταί and
γνώμονες. --- ἐνθυμουμένους, forming your judgment ; πολιτείας, my life as a
citizen. — o§...hvayK., than I was compelled to do; Taylor and others have
emended by inserting ἤ, thav, before ws. It must be admitted that there is
no undoubted instance of ὡς alone having this meaning, though we have
frequently a corresponding use of οἷος and ὅσος. --- τριηραρχών : cf. Dict.
Ant., “Trierarchia”; τἄλλα λειτ., defraying the other public charges ; for
an account of them, see ‘‘ Leitourgia,” 7dzd.

i68 . NOTES ON ORATION VII.

32, 33. ἀλλὰ μή, zvstead of. — οὐτ᾽ ἂν... ἠγωνιζόμην, 7 should not be in
danger of banishment, or of the loss of my property either; on ἄλλην, cf.
§ 22. — οὐδὲν ἀδικ... οὐδέ, without being guilty of any crime, and without ;
H. 969, at the end; G. 1563,7; cf. note on XXII. 1. — πράξας, dy en-
gaging in, or, when I had engaged in; ἐκέρδαινον, J was gaining. In
various parts of this argument, it will be observed, the defendant assumes
the point of view of the accuser, — admits the accusation in order to show its
absurdity. This accounts for the mood or tense of a number of verbs, which
the reader might easily be led to mistranslate ; e. g. § 12, σκοπεῖν, ἐπεχεί-
pow; ὃ 15, ἐξέκοπτον, γενομένας ; and others. — τοῖς pey.,...r@v pey.: the
generic art.; H. 659; omit in transl. In weighty concerns the proof should
be weighty. — πιστότερα, more worthy of belief, agr. with antec. of ὧν.

34. ἐκ.. σκέψασθε, judge from the other facts, i. e. from other considera-

tions still to be adduced. — ὅτι... θεράπ., that 7 had all the servants, i. e. that
I still had them with me. — εἴ twa Bodn., whichever one he wished ; namely,
of the slaves ; H. 932, 2, a, and b, (2) ; Goodw. 1498.— ἡγούμενος gives the
reason of his procedure. A great deal of barbarism and cruelty underlay the
intellectual culture of even the Greeks and Romans. The orator Lycurgus
(Against Leocrates, § 29) speaks as if it were too well understood to need argu-
ment, that justice and the public welfare were alike subserved by torturing
the slaves of an estate or household, both men and women, in order to elicit
evidence concerning the master. In the present instance, the master offers
them for torture in his own defence. The worthlessness, as well as the
detestable cruelty, of this method of ascertaining the truth, seems slowly to
have reached men’s minds, — how slowly, the criminal codes and procedure
of medizeval and even of modern Europe can show.
. 35, 36. πιστόν : agr. with οὐδέν, and foll. by dat., the same as its cogn.
verb; H. 765; G. 1174; freely, that there was no trusting servants. —
πεφύκασι, are in the nature of things; the danger, if not the wrong, of
slavery was appreciated by the ancients. With the enormous slave popula-
tion of Attica, the masters lived in constant dread of slave rebellions. — καὶ
μὲν δή : see note on ΧΙ]. 30; ἐμαυτῷ ξυνειδέναι, 40 de conscious of guilt, —
ἐμοῦ παραδιδ,, when 7 was offering to deliver them over ; δίδωμι in the pres.
and imperf. often = ἡσ be ready to give, to offer. —rhv abr. γνώμην : i.e. to
take the view that Nicomachus on his part was conscious that he was wrong,
since with little or nothing to lose by it he refused to call in the testimony
of the slaves. The reader is tempted to hope that this may have been an
instance where motives of humanity prevailed.

37, 38. εἴ τι ἔλεγον, if they had given any testimony ; meaning, adverse
testimony. Scheibe has substituted ἤλεγχον for ἔλεγον of the MSS. Fol-
lowing Rauch. οὐ a/., I have replaced the latter and added ri. — τούτῳ, fo
him ; the examination by torture was conducted by the prosecutor, under

CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 169

the direction of the proper official, called βασανιστής, Lat. guesitor. — ἐνο-
χοξ ἦν: H.895, N.; G. 1397 and 1402.— ἢ..«προσήκεν, than it belonged to me
to deliver them over. — ἔγὼ τοίνυν... ἡγούμενος, 7, you see, was thus forward,
because I considered ; μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ, for my advantage. — ols, for whom ; dat. of
adv.; by changing to the sing. in @, the accuser is more plainly pointed out ;
τετόλμηκε : SC. μαρτυρεῖν. --- καὶ.. μᾶλλον, and whether it is more likely. —
βοηθεῖν : cf. ὃ 20; there were too many prosecutions of another kind to
make the supposition of a patriotic motive the first to suggest itself in
judging of any particular case of litigation. — συκ. αἰτιάσασθαι, or that he
acted the sycophant in being the accuser. Rauch. and Frohb. have αἰτιᾶσθαι,
which corresponds better with βοηθεῖν.

39. ἐγν. ὑμᾶς, that you are convinced. — οὐχ ὡς... ἀλλ᾽ ds: the first ὡς
belongs with ἐλπίζων ; the constr. is similar to the one in ὃ 27, and XII. 2,— ©
oi τοιοῦτοι, such men ; i, 6. men threatened with prosecution ; ἀπ, τῶν κιν-
δύνων, 77 the greatest embarrassment from dangers; H. 754, e; G. 1140.
--τοσούτῳ.. μάλιστα, the more they all avoid them (i. 6. τῶν κινδύνων), in
every possible way. Both the text and the interpretation of this sentence are
doubtful.

40, 41. οὐκ ἠξίουν, did not deem it worthy, i. e. τὸν τοιοῦτον κίνδυνον φεύ-
yew. — παρέσχον ἐμ.. χρῆσθαι, 7 placed myself at your disposal, lit. to use as
you wish; ὅ τι in ady. accus. — οὐδενὶ... SupAAaynv: as if to say: I was
not frightened into an attempt to make a compromise with my enemies. —
ἥδιον, (even) more gladly ; a hatred so intense that even their own self-love
was, as it were, overborne by it ; possibly a ref. here to something said in
the course of the trial, — ἐπιπέμπουσι, incite ; to set on, a dog, for instance,
is ἐπιπέμπειν ; φανερῶς, openly, is by μέν put in contrast with this indirect
-method. — γενοίμην, εἰ... καταστ.: H. gor; G. 1421, I.— ép.... γενομένου,
being made desolate, i. e. in the event of his banishment.

42, 43. ἀλλὰ γάρ : cf. § 9. — ὅτου ἕνεκα : introd. an indir. question, of
which the pred. is κατέστησεν, kal... ζητεῖ, kal... ἤθελεν. — ἐξὸν.... ἐλέγξαι,
when it was possible to convict me in the very act; H. 973,8; G. 1569. On
the phrase ἐπ᾽ air., see XIII., Introd., and § 85, note. — εἰς τοσ-.. ἀγῶνα,
into so important a judicial contest. — ἐξὸν.. ἀποδεῖξαι : used concessively,
and limiting the whole of the preceding clause. — ἐμοῦ... διδόντος, when 7
offered.

NOTES ON ORATION XXII.

I. θαυμάζοντες : H. 969; G. 1563, 7; the descriptive part.; render with
ὅτι, thinking it remarkable that,— συτοπωλῶν : H. 751 ; Goodw. 1123. —
el... ἡγεῖσθε, if you consider them ever so guilty; for as, see H. 651;
οὐδέν : H.719,b; G. 1060. — οὐδ᾽ fr... νομίζετε, delieve none the less that,
etc.; ποιουμ. : mid.; see note, XII. 2; συκοφ. ; on the “sycophants,” cf.
Introd. ; also L. ἃ S., sixth ed., sub voce συκοφάντης. --- περὶ τούτων : neut.,
ref. to the prec. clause; H. 635.

2. γάρ: see note, XIII. 5; ot Ipur., the Prytanes; see Lex., or Dict.
Axnt., “ Boule,” for their specific duties. Note that the word in this mean-
ing is peculiar to Athens; ἀπέδοσαν, reported; in accordance with their
duty of presenting public business to the Senate. — ὠργίσθησαν : the subj.
they is plainly referable to τὴν βουλήν. --- as... χρή : H. 928, 932, 951;
G. 1487; ζημιῶσαι : H. 765; 6. 1532; ἕνδεκα : see Lex.; the dreaded
Eleven, a board of officers often mentioned in the history of the Thirty
Tyrants. — ἐθίζεσθαι : pass. with βουλήν for its subj., and itself the subj.
of elva; H. 939, a; G.1517.— δοκοίη : H. 932, 2; G.1487. Observe that
the clauses foll. νομίζων are also in indir. disc., and the tenses are to be
rendered accordingly ; θανάτου : after ἄξια ; H. 753, ἔ; Goodw. 1135; οὐδὲν
«ον 8lk., that you no less than we would decide justly ; addressed to the
dicasts or judges; ἀπολ. : H. 501; its subj. is αὐτούς. The reader will
recall occasional instances staining the page of Athenian history, where a
sudden outburst of popular indignation denied justice to its victims, and
sent them to execution without legal trial; e.g. the case of the generals
who commanded at Arginuse.

3, 4. ταῦτα: H. 724, and a; Goodw. 1239.— ἐποιούμην : used as in § 1;
the tense (imperf. in indir. disc, H. 936; Greek Moods, 672) im-
plies that this reproach was uttered after the afore-mentioned session ; the
imperf. thus used refers, with rare exceptions, to an action previously going
on; here render: 7 had made, or, been making. — πρός, before, in the
presence of; αὐτοῖς": i. 6. the grain-dealers; so also αὐτῶν in the next
sentence ; ἔργῳ ἀπελ., 7 defended myself by deed ; render the foll. γάρ, that
is to say; it explains épyy. — τοῖς vopous...éB., Aad been upholding the

AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. I7I

established laws ; κεῖμαι serves as a pass. of τέθημι, see Lex. On the tense
of ἔλεγον and €8., see remark on ἐποιούμην, above. In both sentences it is
possible that the imperf. may be intended to represent the pres. of direct
disc. This would do no violence to the sense ; there is nothing, however,
in the context to require it; see H. 936; Greek Moods, 674, 2.—
τούτων ἕνεκα : i.€. on account of the slanderous accusations already re-
lated; further explained by δεδ. τ. air. following. — ψηφίσ. : H. 898, c
G. 1470; πρίν freq. has πρότερον (sometimes πρόσθεν, also πρίν itself) as
an antec. correl.; render both, uzéi.—6 τι ἂν βούλ. : spoken deferen-
tially ; util you have voted their condemnation would have been the
obvious completion of the Bentence, had the speaker consulted sae’) his
own wish and hope.

5. The interrogation of one of the accused. One member of the firm
or company is singled out: εἰπὲ od. — μετοικεῖς : syn. with μέτοικος ef. —
ὡς πεισ΄, with the intention of obeying ; H.978; Goodw. 1574; πότερον :
H. 1017; G. 1606. A question fair enough in form, but one which
might be put in a very insolent, browbeating way. — ἄλλο τι...ἤ:
H. τοῖς, b; G. 1604. An interrog. phrase, having the sense of Gp’ οὐκ.
- ἐφ᾽ ois: refers to the collective τὶ; H. 629; Goodw. roz1 (Ὁ). Rauch.
supposes it to refer to τοιούτων understood after τὶ. ---- συμπρίασθαι (συν-
e@véouat): aor. inf. in ind. disc.; H. 854; G. 1280; observe the force of the
prep. in compos., as in the Lat. coemo ; goppav: after the compar. πλείω.
— dv... κελεύει, which the law directs to be allowed ; gen. by attraction ;
H. 994; G. 1031.— τῶν apx., the officers ; used throughout this oration in
its general signif., and ref. to the σιτοφύλακες, as appears from § 8.

6, 7. τὸν σῖτον, the grain; restr. art.; H. 657, Ὁ; ἀποψηφ. : explain
why the aor. is used, rather than the pres.; H. 851; so also καταψηφ.
Cf. the pres. inf. συνωνεῖσθαι, above. — παρεσχόμεθα : as Frohb. suggests,
probably in the indictment. — μηδένα : H. 1029; Goodw. 1615.— χρῆν :
H. 834; Goodw. 1400.—4dmay. φαίνεται, plainly forbids it; H. 986;
Kiihn. 311, 8. The causal clause introd. by ἐπειδή, since, extends to
ψηφιεῖσθαι. ---- εἰπεῖν : dep. on ἀνάγκη; H. 952; G. 1521.

8. παρακαλ., having summoned ; this was in the preliminary hearing of
the grain-dealers before the Senate.—ot.. τέσσαρες, four of them ; H. 664, a;
the four, besides Anytus, out of the five inspectors ; probably the five ap-
pointed for the Pirzeus. — ds . .. συμβουλ. : cl. of ind. disc. ; τούτων, kK. τι λ
when they were outbidding and fighting against one another ; σφᾶς αὐτούς
has a recip. force, and thus is syn. with ἀλλ. : H. 686, b; Goodw. 996. —
παύσ. φιλονεικοῦσιν : cf note, XII. 1, on παύσ. λέγοντι. --- ἡγούμ.... .-πρί-
ασϑαι, dclieving it to be advantageous to you who buy from these that they
should previously buy it as cheap as possible ; note the force of the aorist
(πρίασθαι), denoting a prior action as compared with ὠνουμένοις. --- δεῖν :

172 NOTES ON ORATION XXII.

ind. disc. still continued; H. 932, 2,a; G.1525; ὀβολῷ μόνον...τιμ., πιο
more than an obol dearer (H. 781; G. 1184); the law being, as it appears,
that the retail dealer should be allowed only one obol profit, about three
cents, on the medimnus.

9. οὐ qualifies the whole clause ; H. 1023, a; cf. on the contrary μή, be-
low. Each of the cl. introd. by ὡς dep. on μάρτυρα ; καταθέσθαι, Zo store
τ. - ἐπὶ... βουλῆς, during the session of the previous Senate, the Senate of
the previous year. The Senators were chosen annually. — συνωνούμ.: not
the part. used for the imperf. (which is Frohb.’s view), but rather as the pro-
gressive perf.

10. ἂν ὡς μάλ.: see note, § 1. — οὐχ.. ἀπολογ., that they will not be
making out a defence for themselves, but will (only) be accusing these. —
περὶ.. .ὧν.. δίκην, ought they not to be punished for (offences) concerning
which, etc.; the antec. of ὧν is in the gen., limiting δίκην : the foll. partt.
are the subj. of διδόναι ; τούτοις refers to νόμοι. Translate: ought they not
to be punished, — those who do not obey, as well as those who direct to do
what is contrary to these? Here, as in § 17, πῶς οὐ = Lat. monne ; cf.
XII. 84.

11. οὐκ ἐλεύσ΄., will not resort ; this form for the fut. of Zo come is rare
in Attic prose ; oftener ἥξειν, ἀφίξεσθαι. --- ὥσπερ... βουλῇ, just as they did
in the Senate, In an adverbial or relative clause expressing comparison,
the strengthening καί, a/so, may generally be omitted in translation, or else
be transferred to the principal clause. English usage places the emphasis
on the demonstrative, rather than on the relative clause of the comparison ;
Greek places xai in the latter, or in both. Cf. Kriiger’s Griechische Sprach-
lehre, 69, 32, 13. — ἐπ᾽ εὖν.... πόλεως, out of good-will to the city ; ἐπί here,
as often, denotes the ground or occasion of an action ; hence = for, because
of, out of ; for πόλεως, see H. 729, ε; G. 1085, 2.

12. γάρ, as in § 2; halveorOar...mwd.: with ἐχρῆν : they ought to have
been found selling. — τιμῆς : H. 746; G. 1133; 6 συνεωνημένος : sc. σῖτος ;
used here in its pass. sense ; νυνί, but as i¢ 7s. — τῆς abr. hy, on the same
day ; cf. with ἡμέρας, above, denoting time during which ; ὥσπερ... συνων.,
as if they were buying it up by the medimnus ; the part. denotes the same
time as ἐπώλουν. In selling, he maintains, they kept with the rising prices, ’
though the wheat they were selling had been bought long before at low
rates,

13. δεινὸν. εἰ, strange that; εἰ after 5., as after corresponding verbs of
surprise, etc., may often be rendered by “hat; see note, XII. 36. The
speaker ironically expresses his surprise that their vaunted public spirit,
which ran the risk of capital punishment in order to supply the city with
breadstuffs, should invariably be poverty-stricken whenever the necessities
of the state called for the imposition of a war-tax ; ἣν... μέλλουσιν, which all

AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 173

will know of; i. e. the payment of a special tax of this kind would be known
to the public. — ἐφ᾽ οἷς.. ταῦτα, those offences for which the penalty is death
and (in which) i¢ was for their interest to escape detection ; the latter part
of the clause is loosely connected with the rel. phrase ἐφ᾽ οἷς, and does not
depend upon it used in precisely the same sense ; but it is not necessary to
the completeness of the Greek construction to supply either another rela-
tive, or a demonstrative; see H. 1005; ταῦτα is the antec. of οἷς, and
cogn. accus. after wapay.; ὑμετέρᾳ: H. 694; Goodw. 999. — τοι.
ποιεῖσθαι Ady., to make such a defence. — αὐτοῖς, ἄλλοις : dat. after συμφ.
They and the citizens have interests precisely opposite. —mwéAe: after
κακοῦ.

14. ἄσμενοι: Η. 619, Ὁ. --- τὰς τὶ... λογοπ,, and others they make up
themselves ; if actual calamities are wanting, they invent reports of them. —
Πόντῳ : the Tauric Chersonese was the granary of Athens, and there was
shipped to the Pirzeus from the grain ports of the Black Sea more wheat
than from all other quarters. See Pub. Econ., p. 109 seg. — ἐκπλεούσας :
i.e. on their way out of the Pontus and the Hellespont. — τὰς σπονδάς :
the treaty existing at that time; it is likely that the Peace of Antalcidas,
made 387 B.C., is here referred to; so Frohb. shows by comparison of
passages in Xenophon’s /Yel/enica. This is the only clew afforded in the
oration for determining its date ; ἄπορ., fo be declared void ; fr. ἀπεῖπον.

15. ἔχθρας : H. 730, c; G. 1088.— ἵνα... διαφερ., that we may not dispute
with them about the 2γέεξ. ---- ἂν... ἀπέλθωμεν, if we get away from them,
having effected a purchase at any price whatever ; ὅποσοντ. : see Lex.,
ὁπόσος. Cf. H. 285, 286. ---- πολιορκ,, we are kebt in a state of siege. Some
of the court might remember the winter that closed the Peloponnesian War,
when the city was blockaded by the Lacedzemonians, and numbers died of
starvation. There would then be a touch of pathos in the suggested associa-
tions, heightening the humorous allusion to the purchaser glad to get out of
the clutches of the dealer on any terms.

16. οὕτω.. ἔγνωκεν, has come to have such an opinion. —dbdaxas, as
inspectors ; pred. accus.; Kareor. is prob. the aor. for our perf.; ἀποκλη-
potre: this was one of the offices that were filled by lot. In Scheibe it is
ἀπεκληροῦτε, but Rauch. and Frohb. rightly prefer the pres., as in the MSS.
— πολ. ὄντων, although they were citizens ; H. 969, ε ; G. 1563,6; ἐκείνων
refers to σιτοῴ., above. They were, of course, Athenians, while the grain-
dealers were mostly foreign residents. The trade and manufactures of
Athens were in those times largely in the hands of foreigners. — αὐτούς :
intens. ; the criminals themselves; φυλάττειν, to restrain. An additional
indication of the severity of the law.

17. ἀδύνατον, impossible ; that is, in the discharge of their sworn duty as
jurors, for the reason that the accused had themselves already confessed to a

174 NOTES ON ORATION XXII.

violation of the law. — ὅμολ. αὐτῶν : agr. with the obj. of ἀπογνώσεσθε, i e.
τούτων understood ; transl., when they themselves acknowledge. The time
denoted by συνίστασθαι is to be ascertained from the context ; see note on
ἀφανίζειν, VII. 2. Render: that they were engaged in a combination ;
τοῖς εἰσπλ.: syn. with τοὺς ἐμπόρους ; the merchants who entered the Athe-
nian ports. This sent. seems to be introd. by ydp not as stating the reason
for what precedes, but as including it, implied in ὁμολ. αὐτῶν. --- ἂν εἶχε...
ἐπιτιμᾶν, could censure. —ép’ ὑμῖν : sc. ἐστίν, (it is in such cases) at your
discretion to believe, etc. —dv δόξαιτε, εἰ... ἀφήσ.: a mixed cond. sent. ;
H. gor; G. 1421, 1.

18, 19. ὅτι.. κατέγνωτε, that you have already condemned many accused
of this crime, etc.; ἐχ. αἰτίαν = crimen habere ; the adv. ἤδη with the verb
requires it to be rendered by the Eng. perf. — μᾶλλον éed., you were more
desirous ; the other member of the comparison is implied, i. e. than upon
those who admit their guilt. — καὶ μὲν 84: see note, XII. 30; κοινότ., of
the most general interest ; in those judicial decisions which affected the price
of bread, the public would naturally feel the keenest interest ; further ex-
plained by ἡγούμενοι, x. τ. d., for they will think, etc. The effect of just
punishment as a preventive of future crime is still more emphatically referred
to in the next sect.; cf. XII. 35. — ψηφ. ἔσεσθε: H. 850; Goodw. 706;
ποιεῖν : after ἄδειαν, as in XII. 85.

20, 21. τῶν p. ἔσεσθαι : that is, what treatment the violators of these
laws are to expect in the future. — οὕτω.. ἀνεκτοί, for in that case they will
be only just endurable ; μόγις has here its positive, not its negative force :
just, barely, not scarcely, hardly. You can perhaps manage to get along
tolerably with them, if you make the present case a suitable example. οὕτω
is used as in VII. 22. — πλεῖστοι, the most, i.e. more persons than from
any other pursuit ; περὶ... ἤγων., Aave been tried for their lives, syn. with
mept...xwd., below. —Kal...apedotvrat, and so great are their profits from
it, — πολιτῶν : limits the understood antec. of of. — συνέστησαν : cf. cuvl-
στασθαι, ὃ 17. — παρ᾽ αὐτῶν : ref. to the defendants, as αὐτούς, above. —
ots, and these; the rel. must be understood in a diff. case with ποιήσετε ;
H. 1005.

22. ὅ τι... δεῖ, why there is need; ὅ τι is adv. accus. Cf. VII. 40.—
τῶν... ἀδικ., other criminals; the art. (repeated with ἄλλων) has its
generic force, hence may be omitted in transl. —é§.: H. 619. This
ad captandum argument has evidently been reserved by the speaker as
the sharpest and surest arrow in his quiver.

NOTES ON ORATION II.

On the “Ceramicus,” see Dict. Geog., I. p. 303, “ The Outer Ceramicus and the
Academy.” Interesting details concerning the tombs are given in Dyer’s Ancient
Athens, p. 492 seg. The student is also recommended to read the Platonic dialogue
Menexenus, in Jowett’s admirable translation. It should be said, however, that the
introduction by the distinguished translator scarcely does justice either to the merits
of the discourse contained in the dialogue, or to the significance of this class of
orations in republican Athens. The student will find in the Menexenus many points
of suggestive contrast with this oration, which, if the theory of Schleiermacher and
Grote (mentioned in the Introd.) be correct, is invested with additional interest as
a contemporaneous and rival production.

I. ἐμεμψ. div, 7 should blame ; the aor. with ἄν, after an imperf. in the
cond., sometimes denotes present time; Gr. Moods, 49, 2, N. 5. — Tots...
λέγειν, chose who summoned me to speak at few days notice; cf. ἐξ ὀλἔγου,
at short notice, below ; ἐκ, in the sense of after. That the election of the
orator was often left to a late day would appear from Plato: ‘‘ This time,
however, I am inclined to think that the speaker who is chosen will not
have much to say; for the choice has been quite sudden, and he will be
compelled almost to improvise.” ((Zenex., III.) —6 πᾶς x., all time;
H. 672; Goodw. 979. — οὕτως.. τυγχ-., that thus they would obtain,
etc.; H. 739; G. 1099.

2. πρός, with; my discourse is not to vie with their deeds; τοὺς... εἰρηκ.:
the customary eulogy on these occasions embraced the heroic deeds of all
the dead whose memorials adorned the Ceramicus. Thus the theme of
each speaker was to a great extent the same as that of previous orators. —
ἀφθονίαν, abundance ; i.e. of themes for emulation. — ποιεῖν, 40 compose
poetry ; in early Eng. make had also this signif. Taylor appositely cites
Spenser : —

“ What is he for a ladde you so lament?
Ys love such pinching paine to them that prove?
And hath he skill 70 make so excellent,
Yet hath so little skill to bridle love?”

176 NOTES ON ORATION II.

The parallel expression in Isoc., Panegyr., is: τῶν ποιεῖν δυναμένων, ἣ
τῶν λέγειν ἐπισταμένων. --- καλὰ μέν : μέν is here concess.; its force may be
reproduced by rendering it a/¢hough in a subord. cl.; although many excel-
lent things have been said, etc.; δέ, yet; observe the similar constr. in the
preceding sent. — ἐκείνοις : i. e. τοῖς προτέροις ; dat. of agent; ἱκανά : obj.
of εἰπεῖν. ---- γῆς, θαλάττης : H. 753,d; Goodw. 11403 ἄπειροι, without
experience of ; they had met peril on every shore. —Kaxd: placed after the
part., instead of being in its normal position before it. For other instances
of such misplacement of words for rhetorical effect (hyperbaton, as the an-
cients called it), see XIII. 43, τῇ πόλει; XXIV. 21, ὑμῖν; ΧΙ]. 94, νῦν.

3. τῶν mpoy., our forefathers ; φήμης, tradition ; not legend, as if there
were necessarily implied any want of belief in the historic truth of what he
was about to relate. History for readers had in that age but just begun to
be composed among the Greeks ; they had as yet scarcely attempted to dis-
tinguish between legend and history. — κἀκείνων : καί = also; the ancient
as well as the recent dead. — γνώμαις : West. has μνήμαις, but the weight
of MS. authority is for the former. τῶν ἀγαθ. is then obj. gen., — the
current sayings and anecdotes concerning the brave.

4. The Amazons hold a prominent place in Greek literature, from the
fliad down. Of their invasion of Attica there is frequent mention, Plu-
tarch, in his Ζ 278 of Theseus, describes the final battle, defining the position
and movements of the contending armies, and giving the day of the month
in which the engagement took place. Isocrates, in the Panegyricus, refers
to the Amazons in language similar to that employed here. Plato, Herodo-
tus, and the ancients generally, believed this nation of warrior-women to
have actually existed. Consult Class, Dict.; also Grote, I. p. 208 seg.,
where an excellent statement is to be found of the views of the Greeks con-
cerning them. The Greek chronologists made Theseus contemporary with
Hercules, in the.thirteenth century B. C., and during his reign the invasion
was supposed to have taken place.

γάρ : see note, XIII. 5; οἰκοῦσαι : sc. ἦσαν. The Thermodon is a
small stream of Pontus, flowing into the Euxine east of the river Iris. It
was in this region that the Argonauts encountered the Amazons. — τῶν περὶ
αὐτάς, of those in their region ; dep. on μόναι. ---- ἥρουν, overtook ; dved.,
unexpectedly ; to their enemies’ surprise. — διαφέρειν, Zo surpass ; ἣ.. ἐλλεί-
mew, than to be inferior in their forms; i.e. in size and strength, What
is the etymology and original signif. of our word idea ?

5. ἔργῳ, λόγῳ : the funeral orations seem to have rung all possible
changes on this antithesis of deeds and words. Jowett’s paraphrase of the
Platonic oration in AZenex. felicitously begins : “ There is a tribute of deeds
and of words.” Here the contrast between deed and report — between their
own deeds and the report conveyed by others— seems somewhat forced.

FUNERAL ORATION. 177

Throughout the oration there is an excessive striving after antitheses, — see
already in § 4, — a fault vigorously condemned by Reiske : ‘‘ Mirifice et ad
fastidium luxuriat hac in oratione Lysias, cum antithesis molestissimis,
frigus et nauseam creantibus, tum illa perpetua oppositione, seepe perquam
inepta et puerili, inter μέν et dé.”

The participial construction also abounds in this oration, participles
following one another in some passages instead of adverbial clauses. In
many of these cases, it is preferable to translate the partt. by clauses, acc.
to the logical requirements of the sentence. —rapahaPotoat...éorpar., cook
with them and marched. It will be seen that the part. is connected in
thought with the pred. more closely than those which precede ; πολλῆς...
χάριν : Plutarch follows another legend, and says that the war arose in
consequence of the carrying off of Antiope by Theseus in one of his expedi-
tions. — ἐκτήσαντο, acguired, came to have their souls like their nature ;
cf. φύσει with ἰδέαις, above. — τῆς mpor.: after ἐναντίαν ; H. 753, 5;
Goodw. 1140; 1117; ἐναντίος may take the gen. when it denotes the
opposite of, different from ; ἐκ tax κινδ., from their dangers ; meaning from
their conduct when in danger.

6. μαθούσαις : H. οὔο, 4; G.1563,3; τῶν λοιπῶν : i.e. their future
enterprises. — οὐδὲ.. ἀπελθ.: cf. Isocr., Panegyr., 70: τῶν μὲν ἐλθουσῶν
οὐδεμία πάλιν ἀπῆλθεν. --- αὐτοῦ : adv.; πόλεως limits μνήμην ; διὰ τὴν ἀρε-
τήν, on account of its valor.

7. The orator next relates the part taken by Athens in the mythical ex-
pedition of the Seven against Thebes. See Grote, I. p. 272 seg. Seven
chieftains led their troops against the City of Seven Gates, — Adrastus, Am-
phiaraus, Capaneus, Hippomedon, Parthenopzeus, Tydeus, and Polynices.
After their defeat, ‘‘ Adrastus, unable to obtain permission from the Thebans
to inter the fallen chieftains, presented himself in suppliant guise, accom-
panied by their disconsolate mothers, to Theseus at Eleusis. He implored
the Athenian warrior to extort from the perverse Thebans that last melan-
choly privilege which no decent or pious Greeks ever thought of with-
holding, and thus to stand forth as the champion of Grecian public morality
in one of its most essential points, not less than of the rights of the sub-
terranean gods. The Thebans obstinately persisting in their refusal, Theseus
undertook an expedition against their city, vanquished them in the field, and
compelled them by force of arms to permit the sepulture of their fallen
enemies. This chivalrous interposition, celebrated in one of the preserved
dramas of Euripides, formed a subject of glorious recollection to the Athe-
nians throughout the historical age ; their orators dwelt upon it in terms of
animated panegyric ; and it seems to have been accepted as a real fact of
the past time, with not less implicit conviction than the battle of Marathon.”
(Grote, I. p. 277.)

178 NOTES ON ORATION II.

The participles in this sentence (§§ 7-9) should be closely studied. The
first three are all temporal ; orpar. and ἥττηθ., however, belong to ἐώντων,
which latter, denoting a continued state or action in time past, is more
closely connected with ἐδέοντο, when the Thebans did not permit, etc., they
sent heralds and besought; ἡγησάμ.: causal; ἀποθαν, dy their death. —
τοὺς... κάτω, the gods below ; the gods of the underworld, Pluto and Perse-
phone, with the deities subordinate to them; τὰ αὑτῶν, ¢heir (due honors) ;
namely, the customary funeral rites. — ἱερῶν δὲ μιαιν., and holy places being
polluted ; the groves and sacred enclosures outside of the city, which the
presence of the dead would pollute; Pausanias mentions, for instance,
temples of Zeus and of Themis, situated west of the city.

8, 9. ἀνδρῶν: H. 732,4; G. 1094,1; also understood with damier. in the
next cl.; but of men who distrusted themselves. — τούτων, dep. on τυχεῖν, is
either ¢#zs, referring to the request, or ¢hese, referring to τῶν νεκρῶν. --- οὐδε-
plas...dmapyx., although there was previously no occasion of hostility, etc.;
ovdt...xapit., and not because they were trying to please ; χαριζ. and ἀξ. are
causal. — τῶν νομιζομένων, the customary rites; ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων : for the
real interests of both contending parties; ἑτέρους refers to the Thebans ;
ὑπὲρ μὲν τῶν (for ὑπερ τῶν μέν, the particle being placed after the first word
of the phrase) refers to the Thebans, and τῶν ἑτέρων to the Argives ; they are
in appos. with ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων. In the latter of the two phrases, ἑτέρων is
unnecessary. — πλείω : cogn. accus. after ἐξυβρ.; πατρίου, ancestral ; sanc-
tioned by hereditary usage.

10. κοινὰς ἀπ. dv0., common to all men; H. 754,¢; G. 1143 — érap-
θέντες (€raipw): causal; οὐχ is placed at the beginning, because it qualifies
the whole pred. of the clause. — Καδμείων : the name of Thebes in the
mythical period was Καδμεία, a name afterwards confined to the citadel. —
νεκρούς : in appos. with 40\a. —év ...’"EXevo., i their Eleusis; i. 6. Eleusis
in Attica. There was an ancient town in Boeotia bearing the same name.

11. ‘‘ After the death and apotheosis of Heracles, his son Hyllos and his
other children were expelled and persecuted by Eurystheus ; the fear of his
vengeance deterred both the Trachinian king Keyx and the Thebans from
harboring them, and the Athenians alone were generous enough to brave the
risk of offering them shelter. Eurystheus invaded Attica, but perished in
the attempt by the hand of Hyllos, or by that of Iolaos, the old companion
and nephew of Heracles. The chivalrous courage which the Athenians had
on this occasion displayed in behalf of oppressed innocence was a favorite
theme for subsequent eulogy by Attic poets and orators.” (Grote, I. p. 94.)

According to the Alexandrian chronologists, Hercules belonged to the
generation immediately preceding the Trojan War. They make Eurys-
theus to have been slain n, Ὁ, 1207. Isocrates says, ‘‘long before the Tro-
jan War” (πολὺ πρὸ τῶν Tpwikadv) ; Panegyr., § 54.

FUNERAL ORATION. 179

Εἱὐρυσθ.: king of Mycenze ; see Class. Dict. — ἠφανίσθη : by plup. in
Eng.; H. 837; ἐξηλαύν., were driven forth (from one city after another);
note the force of the imperf. — αἰσχ... ἔργοις, ashamed, it is true, of their
act, i, 6. in refusing shelter to the sons of Hercules. — ἐπὶ τῶν βωμῶν :
‘* All altars were places of refuge. The supplicants were considered as
placing themselves under the protection of the deities to whom the altars
were consecrated.” (Dict. Ant., ‘* Ara.”)

12. οὐκ HOA., would not; μετὰ... διαμάχ., 40 contend on the side of jus-
tice. — τὴν... ἠδοῦντο, reverenced the virtues of Hercules; ἀρετή in such
a connection commonly has a broader signif. than valor, prowess, for which
ἀνδρία, εὐψυχία, and other syn. are used. In the Funeral Oration attributed
to Demosthenes, the speaker remarks that valor (ἀνδρία) is only one of the
elements of ἀρετή. --- χαριζόμενοι : as in § 8, giving the reason.

13. μετὰ τῶν... .ἐχ., with, i. e. with the aid of, etc.; Peloponnesus, before
its invasion by the Dorians, was inhabited by the Achzeans, Arcadians, and
other tribes of more or less pure Hellenic blood. — οὐκ... μετέγνωσαν, they
did not repent on the approach of danger; ϑεινῶν : after ἐγγύς ; H. 757;
G. 1149. — ὁποῖοι... γενόμενοι, what sort of men they would become ; lit.
of what sort they would be, having become men; ἄνδρες : pred. nom. with
γενόμ. The preceding ἐκείνους, acc. to Greek usage, anticipates the subj. of
the clause ; it may be omitted in transl. See H. 878.

14. οὐδὲ.. ἀγαθῆς, ad no gain offering itself except a good renown. —
Kal τοὺς μέν͵... τοῖς δέ, azd...the latter,...the former. — μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄκον-
τας, to do nothing by compulsion; subj. of εἶναι ; ἄκοντας agr. with indeterm.
subj. of ποιεῖν. --- ὑπὲρ τούτων apd., ἐγ: dchalf of both of these; i.e. inte
and the oppressed.

15. τοσοῦτον.. ἐφ., were so proud. —avrov ἱκετεύοντα, cven if he should
come as a suppliant himself. — ἐλθοῦσαν : for its position, see H. 667, a,
and cf. XII. 77. — καὶ τ. . ἠλευθ., set free their souls also. — τοῖς... ἐστε-
φάνωσαν, by their own perils crowned them with victory; i. e. secured their
triumph. By a rather forced figure, the verb meaning 20 designate as victor,
i. 6. by bestowing a crown, is used meaning 20 render victorious. So
Reiske : ‘‘coronabant, hoc est, victores reddebant.” Baur: ‘‘bekranzten
sie mit den Preisen ihrer eignen Kampfe.”

16, tocotrov...ebr., so much more fortunate than their father ; observe
that roo. refers not to what precedes, but to what follows ; which, instead
of a cl. of conseq., is an indep. sent. introd. by γάρ. The sense is given by
rendering τοσ., much, and γάρ, as usual, for. Though the sons of Hercules
had not reached manhood, they had obtained what had never been granted
to their father with all his might. — érl....rdv βίον, having made life toil-
some, etc.; καὶ... ὄντα, although he was. — εἶδον : see the similar hyperbaton
in § 2, πενθοῦντες.

180 NOTES ON ORATION II.

The preceding passage offers many marked similarities of thought and
expression to §§ 54-60 of the Panegyricus.

17. The Athenians are extolled as the natural champions of human
rights, by virtue not only of their autochthonous origin, but also of their free
institutions. The birth of their race from the soil on which they lived was
a favorite theme with the orators in their panegyrics. It was deemed an
honor peculiar to the Attic people. In the //ad, Erechtheus, the oldest
name in the Attic genealogy, is said to be born of the Earth : —

ὅν ποτ᾽ ᾿Αθήνη
θρέψε, Διὸς θυγάτηρ, τέκε δὲ ζείδωρος ἄρουρα.
71., Tl. 547, 548.

— πολλὰ... ὑπῆρχε, thus, accordingly, did it fall to our ancestors, etc.; the
subj. is διαμάχ. ---- ἥ τε yap: the correl. of τέ is δέ at the beginning of § 18;
H. 1040, b.— ᾧκησαν, became inhabitants of; incept. aor.; ot πολλοί : i. 6.
most nations. — ἀλλὰ... πατρίδα, but, being autochthonous, they had the same
soil as both mother and country. Isocr. says: μόνοις γὰρ ἡμῖν τῶν Ἑλλήνων
τὴν αὐτὴν τροφόν καὶ πατρίδα καὶ μητέρα καλέσαι προσήκει. Panegyr., ὃ 25.
And Plato: ““ὙΠΕΙΓ ancestors were not strangers, nor are these their descend-
ants sojourners only, whose fathers have come from another country ; but
they are the children of the soil, dwelling and living in their own land.
And the country which brought them up is not like other countries, a step-
mother to her children, but their own true mother; she bore them and
nourished them and received them, and in her bosom they now repose.”
Menexenus, VI., Jowett’s transl.

18, 19. δέ: correl. with τέ above; it introd. a second reason; ἐν...
χρόνῳ : the expulsion of the dynasty of the Pisistratidz occurred B. C. 510.
The constitutional changes introduced by Clisthenes followed immediately
after, and with him the Athenian democracy began. — τὴν ἐλευθ..... μεγί-
στην, that the freedom of all is (amounts to, results in) the greatest har-
mony ; ‘‘libertatem omnium summam efficere concordiam.” Auger. —
Tos...edrlSas: i. e. the hope of what would be gained by the dangers they
endured; hence translate, the rewards of their dangers: in times of danger
all were animated with a common hope ; kotwds.. GAX.: to be shared by one
as well as another, hence common to all; ἐπολιτεύοντο, administered the
government, — βίᾳ, dy force ; in distinction from νόμῳ ; an essential differ-
ence between an arbitrary and a constitutional government. — ὁρίσαι, 20
define; observe the meaning of ὅρος = Lat. fimis, and of the derivatives
horizon, aorist, etc. — ἔργῳ δὲ... ὑπηρ., and in their actions to yield obedi-
ence to these; expl. by what follows. They acted with Law as their King, |
and Discourse as their Teacher.

Only this passing glance is given to the free institutions and the charac-

FUNERAL ORATION. 181

teristic civil polity of Athens. Fora worthier eulogy based on a discrimi-
nating analysis, we must turn to the orations of Pericles.

20. In the following sections (20-47) the orator extols the martial valor
and the Pan-hellenic patriotism of his countrymen in repelling the Persian
invasions ; the first commanded by Datis and Artaphernes, B. C. 490; the
next under Xerxes, ten years later. The reader will do well to consult
Grote, or, for a more compact narrative, Curtius, Vol. II., the chapter on
‘©The Wars of Liberation.”

καὶ γάρ tot: this phrase freq. introduces a conclusion, consequence, or
illustration. It then = Lat. ztague, accordingly, and thus, therefore, καί
having a connective, γάρ an epexegetic, and τοί a confirmative force. For
other exx. of this use (distinct from the signif. in which it is more freq. used
= Lat. etenim profecto), see ὃ 26; also Demosth., Phil, I. 6; De Cor.,
99; De Falsa Legat., 137 and 325. — καὶ φύντες, κ. τ. A. being of noble
descent and of one mind; Ὑ. ὅμοια may be understood in two ways:
(1) entertaining like sentiments, i.e. the sentiments of liberty, equality, and
harmony spoken of above, —an interpretation which Reiske prefers, and
which accords with the context ; (2) entertaining corresponding sentiments,
i, e. sentiments and aims cortesponding to their honorable descent. Thus
Baur: ‘‘ ebenso gesinnt.” — πανταχοῦ : used as adj., everywhere existing.

21. βασιλεύς : Darius, the son of Hystaspes; evr. pupidd., ft
‘*myriads,” half a million ; the reader will remember that this is eulogy,
not history. The number led by Datis and Artaphernes is variously
estimated ; see Grote, IV. p. 345, note; Curtius, II. p. 235, note. 100,000
infantry and 10,000 cavalry is the lowest estimate. In the Platonic oration
it is ‘‘ fifty myriads and three hundred ships”; Menex., X. — ἑκοῦσαν,
ἄκουσαν : H. 619; they may be rendered, without force, by force. — οὕτως
may be omitted in transl. ; it refers to the condition expressed in the cl.
εἰ... ποιήσαιντο, if they should bring on the conflict, etc. :

22. περὶ τῆς πόλ.: limits τοι. δόξα, such an opinion, i.e. the opinion
expressed in the foll.; ἴασιν, πολεμήσουσι : both retain the tense of direct
disc.; the former has its future sense ; H. 828, a; Goodw. 1257; ἐκείνοις :
ref. to ἄλλην πόλιν in its collect. signif. — ἥξουσι, they would come, i.e. the
Athenians ; still ind. disc. after δόξα, continued also with change of mode in
τολμήσειν, below. — φανερὰν... καταθέσθαι, to assume in their behalf an
attitude of open hostility with them, i. e. the Persians. The verb properly
denotes to make a deposit with a person, with the understanding of repay-
ment. Cf. Demosth., XV. 11.

23. οἱ μὲν....διεν., they, then, reasoned thus ; οὐ doy. εἰδότες, making no
account of; in most of the MSS. there is a lacuna. — ἀθάνατον : H. 1062,
fine print, last sent. — δεῖν.. εἰδέναι, chat they ought to be indebted for their
rescue to others ; see Lex., χάρις.

182 NOTES ON ORATION II.

24. ταῦτα.... γνόντες : cf. y. ὅμοια, ὃ 20. — μετὰ πάντων, in common
with all men. — τὰς μὲν.. κεκτῆσθαι, that because of death their lives were
not their own ; lit. they possessed their lives belonging to another. They
held their lives as of little worth, for really they were not theirs. So Isocr.,
Panegyr., 86, also speaking of his countrymen at Marathon: ὥσπερ ἐν ἀλλο-
τρίαις ψυχαῖς μέλλοντες κινδυνεύσειν, as if they were about to go into battle
with the lives of others. Similarly, in Thucyd., I. 70, the Corinthian orator
says of the Athenians: ἔτι δὲ τοῖς μὲν σώμασιν ἀλλοτριωτάτοις ὑπὲρ τῆς πό-
λεως χρῶνται, further, in the cause of the state they treat their bodies as if
they absolutely belonged to another. —vukgev: H. 917; Goodw. 1436; cf.
1500; supply νικᾶν after δύνασθαι, with the antec. of ots for its obj. — ὀλίγῳ
...mpoam., that they should perish (only) a little before the rest; H. 781;
G. 1184.

25, 26. ὑπὲρ.. φιλοψυχ΄, ot grudging their lives in the cause of virtue
and valor ; on the meaning of ἀρετή, see note on § 12, and cf. L. ἃ S.,
sixth ed. —tpémaa...rav βαρβ... ἐμβαλόντων, ¢rophies of (their victory
over) the barbarians who had made an invasion, etc.; ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν... παρὰ...
χώρας, 27 their own country, on the borders of the land ; the arrangement
of the phrases in this part of the sentence cannot be commended for either
elegance or perspicuity. — οὕτω... διὰ ταχέων, so guickly. —Kal γάρ τοι:
see ὃ 20; ὑπέρ in each cl. has its causal signif., because of; in the latter cl.
transl. over. — τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν, the glory of them ; i. e. τῶν ἔργων.

. 27. dxOdpevos...cuph., grieved at the disaster ; ἀπαθὴς... κακ., and not
having suffered misfortunes. These brief touches characterize not inappro-
priately the weak and passionate monarch. — Sex. ἔτει : in the spring of
480, after having spent the winter in Sardis, Xerxes and his host set out
from that city. — οὕτως ἄπειρον : a diff. word from ἄπειρος, above, being
derived from alpha privative and πέρας or πεῖρας, end, /imit; in order to
give the pred. adj. its proper force, render : the number of the land-army
he led was so vast. Werod. says: ‘* For was there a nation in all Asia
which Xerxes did not bring with him against Greece? Or was there
a river, except those of unusual size, which sufficed for his troops to drink ?”
Rawlinson’s transl., IV. p. 19.

28, 29. σημεῖον : H. 626, b; the foll. γάρ is epexegetic. He finds an
incidental evidence of the magnitude of the host in the fact that it was con-
sidered a saving of time to construct such a bridge for its transportation. —
τὰ πεφ., the obstacles of nature; τὰ θ, mpay., the deeds of the gods; the
latter referring doubtless to the storm which destroyed the first bridge, and
to the other portents mentioned by Herod, — πλοῦν... ἠνάγ. γενέσθαι, forced
a voyage to be made; explained by διορύξας .. Αθω. On this latter form,
see H. 161; Goodw. 199. — τῶν piv... ὑπακου., some reluctantly submit-
ting ; ἀκόντων and ἑκόντων are pred. adjj.; H. 619; Goodw. 926. Herod.

FUNERAL ORATION. 183

names various tribes “ that submitted without necessity, when their affairs
were in good condition,” among them the Beeotians, except the Plateeans
and Thespians. —dpodtepa: defined by the foll. appositives κέρδος and
δέος ; H. 624, ες.

30, 31. avrol...2uBdvres, embarking in person ; not employing merce-
nary troops and substitutes, as became common at a later date ; ἐπὶ... ἐβοήθ.,
went with assistance to. — -ῪΛακεδαιμόνιοι in § 31 is without a pred. On
Scheibe’s suggestion we may supply ἀπώλοντο, perished, in the lacuna after
ἔμελλον. This unwieldy sentence extends (acc. to Scheibe’s punctuation)
unbroken into § 34. — τοῦ πλήθους: H. 748; G. 1117;.supply. a partit.
gen. after it as the antec. of the foll. relatives. —ovx ἥττηθ., κι τ. A: they
were killed, but not conquered, — a favorite thought with the orators. So
Lycurgus, of those who fell at Chzronea, in almost the same words: οὐχ
ἡττηθέντες, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποθανόντες ἔνθαπερ ἐτάχθησαν. (Against Leocrates, ὃ 48.)
Isocr., Panegyr., 92, of the Spartans at Thermopylz: ‘‘ Surely it is wrong
to say that they were conquered, for no one of them deigned to flee.”

32, 33. τῶν μέν : the Lacedzmonians ; τῶν δέ: the Persians ; τῆς παρ-
όδου : of Thermopyle ; of μέν, the latter, — τοῖς... πράγμασιν, the dangers
that encompassed them ; περιέστηκα often = to encompass in a threatening
manner. --- ἐρήμην... λήψ., they (i.e. the barbarians) would take the city
being left defenceless. — εἰ.. ἁλώσονται, but if, etc., that they (i. e. Athens)
would be captured by the land-army. — ϑυνήσονται : join with ὅτι, above.
— δυοῖν : gen. abs.; fwo (questions) being before them ; more freely : being
called to decide whether it was best, etc. — μετὰ... γενομ., joining the bar-
barians. —«péirrov: pred. adj. agr. with ἐλευθ.; H. 617; Goodw. 925.

34, 35. παῖδας, yuv., pyt.: emphatic omission of the art.; H. 660, a.
Observe the same omission in transl. — ὃ τίς... ἰδών, on seeing which, who
would not? etc.— ὡς.. ἠγωνίσθη, considering how great and terrible a danger
.--was encountered ; instead of a causal cl. introd. by ὅτε οὕτως, we have an
exclamation expressing the thought subjectively ; H. 1001; Gr. Moods, 580.
— ποί. γνώμην, what feelings. — τοῦ.. κινδύνου (sc. ὄντος ἀπίστου), the ap-
proaching conflict being of doubtful issue. — ὑπὲρ τ. φιλότητος, for their
loved ones ; explained in the cl. immediately following. φιλότης, affection,
is poetically put for the object of the affection; cf. Plato, ἐγγυτάτου τοῦ
πόθου, nearest the object of his desire ; he has also ὦ φιλότης, my dear.

36, 37. περιειστήκει : see note on περιεστ., ὃ 32. — Td...mpoedévat, the
prospect of their own death ; subj. of εἶναι. --- συμφοράν, calamity, pred.
nom. agr. with the antec. of 4. — εὐτυχ.: H. 969,d; G. 1563, 5; ὑπεκτεθ.:
cf. ὑπεκθ., ὃ 34; ἤλπιζον, were expecting. —% που, doubtless ; ἢ confirma-
tive, as also in § 40, before πολύ. --- τὴν δὲ... πορθουμένην, and that the land
was suffering devastation ; note the change of tense from the preced. —
ἱερῶν δὲ.. ἀκού, δέ: Gr. Moods, 876.

184 NOTES ON ORATION II.

38. ἐν ταὐτῷ, αὐ the same time. — κραυγῆς τῶν διαφ., the shricks of the
perishing. — τῆς Sad. μεστῆς : the sense requires another part., say αἰσθα-
νόμενοι, perceiving, instead of dxovoryres. A striking illustration of this
figure, zeugma, is found in M. 7:, 1 Corwiii. 2: γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ
βρῶμα, “7 gave you milk to drink, not meat.” Farrar (Greek Syntax),
quoting this ex., remarks: ‘* This figure of speech is very rare in English,
and illustrates more than any other the Greek quickness of apprehension.”
— οὔσης τῆς ναυμαχ.: causal, and to be joined with dox., decause of the
naval baitle being undecided, thinking ; τοτὲ μέν... «τοτὲ δέ, now...and now.

39. ὧν.. εἶδον : H. 996, anda; Goodw. 1032, and 1007. — θυσιῶν
avapy., lit. remindings of sacrifices, enumeration (to the gods) of sacrifices
offered. Others differently, as L. ἃ S.: recollection of vows to pay sacri-
fices; Reiske: gue non concipiebantur victimarum vota.— ἔλεος... παίδων,
compassion for children ; all these genitives objective ; H. 729, c; G. 1085, 3.
_ 40, 41. τόλμης : H. 744; Goodw. 1102, and 1108.— κατὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν
«οὐδιήνεγκαν, szmpassed, were superior to; see note, § 12, on ἀρετή. ---
βασιλευομένων, sabjects of a king.

42, 43. πλεῖστα... καὶ KGAA....cuveB., they made the greatest and most
honorable contributions. — ixavar....mpagat: describing the ideal leader ;
γνώναι, 20 form a judgment, to decide, including the power to comprehend
the exigencies of a crisis, and to decide on the requisite action. — καίτοι,
accordingly; ἂν... ἤρισαν (épifw), would have contended, claimed to be
equal; γνώμῃ, judgment ; cf. γνῶναι, above. —avapduoB., without dispute ;
pred. adj.; ὁμονοοῦσαν, corresponding to, commensurate τυΐίλ, ---- γνησίαν
kal αὐτόχ., genuine and native ; the first implying that their valor was
not a spurious or assumed virtue ; the second, that it was not an imported
one, or borrowed from others.

44, 45. κοινὴν... ἐκτήσ., hey gained a common freedom for the rest also ;
the verb foll. by a pred. adj. as in §§ 5, 43, and 24. —Io®puév: the build-
ing of the wall across the Isthmus had been begun on the approach of
Xerxes. It was resumed on the approach of Mardonius, who, however,
after invading Attica, fell back into Boeotia, where the campaign was ended
by the battle of Plateea. — ἀγαπώντων... σωτ., being content with their own
safety. — διαν... περιιδεῖν, Aurposing to look on and allow; tmd...yevopé-
vous: cf. wera...yevou., ὃ 33. —’A@nvatior: as Herodotus relates it, it was
Chileiis, a Tegean, who reminded the Lacedzemonians of the uselessness of ἡ
their plan of self-defence. (Bk. IX. 9.) — ἐκείνοις : i. 6. the Persians ; τού-
τους: i.e. the Peloponnesians.—torer@Oar...Bacwd., would belong to the king;
on the omission of the art., see H. 663.

46, 47. ϑιδασκ., suffering themselves to be taught; one meaning of the
pass., and suitable to the tense used. — αὐτοὶ μέν : emphasizes the subj. of
ποιεῖν and Bovd., in contrast with ᾿Αθηναίους, --- αὐτοῖς : after παραινεῖν ;

FUNERAL ORATION. 185

ἐβοήθ. els: cf. ἐβοήθ. ἐπί, ὃ 30. --- τοὺς ἀπογν., who had despaired of. —
βέβαιον : constr. like κοινήν, ὃ 43; κατειργ., achieved, secured. — μεθ᾽ dv:
with whom, on whose side. — ἡγεμόνες : the Athenian hegemony (ἡγεμονία),
or leadership in Grecian affairs, is usually dated from about 477 B. C.; see
Grote, Vol. V. p. 290 seg. The battle of Platzea was fought in 479.

48. In §§ 48-53, mention is made of the war against Corinth and Aégina
in alliance with Sparta. It broke out 457 B. c. Little is known concerning
it. Thucydides is the chief authority, and his account is almost as brief as
this. See Thucyd., Bk. I. 105, 106; also Grote, Vol. V. p. 320 seg. The
speaker, indeed, seems to have taken Thucydides as his authority, if we may
judge from the strikingly similar phraseology.

καταστάντος... γεγ., Aaving broken out through jealousy on account of
what had taken place ; τῶν wempay.: ref. to the achievements of the Athe-
nians. — μικρῶν... .δεόμ., and each needing but few grievances, i. 6. pretexts
for war. — vavp. ᾽Αθ....γενομένης, @ xaval battle having been fought by the
Athenians, — ἐλάμβανον : ref. το ᾿Αθηναίοις for its subj. Observe the irreg-
ularity of construction above, by which φρονοῦντες and δεόμενοι are in the
nom. instead of the gen. absol.; H. 1063. See a similar instance, /ed/en.,
11. 2. 3: ὁ ἕτερος...παραγγέλων.

49. πολιορκούντων : sc. ᾿Αθηναίων ; H. 972, ἃ. --- τῆς HA. ἀπούσης, the
men capable of bearing arms being absent ; ἡλικία, in this and similar con-
nections, denotes the age during which Athenians were liable to military
duty. They were enrolled as citizens at 18; then, after serving two years
in the home-guard, were liable to military duty abroad from 20 to 60, — in
all 42 years of nominal or actual service. In a collective sense, ἡ ἡλικία
(also the pl. αἱ ἡλικίαι) denotes the entire military force of the city, namely,
the 42 successive enrolments or military classes which constituted the Athe-
nian army. — ἔρημον : pred.; cf. ἐρήμην in ὃ 32; ἐμβαλεῖν is fut. — ἄξειν τὸ
στρατ., that they would draw off the encamped army. —Tepaveav : Gera-
neia, the mountain-range west of Megara.

50. τῶν μὲν ἀπ΄, some (of their troops) deing at a distance, i.e. in Egypt;
τῶν δέ, others, i.e. those in Aigina; οὐδένα... μεταπέμπ., had the courage
not to send for either. —ot...yeyovdéres, those who were under the military
age. Cf. Thuc.: οἱ πρεσβύτατοι καὶ οἱ νεώτατοι, the oldest and the youngest.
— τὸν κίνδ. ποιήσασθαι : cf. ὃ 21; αὐτοὶ μόνοι : join with the subj. of the
infinitive. ἣ

51, 52. οἱ μέν, the former; αὐτοί, themselves, i.e. in their own ex-
perience. They had no need to imitate others, but simply to repeat their
own deeds. — Μυρωνίδου orpar., with Myronides as general; ἄπαντ. at-
τοί: see αὐτός, L. ἃ S., 1. 3. — τοῖς ἤδη ἀπ΄, those now past service ; i.e.
disabled by old age ; this and the foll. phrase are in the instrum. dat., where
the nom, would be more natural, the ref. being to the same persons as the

186 NOTES ON ORATION II.

subj. — τοὺς.. ἀπαντήσαντες, having gone (I say) into a foreign land to
meet those who had presumed to invade theirs ; 1 have added parentheses to
the text of Scheibe.

53. οἱ μὲν... σώμασιν (sc. duvduevor): syn. with rois...daecpyxdcr, above.
— κρείττους : their bravery superior to their physical strength. — of μὲν...
ἔπαιδεύοντο, the latter went back to their teachers ; παιδεύομαι (pass.), 20
receive instruction.

54. The orator now epitomizes (§§ 54-57) the beneficial results of the
policy pursued by Athens during her primacy in Greece; the contrast of
succeeding events might well bring Hellas to these tombs bewailing her
buried liberties (58 -- 60).

ἐν ἅπ... χρόνῳ : not the same as ὁ πᾶς χρόνος, § 1, but the whole period
treated of in this discourse. — τῶν... ἀνδρῶν : including those previously
buried in the Ceramicus.

55, 56. παρασχόντες, rendering ; syn. with ἀποδείκνυμι. See Lex. —
τοῖς ὀλίγοις : the policy of Sparta was to establish oligarchies in her depend-
encies. — τὸ ἴσον, eguality ; H.621,b; G. 933. -— κἀκείνους, them too ;
the policy of the Athenians (he maintains) was to strengthen their allies as
well as themselves. — 6 μ. βασιλεύς ; i. e. the Persian monarch. — ἐδίδου...
éavrot, was yielding up some of his own possessions ; H. 736; G. 1097, 1.

57. καὶ οὔτε: the foll. clauses also dep. on ὥστε. --- προστάτας, ἡγεμό-
vas, champions, leaders ; γίγνεσθαι : its subj. is implied ;: the living Athe-
nians who stood in the places of the fallen.

58. ἀπολομένων : at Aigospotami. — εἴτε fy. κακίᾳ, whether (it was) dy
a commander's treason. ‘*Of this suspicion both Konon and Philokles
stand clear. Adeimantus was named as the chief traitor, and Tydeus along
with him.” Grote, Vol. VIII. p. 220; see also his note. — συμφορᾶς :
pred. after yevou. For ἐκείνης, see H. 632, a; agrees with its pred. -noun, —
ἦν, ad been. Says Grote (Vol. VIII. p. 191): ‘* We shall be warranted
in affirming that the first years of the Spartan empire, which followed upon
the victory of AEgospotami, were years of all-pervading tyranny and multi-
farious intestine calamity, such as Greece had never before endured.”

59. ἕτ.... ἡγεμόνων : ref. to the Lacedeemonian hegemony, or supremacy.
— οἱ... ἐμβαίνοντες, those who formerly did not embark upon the sea ; i. 6.
the Persians. The Persian fleet of Pharnabazus conquered the fleet of
Sparta and her allies at Cnidus, B. c. 394. (Cf. Grote, IX. p. 282 ; Cur-
tius, IT. p. 254 seg.) It was the Athenian Conon, however, who commanded
the Persians, — εἰς τ, Εὐρώπην : Pharnabazus with his fleet sailed the fol-
lowing spring to the Peloponnesian coast. ‘The appearance of a Persian
satrap with a Persian fleet, as master of the Peloponnesian Sea and the Sa-
ronic Gulf, was a phenomenon astounding to Grecian eyes. And if it was
not equally offensive to Grecian sentiment, this was in itself a melancholy

FUNERAL ORATION. 187

proof of the degree to which Pan-hellenic patriotism had been stifled by the
Peloponnesian War and the Spartan empire. No Persian tiara had been
seen near the Saronic Gulf since the battle of Salamis.” (Grote, IX. p. 321.)
— ϑουλεύουσι, ave in slavery; ἔγκαθ., have been placed in power. These
things could hardly have been said till some time after the conclusion of the
treaty of Antalcidas, B. c. 387. How great the humiliation of Greece was
at that time, see depicted by Grote, IX. 385, and the foll. chapter.

60. ἄξιον qv: sc. ἄν. --- ὥστε.. ἀρετῇ : quoted by Pausanias, and sup-
posed to be the passage freely quoted by Aristotle (Ret, III. 10), who
instances it as a happy combination of antithesis with personifying metaphor ;
‘*had he said there was reason she should weep, her liberty having been
buried with them, it would indeed have been metaphor and personification ;
but the words ‘her liberty,’ ‘their valor,’ have a certain antithesis”;
ὡς, κι τ΄ X., considering that her own liberty was being buried with their
valor; αὑτῶν : ref. to the collective Ἑλλάδι. Lycurgus (Oraz. ag. Leocrates,
50) says of the dead at Cheronea: συνετάφη γὰρ τοῖς τούτων σώμασιν ἡ τῶν
ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερία. --- ἑτέρων... λαβόμενος, 27: meeting other leaders ;
i. e. when the Greeks were led by others than Athenians. — τῷ δὲ.. ζῆλος
ἐγγίνεται, while in the latter there is springing up a disposition to emulate,
etc. :

61. An eloquent tribute (δ 61-66) to those who fell fighting under
Thrasybulus for the restoration of the Athenian democracy. This could be
fitly spoken by Lysias, who had shared the reverses and the triumph of
the exiles.

ἐξήχθην, 7 have been led off; ταῦτα μέν : obj. of ὀλοῴ., to give utterance
to these lamentations. Observe the antithetic μέν and δέ; these lamenta-
tions for Greece are aside from the purpose of my discourse ; my eulogy
finds a more fitting theme in those men who restored free government to
Athens. — περὶ τοῦ δικαίου : as in § 17. — wavras...xext., having made all
men their enemies ; rhetorical exaggeration, referring to the fact mentioned
at the end of § 62, that they fought not only against the enemies of their
country, but against their countrymen themselves.

62. κοινὴν... καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, as a common possession to the rest also;
ψυχαῖς, courage. — οὐχ... ὀργιζόμενοι : this contrast of blended motives, —
shame and rage, —is a fine one. — πολεμίους δέ, κ. τ. ., and (having) as
enemies (not only) those who were formerly (such), but also, etc.

63. σώμασι.. ἑαυτῶν : i. 6. not depending on mercenaries alone. — μάρ-
Tupas : appos. with τοὺς... τάφους. Xenophon mentions that the Lacede-
monians who fell in one of the engagements were buried in the Ceramicus.
(Hellen., Il. 4. 33.) — kal yap τοι : see note, § 20. — ἀπέδειξαν, ἀπέφηναν :
both these verbs are used in the sense 40 cause to be, to render. —relxn: it
was Conon who rebuilt the walls, after the battle of Cnidus, 394.

188 NOTES ON ORATION II.

64. αὐτῶν : partit. gen.; ἀδελφὰ... τοῖς ἔργοις, kindred to the deeds, —
ἐτράποντο, devoted themselves ; read the remarks of Grote (IX. p. 367) on
the character of Thrasybulus. He says: ‘In him the energy of a successful
leader was combined with complete absence both of vindictive antipathies
for the past, and of overbearing ambition for himself. — ἐλαττοῦσθαι...
πλέον ἔχειν : the ref. is to their privileges as citizens; render: metther being
able to suffer encroachment upon their privileges, nor wanting to have more
for themselves (i. e. more than had belonged to them under the constitution).
— μετέδοσαν, gave a share of; foll. by τῆς... ἐλευθερίας.

65. ὅτι.. ἔδυσ.: obj. cl. after dwedoy., they repelled the charges against
them, (showing) that, etc. — βίᾳ, in spite of. — δμονοοῦντες : conditional,
as shown by the ἄν belonging with ἐδύναντο.

66. A brief mention of the allies and mercenary troops that assisted
Thrasybulus. The ‘‘men of Phyle” received reinforcements from the Me-
garians and Argives, and more especially from the Thebans.

τῷ πλήθει, the people; see note, XII. 42. — πατρίδα... ἡγησάμενοι, ve-
garding valor as their native country ; that is, regarding as their home and
country any spot where glory was to be won.

67. The eulogy (δὲ 67 — 76) of those whose remains were now receiving
interment. ;

καινοὶ... γενόμενοι, entering into a new alliance ; the part. logically sub-
ordinate to βοηθήσαντες, hence without a connective ; cf. a similar use of
γενόμ. in ὃ 69. On the formation of this league, see Curtius’s /77s¢., Vol. IV.
p- 243. — οὐ.. ἔχοντες : causal and explanatory ; for they did not cherish the
same spirit, etc.; from od on through the parenthesis may better be rendered
at the close of the sentence. — οἱ μέν, che latter ; ot δέ, but they; i.e. the
Athenians who aided the Corinthians. — τῆς port. ἔχθρας : as a Pelopon-
nesian state and an ally of Sparta, Corinth had more than once been at war
with Athens. The Peloponnesian War, it will be remembered, began by
the Athenians taking the part of the Corcyrseans against Corinth.

68. μεγάλην... “Ἑλλάδα, exdeavoring to render Hellas great; a use of
the part. similar to χαριζύμενοι, § 8. — ἐκείνων : ref. to τῶν πολεμίων. In
their contest with Sparta, they were fighting the battles of the very states
that were in league with Sparta, — the tributary states of the Peloponnesus,
-- νικήσαντες, when victorious; τῶν αὐτῶν : the same liberties that they
themselves enjoyed.

69, 70. οὗτοι : the same as ol θαπτόμενοι, ὃ 67.— διασώσαντες, having
hept untarnished.— ἐπηνώρθωσαν : double augment; H. 361; Goodw. 544;
render: made good the ill-successes of others. — τὰ τροφεῖα, the filial debt ;
the debt due to their country for their rearing and education ; see Lex.

71, 72, τοῦ ἐπ. βίου, because of the life still left them; H. 7443
G. 1126. — περὶ ἐλάττονος... ἡγούμενοι: see note, XII. 7. -- ἀδελφούς,

FUNERAL ORATION. 189

k. Tt X.: art. omitted; see note to § 34. — πολλῶν.... ὁπαρχόντων : gen.
abs.; cf. XII. 97. Miiller: 2 ¢anta malorum multitudine et gravitate ;
render : in view of the many sufferings to which they are exposed. — νεώτεροι
νον ἢ ὥστε εἰδέναι, too young to know; H.954; οἵων: H. tort, a; Kiihn,
344, Rem. 1, last sentence.

73. τούτων : neut., after the comparative; it refers to the following
clauses. — ἀδυνάτους... τῷ σώματι : cf. τοῖς σώμασιν.... δυνάμενοι, ὃ 53.
ὑπὸ ἐλεεῖσθαι : i.e. that those same ones who formerly envied them
should now be looking on them with pity, — one of the sharpest ‘‘ arrows
of outrageous fortune.” — ἄνδ. ἀμείνους : pred. after ἦσαν.

; 74. πῶς... χρή, and how are they to, etc, See L. ἃ 8., χρή, 1|. --- ἀλλὰ
οὐ μεμνῆσθαι, "αν, 1} ἐς reasonable at such a time that the rest (of the citizens)
remember then, i.e. the bereaved ; ἀλλά thus used implies ot so! on the
contrary ; it is sometimes rendered why. The next ἀλλά introd. one of the
series of rhetorical questions, and may be rendered or; see note, XII. 40. —
λυπῆσαι : subj. of ἐστί understood. — &AAG...KwwSbvous: the answer to this
question, instead of being introd. by ἀλλά, dwt, like the preceding question, —
is made a cl. dep. on the interrog. sent. itself. — μέγα φρονοῦντας, k. τ. X.,,
exulting over their misfortunes ; τούτων seems to be used instead of αὐτῶν,
because the persons referred to are present before the speaker.

75. χάριν: pred. accus., ταύτην being the direct obj. of dwod.; H. 726;
Goodw. 1080 ; for the gender of ταύτην, which refers to the rest of the sen-
tence, commencing with εἰ, see note XII. 37. Render: zt seems to me that
this is the only return we can make. Observe, however, that μόνην agrees
with ταύτην. --- περὶ.. «ποιοίμεθα, should highly honor. — ὥσπερ... ὄντες, as
if we were ourselves their fathers.

76. τῶν ζώντων: gen. after τίνας. --- προσήκοντας: used substantively,
but foll. by the same case as its verb. It is sometimes foll. (as a subst.) by
a limiting gen. — τὸ ἴσον τ. ἄλλοις, equally with the rest, i. e. no more than
the rest. — ἀποθανόντων : gen. abs.; supply τούτων from the preceding ;
H. 972,a; Gr. Moods, 848.

77- Peroration, administering consolation to the surviving friends of the
deceased. Death is the common lot of man. . These now buried are not to
be lamented, but counted happy; for they chose their own destiny, and have
gained immortal honors.

ἀλλὰ γάρ: cf. ΧΙΠ. 99; but. — οὐ γὰρ... θνητοί, for we were not unaware
of our being mortal; H. 984; Goodw. 1586; Greek Moods, 887 and 892.
The student would do well to note two points in regard to this character-
istically Greek construction : first, that λανθάνω, fo escape the notice of, is an
active verb, though not usually translated by such in Eng.; second, that the
part. ὄντες (with θνητοί) not only agrees grammatically with the subject, but

190 NOTES ON ORATION II.

is Jogicadly an integral part of the subject. Cf. οἶδα θνητὸς dv, J know that
“7 am mortal, in which the part. with the adj. logically forms a part of the
object. — ἢ.. φέρειν, or to be so exceedingly sad. — ὃ θάνατος, x. τ. X.: cf.
Ilorace, Odes, I. 4:

“ Pallida Mors zquo pulsat pede pauperum tabernas
Regumque turres.”

“ Pale Death with impartial foot strikes at the hovels of the poor and the towers of
princes.”

78. ἄξιον (jv): dv also to be supplied, as in § 60. — καὶ νόσων....γήρως,
subject both to diseases and to old age ; gen. after compar. — ὃ.. εἰληχώς, who
presides over, to whom ἐς allotted. ‘The orations contain no intimation more
distinct than this of Lysias’s religious conceptions ; see note, XIIT. 63.

79. οἵτινες, in that they; the indef. relat. with a slight causal force;
H. 910; Gr. Moods, 580. — οὐκ.. τῇ τύχῃ, not intrusting themselves (lit.
concerning themselves) to fortune ; ἐπιτρέπω is usually followed by the accus.
and dat., but ἐπ. τινὶ περί twos, to trust to one concerning something, is a
construction found in Plato and Menander. — καὶ γάρ τοι: see note, ὃ 26.
Miiller, however, renders : am profecto, which would introd. the reason for
προσήκει.. ἡγεῖσθαι, above.

80. ot: for a similar emphatic use of the rel., see XII. 40; the cl. has
a causal force, being explanatory of the preceding. — dyaves...papys καὶ
σοφίας kal πλούτου : Pluto says (Menex., 21) of Athens: ‘*She never
ceases honoring the dead every year, celebrating in public the rites which
are proper to each and all; and in addition to this, holding gymnastic and
equestrian festivals, and musical festivals of every sort.” (Jowett’s transl.)
A parallel passage to the present section is found in the fragment remaining
from the Olympic oration of Lysias, mentioning the establishment of the
Olympic Games by Hercules: ‘‘ After he had put down the tyrants, and
checked the insolence of the oppressors, he instituted in the fairest spot of
Hellas a contest of bodies, and an ambitious display of wealth, and an ex-
hibition of intellect.” XXXIIT. 2. — ds...8vras: H. 974 ; Goodw. 1570;
ταῖς αὐτ.. ἀθανάτους, with the same honors as the immortals ; i.e. the gods.
For καί after ὁ αὐτός, see H. 1042, a.

81. θανάτου: H. 745, b; G. τι26, --- γενέσθαι: dep. on κρεῦττον ;
οἵτινες : see note, § 79.—8pws δέ, but yet; in adversative contrast with
the preceding sent., introd. by μεν. --- θεραπεύοντας, honoring.

CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE

TO ILLUSTRATE

\

THE ORATIONS OF LYSIAS CONTAINED IN

B.C.
444.

431.
429.
421.
413.
4τι.

4ο6.
405.

404.

403.

THIS VOLUME.

Birth of Lysias.

Beginning of the Peloponnesian War; April 4.

Cephalus, the father of Lysias, removes with his family to Thurii.

The Peace of Nicias.

The Sicilian Expedition. ν

Lysias and his brother Polemarchus return to Athens.

The Four Hundred, — in power about four months, from March to June.
Battle of Arginuse ; September.

Battle of AEgospotami; August.

Committee of Five “ Ephors”; Autumn.

Blockade of Athens. Theramenes sent as ambassador to Sparta; Autumn.

Second embassy of Theramenes ; Spring.

Surrender of Athens to Lysander, —the end of the Peloponnesian War;
latter part of April.

Establishment of the Thirty Tyrants; June.

Execution of Dionysodorus and others ; Summer.

A Spartan garrison placed in the Acropolis ; about October.
Reaction among the Thirty. The execution of Theramenes.

Thrasybulus takes possession of Phyle; about January.

Victory of Thrasybulus in Munychia; flight of the Thirty, and appointment
of the Ten; February.

192 CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE.

Thrasybulus holds Pireeus and Munychia; Spring and Summer.
Skirmish with the Spartans near the Pirzeus; June.
Negotiations with Pausanias; Summer.

Return of the Exiles headed by Thrasybulus, Sept. 21, and the Restoration
of the democratic constitution. Euclides chosen First Archon.

Oration against Eratosthenes.
401-400. Expedition of Cyrus, and Retreat of the Ten Thousand.
399. ‘Trial and death of Socrates.
395- Beginning of the Corinthian War.
394. Battle of Cnidus; August.
387. Peace of Antalcidas.

THE END.

EDUCATIONAL PUBLICATIONS

S, C. GRIGGS ἃ CO., CHICAGO.
Gatcie emion

BOISE — FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. A new edition.
Revised by J. 6. Patrrencitt. Adapted to Goodwin’s, and to Hadley-Allen’s
Grammar, and intended as an Introduction to Xenophon’s Anabasis. $1.00.

BOISE— FIRST THREE BOOKS OF HOMER’S ILIAD.
With Explanatory Notes, and References to the Grammars of Goodwin, Hadley, and
Hadley-Allen. By James R. Βοιβε, Ph.D., LL.D. 12mo, Cloth. $1.00.

BOISE— FIRST SIX BOOKS OF HOMER’S ILIAD. With
Explanatory Notes, and References to the Grammars of Goodwin, Hadley, and
Hadley Allen. Revised Edition. By J. R. Boisz, Ph.D., LL.D 12mo. Cloth.
$1.50.

BOISE—EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. Being Exercises
in some of the more difficult Principles of Greek Syntax; with References to the
Grammars of Crosby, Curtius, Goodwin, Hadley, Hadley-Allen, and Kiihner. A
Sequel to “ Jones’s Greek Prose Composition.” By J. R. Borsz, Ph.D. $1 25.

BOISE AND FREEMAN —SELECTIONS FROM VARI-
OUS GREEK AUTHORS. For the First Year in College. With Explanatory
Notes, and References to Goodwin’s Greek Grammar and to Hadley’s Larger and
Smaller Grammars. By J. R. Boise, Ph.D., LL.D., and J. C. Freeman, M.A.
1zmo. Cloth. - $2.00.

CHITTENDEN — ELEMENTS OF ENGLISH COMPOSI-
TION. A Preparation for Rhetoric. By Lucy A. CHITTENDEN. 12mo. Cloth.
60 cents.

“ Progressive. suggestive, and thoroughly practical.” — Prof Ε. E. Smith, Purdue
University, Ind.

“ After thorough trial in the class I unhesitatingly commend it.” — F. S. Hotaling,
Prin High School, Framingham, Mass.

** As an elementary book, I know no work equal to it.” — A. Martin, LL.D.,
Pres of De Pauw University, Ind.

“Tt ought to be used in every high school.” — A. V. Hewett, Supt. of Schools,
Abilene, Kan.

** Between 600 and 700 copies will be required for immediate use.”” — Z. A. Paul,
Prin. of High School, Washington, D.C

CROSS—ECLECTIC SHORT-HAND. Writing by Principles
instead of Arbitrary Signs, for General Use and Verbatim Reporting. By J. Gso.
Cross, A.M. Complete in one volume. 12mo. Cloth. $2.00.

D’OOGE — DEMOSTHENES ON THE CROWN. With Ex-
tracts from the Oration of A°schines against Ctesiphon, and Explanatory Notes. By
M. L. D’OocGe, Ph.D. Professor of Greek, University af Michigan. Cloth. $1-50

Educational Publications of 5. C. Griggs & Co.

JONES — EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSI-
TION. With References to the Grammars of Hadley and Allen, Gocdwin, and
Kiihner and Taylor, and a full English-Greek vocabulary. By ErtsHa Jongs, M.A.,
Professor in the University of Michigan. r2mo. Half leather. $1.00.

JONES — FIRST LESSONS IN LATIN. Adapted to the Latin
Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Andrews and Stoddard, Bartholomew, Bullions
and Morris, Chase, Gildersleeve, and Harkness. By ELIsHa Jongs, M.A. i2mo
Half leather. $1. 13.

JONES — EXERCISES IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
With References to the Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Andrews and Stoddard,
Bartholomew, Bullions and Morris, Gildersleeve, and Harkness. By Exisua JoNEs,
M.A. $1.00.

MORRIS— MANUAL OF CLASSICAL LITERATURE.
Comprising biographical and critical notices of principal Greek and Roman authors,
illustrative extracts from their works, etc. By CHARLES Morris. 12mo. Cloth,
$1.50.

PETERSON — NORWEGIAN-DANISH GRAMMAR AND
READER. With a Vocabulary designed for American Students of the Norwegian-
Danish language. By Rev. Ὁ. I. P. Pererson, Professor of Scandinavian Literature.
r2mo. Cloth. $1.25.

STEVENS—SELECT ORATIONS OF LYSIAS. With Intro
ductions and Explanatory Notes. By W. A. Stevens, A. M. 12mo, Cloth. $1.25-

WELSH— ESSENTIALS OF GEOMETRY. By A.H. WELsH,

Professor in Ohio State University. 8vo. Cloth. $1.25.

WELSH — DEVELOPMENT OF ENGLISH LITERATURE
AND LANGUAGE. By Prof. A. H. Wetsu. University Edition. Complete
in 1 vol., unabridged. Crown 8vo. Cloth. $3.00.

“ΤῸ is a work greatly needed. In plan and execution it seems to me all that could
be asked for.” — Yohn G. Whittier.

“ Welsh’ ‘English Literature’ is unsurpassed for usefulness.” — ¥. Ernest Whit
ney, Instructor in English in Yale College.

WINCHELL— GEOLOGICAL EXCURSIONS; or, The Rudi-
ments of Geology for Young Learners. By ALEXANDER WINCHELL, LL. D., Profes-
sor of Geology, etc., University of Michigan, Illustrated. 1zmo. Cloth. $1.25.

WINCHELL — GEOLOGICAL STUDIES; or, Elements of Ge-
ology for High Schools, Colleges, Normal and other Schools. By ALEXANDER
Wincuett, LL.D. One vol. 12mo. 540 pages, with 367 fine illustrations. $2.50.

“Tt abounds with most excellent points and valuable information, and seems an
American book beyond any other I have seen.””— Prof. A. P. Kelsey, Hamilton
College, N. Y.

“1 find it full of admirable suggestions in the way, τ conducting instruction, and of
presenting the topics of geology to a class.’ —H. 5. Williams, Prof. of Nat. Sci
Cornell \/niversity.

--...-. en

Descriptive Circulars sent on application. Books will be mailed, postage
paid, on receipt of price.

UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACIL! TY

SUT

1253 5

Ἄ : S ε.
aes =F —— ae — == ae eens
= oar oe ΕΞΞΞ See Se ee
aoa GF pn

te

Sens

Soret ee
See ere.
SLE SAN aber ee ene

oe Remo

Se

eS